UC-NRLF 


SB 


PRICE    FIFTY    CENTS. 


AND     THE 


(WITH  i-J  UK  lUTU-UL  ILLUSTRATIONS,  BY  S.  P.  AVERY.) 


BY    TALBOT  /WATTS,    M.    D. 

(LATE  !N  THE  SERVICE  OF  T&3  HON.  THE  B.  E.  I.  COMPANY.) 


NEW-YORK . 

J.  P.  NEAGLK,  102  NASSAU  «TREKT,  OR  18  ANN  STREET. 
1852. 


PROFESSOR    C,A,  KOF3ID 


THE     SUl'KKMi:     DKITV     (AMIDA)     OF    TI1K    JAPANESE. 


JAPAN 


AND 


THE    JAPANESE: 


PROM  THE  MOST  AUTHENTIC  AM)  RELIABLE  SOURCES : 


SlUjttfltinns 


OF    THEIR 


MANNERS,  COSTUMES,  RELIGIOUS  CEREMONIES,  &c 
BY    T  A  L  B  O  T    WATTS,    M  .  D  ., 

LATE   OF   THK   HON.    THE   B.    E.    I.    CO.'s   SEKVICE.    17TH   LT.    DRAGOONS,    &C 


NEW   YORK: 
J.   P.    NEAGLE,    18   ANN   &   102   NASSAU   STREET. 

1  852. 


GIFT  OF 

PROFESSOR    C.A.  KOFOIJ) 


TO  HIS   EXCELLENCY 
MILLARD     FILL  MORE, 

PRESIDENT    OF    THE    UNITED    STATES, 

To  whom,   and  through  whose  sanction,   the  following   pages   are 

most  respectfully  dedicated,  as  a  humble  but  lasting  tribute  to 

his  enlarged  views  of  the  rights  of  nations — under  whose 

administration    the   Japanese    Expedition   was  decided 

upon,    insuring  the  highest  regard  and   perpetual 

remembrance   of  a   grateful   country,   by   his 

Excellency's  most  obedient  servant, 

TALBOT  WATTS,  M.  D. 

424  Greenwich  Street. 


M217379 


PREFACE. 


THE  general  interest  manifested  by  all  classes  of  society,  for  inform 
ation  upon  the  subject  of  Japan  and  the  Japanese,  renders  useless  any 
apology  for  placing  before  the  public  all  the  reliable  or  valuable  in 
formation  that  can  be  obtained  upon  the  subject — in  a  form  within  the 
reach  of  all.  If  it  were  only  the  great  bulk  and  cost  of  many  of  the 
works  from  which  the  information  is  derived,  it  would  prevent  a  large 
portion  from  participating  in  the  knowledge ;  but  the  scarcity  of  some 
of  the  publications  would  render  it  thoroughly  impossible  for  many 
to  obtain  them,  independent  of  the  fact  that  but  few  would  be  ac 
quainted  with  the  names  of  the  books  from  which  the  selections  have 
been  made,  viz :  "  The  Universe  Displayed,  or  a  survey  of  the  wonder 
ful  works  of  creation,  and  the  various  customs  and  inventions  of  men, 
in  which  whatever  is  remarkable  throughout  the  world,  both  with 
respect  to  the  works  of  Nature  in  Plants,  Insects,  Serpents,  Beasts, 
Birds,  Fishes,  &c.,  YD. four  volumes,  8vo.  R.  Goadby:  London:  1771." 
It  is  doubtful  if  even  another  copy  is  to  be  found  in  the  United  States. 
"  The  Wonders  of  Nature  and  Art,  or  a  concise  account  of  whatever  is 
most  curious  and  remarkable  in  the  world,  compiled  from  Historical 
and  Geographical  Works,  of  established  celebrity,  and  illustrated  with 
the  Discoveries  of  Modern  Travellers,  by  the  Rev.  Thos.  Smith,  au 
thor  of  the  Universal  Atlas,  Sacred  Mirror,  &o.,  &c.  Revised,  corrected 
and  improved,  by  James  Mease,  M.  D.,  &c.  14  vols :  12mo :  Phila., 
1807."  Then,  the  copies  of  the  splendid  engravings  in  Picart's  Reli 
gious  Ceremonies ;  the  whole  article  from  Malte-Brun's  Modern  Ge 
ography,  3  vols.  4to  :  Boston  :  1836—with  all  its  authorities  j  and  all 
from  McCulloch's  Geographical  Dictionary,  or  Universal  Gazeteer,  2 
vols.  8vo. :  1851 — as  well  as  the  various  extracts  from  other  sources. 


IV  PREFACE. 

In  fact,  any  other  plea  for  profering  information  upon  the  subject 
would  be  ridiculous. 

And  as  to  any  speculative  or  prosy  articles  upon  the  probable  suc 
cess  of  the  present  Expedition,  would  be  alike  presumptuous  ;  all  that 
I  feel  warranted  in  saying  is,  no  expectation  can  be  realized,  that  Ja 
pan  may  have  progressed  in  knowledge  or  civilization,  owing  to  their 
seclusion  and  degenerating  influences  of  their  social  and  religious  in 
stitutions.  This  remark  is  made  from  hearing  it  expressed,  that  "  It  is 
probable  they  may  have  changed  their  views,  and  partake  in  some  de 
gree  of  the  spirit  of  universal  progress,  evinced  by  the  people  of  the 
United  States."  But  without  flattery  to  that  people,  experience 
teaches  us  that  it  is  not  their  example  that  is  capable  of  imitation, 
even  by  the  most  enlightened  nations  of  Europe,  that  it  is  not  only 
owing  to  the  vast  amalgamation  of  persons  from  the  most  distant  climes, 
but  of  all  circumstances,  together,  conspiring  in  one  firm  band  of 
union  to  make  a  Model  Nation,  vast  in  its  resources  of  all  vastness ;  it 
is  to  no  one  quality  or  characteristic  of  its  climate,  soil,  productions, 
or  its  people,  but  the  combination  of  the  whole  \  all  are  equally  in 
debted  to  each,  and  each  to  all.  The  energies  of  the  people  are  as 
much  the  cause  of  its  resources,  as  the  resources  are  the  causes  of  the 
energies  j  therefore,  there  can  be  no  analogy  in  its  antithesis,  as  Japan 
and  the  Japanese  must  evidently  be ;  so  taking  that  question  as  set 
tled,  that  no  amicable  arrangements  can  be  made,  or  if  made,  kept, 
even  for  the  slightest  compact,  therefore  it  is  right  to  infer  that  all 
such  considerations  and  what  they  naturally  lead  to  have  been  well 
and  deeply  investigated  by  the  powers,  organizing  the  Expedition,  and 
that  after  duly  examining  their  chances  of  success  they  will  imme 
diately  after  receiving  the  answer  of  the  Emperor,  (if  he  deigns  one), 
proceed  to  the  Island  of  Formosa — from  the  condition  of  which,  it  is 
most  probable  would  be  ceded  by  its  inhabitants  without  a  struggle 
or  a  shot,  after  which  no  prophetic  Zadkiel  need  foretell  the  results. 

TALBOT  WATTS,  M.  D. 

424  Greenwich  St. 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 


JAPAN,  or  the  Japan  Islands,  are  but  one  hundred  and  fifty 
miles  east  from  China.  They  are  situated  in  a  most  desirable 
climate,  and  are  blessed  with  a  fruitful  soil,  which  produces  the 
same  sort  of  grain  and  fruits  as  China.  They  are  most  remarka 
ble  for  the  plenty  of  gold-dust  to  be  met  with  here,  and  their 
Japan  cabinets,  or  lacquered  ware  and  screens.  They  traffic  only 
with  the  Chinese  and  the  Dutch.  All  other  Christians,  but  the 
Dutch,  have  been  excluded  from  a  share  in  this  trade  ever  since 
the  year  1630.  The  Portuguese  had,  till  then,  the  chief  trade  to 
Japan,  and  had,  as  they  state,  converted  a  great  part  of  the  na 
tion  to  Christianity  ;  but  being  charged  with  a  conspiracy  to  usurp 
the  government,  upon  the  Pope's  supremacy,  they  and  their  nume 
rous  Christian  proselytes  were  massacred  or  banished  the  Islands ; 
and  the  Dutch  were  only  suffered  to  trade  thither,  on  their  de 
claring  they  were  no  Christians,  or,  perhaps,  on  the  merit  of 
supplanting  and  assisting  in  expelling  the  Portuguese  ;  for  it  is 
impossible  that  the  Japanese  can  be  ignorant  that  the  Dutch  pro 
fess  Christianity,  as  they  trade  to  China ;  and  we  find  the  Japa 
nese  use  as  much  caution  in  their  commerce  with  the  Dutch,  as  if 
they  were  really  Christians. 

At  the  season  the  Dutch  fleet  is  expected,  the  Governor  of 
Nangascke  places  sentinels  on  the  hills,  to  give  notice  of  the  ap 
proach  of  any  ships.  When  they  appear,  a  boat  is  sent  off  to 
every  ship  with  a  waiter  or  officer ;  and  as  soon  as  the  ships  come 
to  an  anchor,  an  express  is  immediately  dispatched  to  court,  be 
fore  whose  return  the  Dutch  are  not  to  dispose  of  anything. 

In  the  meantime  the  particulars  of  every  ship's  cargo  are  taken, 
with  the  name,  age,  stature,  and  office  of  every  man  on  board, 
which  is  translated  and  printed  in  the  Japanese  language.  When 


6  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

the  express  is  returned,  the  ship's  crew  arejp»ermitted  to  come  on 
shore,  and  are  all  mustered  before  a  Japanese  commissary.  Every 
person  is  called  over  aloud,  and  required  to  give  an  account  of 
his  age,  quality,  and  office,  to  see  if  it  agrees  with  the  particulars 
given  in  by  the  Dutch.  After  this  examination  they  are  sent  on 
board  again ;  and  the  sails  of  the  ship,  with  the  guns,  arms,  am 
munition,  and  helm,  are  brought  on  shore,  and  the  hatches  sealed 
down  by  a  Japanese  officer  ;  nor  can  they  be  opened,  whatever 
the  ship's  crew  want,  without  permission  from  the  governor,  who 
always  sends  a  person  to  see  what  is  taken  out,  and  seal  them  down 
again ;  nor  dare  the  Dutch  sailors  light  a  candle,  or  make  any 
noise  on  board  their  ships,  any  more  than  on  shore.  The  ships 
are  allowed  no  communication  with  one  another  ;  nor  is  any  officer 
or  sailor  suffered  to  go  on  shore,  except  the  persons  who  are  ap 
pointed  to  carry  the  company's  present  to  the  King  of  Yeddo.  His 
Majesty  having  accepted  the  present,  and  prepared  another  for  the 
company,  the  Dutch  officer  is  conveyed  to  Nangascke  under  a 
strong  guard.  This  journey,  and  the  transaction  of  their  mer 
cantile  affairs,  usually  take  up  about  three  months  and  a  half. 
The  Dutch,  who  attend  the  king  on  this  occasion,  approach  him  on 
their  knees,  with  their  hands  joined  together,  and  carried  to  their 
foreheads.  The  Japanese  governors  and  ministers  always  ap 
proach  him  in  the  same  manner. 

While  the  Dutch  ships  lie  in  the  road,  none  of  the  Japanese  are 
allowed  to  go  on  board  to  trade  with  the  sailors  ;  and  those  that 
carry  provisions  on  board,  are  not  suffered  to  take  any  money  for 
them,  till  the  permission  to  trade  comes  from  court,  and  then  they 
deliver  in  their  accounts,  and  are  paid.  After  this  the  Japanese 
permit  six  persons  from  every  vessel  to  come  on  shore,  and  buy 
and  sell  for  themselves,  and  stay  four  days,  either  in  Disnia  or  in 
the  city,  as  they  see  fit.  "When  these  six  men  return  on  board, 
six  others  are  allowed  to  go  on  shore,  and  traffic  in  like  manner, 
and  so  on. 

The  goods  are  generally  paid  for  in  bullion,  or  pieces  of  silver 
of  ten  or  five  crowns  value,  or  smaller  pieces,  by  weight ;  for  they 
have  no  coin,  except  little  pieces  of  copper. 

After  six  weeks  free  trade,  there  is  no  further  communication 
allowed  between  the  city  of  Nangascke  and  the  Dutch,  in  the 
Island  of  Disnia  or  with  the  shipping ;  whereupon  the  fleet  pre 
pares  to  return,  and  the  factors  in  Disnia  are  confined  to  their  lit 
tle  island  again,  till  the  season  of  the  year  for  traffic  returns. 

The  Island  which  we  call  Japan,  but  which   the   inhabitants 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  7 

call  Nippen,  is  divi^l  into  six  great  provinces,  which  are  sub- 
divided  into  several  lesser  ones,  governed  by  lords  or  princes,  W!K 
are  all  subject  to  the  Emperor.  Some  of  these  lords  are  rich  in 
corn  and  cattle,  others  in  mines,  such  as  gold,  silver,  copper,  tin, 
quick-silver,  iron,  &c. ;  others  are  wealthy  in  woods,  flax,  cotton 
or  silk  ;  all  which  are  well  known  to  the  Emperor  by  the  secret 
information  sent  him  by  those  Secretaries  whom  he  places  among 
them  to  manage  their  affairs  ;  for  he  recommends  to  every  one  of 
them  a  secretary,  with  a  letter  to  this  effect : — "  Well-beloved,  I 
know  you  have  many  vassals  and  servants,  and  that  the  occasions 
wherein  you  are  to  employ  them  are  very  great ;  therefore  I  send 
you  a  person,  whose  assistance  may  in  some  measure  ease  you  of 
the  burthen  which  lies  upon  you,  and  of  whose  fidelity  you  may  be 
assured,  inasmuch  as  I  commend  him  to  you,  as  one  who  hath  been 
brought  up  at  my  own  house :  make  use  of  him,  and  take  in  good 
part  the  care  I  have  of  your  person  and  affairs." 

These  secretaries,  for  the  most  part,  are  such  as  have  served  the 
Emperor  in  their  youth,  in  his  three  chambers,  and  of  whose  abilities, 
prudence  and  judgment,  he  is  satisfied,  assuring  himself  of  their  fidel 
ity,  besides  the  expressions  he  might  find  thereof  during  the  time 
of  their  service,  by  an  act  signed  with  their  blood.  The  Empe 
ror,  through  these  secretaries,  becomes  acquainted  with  everything 
done  in  the  Provinces,  as  they  keep  an  exact  journal  of  whatever 
they  observe  in  the  life  and  actions  of  princes  to  whom  they  are 
sent,  and  who  undertake  nothing  without  their  advice,  nor  do  any 
business  in  which  they  are  not  consulted.  This  gives  them  great 
authority  in  the  provinces,  and  makes  the  princes  themselves 
look  on  them  as  such,  whose  favor  they  stand  in  need  of,  to 
keep  a  fair  correspondence  with  the  Court.  On  the  other  hand, 
these  princes  are  glad  to  have  able  and  understanding  persons 
about  them,  such  as  may  observe  the  miscarriages  of  their  govern 
ment,  and  have  the  confidence  to  be  their  remembrancers  thereof ; 
choosing  rather  that  a  faithful  servant  should  acquaint  them 
therewith,  so  that  they  may  be  seasonably  reformed,  than  that 
they  should  become  the  discourse  of  the  people,  or  any  should 
take  occasion  thence  to  do  them  ill  offices  about  the  Emperor. 

The  death  of  their  great  lords  is  commonly  attended  by  the 
voluntary  execution  of  twenty  or  thirty  vassals  or  slaves,  who  rip  up 
their  bellies  and  die  with  their  masters.  These  are  obliged  to  do 
this  by  an  oath,  and  it  is  done  partly  by  way  of  acknowledgment 
of  the  particular  kindness  which  their  lords  had  for  them.  Having 
acquainted  their  lord  that  they  are  willing  to  be  obliged  to  sacri- 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE. 


fice  themselves  in  that  manner  when  occasAi  shall  require,  they 
entertain  him  with  a  short  discourse  to  nns  purpose  : — "  Most 
mighty  sir,  you  have  many  other  slaves  and  servants,  of  whose  af 
fection  and  fidelity  you  are  assured  ;  who  am  I,  or  what  have  I 
deserved,  that  you  should  honor  me  with  your  favor  above  any 
of  the  rest  ?  I  resign  up  this  life  to  you,  which  is  already  yours, 
and  promise  you  I  will  keep  it  no  longer  than  it  shall  be  service 
able  to  yours."  Then  the  lord  and  the  vassal  take  off,  each  of 
them,  a  bowl  of  wine,  which  is  the  most  religious  ceremony  ob 
served  among  them  to  confirm  their  oaths,  which  thereby  become 
inviolable. 

To  do  this  execution  upon  themselves,  after  the  death  of  their 
lord,  they  get  together  all  the  nearest  of  their  kindred,  who  con 
duct  them  to  the  Mesquite,  or  Pagode,  where  they  all  sit  down  upon 
mats  and  garments,  with  which  they  cover  the  floor ;  and 
having  spent  some  time  in  making  good  cheer,  they  rip  up  their 
bellies,  cutting  them  across,  so  that  all  the  entrails  come  out; 
and  if  that  does  not  dispatch  them,  they  thrust  a  knife  themselves 
into  the  throat,  and  so  complete  the  execution.  Nay,  there  are 
some,  who,  on  hearing  that  their  master  intends  to  build  some 
edifice,  either  for  himself  or  the  Emperor,  will  desire  him  to  do 
them  the  honor,  that  they  may  be  laid  under  the  foundations, 
which  they  think  are  made  immovable  by  that  voluntary  sacrifice  ; 
and  if  their  request  be  granted,  they  cheerfully  lay  themselves 
down  at  the  foundation,  having  great  stones  cast  upon  them, 
which  soon  put  them  out  of  all  pain. 

There  is  no  lord,  nor  indeed  any  citizen  or  merchant,  but  may 
put  his  vassals  and  domestics  to  death,  and  that  by  way  of  justice, 
he  himself  being  the  judge  ;  but  to  others  justice  is  administered, 
all  over  the  country,  in  the  Emperor's  name.  Gentlemen  and 
soldiers  have  the  privilege  to  be  their  own  executioners,  and  to  rip 
up  their  bellies  themselves  ;  but  others  are  compelled  to  receive  their 
death  from  the  hands  of  the  common  executioner.  They  allege, 
as  a  reason  for  this  proceeding,  that  merchants  are,  in  some 
respects,  infamous,  inasmuch  as  they  are  liars,  for  the  most  part, 
and  deceive  those  that  trust  them.  Tradesmen  they  slight, 
as  being  only  but  public  servants ;  and  the  peasantry  is  contempti 
ble,  by  reason  of  the  wretched  condition  they  live  in,  which  is 
little  better  than  that  of  slaves.  Only  the  gentlemen  and  soldiers 
are  respected,  and  live  at  the  charge  and  upon  the  labor  of  others. 
There  is  no  offence,  though  ever  so  small,  but  is  punished  with 
death;  but  especially  theft,  though  it  were  but  for  a  penny. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  9 

Gaming,  if  it  be  forBfcney,  which  depends  upon  chance,  or  requires 
skill,  is  considered  a^Tpital  offence.  He  who  kills  another,  though 
innocently,  and  in  his  own  defence,  is  to  die  without  mercy ; 
with  this  difference,  that  those  who  kill  in  their  own  defence, 
as  also  those  who  commit  such  faults  or  offences  as  would  not 
here  be  punished  with  death,  die  only  themselves  ;  but  other  of 
fenders  involve  all  their  kindred  in  their  misfortune  ;  so  that  for 
the  crime  of  one  single  person,  the  father,  brethren,  or  children, 
are  put  to  death,  the  wives  and  daughters  are  made  slaves,  and  the 
estate  of  the  whole  family  is  confiscated.  And  this  happens  so 
frequently,  that  there  are  commissioners  expressly  appointed  for 
the  administration  of  what  is  so  confiscated  ;  yet  does  not  the 
money  thus  raised  go  to  the  King,  but  is  employed  in  the  build 
ing  of  Pagodes,  and  the  repairing  of  highways  and  bridges. 

The  torture  thieves  are  put  to,  for  want  of  evidence,  makes 
rather  the  unfortunate  than  the  guilty  to  be  condemned.  They 
take  a  piece  of  iron,  about  a  finger  thick  and  a  foot  square,  and 
make  it  red  hot ;  and  as  soon  as  the  redness  is  gone,  and  the  iron 
returned  to  its  own  color,  they  put  it  to  the  hands  of  the  party  ac 
cused,  upon  two  sheets  of  paper,  which  immediately  flame,  and  if 
the  accused  person  can  cast  the  piece  of  iron  upon  a  little  hurdle 
standing  near  him,  without  burning  himself,  he  is  dismissed  ;  but 
if  his  hands  are  even  touched  by  the  fire,  he  is  sentenced  to 
die.  This  crime  is  punished  with  a  particular  kind  of  death. 
The  criminal  is  tied  with  a  straw-rope,  by  the  neck,  to  a  great 
cane,  across  which  they  put  two  other  canes,  to  which  they  fasten 
the  feet  and  the  hands,  and  then  the  executioner  runs  him  through 
with  a  pike,  from  the  right  side  up  to  the  left  shoulder,  and  from 
the  left  side  to  the  right  shoulder ;  so  that  being  twice  run  through 
the  heart,  he  is  soon  dispatched.  Sometimes  they  only  fasten  the 
malefactor  with  his  back  to  a  post?  and  make  him  stretch  forth  his 
hands,  which  are  held  out  by  two  men  ;  and  then  the  executioner, 
standing  behind  him,  runs  the  pike  in  at  the  neck,  and  so  into  the 
heart,  and  dispatches  him  in  a  moment. 

The  lords  have  such  an  absolute  power  over  their  menial  ser 
vants,  that  it  requires  but  a  pretence  to  put  them  to  death.  The 
gentlemen  and  soldiers  are,  for  the  most  part,  very  poor,  and  live 
miserably  ;  but  being  highly  conceited  of  themselves,  most  of 
them  keep  servants,  though  only  to  carry  their  shoes  after  them, 
which  are  indeed  but  a  pair  of  soles,  made  of  straw  or  rushes, 
having  a  hole  towards  the  toe,  which  keeps  them  on  their  feet. 

The  crimes  for  which  all  of  the  family  or  kindred  are  put  to 


10  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

death,  are  extortion,  coming,  setting  house^m  fire,  ravishing  of 
women,  premeditated  murder,  &c.  If  a  Mm's  wife  be  guilty  of 
any  crime  her  husband  is  convicted  of,  she  dies  with  him  ;  but  if 
she  be  innocent,  she  is  made  a  slave.  Their  punishments  bear  no 
proportion  to  the  crimes  committed  ;  but  are  so  cruel  that  it  is 
not  easy  to  express  the  barbarity  exhibited.  To  consume  with 
a  gentle  fire,  or  only  with  a  candle,  to  crucify  with  the  head 
downwards,  to  boil  men  in  seething  oil  or  water,  to  quarter  and 
draw  them  with  four  horses,  are  very  ordinary  punishments  among 
them. 

One  who  had  undertaken  to  find  timber  and  stones  for  the  build 
ing  of  a  palace  for  the  Emperor,  and  had  corrupted  the  officers 
appointed  by  him  to  receive  and  register  what  he  should  send  in, 
was  crucified  with  his  head  downwards.  He  had  the  reputation 
of  being  an  honest  man,  and  was  one  that  had  frequently  obliged 
several  persons  of  quality  ;  insomuch  that  some  resolved  to  petition 
the  Emperor  for  his  pardon,  though  these  intercessions  for  con 
demned  persons  are  in  some  sort  criminal ;  and  indeed  the  Empe 
ror  took  it  so  ill,  that  the  lords  who  presented  their  petition  for 
him,  received  no  other  answer  but  the  reproaches  he  made  to  them 
for  their  imprudence.  The  officers  who  had  been  corrupted  by 
him,  were  condemned  to  rip  up  their  bellies. 

The  following  instance  shows  to  what  a  degree  the  Japanese 
punish  all  the  members  of  a  family  for  the  fault  of  one  : — In  the 
year  1638,  a  gentleman  on  whom  the  King  had  bestowed  the 
government  of  a  little  province,  near  Jeddo,  so  oppressed  the 
country  people,  that  they  were  forced  to  make  their  complaints 
thereof  to  the  Court ;  where  it  was  ordered  that  the  said  gentle 
man  and  all  his  relations  should  have  their  bellies  ripped  up  on  the 
same  day,  and  as  near  as  might  be  at  the  same  hour.  He  had  a 
brother  who  lived  two  hundred  and  forty-seven  leagues  from  Jeddo, 
in  the  service  of  the  King  of  Fingo  ;  an  uncle  who  lived  in  Satsu- 
ma,  twenty  leagues  further ;  a  son  who  served  the  King  of  Kino- 
cuni ;  a  grandson  who  served  the  King  of  Massamme,  a  hundred 
and  ten  leagues  from  Jeddo ;  and  at  three  hundred  and  eighty 
leagues  from  Satsuma,  another  son  who  served  the  Governor  of 
the  Castle  of  Quanto  ;  two  brothers  who  were  of  the  regiment  of 
the  Emperor's  guards  ;  and  another  son  who  had  married  the  only 
daughter  of  a  rich  merchant  near  Jeddo  ;  yet  were  all  these  per 
sons  to  be  executed  precisely  at  the  same  hour.  To  do  that  they 
determined  the  time  requisite  to  send  the  order  to  the  farthest 
place ;  and  having  appointed  the  day  for  the  execution  there, 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  11 


orders  were  sent  to^R  princes  of  all  the  places  mentioned,  that 
they  should  all  be  pirc  to  death  on  the  same  day,  just  at  noon, 
which  was  punctually  done.  The  merchant  who  had  bestowed  his 
daughter  on  that  gentleman's  son,  died  of  grief,  and  the  widow 
starved  herself. 

Lying  is  punished  among  them  with  death,  especially  that  which 
is  told  in  a  Court  of  Judicature.  Princes  and  great  lords  are  or 
dinarily  punished  more  cruelly  than  if  they  were  put  to  death  ;  for 
they  are  banished  into  a  little  island  named  Faitsensima,  fourteen 
leagues  from  the  Province  of  Jeddo,  and  is  nearly  a  league  in  cir 
cumference.  It  has  neither  road  nor  haven  ;  and  it  is  so  steep 
all  about,  that  no  doubt  it  was  with  the  greatest  danger  imaginable 
that  the  first  who  got  up  to  it  made  a  desperate  effort  to  do  it. 
Those  who  first  attempted  it,  found  means  to  fasten  great  poles  in 
certain  places,  to  which  they  have  tied  ropes  ;  and  with  these  they 
draw  up  those  that  are  sent  thither,  and  make  fast  the  boats  which 
otherwise  would  split  against  the  rocks  by  the  first  wind. 

Nothing  but  a  few  mulberry  trees  grow  on  the  Island,  so  that 
they  are  obliged  to  send  in  provisions  for  the  subsistence  of  the 
prisoners.  They  are  supplied  every  month,  as  is  also  the  garrison 
kept  there  ;  but  they  are  dieted  very  sparingly,  being  allowed 
only  a  little  rice,  some  roots,  and  other  wretched  fare  ;  they  hardly 
afford  them  a  lodging  over  their  heads  ;  and  with  all  these  mise 
ries  they  are  obliged  to  keep  a  certain  number  of  silk-worms,  and 
to  make  a  certain  quantity  of  stuffs  every  year. 

They  who  speak  of  the  Sovereign  Prince  of  all  Japan,  give  him 
the  quality  of  Emperor,  inasmuch  as  all  the  other  lords  of  the 
country  on  whom  they  bestow  the  title  of  King,  depend  on  him  and 
obey  him,  not  only  as  vassals,  but  as  subjects,  since  it  is  in  his 
power  to  condemn  them  to  death,  to  deprive  them  of  their  digni 
ties,  to  dispossess  them  of  their  territories,  and  to  banish  or  send 
them  to  some  island,  for  very  trifling  offences. 

The  Castle  of  Jeddo,  the  palace  of  the  Emperor's  ordinary  resi 
dence,  is  nearly  two  leagues  in  circumference,  fortified  with 
three  walls,  and  as  many  moats,  very  deep,  and  is  built  of  free 
stone,  but  so  irregular  that  it  is  impossible  to  assign  it  any  certain 
figure.  Within  less  than  three  hundred  paces  a  man  must  pass 
through  eight  or  nine  gates,  not  one  of  them  standing  opposite  to 
each  other  ;  for,  coming  within  the  first  he  must  turn  on  the  right 
hand  to  go  to  the  second  ;  and  having  come  within  that,  he  turns  on 
the  left  hand  to  go  to  the  third,  and  so  on,  alternately,  till  he  comes 
to  the  last.  Just  within  this  gate  there  is  a  magazine  of  arms  for  three 


12  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

or  four  thousand  men,  on  which  jet  out  a^Rhc  streets,  which  are 
4air  and  broad,  having  on  both  sides  many  magnificent  palaces.  The 
gates  are  secured  with  large  iron  bars ;  and  over  every  gate  there 
is  a  house  wherein  two  or  three  hundred  soldiers  may  be  lodged. 
The  Emperor's  palace  stands  in  the  middle  of  the  Castle,  and  has 
belonging  to  it  many  apartments,  halls,  chambers,  closets,  galleries, 
gardens,  orchards,  groves,  ponds,  rivers,  fountains,  courts,  &c.,  and 
several  particular  houses  for  his  wives  and  concubines.  The  ceil 
ings  of  the  halls  and  chambers  are  plated  with  gold  and  silver, 
curiously  raised  and  worked,  and  enriched  with  a  variety  of  precious 
stones.  The  hangings  are  of  the  richest  silk,  flowered  with  silver 
and  gold,  pearl,  and  other  embellishments.  In  the  hall  of  audience, 
where  the  Emperor  receives  homage  or  ambassadors,  there  is  a 
throne  of  massy  gold,  beset  with  large  gems  of  inestimable  value. 
The  roof,  being  lofty,  is  also  plated  with  gold,  richly  enamelled 
with  curious  figures  and  landscapes,  and  supported  by  stately  gilded 
columns.  The  gardens  behind  the  apartments  are  laid  out  in 
elegant  taste,  and  are  most  agreeably  diversified  and  adorned 
with  terraces,  canals,  fish-ponds,  water-works,  and  other  ornaments. 

As  you  come  out  of  the  palace,  you  go  into  that  quarter 
where  the  Princes  of  the  blood  and  Counselors  of  State  live,  and 
thence  into  another  quarter  where  are  the  palaces  of  the  Kings 
and  great  Lords  of  Japan,  which  are  gilded  both  within  and  with 
out  ;  they  are  the  more  sumptuously  built  on  the  account  that  there 
is  a  certain  emulation  amongst  them,  who  shall  be  at  the  great 
est  expense  to  please  the  Emperor.  In  the  next  quarter  to  this 
there  live  other  princes  and  lords,  who  are  not  so  powerful  as 
the  former,  yet  have  their  palaces  gilded  and  so  richly  furnished, 
that  a  man  would  think  at  his  first  coming  in,  he  met  with  moun 
tains  of  gold.  In  this  quarter  there  live  some  of  the  wives  of 
the  eldest  sons  of  those  princes  whom  the  Emperor  hath  brought 
up  in  the  sight  of  the  court,  as  so  many  hostages  of  their  fathers' 
fidelity ;  so  that  this  Castle,  though  as  large  as  a  considerable 
city,  yet  is  so  full  of  people  that  the  streets  can  hardly  con 
tain  them. 

When  the  Emperor  goes  out  of  his  palace,  he  either  goes  on 
horseback  or  is  carried  in  a  Palanquin,  open  on  all  sides,  and 
is  accompanied  by  a  great  number  of  lords,  who  are  called  the 
Emperor's  Camarades.  These  lords  are  of  great  quality,  and  very 
rich,  yet  they  do  not  think  it  a  dishonor  to  apply  themselves  to 
such  things  as  are  either  necessary  or  delightful.  Some  are  skilled 
in  music,  some  in  physic  ;  some  are  excellent  at  writing  or  paint- 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  13 

ing  ;  others  study  eloaMnce  and  the  management  of  affairs.  Next 
to  them  goes  a  part  m  the  guard  consisting  of  persons  selected 
from  among  the  children  of  younger  brothers,  cousins,  or  kinsmen 
of  great  lords,  among  whom  there  are  also  some  natural  children 
of  such  as  either  actually  are  in  employments,  or  may,  upon  pre 
sumption  of  their  birth,  pretend  thereto.  Then  follow  the  ordina 
ry  guard,  commanded  by  their  colonels  and  other  officers,  so  dis 
posed  of  that  two  or  three  thousand  march  before  the  Emperor 
and  as  many  after  him.  Among  so  many  soldiers,  there  is  not 
one  but  some  trial  has  been  made  of  his  courage,  nor  any  that  has 
not  gone  through  all  the  necessary  exercises,  in  order  to  be  fit  for 
such  a  kind  of  life,  and  whose  countenance  and  demeanor  are  not 
answerable  to  the  employment  they  are  engaged  in.  They  leave 
a  space  between  them  and  the  Emperor  for  a  great  number  of 
other  great  lords,  who  are  about  the  Emperor's  person,  who  must 
needs  make  an  uncommon  show  among  five  or  six  hundred  men, 
all  clad  in  black,  some  on  horseback,  some  on  foot,  all  marching 
with  such  gravity  and  so  orderly  that  there  is  not  one  man  to  be 
seen  out  of  his  rank,  nor  a  word  spoken,  that  can  be  heard.  The 
streets  are  swept  and  strewed  with  sand  or  gravel,  and  the  doors 
of  all  the  houses  kept  standing  open ;  yet  there  is  not  a  person  to 
be  seen  either  in  the  shops  or  at  the  windows.  Should  any  per 
sons  be  seen  in  the  streets  or  elsewhere,  the  guard  makes  them 
kneel  while  the  Emperor  is  passing  by. 

Once  every  five  years  the  Emperor  goes  to  Meaco.  A  whole 
year  is  spent  in  making  all  things  ready  for  that  journey.  From 
the  city  of  Jeddo  to  that  of  Meaco,  the  distance  is  one  hundred 
and  twenty-five  leagues,  and  within  every  three  or  four  leagues 
there  is  a  considerable  city,  able  to  lodge  the  whole  court.  The 
Emperor  has  caused  to  be  built  between  those  two  places,  at  an 
equal  distance  one  from  the  other,  twenty-eight  fair  houses,  of  which 
there  are  twenty  great  castles,  and  in  every  house  there  is  a  retinue, 
and  all  things  else  suitable  to  a  king's  court,  as  gentlemen,  guards 
officers,  servants  and  horses,  with  provisions  necessary  for  the  sub 
sistence  of  the  whole  train.  They  who  go  with  the  Emperor 
from  the  city  of  Jeddo,  leave  him  to  the  care  of  those  whom  they 
find  in  the  first  house ;  these  accompany  and  conduct  him  to  the 
second,  and  so  on,  from  one  to  another,  till  he  comes  to  the  city  of 
Meaco.  In  his  return  he  observes  the  same  order,  being  attend 
ed  from  one  house  to  another,  till  he  comes  to  Jeddo. 

The  Emperors  of  Japan  build  many  of  these  castles,  and  have 
them  finished  in  so  short  a  time,  that  they  will  have  a  structure 


14  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 


completed  in  six  months,  which  in  EuropJI  would  take  as  man) 
years.  We  have  an  instance  of  it  in  the  casTle  which  the  Emperor 
had  built  in  the  year  1636,  in  the  province  of  Nicko,  four  days' 
journey  from  the  city  of  Jeddo.  It  is  fortified  with  a  double  moat 
and  a  double  rampier,  and  both  of  free-stone  ;  and  it  is  so  spacious, 
and  consists  of  so  many  particular  palaces*  for  the  grandees  of  the 
court,  and  so  many  apartments,  gardens  and  fountains  for  the 
Emperor  himself,  that  the  best  architect  in  Europe  would  not  have 
finished  it  in  several  years  ;  yet  this  great  building  was  completed 
in  less  than  five  months — many  masons,  carpenters,  joiners,  stone 
cutters,  gilders,  painters,  &c.,  being  employed  about  it. 

The  Emperor's  treasures  are  so  great,  that  it  is  impossible  to 
give  anything  near  an  exact  account  of  it,  inasmuch  as  the  gold 
and  silver  is  locked  up  in  chests  and  deposited  in  the  towers  of  the 
castle,  besides  what  is  in  several  places  up  and  down  the  country, 
where  it  increases  almost  to  infinity,  since  the  revenue  of  two 
months  will  defray  the  charges  of  a  whole  year's  expense. 

It  is  no  hard  matter  for  the  Emperor  of  Japan  to  raise  and  keep 
an  army  on  foot,  as  all  his  subjects  are  obliged  to  bring  in  and 
maintain  a  certain  number  of  soldiers,  proportionably  to  their  re 
venue.  He  who  has  a  thousand  kockiens,  or  four  thousand  crowns 
per  annum,  is  obliged  to  maintain  twenty  foot  and  two  horse 
men.  According  to  this  account,  the  Lord  of  Firando,  (where 
the  Dutch  made  their  first  establishment),  who  has  sixty  thou 
sand  kockiens  of  yearly  revenue,  was  taxed  at  twelve  hundred 
foot  and  one  hundred  and  twenty  horse,  besides  the  servants, 
slaves,  and  whatever  else  is  consequent  thereto.  By  this  means, 
according  to  the  revenues  of  the  lords,  which  amount  to  eighteen 
millions  °and  four  hundred  thousand  kockiens,  the  Emperor  of 
Japan  can  raise  an  army  of  three  hundred  and  sixty-eight  thou 
sand  foot,  and  thirty-eight  thousand  and  eight  hundred  horse,  not 
counting  the  hundred  thousand  foot  and  twenty  thousand  horse, 
which  he  is  able  to  maintain  out  of  his  own  revenue,  and  which 
he  keeps  as  a  standing  army  for  the  defence  of  his  castles  and 
strong  places,  and  for  his  guards. 

Most  of  these  lords  find  it  no  great  trouble  to  make  their  levies, 
for  there  are  few  of  them  but  ordinarily  maintain  twice  as  many 
soldiers,  out  of  a  humor  they  have  to  make  great  shows,  especially 
upon  those  occasions  wherein  they  expect  to  exhibit  some  ^marks  of 
their  courage,  or  the  zeal  they  have  for  the  service  of  their  prince. 
Their  cavalry  is  armed  with  corselets,  but  the  foot  have  only 
head-pieces.  The  offensive  arms  of  the  horse  are  a  sort  of  fire- 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  15 

locks,  not  much  lon^r  than  our  pistols,  half-pikes,  bows,  arrows 
and  ciraeters.  The  Toot  wear  two  cimeters,  and  have  muskets, 
pikes,  and  nanganets,  or  half-pikes,  and  every  man  has  about 
him  a  very  broad  knife.  Their  companies  consist  only  of  fifty 
soldiers,  who  are  commanded  by  a  captain,  a  lieutenant,  and  ten 
corporals,  to  wit :  a  corporal  for  every  five  soldiers.  Five  com 
panies  make  a  body,  which  is  commanded  by  another  officer,  and 
every  fifty  companies  have  their  colonel. 

The  Emperor  of  Japan  takes  the  following  course  to  know  every 
year  how  many  persons  there  are  in  his  kingdom  : — Every  quarter 
of  a  city  or  village  is  divided  into  cantons,  consisting  of  five  houses, 
which  are  commanded  by  a  certain  officer,  who  keeps  a  register  or 
catalogue  of  all  those  who  die  or  are  born  within  the  five  houses 
under  his  jurisdiction,  and  reports  the  same  to  his  superiors,  who 
give  an  account  thereof  to  the  prince  or  lord  of  the  province  ;  and 
these  last  to  two  Counselors  of  State,  who  are  appointed  for  that 
purpose. 

The  Council  of  State  consists  of  several  lords,  who  have  each  of 
them  his  particular  function,  excepting  only  the  four  chiefest,  who 
are  every  day  punctually  at  court  to  give  the  Emperor  an  account 
of  affairs.  All  the  rest  are  so  powerful  and  rich,  that  some  among 
them  have  above  two  millions  of  yearly  revenue,  others  three  or 
four  hundred  thousand  crowns,  others  but  forty  or  fifty  thousand. 
They  are  very  reserved  in  the  advice  they  give  the  Emperor,  to 
whom  they  speak  not,  even  of  affairs,  if  they  find  him  not  in  a 
good  humor  to  hear  them.  But  none  will  presume  to  speak  to 
him  twice  of  the  same  thing,  or  renew  his  entreaties  after  a  refu 
sal.  This  Council  consists  of  such  lords  as  the  Emperor  may  be 
the  more  confident  of,  as  they  have  commonly  received  their  educa 
tion  at  court.  These  have  the  management  of  all  public  affairs  ; 
but  with  such  dependence  on  the  sovereign's  pleasure,  that  they 
never  resolve  on  anything  of  themselves,  nor  speak  to  the  Emperor 
till  he  gives  them  some  occasion  to  do  it,  having  first  consulted  his 
eyes  and  observed  his  countenance  to  find  what  his  sentiments 
are.  They  always  approve  what  he  says,  though  ever  so  pre 
judicial  to  himself,  even  to  the  loss  of  a  whole  province  ;  for 
the  least  contradiction  of  him  would  cost  them  their  fortunes, 
if  not  their  lives. 

The  revenues  of  the  lords  are  very  great,  and  so  are  their 
expenses ;  for  there  is  not  one  of  them  but  is  obliged  to  live  one 
half  of  the  year  at  court,  and  during  that  time  to  keep  house  in 
the  chief  city  of  Jeddo,  where  he  who  lives  at  the  highest  rate  ia 


16  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

most  in  favor  with  the  Emperor.  The  fir|t  six  months  in  the 
year,  those  lords  who  have  their  principalities  and  lordships  in  the 
eastern  and  northern  provinces  of  the  kingdom,  continue  at  the 
court ;  and  the  other  six  months  live  in  the  western  and  southern 
provinces.  At  their  coming  to  the  court,  and  departing  there 
from,  they  make  very  considerable  presents  to  the  Emperor,  and 
great  entertainments  among  themselves.  Their  journies  and  their 
expenses  at  court,  whither  some  lords  bring  a  retinue  of  five  or 
six  thousand  persons,  lie  very  heavy  on  the  richest,  and  ruin 
the  rest. 

Provisions  are  dear  enough  in  Japan,  but  at  an  excessive  rate 
about  the  court,  by  reason  of  the  abundance  consumed  by  so  great 
a  number  of  persons  of  quality.  Another  way  to  exhaust  their 
estates,  is  their  magnificence  in  building.  Most  of  their  domestics 
go  in  silk,  especially  their  women,  and  those  of  their  own  sex  that 
wait  on  them  ;  so  that  there  is  hardly  any  lord  but  spends  more 
than  his  revenue  amounts  to.  But  what  helps  to  ruin  them  is  the 
order  they  receive  from  the  Emperor  to  supply  him  now  and  then 
with  men  and  money  to  carry  on  the  public  buildings,  which  he 
does  rather  to  drain  the  purses  of  these  lords,  than  out  of  any 
necessity  obliging  him  to  do  so. 

The  principal  lords,  when  they  build  a  palace,  do  ordinarily 
make  two  gates  thereto,  one  for  their  own  use,  and  the  other  for 
the  Emperor's  passage  into  it.  The  latter  is  much  larger  than  the 
former,  and  made  of  joiner's  work,  excellently  varnished,  carved 
into  branch-work,  and  gilded.  As  soon  as  it  is  finished,  it  is  co 
vered  with  boards,  to  prevent  its  being  injured  by  the  weather, 
and  is  not  uncovered  till  near  the  time  the  Emperor  intends  to 
honor  the  house  with  his  presence  to  dine  there  ;  and  as  soon  as 
he  has  departed  therefrom  it  is  shut  up  and  so  kept  ever  after, 
because  that,  having  served  for  a  passage  for  the  Emperor's  sacred 
person,  it  is  reckoned  a  profanation  if  any  private  person  should 
pass  through  it  after  him.  It  is  also  to  be  observed  that  the  Em 
peror  never  dines  more  than  once  in  any  house  belonging  to  another 
man.  It  requires  three  whole  years  to  make  all  things  ready  for  his 
entertainment.  Accordingly  he  has  notice  of  it  three  years  before, 
and  in  the  meantime  all  the  furniture  of  the  house  is  made  and 
marked,  also  all  the  plate,  with  the  arms  and  characters  of  the 
Emperor  ;  and  after  that  time  they  are  never  more  used,  but  kept 
very  safe,  after  they  have  once  served  the  Emperor's  person  ; 
so  that  this  expense,  and  that  which  they  are  at  in  the  entertain- 
ment  which  the  master  of  the  house  is  obliged  to  make  for  the 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  17 

whole  court,  for  three  months  together,  is  enough  to  beggar  an 
ordinary  king. 

Another  thing  which  lies  heavy  on  these  lords,  is  the  presents 
which  the  Emperor  makes  them  ;  for  upon  his  return  from  hunting 
the  Crane,  a  bird,  there  very  highly  esteemed,  he  sends  some  of 
those  he  has  taken  to  his  favorites.  But  this  present  costs  the  per 
son  who  receives  it,  at  least  half  a  year's  revenue  in  feasts,  pre 
sents,  and  other  public  entertainments,  which  he  is  obliged  to 
make  in  acknowledgment  of  the  favor  done  him  by  the  Emperor, 
in  sending  him  a  bird,  taken  by  a  hawk,  sent  off  from  his  sacred 
hands. 

On  a  certain  time  the  Lord  of  Zatiuma  entertained  the  Emperor 
with  a  dinner  in  a  palace  which  was  then  but  newly  finished  ;  and 
he  got  well  rewarded  for  the  expense  he  had  been  at,  for  the  Em 
peror  made  him  a  present  for  his  horses,  (for  so  they  call  the 
gratifications  he  makes  his  favorites),  by  an  addition  to  his  former 
revenue  of  two  hundred  and  fifty  thousand  crowns  per  annum. 

The  grandees  never  select  their  own  wives  but  receive  them 
from  the  Emperor's  hands  ;  and  it  is  of  her  alone  who  is  given  by 
him,  that  the  children  are  to  be  born  who  are  to  inherit  their 
estates.  Accordingly,  they  look  on  her  and  respect  her  as  the  per 
son  from  whom  they  expect  heirs  for  the  propagation  of  their  fa 
mily,  and  upon  that  account  are  recommended  to  them  by  the  Em 
peror.  He  who  expects  to  have  this  honor  done  him,  builds  a 
palace  purposely  for  her  reception,  furnishes  it  very  richly,  and 
allows  her  a  retinue,  consisting  of  a  great  number  of  women  and 
maids,  to  accompany  her  and  wait  on  her. 

Women  go  abroad  but  once  a  year,  to  give  their  relations  a 
visit,  and  then  they  are  seen  in  the  streets  with  a  retinue  of  thirty, 
forty,  or  fifty  close  palanquins,  wherein  are  carried  as  many  maids 
of  honor,  each  of  them  accompanied  by  their  waiting  gentlewomen, 
and  other  women,  marching  in  a  file  on  both  sides  of  the  palan 
quins,  which  are  varnished  over  and  gilded.  All  the  remainder 
of  the  year  the  women  stir  not  out  of  their  houses,  into  which 
there  are  not  any  men  permitted  to  enter,  save  only  some  of  the 
wives'  nearest  relations,  who  sometimes  have  permission  to  see 
them  in  presence  of  their  husbands.  It  is  the  husband's  business 
to  make  the  restraint  as  little  burthensome  as  possible  to  them,  by 
allowing  them  all  the  diversions  and  recreations  which  honest  wo 
men  can  take — providing  them  gardens  and  parks  for  walking,  ponds 
for  fishing,  keeping  all  sorts  of  living  creatures  for  their  pleasure, 
and  entertaining  them  every  day  with  music  and  plays.  But  they 


18  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

must  expect  to  end  their  days  in  this  restraint,  and  renounce  the 
conversation  of  men,  inasmuch  as  the  least  suspicion  is  unpardon 
able,  and  punished  with  death,  as  any  other  manifest  crime  ;  not 
only  in  the  person  of  the  lady,  but  also  in  all  about  her.  Their 
attendants  are  commonly  some  of  the  handsomest  young  women  in 
the  province,  who  always  stand  before  their  master  and  mistress 
with  such  respect,  that  they  study  to  answer,  laugh,  and  hold  their 
peace,  upon  the  least  sign  made  them.  They  are  generally  divided 
iiitu  bands  or  companies  consisting  of  sixteen  women,  who  have 
each  a  governess  over  them.  They  are  clothed  in  silk,  flowered, 
painted,  or  embroidered,  of  different  colors  or  liveries.  One  band 
is  in  a  red  livery,  with  girdles  and  head-clothes  of  a  green 
color  ;  another,  white,  with  girdles  and  head-clothes  red  ;  another, 
yellow,  with  girdles  and  head-clothes  of  a  sky  color,  and  so  of  the 
rest.  Most  of  the  women  who  are  received  into  the  service  of  these 
princesses  at  fifteen  or  twenty  years  of  age,  engage  themselves  for 
the  remainder  of  their  lives  ;  but  such  as  are  taken  into  the 
service  while  they  are  yet  children,  are  sometimes  afterwards  mar 
ried  to  gentlemen,  soldiers,  or  others  of  the  menial  servants,  who 
have  some  office  about  the  house,  and  whose  allowances  are  upon 
that  account  augmented.  But  such  as  are  not  married  at  thirty, 
must  not  expect  to  change  their  condition  otherwise  than  by  being 
advanced  to  some  more  honorable  employment  among  the  women. 
It  is  the  custom  of  the  country,  that  women  should  be  instructed 
betimes  not  to  meddle  with  any  kind  of  business  whatever,  in 
somuch  that  they  never  speak  of  any  such  thing  to  their  husbands. 
These,  on  the  other  side,  make  it  their  boast  that  they  are  endued 
with  such  a  strength  of  parts  and  understanding,  as  to  leave  all  se 
rious  thoughts  behind  them  at  their  own  lodgings,  when  they 
leave  them  to  go  into  the  apartment  of  their  wives,  where  their 
discourse  is  altogether  of  mirth  and  diversion.  If  a  woman 
should  trouble  her  husband  with  the  least  discourse  about  business, 
she  would  immediately  put  him  out  of  humor,  make  him  change 
his  countenance,  and  oblige  him  to  retire,  without  so  much  as 
speaking  to  her.  But  this  she  will  be  sure  to  avoid,  though  out  of 
no  more  motive  than  this,  that  another  might  not  have  those  enjoy 
ments  of  him  which  she,  by  her  imprudence,  would  deprive  herself 
of;  for  they  affirm,  that  a  woman  is  bestowed  on  man  merely  to 
serve  and  divert  him,  and  to  mind  the  education  of  his  children  ; 
and  that  herein  consists  all  her  duty,  and  that  there  are  but  too 
many  examples  of  the  mischiefs  happening  through  the  excessive 
freedom  heretofore  allowed  to  women.  The  wives  in  Japan  have 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  19 

the  reputation  of  being  extremely  faithful  to  their  husbands, 
and  so  modest  and  reserved  that  none  anywhere  else  come  near 
them. 

The  King  or  Prince  of  the  Province  of  Fingo,  hearing  that  a 
gentleman  of  the  country  had  a  very  handsome  woman  for  his 
wife,  had  him  dispatched  out  of  the  way ;  and  having  sent  for  the 
widow  some  days  after  her  husband's  death,  acquainted  her  with 
his  desires.  She  told  him,  that  though  she  had  much  reason  to  be 
glad,  and  think  herself  happy  in  being  honored  with  the  friendship 
of  so  great  a  prince,  yet  she  was  resolved  to  bite  off  her  tongue, 
and  murder  herself,  if  he  offered  her  any  violence  ;  but  if  he  would 
grant  her  one  favor,  viz  :  to  spend  one  month  in  bewailing  her  hus 
band,  and  then  give  her  the  liberty  to  make  an  entertainment  for 
the  relations  of  the  deceased,  to  take  her  leave  of  them,  he  should 
find  how  much  she  was  his  servant,  and  how  far  she  would  comply 
with  his  wishes.  The  prince  made  no  objections  to  do  what  she 
desired  ;  and  having  provided  a  very  great  dinner  at  the  place 
designated  by  her,  all  the  kindred  of  the  deceased  attended,  but 
it  was  only  to  be  witnesses  of  the  fidelity  which  she  expressed  for 
her  husband  after  his  death ;  for,  perceiving  the  king  had  become 
excited  by  the  wine  which  he  had  drank,  and  fondly  indulging  the 
hope  that  he  was  soon  to  enjoy  what  had  been  promised  him,  she 
requested  the  privilege  of  withdrawing  into  an  adjoining  gallery  to 
take  the  air  ;  but,  as  soon  as  she  reached  it,  she  committed  sui 
cide  by  casting  herself  "  head-long  down"  in  the  presence  of  the 
king  and  her  husband's  relations  ! 

The  Japanese  are  generally  reserved  in  their  conversation. 
They  are  seldom  guilty  of  any  obscene  or  impertinent  expres 
sions,  and  will  not  so  much  as  talk  of  marriage,  or  anything  re 
lating  thereto,  in  the  presence  of  young  people.  The  children 
have  a  great  tenderness  and  respect  for  their  parents — being  per 
suaded  there  is  no  sin  more  severely  punished  by  the  gods,  than 
the  disobedience  of  children.  They  have  also  a  great  veneration 
for  the  memory  of  their  parents  after  their  decease  ;  for  they  reli 
giously  observe  those  days  of  the  month  on  which  their  parents  de 
parted  this  world,  as  fasting  days,  abstaining  from  whatever  hath 
had  life. 

As  the  Japanese  are  very  severe  in  restraining  their  wives  and 
concubines  of  even  the  least  liberty,  so  are  they  excessively  cruel 
in  punishing  those  who  are  not  careful  to  preserve  their  honors,  or 
give  the  least  suspicion  of  their  inclinations  to  be  dishonest.  Once 
the  Lord  of  Firando  caused  three  women  to  be  put  into  so  many 


20  JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE. 

chests,  through  which  there  were  nails  struck  in  on  all  sides  ;  one 
for  having  prostituted  herself  to  a  man,  who  ripped  up  his  own 
belly  as  soon  as  their  familiarity  was  discovered,  and  the  other 
two,  because  they  had  been  privy  to  their  love,  and  had  not  ac 
quainted  the  lord  therewith. 

There  are  in  Japan  an  incredible  number  of  Pagods  or  Mes- 
quites,  some  of  which  have  fifteen  or  twenty  Priests  belonging  to 
them.  They  are  distinguished  from  the  Laieks  by  having  their 
heads  shaved,  and  also  by  being  clothed  in  a  kind  of  cassock,  made 
like  the  frocks  worn  by  many  country  people ;  but  upon  holidays 
they  substitute  a  sort  of  long  garments,  which  they  fold  up  under 
the  left  arm  like  a  cloak.  Their  principal  employment  is  to  pray 
before  their  gods,  and  to  bury  their  dead,  or  at  least  the  ashes  of 
such  bodies  as  have  been  burnt.  They  are  divided  into  several 
sects,  and  consequently  have  as  many  different  ways  of  paying  their 
devotions,  especially  on  the  anniversary  days  of  the  deceased,  which 
they  call  Bom^  on  which  the  priests  are  employed  in  praying  and 
singing  litanies,  and  making  processions  round  a  chapel  set  about 
with  wax  lights,  much  after  the  same  manner  as  is  done  in  some 
parts  of  Europe.  Their  sepulchres  are  near  their  pagodes,  covered 
with  great  stones,  two  or  three  feet  high,  on  which  they  go  to  pay 
their  devotions  and  cast  flowers  or  branches  of  trees,  and  put  into 
a  little  pit  made  in  the  ground,  some  fair  water  and  a  little  rice, 
which  is  taken  away  from  thence  by  the  poor.  Persons  of  quality 
erect  a  little  pillar  near  their  sepulchres,  and  engrave  thereon  their 
names,  with  a  certain  elegy  which  serves  for  an  epitaph. 

Their  Ecclesiastics  are  divided  into  twelve  principal  sects,  of 
which  eleven  eat  not  of  anything  that  has  had  life,  and  make 
a  vow  of  chastity,  with  an  obligation  for  the  strict  observance 
thereof,  that  if  they  break  it,  though  in  never  so  small  a  point, 
they  are  put  to  the  most  cruel  death  imaginable  ;  for  the  priest 
who  has  broken  his  vow  is  put  into  the  ground  up  to  the  middle 
of  his  body,  near  the  highway,  and  all  that  pass  by,  who  are  not 
nobly  descended,  are  obliged  to  give  a  slight  stroke  upon  his  neck 
with  a  wooden  saw,  which  being  very  blunt  makes  the  wretch 
languish  three  or  four  days  altogether,  before  he  dies. 

The  priests  of  the  twelfth  sect  are  not  thus  restricted — as  it  is 
lawful  for  them  to  feed  on  anything  that  earth  or  water  affords, 
and  also  to  marry ;  and  yet  this  sect,  which  they  call  Icko,  whence 
the  priests  whereof  it  consists,  are  named  Ickois,  is  considered  the 
holiest  and  most  perfect  of  them  all.  He  who  is  head  of  this 
sect  is  also  supreme  head  of  all  the  clergy  of  the  country,  and  is 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  21 

in  so  great  veneration  among  his  followers,  that  they  do  not  only 
carry  him  in  a  palanquin,  but  indeed  do  him  such  honors  as  are 
almost  divine.  All  the  priests  depend  on  the  Dayro,  who  still  has 
the  same  power  over  the  ecclesiastics  as  he  had  heretofore,  jointly, 
with  the  secular  power.  Only  such  Pagods  as  belong  to  these 
last  have  a  settled  revenue,  and  enjoy  many  privileges  and  im 
munities  granted  them  by  the  Emperors.  All  the  other  Pagods 
are  maintained  by  what  is  given  them,  either  by  way  of  alms  or 
the  gratification  that  they  get  from  those  who  employ  them  about 
prayers  for  the  dead,  wherein  the  main  part  of  the  exercise  of 
their  religion  consists. 

Some  among  them  believe  that  the  soul  is  immortal ;  that  the 
body  is  reduced  to  its  first  principle,  and  becomes  dust  and  ashes ; 
that  the  spirit  is  either  raised  to  eternal  joy,  or  condemned  to 
an  endless  grief;  and  that  at  its  return  into  this  world,  it  shall 
find  good  or  evil,  according  to  what  it  had  done  during  this  life. 
Others  make  no  distinction  between  the  souls  of  men  and  those  of 
beasts  ;  and  as  they  have  no  knowledge  of  the  creation  of  the 
world,  so  are  they  ignorant  that  there  is  a  time  appointed  for  its 
dissolution. 

Most  of  their  houses  are  built  of  wood,  slightly  enough,  as  the 
country  is  very  much  subject  to  earthquakes.  They  are  all  raised 
three  or  four  feet  from  the  ground,  boarded  and  matted,  and  very 
handsome  within,  especially  those  rooms  in  which  they  receive  visi 
tors.  They  are,  for  the  most  part,  but  one  story  high,  in  which 
they  live,  and  the  rest  serve  for  corn-lofts.  They  have  places  dis 
tinct  from  their  houses,  where  they  keep  their  merchandizes  and 
whatever  else  they  most  esteem.  Their  houses  are  so  apt  to  take 
fire,  that  they  are  compelled  for  self-preservation,  to  have  vats  full 
of  water,  always  ready  against  such  accidents. 

The  houses  of  gentlemen  and  soldiers  are  divided  into  two  par 
titions—one  is  taken  up  by  the  wife,  who  is  never  seen,  and  the 
other  by  the  husband,  who  has  his  chambers  and  halls  for  the 
reception  of  his  friends  and  his  business.  The  wives  of  citizens 
and  merchants  appear  in  the  shops,  and  have  a  care  of  the  house  ; 
but  they  are  treated  with  so  much  respect  that  none  durst  let  fall 
a  free  or  equivocal  expression  in  their  presence  ;  nay,  a  licentious 
one  is  considered  criminal.  Instead  of  tapestry,  they  have  a  kind 
of  scenes  or  shutters,  which  serve  them  also  for  pictures,  with 
which  they  cover  the  closures  with  paper,  painted  and  gilded,  and 
so  neatly  pasted  on,  that  the  whole  piece  seems  to  consist  but  of 
one  sheet.  These  shutters  are  made  of  very  thin  boards,  and  fall 


22  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

one  into  another,  so  that  two  or  three  small  chambers  can  in  a  few 
moments  make  a  very  fine  hall.  All  these  little  rooms  make  a 
kind  of  gallery,  which  serves  equally  for  both  the  apartments 
of  the  husbaud  and  wife,  and  leads  to  a  common  door  to  go  into 
the  garden,  which  door  is  ordinarily  opposite  to  the  hall  win 
dows.  In  the  midst  of  the  room  there  usually  stands  a  cabinet, 
on  which  they  set  a  pot  of  flowers,  which  are  there  to  be  had 
during  the  whole  year.  They  are  very  curious  about  their  gar 
dens,  and  make  them  as  pleasant  as  may  be,  with  groves,  fountains, 
orchards,  and  especially  one  kind  of  tree,  which  is  as  green  in 
winter  as  in  summer. 

There  is  not  much  household  stuff  to  be  seen  in  their  houses,  as 
they  bestow  on  their  wives  the  trunks  and  cabinets  of  lacque,  their 
rich  tapestry,  and  the  like,  or  they  store  them  into  some  private 
rooms,  into  which  they  admit  only  their  most  intimate  friends. 

They  are  civil,  and  entertain  such  as  visit  them  with  great  com 
pliments.  Persons  of  quality  desire  those  who  come  to  see  them 
to  be  seated,  presenting  them  with  tobacco  and  tsia.  If  the  master 
of  the  house  has  a  particular  esteem  for  the  friend  who  visits  him, 
he  will  treat  him  with  wine,  which  is  brought  in  a  varnished  cup  ; 
and  it  is  considered  impoliteness  in  him  to  whom  this  honor  is 
done,  to  refuse  it.  They  are  not  so  reserved  but  that  sometimes 
they  will  take  a  little  more  than  they  are  well  able  to  carry  away ; 
but  seldom  to  that  height  as  to  quarrel  or  to  do  aught  whereof  they 
may  repent  the  next  day ;  for  the  perpetual  apprehension  they 
have  of  the  unavoidable  death  that  would  follow,  keeps  them  in 
fear. 

In  cities  and  upon  the  highways  there  are  inns  for  the  entertain 
ment  of  travelers  and  passengers,  but  besides  these  there  is  not  a 
tippling-house  or  cook-shop  in  all  Japan ;  for  though  they  are 
great  lovers  of  good  cheer  and  company-keeping,  yet  they  have 
not  any  public  places  for  that  purpose,  but  they  meet  at  one  an 
other's  houses,  and  there  spend  the  time  in  good  fellowship  and 
drinking,  and  have  a  kind  of  music,  which  is  not  very  harmonious. 
They  have  but  few  musical  instruments,  and  that  most  used  among 
them  and  which  they  are  most  taken  with,  is  a  kind  of  lute,  the 
belly  of  which  is  above  a  foot  square,  with  a  long  and  narrow  neck, 
being  made  only  for  four  strings  which  are  usually  of  silk,  and 
struck  with  a  peg  of  ivory  about  the  size  of  a  man's  finger.  They 
sing  to  it,  but  the  voice  is  as  unharmonious  as  the  sound  of  the  in 
strument. 

Their  wine  is  made  of  rice.     After  putting  sugar  or  honey  in  it 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  23 

it  is  called  Hour  sack  or  Saltse.  It  is  a  kind  of  mead  rather  than 
wine  ;  yet  it  is  as  strong  as  the  best  sack,  and  makes  a  man  drunk 
much  sooner. 

Tsia  is  a  kind  of  The  or  Tea  ;  but  the  plant  is  more  delicate, 
and  more  highly  esteemed  than  that  of  The.  Persons  of  quality 
keep  it  very  carefully  in  earthern  pots,  well  stopped  and  luted. 
But  the  Japanese  prepare  it  quite  differently  from  the  Europeans ; 
for,  instead  of  infusing  it  into  warm  water,  they  beat  it  as  small  as 
powder,  and  take  of  it  as  much  as  will  lie  on  the  point  of  a  knife, 
and  put  it  into  a  dish  of  porcelain  or  earth,  full  of  seething  water,  in 
which  they  stir  it  till  the  water  is  all  green,  and  then  drink  it  as 
hot  as  they  can  endure  it.  It  is  good  and  excellent  after  a  debauch. 
There  is  nothing  that  allays  the  vapors  and  settles  the  stomach  bet 
ter  than  this  herb.  The  pots  used  for  making  this  kind  of  drink 
are  the  most  precious  of  any  of  their  household  stuff,  as  it  is  well 
known  that  there  have  been  tea-pots  made  which  cost  between  six 
and  seven  pounds  sterling. 

Their  marriages  are  made  only  by  relations  who  have  some 
superiority  over  those  who  contract  them.  The  father  and  mother, 
and  for  want  of  them,  others,  of  the  kindred,  find  out  the  party, 
and  propose  the  alliance  ;  so  that  the  young  couple  know  nothing 
of  what  is  done,  and  never  see  one  another  till  the  marriage  is  to 
be  consummated. 

They  are  very  inquisitire  and  curious  about  the  age  of  the  bride 
and  bridegroom,  that  there  may  be  little  or  no  disparity  between 
them  in  that  respect.  The  husband  accepts  of  neither  portion  nor 
present  with  his  wife  ;  but  on  his  side  the  case  is  quite  different, 

*L  ..     i  i  •          i  '11     __  11 . 


resemblance  to  this  custom  but  the  grant  of  a  certain  sum,  by  way 
of  jointure,  which  the  intended  husband  obliges  himself  before 
hand  to  allow  his  intended  bride,  in  case  the  marriage  takes  effect. 
The  nuptial  ceremony  is  thus  performed : — The  bridegroom  and 
bride  go  out  of  town  by  two  different  ways,  with  their  respective 
retinues,  and  meet  by  appointment  at  the  foot  of  a  certain  hill.  In 
that  of  the  former,  besides  his  friends  and  relations,  &c.,  are  the 
carriages  before-mentioned.  Having  arrived  at  the  hill,  which 
they  ascend  to  the  summit  by  a  pair  of  stairs  made  for  the  purpose, 
they  enter  a  tent,  and  seat  themselves,  one  on  the  one  side  and  the 
other  on  the  other,  like  plenipotentiaries  assembled  together  at  a 
congress  of  peace.  The  parents  of  both  parties  place  themselves 


24  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

behind  the  bride,  and  a  band  of  music  range  themselves  behind  the 
bridegroom,  but  all  without  the  verge  of  the  tent :  Both  their 
retinues  stay  below  at  the  foot  of  the  hill.  The  bridegroom  and 
bride,  each  with  a  flambeau,  then  present  themselves  under  the 
tent  before  the  God  of  Marriage,  who  is  placed  upon  an  altar, 
having  the  head  of  a  dog,  which  is  a  lively  emblem  of  the  mutual 
fidelity  requisite  in  a  state  of  wedlock.  The  string  in  his  hands  is 
another  symbol  of  the  force  and  obligation  of  its  bands.  Near  the 
god,  and  between  the  two  parties,  stands  a  Bonze,  whose  office  it 
is  to  perform  the  marriage  ceremony.  There  are  several  lighted 
lamps  at  a  small  distance  from  the  tent ;  at  one  of  which  the  Ibride 
lights  the  flambeau,  which  she  holds  in  her  hand,  pronouncing  at 
the  same  time  a  form  of  words,  which  are  dictated  to  her  by°the 
Bonze.  After  this,  the  bridegroom  lights  his  taper  or  flambeau 
by  that  of  his  intended  bride.  This  part  of  the  ceremony  is 
accompanied  with  loud  acclamations  of  joy  and  the  congratulations 
of  all  the  friends  and  relations  present.  At  the  same  time  the 
Bonze  dismisses  them  with  his  benediction,  and  their  retinue  make 
a  large  bonfire  at  the  foot  of  the  hill,  in  which  are  thrown  all  the 
toys  and  play-things  which  the  young  bride  amused  herself  with  in 
her  virgin  state.  Others  place  a  distaff  and  some  flax  before  her, 
to  intimate  that  from  thence-forward  she  must  apply  herself  to  the 
prudent  management  of  her  family  affairs.  The  ceremony  con 
cludes  with  the  solemn  sacrifice  of  two  oxen  to  the  God  of  Mar 
riage.  After  this  the  new-married  couple  return  with  their  retinues, 
and  the  bride  is  conducted  to  her  husband's  house,  where  she  finds 
every  room  in  the  most  exact  order,  and  embellished  in  the  gayest 
manner.  The  pavements  and  the  threshhold  are  strewed  with 
flowers  and  greens,  whilst  flags  and  streamers  on  the  house-top 
seem  to  promise  nothing  but  one  continued  scene  of  delight. 

The  Japanese  are  very  tender  and  indulgent  in  the  education  of 
their  children  ;  and  though  they  have  an  absolute  and  unlimited 
authority  of  life  and  death  over  them,  yet  they  very  seldom  act 
the  tyrant,  or  treat  them  with  the  least  inhumanity.  They  endea 
vor  to  inspire  them  with  the  love  of  glory,  which  is  their  darling 
passion,  and  take  peculiar  care  not  to  thwart  the  bias  of  their  na 
tural  inclinations.  As  the  ambition  to  procure  honor  and  esteem, 
and  the  dread  of  losing  their  reputation,  is  conspicuous,  even  in 
their  infancy,  it  is  no  difficult  task  to  inspire  them  with  uncommon 
courage  and  resolution,1  with  generous  and  disinterested  principles ; 
and  on  the  contrary,  to  imprint  on  their  minds  a  lively  detestation 
and  abhorrence  of  particular  vices,  as  base  and  contemptible. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  25 

They  look  down  therefore  on  avarice,  excessive  gaming,  and  theft, 
with  an  eye  of  generous  disdain.  He  who  is  guilty  of  the  last, 
though  the  offence  prove  never  so  trivial,  is  sure  to  die  without 
redemption  ;  nay,  the  injured  party  may  do  himself  justice,  and 
murder  the  pilferer  taken  in  the  act. 

The  Japanese  merchants  are  so  fair  and  honest  in  all  their  tran 
sactions  that  in  case  they  receive  from  those  they  deal  with  more 
than  their  just  due,  or  the  stated  price  of  their  commodities,  they 
will  return  the  surplus.  It  is  reasonable  to  suppose,  that  these 
concientious  Pagans  are  seldom  or  never  worth  millions,  as  some  of 
the  Christians  are.  There  is  another  thing  which  is  very  remark 
able  ;  viz.,  that  poverty  is  neither  the  object  of  shame  or  con 
tempt  at  Japan. 

We  shall  not  expatiate  on  the  obedience  which  children  pay  their 
parents  ;  on  the  equanimity  and  fortitude  of  the  Japanese  under 
misfortunes  ;  or  their  patience  under  afflictions,  &c.  Notwith 
standing  these  virtues  are  so  conspicuous  in  the  Japanese,  they  are 
haughty  and  imperious,  fawning  and  hypocritical,  full  of  resent 
ment  and  revenge,  malicious  to  the  last  degree,  savage  and  in 
human  toward  those  who  seem  to  troat  them  with  the  least  cold 
ness  or  disrespect. 

They  have  academies  and  universities  for  the  instruction  of  their 
youth  in  the  arts  and  sciences.  The  Lizard  is  their  Emblem  of  Wis 
dom,  under  which  venerable  form  they  adore  the  deity  who  pre 
sides  over  learning.  The  lizard,  however,  has  no  statues  or  altars 
erected  to  its  honor. 

The  Sovereign  of  Japan  is  absolute  and  independent,  and  his 
power  and  authority  unlimited,  to  which  his  subjects  show  a  pas 
sive  obedience.  He  looks  on  all  remonstrances  as  acts  of  disloyal 
ty,  and  consequently  never  hearkens  to  them  except  with  the 
greatest  reluctance.  On  the  contrary,  the  prospect  of  advance 
ment  to  the  most  important  posts  in  the  government,  renders  the 
nobility  themselves  very  tractable  and  submissive.  They  make  it 
their  principal  study  to  pry  into  the  secret  thoughts  and  inclina 
tions  of  their  sovereign,  in  order  to  ingratiate  themselves  in  his  fa 
vor,  and  answer  in  all  respects  the  will  and  pleasure  of  this  terres 
trial  deity.  The  vice-roys  and  tributary  princes,  in  imitation  of 
their  great  monarch,  make  all  their  dependents  feel  the  weight  of 
their  despotic  power,  and  resemble  those  rivulets  which,  as  they 
glide  along,  overflow  their  banks  with  the  same  rapidity  as  larger 
rivers.  The  Emperor  is  political  enough  to  engage  them  in  the 
most  difficult  and  expensive  enterprises.  They  are  far  more  un- 


26  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

happy  than  the  populace,  who  are  unknown  to  and  beneath  the 
notice  of  their  sovereign,  since  they  are  obliged  to  submit  to  such 
measures  as  are  almost  insupportable,  and  are  every  day  exposed 
to  the  wayward  and  capricious  humors  of  their  lord  and  master. 
If  the  misdemeanors  of  any  one  of  them  happen  to  be  punished 
with  death,  each  individual  of  his  family,  how  distant  soever  the  re 
lation  may  be,  falls  a  victim  at  once  with  him,  to  his  sovereign's 
resentment.  One  method  which  these  grandees  take  to  ingratiate 
themselves  with  their  Prince,  consists  in  erecting  edifices  with  all 
the  beauty  and  magnificence  imaginable.  We  are  assured  that 
their  slaves  are  contented  to  be  buried  alive  under  the  founda 
tions — the  Japanese  being  so  weak  as  to  imagine,  that  such  walls 
as  are  erected  on  human  bodies,  are  forever  secured  from  all  fatal 
disasters. 

On  Xew  Year's  Day  all  the  princes,  as  well  secular  as  ecclesias 
tic  ;  that  is  to  say,  the  superior  of  the  Bonzes,  and  in  short,  all 
the  religious  orders  in  general,  wait  on  the  Emperor  in  a  body,  to 
pay  him  fresh  instances  of  their  submission  and  obedience,  and  re 
new  their  oaths  of  allegiance. 

When  a  person  dies  at  Nangascke,  they  produce  witnesses  to 
justify  that  the  party  was  not  a  Christian  at  the  time  of  his  de 
cease,  nay,  they  examine  the  corpse  with  the  utmost  precaution,  in 
order  to  be  convinced  that  there  is  no  mark  of  Christianity  about 
it,  or  of  any  punishment  inflicted  on  that  account ;  after  which, 
they  draw  up  a  certificate  in  favor  of  the  deceased. 

Amiclas  is  the  god  of  departed  sculs.  They  hold  that  there  is  a 
Limbo  for  little  children,  and  that  a  Grod  or  Divine  Judge  presides 
over  it,  and  that  it  is  situated  on  a  lake,  which  they  call  Fekone, 
in  the  road  to  Jeddo.  All  children  who  die  before  they  attain 
the  age  of  seven  years,  enter  immediately  into  this  Limbo,  and  are 
there  tormented  till  the  liberal  contributions  of  such  as  are  chari 
tably  disposed,  obtain  of  the  mendicant  Bonzes  those  effusions  of 
the  heart,  those  effectual  fervent  prayers,  which  assuage  the  tor 
ments  of  sinners  in  the  other  world.  On  the  banks  of  this  lake 
they  erect  little  chapels,  all  composed  of  wood,  in  which  reside 
some  particular  priests,  who  chant  the  Namanda  in  a  very  disconso 
late  tone,  mutter  over  a  few  prayers,  and  receive  the  benevolence 
of  all  those  who  travel  that  way.  As  a  grateful  acknowledgment 
of  their  favors  they  give  them  several  papers,  with  the  names  of 
their  gods  written  upon  them,  as  also  some  of  their  most  heinous 
sins.  Such  travelers  as  are  a  little  scrupulous,  as  well  as  all  de 
vout  pilgrims,  receive  these  spiritual  favors  with  their  heads  un- 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  27 

covered,  carry  them  with  all  the  respect  imaginable  to  the  brink 
of  the  lake,  and  throw  them  into  it,  having  first  tied  a  stone  to 
them  that  they  may  be  the  better  assured  of  their  going  directly 
down  to  Limbo.  This  precaution  is  so  much  the  more  necessary, 
as  the  ease  and  relief  of  souls  entirely  depend  upon  it ;  for  they 
receive  comfort  and  consolation  gradually  as  the  water  obliterates 
or  wears  away  the  names  and  characters  which  are  written  on  these 
papers.  The  Bonzes  point  out  the  very  spot  on  which  these  poor 
children  suffer  ;  nay,  even  distinguish  it  by  a  heap  of  stones,  dis 
posed  in  the  form  of  a  pyramid. 

There  is  a  little  temple  called  Fakone,  adjacent  to  the  chapels 
before-mentioned,  remarkable  for  its  numerous  sacred  relics.  There 
they  produce  the  sabres  of  their  heroic  Camis,  still  dyed  with  the 
blood  of  those  whom  they  had  slain  in  battle  ;  the  vestments  which 
were  heretofore  worn  by  an  angel,  and  which  supplied  the  place 
of  wings,  and  the  comb  of  Baritomo,  who  was  their  first  secular 
Emperor.  These,  however,  are  not  the  only  relics  which  they  boast 
of  at  Japan — there  are  abundance  to  be  met  with  in  several  other 
temples,  and  all  of  them  are  generally  preserved  with  the  utmost 
strictness  and  precaution.  As  the  saints  of  this  empire  are,  for 
the  most  part,  more  illustrious  warriors  than  those  of  other  nations, 
there  are  amongst  the  relics  of  Japan  a  large  quantity  of  sabres, 
swords  and  cimeters,  which  were  made  use  of  in  their  military  ex 
peditions. 

The  Japanese  burn  their  dead.  If  the  deceased  be  a  person  of 
distinction,  his  friends  and  relations,  dressed  all  in  mourning,  re 
pair  to  the  place  appointed  for  the  burning  of  the  corpse,  about. an 
hour  before  the  funeral  procession.  The  women  are  all  veiled. 
A  superior  Bonze,  attended  by  thirty  of  his  own  order,  all  dressed 
in  their  ceremonial  habits,  march  in  the  front.  Their  dress 
consists  of  a  linen  shirt,  with  a  black  cloak  over  it,  and  a  dark- 
brown  vestment  over  that.  Each  of  them  carries  a  taper  in 
his  hand.  After  them  come  two  hundred  Bonzes  more,  who 
either  sing  or  invoke,  as  loud  as  they  are  able,  the  Deity  to  whom 
the  deceased  in  his  life-time  was  peculiarly  devoted.  Then  fol 
low  a  considerable  number  of  inferior  fellows,  who  are  hired  to 
carry  at  their  pike's  end,  several  baskets  full  of  papers,  cut  in 
various  forms  and  painted  in  divers  colors,  which  flutter  in  the  air 
more  or  less,  according  to  the  motion  of  their  pikes,  and  denote 
that  the  deceased  is  safely  arrived  at  the  mansions  of  everlasting 
bliss.  After  them  come  eight  young  Bonzes,  divided  into  two 
bands,  carrying  long  canes  in  their  hands,  with  long  streamers  at 


28  JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE. 

the  end  of  them ;  on  each  of  which  the  name  of  some  particular 
Deity  is  inscribed.  Then  other  Bonzes  follow  them,  with  lighted 
lanterns,  embellished  with  several  hieroglyphic  figures.  These 
last  are  attended  by  two  young  men,  dressed  in  brown  colored 
clothes,  who  carry  unlighted  tapers.  Several  other  persons,  like 
wise  dressed  in  brown,  with  black  leathern  caps  on  their  heads, 
neatly  varnished,  and  on  which  is  incribed  the  name  of  their  idol, 
follow  all  these  Bonzes.  After  this  first  train  comes  the  deceased 
carried  by  four  men,  seated  in  his  coffin,  with  his  head  inclining 
somewhat  forward,  and  his  hands  closed,  as  in  a  praying  posture. 
The  corpse  is  dressed  in  white,  having  a  paper  robe  over  it,  com 
posed  of  the  leaves  of  a  book,  wherein  are  described  the  actions  of 
the  god  to  whom  the  deceased  was  in  his  life-time  most  devoted. 
The  children  of  the  deceased  surround  the  corpse  ;  the  youngest 
carries  a  lighted  pine  taper  in  his  hand,  with  which  it  is  his  pecu 
liar  province  to  set  fire  to  the  funeral-pile.  The  populace,  who 
also  wear  leathern  caps,  bring  up  the  rear  of  this  solemn  proces 
sion. 

This  is  the  order  in  which  they  march  out  of  the  city  to  the 
place  where  the  funeral-pile  is  erected,  which  is  surrounded  with 
four  walls  covered  with  white  cloth,  the  four  gates  only  excepted, 
through  which  they  are  to  enter.  These  gates  front  the  four  car 
dinal  points  of  the  compass.  They  dig  a  deep  grave  in  the  middle, 
which  is  filled  with  wood  ;  and  on  each  side  place  a  table,  covered 
with  all  manner  of  provisions.  On  one  of  them  stands  a  little  cha 
fing-dish,  like  a  copper,  full  of  live  coals  and  sweet-wood.  As 
soon  as  the  corpse  is  brought  to  the  brink  of  the  grave,  they  fasten 
a  cord  to  the  coffin,  which  is  made  like  a  little  bed  for  the  deceased 
to  lie  on.  After  they  have  carried  the  little  bed  in  form  thrice 
round  the  grave,  they  lay  it  on  the  funeral-pile,  whilst  the  Bonzes 
and  relations  of  the  deceased,  call  incessantly  on  the  name  of  his 
tutelary  idol.  After  this,  the  superior  Bonze,  that  is,  he  that  led 
up  the  van  of  the  procession,  walks  three  times  round  the  corpse, 
with  his  lighted  taper,  waving  it  three  times  over  his  head,  and 
pronouncing  some  mystical  words,  the  meaning  of  which  the  assist 
ants  themselves  are  perfect  strangers  to.  This  last  action,  some 
say,  denotes  that  the  soul  exists  from  all  eternity,  and  will  never 
cease  to  be  ;  but  this  emblem  seems  forced,  and  very  obscure. 
After  this,  he  throws  away  his  taper,  and  two  of  the  nearest 
relations  to  the  deceased  taking  it  up,  wave  it  thrice  over  the 
corpse,  and  then  toss  it  into  the  grave,  into  which  has  been  poured 
a  considerable  quantity  of  oils,  perfumes,  and  aromatic  drugs. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  29 

During  the  time  that  the  body  is  consuming  in  the  flames,  the 
children  or  nearest  relations  of  the  deceased,  advance  toward  the 
censer  standing  upon  the  table,  put  perfumes  into  it,  and  then 
worship  and  adore  it.  This  ceremony  over,  the  friends  and  rela 
tions  of  the  deceased  withdraw,  leaving  none  but  the  populace  and 
the  poor  behind  them,  who  either  eat  or  carry  home  the  entertain 
ment  provided  for  the  deceased.  The  day  following  the  children, 
relations  and  friends,  repair  to  the  grave  again,  in  order  to  collect 
the  bones  and  ashes  of  the  deceased,  which  they  carefully  deposit 
in  a  vermilion  urn,  and  cover  it  with  a  rich  veil.  The  Bonzes 
also  go  thither  again,  to  renew  their  prayers  for  seven  days  to 
gether.  The  next  day  they  convey  the  urn  to  a  proper  place, 
where  they  inter  it,  fixing  a  brass  plate  or  a  stone  over  it,  whereon 
are  engraved  both  the  name  of  the  deceased  and  the  idol  he 
adored.  These  sepulchral  monuments,  as  there  are  no  stated 
rules  relating  to  them,  are  made  in  various  forms,  according  to  the 
direction  of  the  survivors,  and  embellished  either  with  some  Japan 
ese  compartments  or  other  decorations  in  lasso  relievo.  They  en 
grave  likewise,  on  marble  pillars,  the  most  heroic  achievements  of 
the  deceased,  his  public  employments,  and  the  day  of  his  nativity 
and  decease.  A  marble  statue  of  the  deceased  is  also  frequently 
erected  in  the  same  place.  The  hero  whom  they  commemorate  is 
represented  with  his  legs  across  under  his  robe,  according  to  the 
Japanese  fashion,  and  his  hands  closed  in  a  praying  posture.  If 
the  statue  represents  a  lady,  her  hands,  on  the  contrary,  are  open 
and  extended,  and  her  head  somewhat  inclined  toward  one  shoul 
der.  These  sepulchral  monuments  are  frequently  strewed  with 
flowers,  and  those  who  visit  them  bring  with  them  an  elegant  col 
lation  for  the  deceased. 

They  suppose  two  Deities  to  be  the  guardians  of  the  dead,  who 
preside  over  everything  that  relates  to  them.  One  of  these  they 
represent  with  four  faces.  In  one  of  his  hands  he  holds  a  sceptre, 
with  a  sun  upon  the  point  of  it.  This  emblem,  in  all  probability, 
denotes  the  conduct  of  Divine  Providence.  The  hand  immediately 
below  that  which  holds  the  sceptre,  (for  this  idol  has  four  hands 
as  well  as  four  faces,)  holds  a  kind  of  wand,  and  the  other  a  censer 
or  pot,  full  of  perfumes.  The  Deity  thus  represented,  is  supposed 
to  be  the  guardian  of  the  souls  of  old  people  and  such  as  have  been 
married.  They  give  him  the  name  Janus.  The  other,  whom  they 
call  Xigiiam,  they  suppose  to  be  the  guardian  of  the  souls  of  little 
children,  and  all  such  as  are  not  arrived  to  years  of  maturity. 

The  Deity  whom  the  Japanese  suppose  to  preside  over  the  souls 


30  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

of  little  children,  and  all  who  have  not  arrived  to  maturity,  they  re 
present  young  and  fair,  with  four  arms — in  one  he  holds  an  infant, 
in  another  a  serpent,  in  the  other  a  sabre,  and  in  the  other  a  ring 
full  of  knots.  His  robe  is  embellished  all  over  with  stars,  and  there 
is  a  parrot  always  placed  on  one  side  of  him. 

Once  a  year  they  celebrate  a  mortuary  festival,  which  consists  in 
visiting  the  sepulchres  of  the  dead,  and  carrying  provisions  with 
them  for  their  entertainment.  This  festival  lasts  two  days.  Every 
house  is  illuminated,  whilst  the  people  flock  out  of  the  city  for  this 
purpose  during  the  evening.  There,  if  we  may  credit  what  they 
assert,  they  have  familiar  intercourse  with  the  dead,  congratulate 
them  on  their  happy  return  to  this  world,  and  are  overjoyed  to  see 
them  again.  Their  compliments  thus  paid,  they  invite  them  to  an 
elegant  entertainment.  Soon  after  they  request  the  favor  of  them  to 
take  a  walk  into  the  city.  "  We  will  go  before  you,"  say  they  to 
their  deceased  friends,  "  to  make  all  the  preparations  that  are  re 
quisite  for  your  commodious  reception,  and  to  pay  you  those  honors 
and  testimonies  of  respect  which  are  due  to  such  worthy  guests." 
Some  short  time  after  the  dead  prepare  accordingly  for  their  march, 
and  the  living  flock  out  of  the  city  with  lighted  tapers  to  meet  them, 
and  conduct  them  into  town.  But  the  two  days  appointed  for  the 
festival  being  expired,  they  shower  down  a  deluge  of  stones  over 
the  city,  in  order  to  oblige  the  dead  to  withdraw  to  their  re 
spective  tombs ;  for  should  but  one  of  them  by  any  accident  stay 
behind,  it  would  be  looked  upon  as  a  public  misfortune. 

The  Japanese  have  not  the  way  of  keeping  accounts  as  the  mer 
chants  in  other  countries  have  ;  but  they  can  count  with  certain  little 
bowls,  which  they  thread  upon  little  sticks  on  a  square  board,  as 
fast  as  our  ablest  accountants  by  all  the  rules  of  arithmetic.  They 
have  many  books,  and  several  large  libraries. 

The  Dayro,  who  is  the  Pope  of  Japan,  is  the  person  who  keeps 
a  memorial  of  whatever  passes,  and  writes  the  chronicle  of  the 
country.  Only  himself,  the  lords  and  ladies  descended  from  him, 
and  the  lords  and  gentlemen  of  his  house,  numbering  about  eight 
hundred,  have  the  privilege  of  writing  books.  These  only  have  all 
the  learning  among  themselves,  and  are  so  proud  of  it,  that  the 
advantages  derived  from  it,  are  equal  to  those  of  their  birth,  which 
is  thought  more  noble  than  that  of  the  Emperor.  Thence  it 
comes,  that  they  slight  all  others  so  far  that  they  shun  their 
conversation,  live  in  a  quarter  of  the  city  distinct  from  the  rest, 
and  will  have  no  communication  with  the  ignorant. 

The  Dayro  has  the  title  of  Tin-sin,  the  signification  of  which 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  31 

is  no  less  than  the  Son  of  Heaven.  His  person  is  looked  upon  as 
sacred.  He  is  never  permitted  to  touch  the  ground  with  his  feet, 
as  being  a  derogation  from  his  dignity  to  walk ;  and  for  that  rea 
son,  whenever  he  appears  in  public,  his  guards  carry  him  upon 
their  shoulders.  Once  every  five  years  the  Emperor  goes  to  Meaco, 
where  the  Dayro  resides,  to  do  him  reverence.  The  ceremonies 
of  the  interview  between  him  and  the  Dayro  are  exceedingly 
magnificent.  One  of  the  Directors  of  the  Dutch  commerce  in  Ja 
pan  gives  the  following  account  of  the  procession  of  one  of  these 
interviews,  of  which  he  was  an  eye-witness  : — 

"  The  streets  were  railed  in  on  both  sides,  from  the  Dayro's 
palace  to  the  Emperor's,  having  files  of  soldiers  all  along,  and  the 
middle  of  the  street  strewed  with  white  sand,  all  laid  so  even  that 
nothing  should  retard  the  procession  or  disturb  its  order.  These 
soldiers,  who  were  part  of  the  Dayro's  guards  and  part  of  the 
Emperor's,  were  all  clad  in  white,  having  on  their  heads  helmets 
of  black  lacque,  by  their  sides  two  cimeters,  and  in  their  hands  a 
nanganet,  or  Japanese  pike. 

"  The  first  appearance  was  that  of  a  great  number  of  the  do 
mestics  of  these  two  Princes,  going  to  and  fro,  as  also  that  of  se 
veral  porters  or  sedan-men,  who  carried,  in  great  square  chests, 
which  were  of  black  lacque  and  gilded,  the  baggage  of  the  Dayro 
to  the  Emperor's  palace. 

"  Then  followed,  in  forty-six  palanquins,  (each  of  them  carried 
by  four  men,)  four  maids  of  honor  belonging  to  the  Dayro's  wives, 
who  went  in  that  equipage  to  the  Emperor's  palace.  The  palan 
quins  were  of  a  fine  white  wood,  painted  with  green,  garnished 
with  brass  plates,  very  neatly  made,  and  five  or  six  feet  high. 

"  After  them  there  came  twenty-one  other  palanquins  of  one 
kind,  which  they  call  Norrimones^  varnished  with  black  and 
gilded. 

'  Next  them  there  came  twenty-seven  other  Norrimones,  of  the 
same  size  with  the  preceding,  but  made  with  wickets  and  win 
dows,  for  as  many  lords  of  the  Dayro's  retinue,  who  were  carried 
in  them  to  the  Emperor's  palace,  having  every  one  before  him  a 
gilt  umbrello,  covered  with  very  fine  cloth.  They  had  about  them 
an  hundred  and  eight  pages,  clad  in  white,  and  behind  them  twenty- 
four  gentlemen,  armed  as  if  they  were  ready  to  engage  in  a  battle. 
These  had  on  their  heads  a  kind  of  bonnet  made  of  black  lacque, 
with  a  little  plume  of  feathers  of  the  same  color,  and  under  their 
Japancsscs  they  had  long  and  narrow  breeches  of  satin,  of  several 
colors,  embroidered  with  gold  and  silver,  with  buskins  varnished 


32  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

with  black,  and  gilded  at  the  extremities.  By  their  sides  they  had 
cimeters,  the  hilts  of  which  were  gilded,  and  bows  and  arrows  at 
their  waist,  and  over  their  shoulders  scarfs  richly  embroidered,  the 
ends  of  which  hung  down  on  the  cruppers  of  their  horses.  They 
were  all  the  handsomest  persons  that  could  be  seen.  Their  saddles 
were  varnished  over  and  gilded,  the  seats  embroidered  and  covered 
with  tiger's  and  lynx's  skins  ;  their  trappings  were  of  crimson 
silk,  twisted,  and  the  horses  had  their  manes  tied  up  with  gold  and 
silver  thread  ;  and  they  had  on  the  breast  and  crupper  a  kind  of 
net-work  of  twisted  crimson  silk,  and  instead  of  shoes  their  hoofs 
were  surrounded  with  plain  crimson  silk.  Every  horse  was  led  by 
two  lackies,  and  two  other  lackies  carried  two  great  umbrelloes, 
covered  with  a  very  fine  and  transparent  cloth,  and  upon  that  a 
covering  of  scarlet  fringed  with  gold.  Another  lackey  carried  a 
nanganet,  or  pike,  the  top  of  which  was  also  covered  with  a  piece 
of  red  and  black  cloth.  Every  horseman  had  eight  pages  clad  in 
white,  and  armed  with  two  cimeters,  according  to  the  mode  of  the 
country. 

"  This  body  of  horse  served  for  a  guard  for  the  three  chiefest  of 
the  Dayro's  wives,  who  followed  it  in  three  coaches,  which  were 
at  least  twenty  or  twenty-five  feet  in  height,  ten  or  twelve  in 
length,  and  five  or  six  in  breadth,  having  on  each  side  three,  and 
in  front  two  windows,  with  embroidered  curtains.  Before  and  be 
hind  they  were  made  like  the  front  of  a  house,  as  was  also  the 
door  at  which  they  went  in,  which  was  made  behind  at  the  back. 
The  wheels  were  of  iron,  and  the  coach  was  varnished  all  over 
with  black,  so  that  the  wheels  might  be  seen  turning  as  it  were  in 
a  looking-glass.  The  roofs  of  them,  which  were  built  archwise, 
had  drawn  thereon  the  Dayro's  arms,  within  a  great  circle  of  gold. 
The  pillars,  as  also  the  inside  of  the  coach,  was  enriched  with 
figures  of  beaten  gold  and  mother-of-pearl,  and  all  the  extremities 
were  garnished  with  gold.  Two  great  black  bufflers,  covered 
with  a  net- work  of  crimson  silk,  drew  each  of  them,  and  they  were 
guided  by  four  halberdeers  clad  in  white.  Every  coach  was  valued 
at  seventy  thousand  tads,  which  amount  to  twenty  thousand  pounds 
sterling.  These  coaches  had  also  their  foot-guard,  and  many 
pages  marching  on  both  sides  of  them. 

"  Twenty-three  of  the  chiefest  servants  belonging  to  these  ladies 
were  carried  next  to  them,  in  as  many  black  Norrimones  adorned 
with  brass  plates,  having  a  halberdeer  marching  before  each  of  them, 
carrying  an  umbrello,  on  each  side  two  pages,  and  behind  them 
sixty-eight  gentlemen  of  the  Dayro's,  clad  and  armed  like  those 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  33 

mentioned  before.  These  marched  abreast,  and  were  followed  by 
a  great  number  of  pages,  halberdeers,  and  slaves. 

"  After  them  there  were  carried  two  gilt  stools,  with  plates  of 
gold  at  the  extremities  ;  a  great  firework  ;  a  great  and  very  rich 
sea-compass  ;  two  great  golden  candlesticks  ,  two  pillars  of  ebony  ; 
three  cabinets  of  ebony,  garnished  with  gold  plates  ;  four  other 
cabinets,  larger  and  richer  than  the  three  preceding  ones  ;  two 
great  gold  basins,  carved  ;  a  pair  of  slippers,  varnished. 

"  After  these,  there  followed  in  two  coaches  of  the  same  kind 
as  the  three  first,  the  Emperor  and  his  Empress,  having  before 
them  an  hundred  and  sixty  gentlemen,  armed  with  two  cimeters 
and  a  nanganet,  serving  for  a  particular  guard  about  their  Majes 
ties'  persons.  These  guards  are  called  Sambreys,  and  are  chosen 
out  of  the  most  valiant  and  most  active  persons  in  the  kingdom. 
Immediately  before  the  coaches  there  inarched  four  men  with  um- 
brelloes,  four  others  with  great  iron  rods  to  make  way,  two  light 
horses  magnificently  covered,  and  with  very  rich  trappings,  ac 
companied  each  of  them  by  eight  men,  armed  with  bows  and 
arrows,  and  two  great  pikes. 

"  The  Emperor's  brethren  followed  next  on  horseback,  accom 
panied  by  all  the  lords  of  Japan,  who  were  also  on  horseback,  all 
armed,  and  sumptuously  clad,  an  hundred  and  sixty-four  in  num 
ber.  These  marched  all  in  a  file,  each  of  them  having  a  long 
train  of  pages,  lackies,  halberdeers,  guards,  and  slaves.  The  other 
lords,  among  whom  were  Ouwaydonne  and  Woutadonne,  the 
chiefest  of  the  Emperor's  council,  marched  two  abreast,  he  of  the 
greater  quality  taking  the  left  hand,  which  among  them  is  accounted 
the  most  honorable. 

"  After  them  marched  four  hundred  of  the  guards  of  the  body, 
in  the  same  order,  in  white  liveries. 

"  Next  them,  in  six  fair  coaches,  came  the  Dayro's  concubines  ; 
but  these  coaches  were  not  as  large  as  the  former,  and  each  of  them 
were  drawn  by  a  single  buffler. 

"  Then  followed  sixty-eight  gentlemen  on  horseback,  attended 
by  a  great  number  of  lackies  and  slaves. 

"  The  Dayro's  secretary,  accompanied  by  thirty-seven  gentlemen 
on  horseback,  followed  next  in  a  coach,  and  immediately  preceded 
forty-six  lords  of  the  Dayro's  house,  who  were  carried  in  norrimo- 
nes,  fifteen  of  which  were  of  ebony,  beautified  with  ivory ;  thirteen 
varnished  with  black  and  gilded,  and  the  other  eighteen  were  only 
varnished  with  black.  There  were  carried  after  them  forty-six 
umbrelloes  suitable  to  their  norrimones. 


34  JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE. 

"  Then  followed  the  Dayro's  music,  which  consisted  of  fifty-four 
gentlemen,  very  oddly  but  very  richly  clad,  who  played  on  their  in 
struments,  which  were  only  tabors,  trimbrels,  copper  basins,  bells, 
and  the  kind  of  lute  spoken  of  before,  which  was  not  heard  by 
reason  of  the  confused  noise  of  the  rest. 

"  Yet  this  was  a  kind  of  music  delightful  to  the  Dayro,  who  im 
mediately  followed  it.  He  sat  in  a  little  wooden  structure,  made 
like  a  sedan-chair,  but  much  larger  ;  it  being  about  seven  or  eight 
feet  high,  and  as  many  in  diameter,  having  windows  on  all  sides, 
with  embroidered  curtains.  The  roof  of  that  little  structure  was 
arched,  and  had  in  the  midst,  upon  a  great  button,  a  cock  of  massy 
gold,  with  his  wings  spread,  in  a  field  of  azure,  with  several  stars 
of  beaten  gold  about  the  sun  and  moon,  which  appeared  there  with 
a  lustre  resembling  nearly  the  natural.  This  machine  was  carried 
by  fifty  gentlemen  of  the  Dayro 's  retinue,  all  clad  in  white,  with 
bonnets  on  their  heads.  Forty  other  gentlemen  went  before  it,  and 
represented  the  guard  for  the  Dayro's  person.  These  were  clad 
after  a  particular  fashion,  much  like  that  of  the  ancient  Romans, 
each  of  them  carrying  a  gilt  nanganet.  The  captain  of  the  guard 
marched  alone  on  horseback,  behind  the  Dayro's  chair,  armed  with 
a  target  stuck  through  with  several  arrows,  and  had  carried  after 
him  forty  umbrelloes  for  the  guards. 

"  Next  were  carried  thirteen  varnished  chests,  and  at  the  close 
of  the  procession  came  four  hundred  soldiers,  clad  in  white,  who 
marched  six  abreast." 

This  ceremony  took  up  the  whole  day.  The  Dayro  staid 
three  days  at  the  Emperor's  palace,  who,  with  his  brethren,  waited 
on  him  in  person,  during  that  time.  There  were  brought  to  his 
table,  at  every  meal,  an  hundred  and  fourteen  dishes  of  meat. 

The  Emperor's  presents  to  him  were  : — Two  hundred  marks  of 
gold  ;  an  hundred  garments  ;  two  great  silver  pots  full  of  honey  ; 
five  catties  of  the  wood  of  calambac  ;  two  hundred  red  pieces  of 
crimson  serge  ;  five  pots  of  silver,  full  of  musk,  and  five  excellent 
horses,  with  very  rich  trappings. 

The  young  Emperor  gave  him  three  thousand  pieces  of  silver, 
amounting  each  to  two  hundred  and  ninety  pounds ;  two  fair 
cimeters,  set  with  gold  j  two  hundred  rich  garments,  after  the 
Japanese  fashion  ;  three  hundred  pieces  of  satin ;  a  piece  of  ca 
lambac  wood,  three  ells  and  a  half  in  length,  and  above  two  feet 
thick ;  five  great  vessels  of  silver  full  of  musk,  and  ten  excellent 
horses,  with  rich  trappings. 

Every  dish  served  up  at  the  Dayro's  table,  and  every  plate  laid 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  35 

upon  it,  must  be  perfectly  new.  By  the  established  rules  of  their 
ceremonial,  every  implement,  of  whatever  kind  or  nature  once  used 
at  his  table,  must  never  be  brought  before  him  again,  nay,  must  be 
perfectly  destroyed  and  broke  to  pieces  ;  for  the  superstitious 
Japanese  are  of  opinion  that  if  a  layman  should,  through  inadver 
tency,  eat  off  a  plate  that  had  served  at  his  highness's  table,  he 
would  be  immediately  tormented  with  a  sore  mouth  and  an  inflam 
mation  in  his  throat.  So  likewise  should  a  layman  presume  to  put 
on  any  vestment  whatever  belonging  to  the  Dayro,  without  express 
orders  from  the  Emperor,  his  body  (say  they)  would  be  infallibly 
bloated,  like  one  that  had  been  poisoned. 

As  soon  as  the  throne  of  the  Dayro  happens  to  be  vacant,  they 
elect  a  successor,  without  the  least  regard  either  to  age  or  sex  ;  but 
they  observe,  with  the  utmost  exactness,  proximity  of  blood,  inso 
much  that  sometimes  an  infant  is  established  on  the  throne,  and 
sometimes  the  widow  and  relict  of  the  deceased  Monarch.  In 
case  there  are  several  candidates  for  the  throne,  and  the  right  of 
primogeniture  appears  dubious  and  difficult  to  be  decided,  then 
each  reigns  alternately  so  many  years,  in  proportion  to  their  re 
spective  titles  to  this  impotent  royalty  ;  for  it  may  properly  be 
called  so,  since,  (notwithstanding  the  religious  adoration,  or  some 
thing  nearly  allied  to  it,  which  is  paid  to  the  Dayro,)  his  dignity 
is  without  authority,  and  must  never  presume  to  exert  itself  with 
out  the  Emperor's  approbation.  He  is  a  Pope,  and  is  infallible 
with  respect  to  the  people  ;  but  his  infallibility  ceases  whenever  it 
is  repugnant  to  the  interest  of  the  secular  Monarch.  And  ought 
we  to  imagine  that  there  is  anything  fantastical  or  extravagant  in 
all  this  ?  No,  doubtless  ;  for  if  we  will  but  observe  the  transac 
tions  of  other  courts,  we  shall  find  that  infallibility  depends  there 
also  on  some  sacred  college  or  some  particular  political  views,  &c. 

Sometimes  the  Dayro  abdicates  his  crown  to  promote  his  chil 
dren  ;  and  in  that  case,  if  he  has  a  numerous  issue,  he  has  the 
pleasure  to  witness  some  part  of  their  reigns  before  he  dies. 
Whatever  revolutions  happen  in  the  Dayro's  court,  they  are 
attended  with  no  manner  of  bustle  or  confusion,  to  prevent,  in  all 
probability,  the  populace  from  being  concerned  in  them  ;  for  let 
his  dignity  be  what  it  may,  this  much  is  certain,  that  all  the 
application  and  interest  imaginable  are  made  to  procure  it ;  and 
the  candidates  have  often  been  so  sanguine  as  to  create  civil 
wars  thereupon,  and  maintain  their  several  pretensions  by  force  of 
arms. 

The  city  of  Meaco,  and  the  places  within  its  jurisdiction,  are  all 


36  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

the  dominions  that  belong  to  the  Dayro.  It  is  true,  he  has  the 
disposal,  by  the  Emperor's  permission,  of  all  the  titles  of  honor  a"nd 
dignity  which  are  conferred  on  persons  who  are  advanced  to  the 
highest  and  most  important  posts,  by  virtue  of  their  merits, 
interests,  or  extraction.  He  also  receives  several  valuable  presents 
from  the  tributary  Princes  and  Viceroys  of  the  Provinces,  either 
out  of  a  religious  regard,  or  to  secure  his  favor  ;  nay,  it  is  further 
asserted,  that  he  annually  receives  from  these  princes  a  kind  of 
embassy  of  submission,  and  that  they  frequently  appear  in  person 
to  do  him  homage.  The  superstitious  idea  which  the  populace  en 
tertain  of  him,  obliges  the  Dayro  to  expend  the  best  part  of  his 
revenues  in  the  support  and  maintenance  of  his  grandeur  and 
sacred  character.  Everything  that  relates  to  him  is  very  pompous 
and  magnificent.  His  nuptials,  the  laying-in  of  his  empress,  the 
birth  and  education  of  his  heir-apparent,  and  the  choice  of  a  pro 
per  nurse  for  him,  require  a  number  of  ceremonies,  and  are  more 
pompous  and  magnificent  than  the  most  lively  imagination  can  con 
ceive.  He  has  twelve  wives.  She  who  bears  him  the  first  son  or 
daughter  is  styled  the  Empress.  The  Dayro  generally  ^wears  a 
black  tunic,  under  a  scarlet  robe,  with  a  large  veil  over  it,  made 
something  like  our  crape,  the  fringes  whereof  fall  over  his  hands ; 
and  upon  his  head  he  has  a  cap  embellished  with  divers  tufts  or 
tassels.  All  his  court  distinguish  themselves  by  their  dress  from 
the  laity. 

The  number  of  ecclesiastics  belonging  to  Meaco  amounts  to 
fifty-two  thousand,  and  the  number  of  temples  to  nearly  six  thou 
sand.  These  temples  are  generally  built  on  high  places  ;  and  par 
ticular  care  is  taken  to  erect  them  as  distant  as  possible  from  such 
places  as  are  exposed  to  any  manner  of  filth  whatever  ;  in  this 
particular  they  are  much  more  careful  than  Christians.  Besides 
the  agreeable  prospect  which  naturally  attends  a  high  situation, 
their  temples  are  always  built  near  some  purling  stream  and  shady 
grotto.  The  priests  assert  that  the  gods  take  delight  in  a  gay  situ 
ation.  They  have  not  always  idols  in  their  temples ;  when  they 
have,  they  are  placed  on  an  altar  in  the  centre  of  the  temple. 
The  idol  has  a  large  sconce  full  of  perfumed  candles,  always  stand 
ing  before  it.  They  build  their  temples,  or,  as  they  call  them, 
Mas,  which  signify  the  habitations  of  their  Cami,  or  immortal 
soul,  of  the  choicest  fir-trees.  A  pleasant  spacious  walk  leads  up 
to  them,  and  at  the  entrance  of  them  there  is  a  handsome  gate,  on 
which  the  name  of  the  god  to  whom  the  temple  of  Mia  is  consecrated, 
is  written  in  large  characters  of  gold.  This  walk  leads  up  to  the 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  37 

templo,  which  is  nearly  no  more  than  a  mean  wooden  edifice, 
built  very  low,  and  choked  up,  as  it  were,  with  the  numerous 
trees  and  bushes  surrounding  it.  There  is  nothing  to  be  seen  in 
these  Mias  but  a  looking-glass,  which,  according  to  their  notion, 
is  an  hieroglyphic  of  the  Deity,  and  some  white  paper  cut  in  seve 
ral  forms,  intended  as  an  emblem  of  purity  of  heart.  The  doors 
are  likewise  embellished  with  white  paper.  When  any  one  comes 
to  pay  his  devotions  to  the  idol,  he  never  presumes  to  enter  into  the 
temple,  but  stands  without ;  and  whilst  saying  his  prayers,  looks 
only  into  it  through  a  lattice-window. 

The  Souls  or  Genii,  which  are  adored  in  these  Mias,  and  which 
are  generally  called  Cami,  are  likewise  called  Sin  and  Fotogi. 

The  highways  and  squares  in  Japan  are  always  honored  with  the 
presence  of  some  idol,  which  is  erected  either  with  a  view  to  kindle 
devotion  in  the  souls  of  travelers,  or  with  an  intent  only  to  pro 
tect  and  support  the  place.  There  are  idols  also  erected  near  the 
bridges  and  around  the  temples,  chapels  and  convents.  The  peo 
ple  purchase  either  the  pictures  or  images  of  these  idols.  The 
former  are  generally  drawn  on  a  sheet  or  half  a  sheet  of  paper, 
which  are  pasted  like  bills  or  advertisements  upon  the  gates  of  their 
cities,  and  other  public  buildings,  or  on  posts  at  the  corner  of  their 
bridges  or  streets.  The  people,  however,  are  not  obliged,  as  they 
pass  them,  to  prostrate  themselves,  or  bow  the  knee  before  them. 
They  have  generally  likewise  an  image  of  their  domestic  and  tute 
lar  gods  before  the  doors  of  their  houses.  Giwon  is  the  particu 
lar  idol  which  is  most  commonly  represented  by  these  images.  They 
call  him  also  God  fu-ten  oo — the  literal  signification  of  which 
is,  "  The  Prince  of  the  Heavens,  with  the  Head  of  an  Ox."  The 
Japanese  ascribe  to  him  the  power  of  protecting  them  from  all 
distempers,  particularly  the  small-pox,  and  other  casualties  inci 
dent  to  mankind.  Others,  still  more  superstitious,  or,  rather  more, 
whimsical  and  extravagant,  imagine  that  they  shall  be  always 
healthy  and  happy,  provided  the  doors  of  their  apartments  are  but 
decorated  with  the  horrid  figure  of  a  savage  of  Jesso,  who  is  hairy 
all  over,  and  armed  with  a  cutlass,  which  he  holds  in  both  his 
hands,  and  with  which,  according  to  their  notion,  this  savage  de 
nies  admittance  to  all  casualties  and  distempers  whatsoever.  Some 
times  the  door  is  secured  by  a  monstrous  head  of  some  devil,  or  the 
tremendous  head  of  a  dragon.  The  last  custom  is  likewise  ob 
served  amongst  the  Chinese.  Sometimes  they  content  themselves 
with  adorning  the  door  with  a  festoon,  composed  of  boughs  of 
some  particular  trees,  or  with  a  plant  called  liverwort.  In  short, 


38  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

they  frequently  place  their  protectors  over  the  doors  of  their 
apartments  ;  and  it  is  highly  probable,  that  throughout  the  whole, 
there  is  a  great  conformity  to  the  amulets  of  the  ancients,  and  the 
talismans  of  the  Arabians. 

All  the  gods  of  Japan  are  represented  in  gigantic  monstrous 
forms,  sitting  on  the  flower  of  a  plant,  which  the  botanists  call 
nympha,  and  the  Japanese,  tar  ate.  The  form  and  attitude  of  their 
gods,  and  their  Seat,  if  the  flower  may  be  properly  called  so,  in 
which  they  are  represented,  are,  for  the  most  part,  the  very  same 
amongst  all  the  idolatrous  Indians,  and  their  neighbors.  These 
idols  are  all  gilded,  and  their  heads  encircled  with  rays,  like  other 
saints,  or  with  a  crown,  a  garland,  or  a  kind  of  mitre,  or  else  with 
a  cap  or  hat,  made  in  the  Chinese  fashion. 

Amidas,  who  is  sometimes  called  Omyto,  is  the  god  and  guardian 
of  the  souls  of  the  Japanese,  who  preserves  them  and  saves  them 
from  those  punishments  which  by  their  sins  and  iniquities  they 
have  deserved.  It  is  to  this  god  the  devotees  say  their  Namanda^ 
— a  short  ejaculatory  prayer,  consisting  of  three  words  only, 
signifying — "  Ever  blessed  Amidas,  have  mercy  on  us."  He  is 
represented  upon  an  altar,  and  mounted  on  a  horse  with  seven 
heads,  which  are  hieroglyphics  of  seven  thousand  ages,  each  head 
representing  one  thousand.  Amidas  is  represented  with  a  dog's 
head  instead  of  a  human  face.  He  holds  in  his  hand  a  gold  ring 
or  circle,  which  he  bites.  This  may  be  said  to  bear  a  very  near 
affinity  to  the  Egyptian  circle,  which  was  looked  upon  as  the  Em 
blem  of  Time.  Amidas  is  dressed  in  a  very  rich  robe,  adorned 
with  pearls  and  precious  stones.  He  is  intended  more  immediately 
than  any  other  to  represent  the  Supreme  Being.  Amidas,  who  is 
the  supposed  protector  of  their  souls,  and  their  saviour,  is  revered 
after  a  very  singular  and,  as  they  think,  meritorious  manner,  by 
some  particular  devotees,  who  voluntarily  sacrifice  their  lives  in 
honor  to  this  idol,  and  drown  themselves  in  his  presence.  This 
act  of  devotion  is  performed  in  divers  ways.  Frequently  despair, 
incurable  distempers,  and  the  torments  of  poverty,  prevail  on  the 
Japanese  to  throw  themselves  headlong  into  the  water,  in  honor 
of  Amidas,  under  the  color  and  disguise  of  devotion  ;  but,  however 
that  be,  the  ceremony  consists  principally  in  entering  a  little  boat, 
generally  gilded,  and  adorned  with  several  silken  streamers,  and  in 
tying  a  considerable  quantity  of  stones  to  the  neck,  waist  and  legs. 
But  the  destined  victim  first  takes  a  dance,  and  frisks  about  to  the 
sound  of  gongum?,  and  other  intrumental  music.  After  that,  he 
throws  himself  headlong  into  the  river.  On  this  solemn  occasion 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  39 

he  is  attended  by  a  numerous  train  of  his  friends  and  relations,  and 
several  Bonzes.  This  voluntary  catastrophe  is  said  to  be  preceded 
by  an  intimate  converse  for  two  days  between  him  and  his  god. 
Some  of  these  enthusiastic  Japanese  prepare  themselves  a  consid 
erable  time  beforehand  for  this  self-offering,  which  is  to  introduce 
them  into  the  paradise  of  Amidas.  One  of  them  preaches  for 
several  days  together  on  the  contempt  of  life  and  the  vanity  of  all 
sublunary  enjoyments,  in  order  to  persuade  and  prevail  on  the 
rest,  by  the  energy  and  power  of  his  exhortations,  to  devote  fhem- 
selves  to  death  after  his  pious  example.  On  the  last  day  of  this 
preparation,  he  who  performs  the  function  of  preacher,  once  more 
preaches  and  enforces  his  earnest  admonitions  to  his  companions. 
After  this,  they  enter  into  the  boat,  and  sink  her  to  the  bottom. 
Others  undergo  another  sort  of  martyrdom,  in  order  to  be  made 
worthy  of  the  paradise  of  Amidas.  They  confine  themselves  with 
in  a  narrow  cavern,  built  in  the  form  of  a  sepulchre,  in  which 
there  is  scarce  room  to  sit  down.  This  they  cause  to  be  walled 
all  round  about,  reserving  only  a  little  air-hole.  In  this  grot  the 
enthusiastic  martyr  calls  upon  his  god  Amidas  without  intermission, 
till  the  moment  he  expires.  The  superstitious  consecrate  chapels 
to  his  honor,  and  the  wits,  to  immortalize  his  memory,  write  his 
elegy  and  epitaph.  This  excess  of  devotion  is  owing  to  the  doc 
trine  of  the  Immortality  of  the  Soul,  maintained  by  the  Budsdoists, 
and  to  the  joys  of  that  paradise,  which  they  expect  from  Amidas, 
as  the  promised  rewards  of  their  virtuous  and  holy  lives.  That 
Amidas  is,  in  their  opinion,  the  Supreme  Being,  is  undeniably  evi 
dent  from  the  description  which  his  disciples  gave  of  him  ;  for,  say 
they,  he  is  an  invisible,  incorporeal  and  immutable  substance,  dis 
tinct  from  all  the  elements,  existed  before  Nature,  is  the  fountain 
and  foundation  of  all  good,  without  beginning  or  ending.  He  cre 
ated,  in  short,  all  the  Universe,  and  is  infinite  and  immense.  They 
likewise  add,  that  he  governs  the  Universe  without  the  least 
trouble  or  care  imaginable.  In  some  places  he  is  represented 
under  the  figure  of  a  naked  youth,  or  else  resembling  a  young 
woman  in  the  face,  with  holes  in  his  ears ;  in  others,  he  appears 
with  three  heads,  each  covered  with  a  bonnet,  like  a  collegian's 
cap,  and  with  three  beards,  which  meet  together  upon  his  shoul 
ders.  Besides  the  temples  and  altars  which  are  erected  to  his 
honor  throughout  the  whole  empire  of  Japan,  a  great  number  of 
convents  are  consecrated  to  him,  in  which  several  monks  and  nuns 
reside,  who  are  forever  destined  to  a  single  life,  on  pain  of  death. 
Canon,  called  the  son  of  Amidas,  they  suppose  to  preside  over 


40  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

the  waters  and  the  fish.  He  is  the  creator  of  the  sun  and  the 
moon.  This  idol,  according  to  the  representation  of  him,  has  four 
arms  like  his  father  ;  is  swallowed  up  by  a  fish  as  far  as  the  mid 
dle,  and  is  crowned  with  flowers.  lie  has  a  sceptre  in  one  hand, 
a  flower  in  another,  and  a  ring  in  the  third ;  the  fourth  is  closed, 
and  the  arm  extended.  Over  against  him  there  is  a  figure  of  a 
humble  devotee,  one  half  of  whose  body  lies  concealed  within  a 
shell.  There  are  four  other  figures  at  a  little  distance  on  an  altar, 
each  of  them  with  their  hands  closed  like  humble  suppliants,  from 
whence  as  from  so  many  fountains  flow  streams  of  water.  This 
god  Canon,  and  the  five  idols  here  mentioned,  are  all  to  be  seen 
in  the  temple  of  Osacca.  There  is  no  difference,  with  respect  to 
the  structure,  between  this  fabric  and  the  Mias.  It  has  three 
stories,  and  the  stairs  thereof  are  pretty  high.  The  windows  are 
all  latticed  for  the  service  of  the  devotees,  who  have  the  privilege 
only  of  looking  into  them,  as  they  pay  their  solemn  vows,  and 
make  their  supplications  to  the  idol.  The  walls  are  adorned  with 
idols ;  and  there  is  a  very  agreeable  grotto  adjoining  the  temple, 
which  stands  in  the  midst  of  a  large  inclosure.  Canon  is  some 
times  represented  with  seven  heads  upon  his  breast,  and  thirty 
hands,  all  armed  with  arrows. 

Xantai  is  a  deity  of  the  most  modern  date,  and  no  other  than 
the  Emperor  Nobumanga,  who  in  his  life-time  constituted  himself 
a  god.  There  are  so  many  instances  of  the  like  extravagance 
among  the  ancients,  that  we  need  not  dispute  the  veracity  of  this 
account.  He  began  with  treating  the  deities  of  his  own  empire 
with  the  utmost  contempt,  and  then  erected  a  magnificent  temple 
for  himself  upon  a  hill.  In  order  to  attract  the  peoples'  devotion 
to  himself,  he  caused  the  most  celebrated  idols  of  his  empire  to  be 
taken  down,  and  advanced  his  own  image  upon  a  lofty  pedestal 
above  them  all,  and  published  an  edict  in  which  he  prohibited  the 
adoration  of  any  other  deity.  In  this  edict  he  styled  himself  the 
Lord  of  the  Universe,  the  Creator  of  Nature,  and  the  only  true 
God.  After  this  he  published  a  second  edict,  which  commanded 
his  subjects  to  commemorate  his  birth-day,  by  the  religious  wor 
ship  of  his  idol,  solemnly  declaring  that  all  such  as  were  poor  should 
become  rich  and  great,  the  sick  should  be  healed,  and  those  who 
were  at  the  point  of  death,  should  be  restored  to  life,  &c.,  in  case 
they  obeyed  his  injunctions.  These  promises  were  attended  with 
awful  menaces,  and  severe  penalties,  to  be  inflicted  on  all  such  as 
should  presume  to  neglect  the  adoration  of  him.  The  religious 
dread  which  was  inspired  by  these  menaces,  soon  procured  him  an 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  41 

infinite  number  of  devotees ;  insomuch,  that  in  a  very  short  time, 
this  modern  god  had  the  secret  satisfaction  to  see  himself  revered 
without  control,  and  his  subjects  all  trembling  at  his  altars.  His 
son  was  the  first  that  paid  him  divine  honors.  The  court  and  all 
the  nobility  followed  his  royal  example.  The  ceremony  was  per 
formed  before  his  image  in  the  manner  he  prescribed.  Some  time 
after  he  was  opposed  by  his  subjects,  who  formed  a  conspiracy  to 
tike  away  his  life,  and  burnt  him  accordingly  in  his  own  palace. 

They  have  likewise  the  idol  Toranga,  and  his  pagode.  This 
hero  of  Japan  was  formerly  a  huntsman.  He  took  possession  of 
the  empire  soon  after  its  first  establishment ;  and  by  his  extraor 
dinary  merit,  in  process  of  time,  was  revered  as  one  of  their  Camus , 
or  demi-gods,  and  in  consequence  was  ranged  among  the  gods. 
He  delivered  Japan  from  a  tyrant,  who,  with  eight  kings  of  the 
country,  his  confederates  and  allies,  laid  the  empire  waste  ;  upon 
which  account  it  was  thought  proper  to  represent  him  with  eight 
arms,  and  in  each  hand  some  weapon  of  defence.  Toranga  de 
feated  them  with  a  hatchet  only,  and  during  the  combat  trod  under 
foot  a  monstrous  and  formidable  serpent,  which  is  looked  upon  as 
an  hieroglyphic  at  Japan.  His  Mia,  situated  in  the  province  or 
kingdom  of  Vacata,  is  remarkable  for  the  four  oxen  which  are 
gilded  all  over,  and  fixed,  by  way  of  decoration,  on  the  four  corners 
of  the  roof  that  projects  on  all  sides,  according  to  the  custom  ob 
served  in  the  erection  of  all  their  Mias.  The  walls  of  this  Mia  is 
also  embellished  with  the  figures  of  several  ancient  Camus,  or  demi 
gods  of  Japan,  and  the  whole  structure  is  raised  after  the  same 
model  with  the  rest.  Several  vagrants  and  beggars  constantly  as 
semble  before  the  door  of  this  temple,  and,  as  they  sing  the  praises 
of  the  hero,  beg  the  charity  and  benevolence  of  the  public. 

There  is  a  pagode  at  Miaco  consecrated  to  a  hieroglyphic  bull, 
which  is  placed  on  a  large  square  altar,  and  composed  of  solid 
gold  ;  his  neck  is  adorned  with  a  very  costly  collar  ;  but  that  is 
not  the  principal  object  that  commands  our  attention.  The  egg, 
which  he  pushes  with  his  horns  as  he  gripes  it  between  his  fore 
feet,  is  a  most  remarkable  thing.  This  bull  is  placed  on  the 
summit  of  a  rock,  and  the  egg  floats  in  some  water,  which  is  in 
closed  within  the  hollow  space  of  it.  The  egg  represents  the 
chaos,  and  what  follows  is  the  illustration  which  the  doctors  of 
Japan  have  given  of  this  hieroglyphic.  The  whole  world,  at 
the  time  of  the  chaos,  was  inclosed  within  this  egg,  which  swam 
upon  the  surface  of  the  waters.  The  moon,  by  virtue  of  her 
light  and  her  other  influences,  attracted  from  the  bottom  of  the 


42  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

waters  a  terrestrial  substance,  which  was  insensibly  converted  to  a 
rock,  and  by  that  means  the  egg  rested  upon  it.  The  bull  ob 
serving  this  egg,  broke  the  shell  of  it  by  goring  it  with  his  horns, 
and  so  created  the  world  ;  and  by  his  breath  formed  the  human 
species.  This  fable  may  in  some  measure  be  reconciled  with  truth, 
by  supposing  that  an  ancient  tradition  had  preserved  amongst  the 
Japanese  some  idea  of  the  creation  of  the  world  ;  but  that,  being 
led  into  an  error  in  process  of  time,  they  ascribed  the  creation  of 
the  world  to  this  animal,  instead  of  the  Supreme  Being.  The 
Egyptians,  and  the  Indians  after  them,  have  also  made  the  egg  a 
Symbol  of  the  Universe.  The  former,  to  denote  the  creation,  re 
presented  an  egg  as  proceeding  half  way  out  of  the  mouth  of  the 
Deity  ;  and  the  latter  assert,  that,  at  first  the  Deity  shot  forth, 
out  of  a  trunk,  an  egg  of  a  moderate  size  ;  but  which  immediately 
fomented  to  that  degree  that  it  became  the  world,  in  which  we 
now  reside. 

They  have  another  emblem  of  the  creation,  which  represents  the 
Creator  of  the  universe,  seated  on  twelve  cushions,  (after  the  man 
ner  of  the  Japanese),  placed  upon  the  top  of  a  trunk  of  a  large 
tree,  which  is  fixed  on  the  back  of  a  tortoise.  This  tortoise,  as 
well  as  the  bull,  is  to  be  seen  at  Miaco.  It  is  placed  on  the  sur 
face  of  some  water,  inclosed  within  a  basin,  the  borders  of  which 
are  raised  about  seven  feet  above  the  ground.  The  Creator  is  as 
black  as  a  Moor,  and  has  a  crown  upon  his  head,  which  runs  up  a 
considerable  length  into  a  point.  His  breast  is  bare,  and  his  hair 
woolly,  like  a  negro's.  He  has  four  arms  and  hands,  with  a  ring 
in  one,  a  sceptre  in  another,  a  flower  in  a  third,  and  in  the  fourth 
a  vessel,  or  little  fountain  ;  all  of  which  are,  doubtless,  emblema 
tical.  These  are  all  made  of  gold,  as  is  also  the  trunk  on  which 
the  god  is  seated.  The  drapery  of  the  idol  is  covered  with  pre 
cious  stones.  It  is  from  the  trunk  of  this  tree,  (in  the  opinion  of 
the  Japanese  divines),  which  the  tortoise  carries  on  his  back,  that 
God  the  Creator  extracted  the  primitive  substance  of  all  material 
things.  A  serpent  of  a  monstrous  size  wreaths  himself  twice  round 
this  trunk.  Two  devils,  or,  to  speak  more  properly,  two  tremen 
dous  figures,  one  of  them  having  the  head  of  a  dog,  and  the  other 
the  horns  of  a  stag,  lay  hold  of  the  serpent's  head  ;  and  two  kings 
of  Japan,  and  a  Sin,  that  is,  a  hero,  or  a  demi-god,  take  hold  of 
his  tail.  The  two  devils,  or  evil  spirits,  sworn  enemies  to  the 
Creator,  would  have  obstructed,  if  possible,  the  creation  of  the 
world.  The  Japanese  being  fully  persuaded  of  the  inveterate 
malice  of  those  evil  beings,  make  their  oblations  to  them,  in  order 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  43 

to  prevent  them  from  destroying  the  products  of  the  earth.  The 
two  kings,  one  of  whom  has  four  faces,  and  the  Sin  in  conjunction 
with  them,  unanimously  consented  to  the  wicked  projects  of  the 
two  devils.  The  four  faces  of  one  of  these  kings  signify  the  four 
thousand  years  during  which  he  lived.  From  the  bottom  of  the 
waters,  on  which  the  tortoise  seems  to  lie  immovable,  appears  a 
sun,  half  risen,  under  the  form  of  a  middle-aged  man,  with  a  mo 
derate  beard,  and  crowned  with  rays.  With  his  right  hand  he 
seems  to  goad  the  tortoise  forward,  and  holds  divers  goods  in  his 
left. 

Apes  and  monkies — though  one  would  scarcely  believe  it — are 
also  worshiped,  and  have  their  pagodes  in  Japan  ;  but  these,  no 
doubt,  are  allegorical,  as  the  former.  In  the  middle  of  their  pagode 
there  is  an  ape,  erected  on  a  pedestal  which  stands  on  an  altar, 
capacious  enough,  not  only  to  contain  both,  but  the  oblations  of  the 
devotees  also,  together  with  a  brass  vessel,  on  which  a  Bonze 
drums,  who  stands  near  the  altar,  in  order  by  this  solemn  sound  to 
stir  up  the  people's  devotion  and  remind  them  of  their  religious 
duties.  Under  the  vaulted  roof,  and  in  the  walls  of  the  pagode, 
there  are  numbers  of  apes  of  all  kinds,  in  various  attitudes,  and 
still  deeper  in  are  several  pedestals,  like  the  one  on  the  altar,  with 
their  respective  apes  upon  them.  Opposite  to  these  pedestals 
there  are  other  apes,  with  the  oblations  of  their  devotees  before 
them.  There  is  one  thing  to  be  offered,  which  will  in  some  mea 
sure  palliate  this  act  of  devotion ;  that  is,  their  notion  that  the 
bodies  of  these  animals,  so  nearly  resembling  the  human  species, 
are  animated  by  human  souls,  even  those  of  the  grandees  and 
princes  of  the  Empire.  The  universal  charity  and  indulgence  of 
the  Monks  of  Camasana,  in  Japan,  to  the  brute  creation,  must  be 
entirely  ascribed  to  this  received  opinion.  There  is  a  hill  not  far 
from  their  convent,  with  an  agreeable  wood  upon  it,  well  stored 
with  all  manner  of  living  creatures.  These  monks  never  fail  to 
supply  them,  once  at  least  every  day,  with  food  convenient  for 
them.  Their  Provider-General  calls  them  all  together  by  the  ring 
ing  of  a  little  bell,  and  dismisses  them  with  the  same  formality,  as 
soon  as  they  have  finished  their  collation.  These  creatures-,  say 
the  charitable  Bonzes,  are  animated  by  the  souls  of  illustrious 
noblemen  and  heroes.  If  the  Stag  be  not  really  the  object  of 
adoration  among  tlie  devotees  of  Japan,  at  least  it  is  looked  upon 
with  so  great  veneration  and  respect,  that  no  one  is  permitted  to 
make  an  attempt  upon  its  life.  Stags  are  to  be  seen  as  common  in 
the  streets  and  towns  of  Japan,  as  dogs  are  in  Spain.  No  one 


44  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

presumes  to  molest  them  ;  and  in  case  any  person  should  acci 
dentally  hurt  one  of  them,  it  would  cost  him  a  large  sum,  if  not  his 
life,  to  make  atonement  for  the  misdemeanor.  Should  the  stag 
happen  to  die  from  the  wound  he  had  received,  the  whole  street 
where  the  act  was  committed  would'  be  demolished,  and  the  effects 
of  all  the  inhabitants  seized  upon  and  forfeited,  which  goes  into  the 
public  treasury. 

The  Japanese  have  another  idol,  called  Xaca,  or  Siaca.  He  is 
represented  in  the  usual  figure  of  a  man  sitting,  according  to  the 
Japanese  fashion,  and  extending  his  hand  like  a  devotee  or  a  doc 
tor.  He  has  a  chain  of  gold  shells,  set  with  precious  stones,  about 
his  neck  ;  several  ribbons,  at  the  end  of  which  hang  several  little 
ornaments,  like  tufts  or  tassels,  upon  his  arms,  and  a  silk  girdle 
about  his  loins.  Behind  and  before  him  are  hung  golden  scales. 
The  table  on  which  Xaca  sits  is  adorned  with  censers,  hanging 
round  about  it  by  gold  chains.  They  burn  incense  in  them  night 
and  day,  in  honor  of  the  Deity.  This  Xaca,  as  the  rest  of  the 
Pagan  Deities,  may  boast  of  devotees  who  delight  in  the  most  ex 
travagant  expressions  of  their  veneration  for  him,  since  we  are 
informed  that  they  will  even  starve  themselves  to  become  his 
martyrs. 

There  is  a  town  near  Miaco,  peculiarly  remarkable  for  the  num 
ber  and  magnificence  of  its  pagodes,  one  of  which  includes  above 
a  thousand  idols.  In  the  middle  of  the  temple  there  is  a  gigantic 
figure  of  an  idol,  having  his  ears  bored,  his  head  bald,  and  his  chin 
shaved,  much  like  a  Braman.  Over  his  head  and  the  canopy  that 
covers  him,  hang  five  or  six  little  bells.  On  the  right  and  left  side 
of  the  throne  on  which  this  deity  is  sitting,  there  are  several  statues 
of  armed  men,  Moors  dancing,  wizards,  magicians  and  devils. 
There  are  also  several  representations  of  thunder  and  winds. 
Bound  about  the  walls  of  the  temple,  there  are  a  thousand  idols,  all 
resembling  Canon.  Each  idol  is  crowned,  has  thirty  arms,  and 
seven  heads  upon  his  breast.  They  are  all  made  of  solid  gold  ; 
every  individual  decoration  belonging  to  them  and  to  the  temple, 
is  likewise  of  the  same  precious  metal.  The  multiplicity  of  arms 
and  hands  symbolically  expresses  the  power  of  the  idol. 

The  Japanese  have  their  asylums,  or  places  of  refuge.  Not  far 
from  Miaco  there  is  a  mountain  called  Hoia,  inhabited  by  Monks, 
whose  laws  and  statutes  are  less  severe  than  those  of  other  Orders. 
Their  convent  is  a  sanctuary  for  the  most  flagrant  offenders.  The 
malefactor  is  not  only  secure  whilst  under  their  protection,  but  may 
purchase  his  liberty,  if  he  is  able,  by  depositing  a  certain  sum  for 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  45 

the  service  of  the  convent.  One  Hoboday  was  the  founder  of  this 
Order,  and  he  is  adored  amongst  them  as  a  god.  Lamps  are  for 
ever  burning  before  this  idol.  To  contribute  towards  the  support 
of  this  foundation,  is  looked  upon  as  an  act  truly  meritorious. 
The  Monks  of  this  Order  apply  themselves  to  trade  and  commerce. 
The  person  whose  peculiar  province  it  is  to  ring  the  hours  of  the 
day,  also  gives  the  people  notice  of  the  time  appointed  for  public 
prayers  as  well  as  preaching.  Their  discourses  turn  only  upon 
moral  topics,  and  the  preacher  is  exalted  on  a  public  rostrum  or 
pulpit,  much  like  those  in  our  own  churches.  On  one  side  of  him 
is  placed  the  tutelar  idol  of  the  sect  or  order  whereof  he  is  a  mem 
ber,  to  whom  the  true  devotees  present  their  free-will  oblations.  On 
each  side  of  the  pulpit  there  is  a  lighted  lamp  hanging  from  the 
canopy  which  covers  it ;  and  a  little  below  it  is  a  kind  of  desk  or  pew 
for  the  junior  fellows,  where  they  are  sitting  and  standing. 
The  preacher  wears  upon  his  head  a  hat  much  like  an  umbrella, 
and  holds  a  fan  in  his  hand.  Before  he  begins  his  sermon, 
he  either  is,  or  seems  to  be,  very  contemplative  ;  reflecting,  no 
doubt,  on  what  he  intends  to  deliver.  After  this  the  preacher 
rings  a  little  bell  always  ready  at  hand,  which  is  the  usual  signal 
for  silence.  Then  he  opens  a  book  containing  the  moral  precepts 
and  fundamental  principles  of  the  religion  of  the  sect,  which  he 
lays  upon  his  cushion  before  him.  In  the  next  place  he  takes  his 
text,  and  illuminates  it  as  he  thinks  proper. 

These  ministers  are  masters  of  rhetoric  ;  their  expressions  are 
nervous,  and  their  discourses  are  very  methodical.  The  conclusion 
of  them  is  always  an  eulogium  on  the  Order  to  which  they  belong. 
A  devotee  must  never  forget  his  oblation  nor  his  voluntary  contri 
butions  towards  the  support  of  the  religious  houses  where  those 
holy  persons  reside,  who  by  their  prayers  and  good  works  reconcile 
you,  and  bring  you  into  favor  with  the  gods,  &c.  The  audience 
must  kneel  to  say  their  prayers,  either  before  or  after  sermon  ;  and 
in  order  to  give  them  due  notice  of  it,  he  rings  the  bell  used  at 
other  times  to  demand  their  silence. 

Japan  abounds  in  every  kind  of  cattle,  more  abundant  because 
they  do  not  castrate  any  creature.  Thence  it  conies  they  are 
well  supplied  with  horses,  bulls,  kine,  swine,  deer,  wild  boars, 
bears,  dogs,  &c.  ;  also  with  all  kinds  of  fowl,  such  as  swans,  geese, 
ducks,  herns,  cranes,  eagles,  falcons,  pheasants,  pigeons,  wood 
cocks,  quails,  and  all  sorts  of  small  birds. 

There  are  in  this  country  several  kinds  of  mineral  waters,  very 
good  for  divers  diseases.  Some  have  the  taste  and  qualities  of 


46  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

copper,  others  of  saltpetre,  iron,  tin,  and  salt ;  and  among  others, 
there  is  a  spring  of  hot  water  having  the  taste  of  tin,  and  issues 
out  of  a  cave  which  is  about  ten  feet  diameter  at  the  mouth,  having 
both  above  and  below  several  pointed  stones,  like  elephant's  teeth, 
giving  it  a  very  odd  and  terrible  appearance.  The  water  which 
comes  out  of  it  constantly  in  great  bubbles,  is  not  so  hot  but  that  it 
may  be  endured  as  soon  as  it  is  out  of  the  spring,  so  that  there  is 
no  need  of  mixing  any  other  water  with  it. 

In  a  spacious  plain,  at  the  foot  of  a  mountain,  not  far  from  the 
sea-side,  there  is  another  spring,  which  gives  water  twice  only  in 
twenty-four  hours,  during  the  space  of  an  hour  at  each  time,  ex 
cept  it  be  when  the  east  wind  blows,  when  it  gives  water  four  times 
a  day.  This  water  comes  out  of  a  hole  which  nature  has  made 
in  the  ground,  and  which  the  people  have  covered  with  several 
large  stones  ;  but  when  the  time  of  its  flood  is  come,  the  water  is 
forced  out  with  such  violence  among  the  stones  that  it  shakes  them 
all,  and  makes  a  Cast  twenty  or  twenty-four  feet  high,  with  such 
noise  as  would  drown  that  of  a  great  gun.  It  is  so  hot  that  it  is 
impossible  fire  should  raise  ordinary  water  to  so  high  a  degree  of 
heat  as  the  earth  gives  this  ;  for  it  immediately  burns  the  stuffs  on 
which  it  falls,  and  keeps  its  heat  much  longer  than  the  water  that 
has  been  boiled  over  the  fire.  The  well  is  inclosed  with  a  high 
wall,  having  at  its  bottom  several  holes,  through  which  the  water 
runs  into  certain  channels,  and  so  is  brought  into  the  houses  where 
they  bathe  themselves,  reducing  it  to  such  a  degree  of  warmth  as 
may  be  endured. 

Some  affirm  that  their  physicians  are  so  able  that  there  is  no 
disease  which  they  cannot  discover  by  the  pulse.  They  are  per 
fectly  well  skilled  in  the  virtues  of  simples  and  drugs,  especially 
those  of  the  radix  chinat  and  rhubarb,  used  in  their  recipes,  which 
for  the  most  part  consist  in  pills,  with  very  good  success.  They 
are  also  very  fortunate  in  the  curing  of  ordinary  diseases  ;  but 
surgery  is  not  yet  known  among  them. 

The  mineral  waters  are  a  sufficient  demonstration  that  there  are 
in  Japan  mines  of  all  kinds  of  metals.  Already  there  has  been 
found  gold,  silver,  copper,  tin,  iron,  and  lead.  The  country 
brings  forth  also  cotton,  flax,  and  hemp,  from  which  they  make 
very  fine  cloths.  It  produces  also  silk,  and  affords  abundance  of 
goat  and  deer  skins,  the  richest  works  of  wood  and  lacque  of  any  in 
the  world,  and  all  kinds  of  provisions  and  medicinal  drugs. 

The  Portuguese  came  to  the  knowledge  of  Japan,  by  means 
of  the  trade  they  drove  in  the  kingdom  of  Siam  and  Cambodia. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  47 

They  found  it  no  hard  matter  to  settle  there  ;  inasmuch  as  the 
Japanes  had  not  at  first  any  aversion  for  their  ecclesiastical  ceremo 
nies,  so  that  in  a  short  time  the  Roman  Catholic  religion  got  such 
footing  there,  that  they  were  permitted  to  build  churches  in  seve 
ral  places  of  the  kingdom,  and  particularly  at  Nangasacke.  But 
the  Spaniards  persuaded  the  Japanese  first  to  set  upon  and  after 
wards  to  burn  their  ships,  and  in  the  year  1636  they  banished  them 
the  country,  with  prohibitions,  upon  pain  of  death,  not  to  return 
to  it. 

The  Dutch  have  traded  thither  since  the  year  1611,  and  still 
continue  it,  much  to  their  advantage.  Their  commerce  to  Japan 
is  worth  to  them  more  than  all  the  rest  of  the  Indies.  They  af 
firm,  in  the  relation  of  the  voyage  they  made  thither  in  the  year 
1598,  that  the  city  of  Meaco  is  twenty-one  leagues  in  circumfe 
rence. 

The  air  is  good  and  healthy,  though  more  inclined  to  cold  than 
heat ;  and  yet  the  Japanese  sow  their  corn  about  the  beginning  of 
May,  and  do  not  cut  the  rice  till  September. 

They  have  neither  butter  nor  oil,  and  have  an  aversion  against 
milk,  imagining  that  the  souls  of  beasts  reside  in  it,  and  that  it  is 
blood  in  effect,  though  of  a  different  color.  They  do  not  eat  the 
flesh  of  either  bulls  or  kine,  nor  that  of  any  tame  beast,  but  love 
wild  fowl  and  venison,  and  are  much  addicted  to  the  hunting  there 
of.  They  have  cedar  trees  so  large  that  they  make  pillars  of 
them  for  their  greatest  edifices,  and  masts  for  their  ships. 

Poverty  is  not  so  criminal  or  infamous  in  Japan,  as  it  is  in  seve 
ral  parts  of  Europe,  where  the  rich  are  only  accounted  virtuous ; 
and  they  hate  calumniators,  swearers,  and  gamesters. 

They  are  more  of  a  brownish  complexion  than  white  ;  strong 
and  well  set,  and  with  incredible  patience  undergo  labor  and  the 
inconveniences  of  the  seasons.  They  endure  hunger  and  thirst, 
heat  and  cold,  without  any  trouble  ;  and  are  clothed  in  winter  the 
same  as  in  summer. 

To  show  how  very  various  and  different  the  customs  of  the  world 
are,  we  will  mention  a  few  other  particulars  concerning  the  Ja 
panese.  We  pull  off  our  hats  when  we  salute  one  another,  but  the 
Japanese  their  shoes.  We  always  rise  to  pay  our  respects  to  such 
friends  as  favor  us  with  a  visit — they,  on  the  contrary,  look  on  it  as 
a  compliment  to  sit  down  on  such  occasions.  We  throw  off  our 
cloaks  as  soon  as  we  come  home — they,  on  the  contrary,  put  them 
on.  The  Japanese  physicians  seldom  or  never  practice  Phleboto 
my,  and  prescribe  salts  and  acids  in  such  cases  as  ours  administer 


48  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

balsamics.  Their  patients  are  indulged  in  everything  their  appe 
tites  suggest,  whereas  ours  are  restrained,  and  obliged  to  observe 
the  strictest  regimen  ;  and  yet  their  patients  recover  as  frequently 
as  we  do  under  our  doctors.  When  their  patients  are  afflicted  with 
a  violent  fever,  they  make  use  of  golden  bodkins,  with  which  they 
lightly  penetrate  the  skin  in  various  parts  of  the  body.  In  other 
distempers,  they  generally  make  up  little  balls  of  dried  herbs, 
which  they  apply  externally  on  different  parts  of  the  body,  and 
then  set  them  on  fire,  and  let  them  burn  till  they  drop  off  of  them 
selves. 


THE    ISLAND    OF    FORMOSA. 

We  will  now  proceed  to  give  an  account  of  the  Island  of 
Formosa,  or  the  Fair  Island,  this  being  a  place  where  the  inhabi 
tants  of  Japan  carry  on  a  great  trade  with  the  Chinese,  they  being 
prohibited  from  coming  to  China. 

This  Island  is  about  an  hundred  and  thirty  leagues  in  circum 
ference,  and  contains  many  villages  and  an  infinite  number  of 
people,  who  acknowledge  no  king  nor  sovereign,  and  have  no  other 
superiors  over  them  but  such  as  they  make  among  themselves, 
after  the  manner  to  be  related.  Its  rivers  are  excellently  well  stored 
with  fish ;  its  forests  well  furnished  with  all  sorts  of  wild  fowl  and 
venison  ;  and  its  fields,  which  are  for  the  most  part  meadows,  in  a 
manner  covered  with  cattle.  They  have  deer,  wild  goats,  hares, 
rabbits,  pheasants,  patridges,  pigeons,  &c.,  and  besides  these  a  kind 
of  horned  horse,  called  by  the  inhabitants  Olavang,  whose  horns 
are  like  those  of  deer,  and  the  flesh  very  delicate.  They  have 
also  tigers,  and  another  kind  of  animal  called  Tirney,  made  like  a 
bear,  but  much  stronger.  The  skin  of  this  beast  is  accounted  by 
them  to  be  one  of  the  most  precious  things  that  the  island 
produces. 

The  ground  here  is  flat  and  fruitful,  but  so  poorly  cultivated 
that  there  are  very  few  fruit  trees,  and  the  little  fruit  they  bear  is 
so  bad,  that  though  the  islanders  eat  it  with  some  delight,  yet  other 
nations  cannot  so  much  as  taste  of  it.  Ginger  and  cinnamon  grow 
in  this  island.  There  has  been  found  here  gold  and  silver  mines, 
whereof  the  Chinese  have  sometimes  made  trial ;  but  it  is  more 
than  the  Dutch  could  ever  discover. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  49 

The  places  in  this  Island  which  the  Dutch  have  most  frequented 
are  Sinkan,  Mandauw,  Toulang,  TafFacang,  Tifulucang,  Teosang, 
and  Tefurang,  which  are  all  within  a  small  distance  of  the  Fort 
Tayouang  ;  so  that  they  may  be  all  gone  to  in  two  days,  save  only 
the*  village  of  Tefurang,  which  lies  in  the  mountains,  at  a  day  and 
a  half's  journey  at  least  from  the  habitations  of  the  Dutch.  The 
rest  lay  as  it  were  upon  the  sea-side,  and  have  all  the  same  manner 
of  life,  the  same  religion,  and  almost  the  same  language. 

The  men  are  strong  and  hardy,  much  larger  than  any  of  the 
Europeans.  Their  bodies  are  hairy  all  over,  and  they  are  of  a 
brown  complexion,  inclining  to  black,  as  most  of  the  Indians  are. 
The  women  are  somewhat  less  in  size,  but  fat  enough,  and,  for  the 
most  part,  well  shaped. 

The  people  are  good-natured,  faithful,  and  obliging,  entertaining 
strangers  with  much  kindness  and  civility,  and  communicating  to 
them  such  good  cheer  as  nature  affords  them.  It  has  never  been 
found  that  they  were  desirous  to  get  what  belongs  to  any  other  by 
indirect  means,  but,  on  the  contrary,  they  have  often  returned  to 
the  owners  what  they  found  mislaid  or  lost.  They  are  constant  and 
faithful  in  their  friendship,  and  religiously  observe,  as  well  the 
treaties  they  make  among  themselves,  as  those  made  with  foreigners. 
Treachery  is  a  thing  they  are  so  unacquainted  with,  that  there  is 
no  misfortune  which  they  would  not  suffer  rather  than  any  reproach 
should  be  made  them  of  unfaithfulness.  They  want  neither  in 
genuity  nor  memory,  but  easily  apprehend  and  retain  what  is  said 
unto  them.  It  is  true,  they  have  a  humor  of  impudently  begging 
anything  they  see  ;  but  they  are  denied  with  the  same  freedom, 
and  are  satisfied  with  a  small  matter. 

They  live  altogether  by  the  little  husbandry  they  carry  on,  and 
the  rice  they  get  out  of  the  ground :  not  but  that  their  lands  are 
very  fruitful,  but  they  have  no  ploughs,  nor  beasts  fit  for  tillage. 
They  have  no  other  way  of  breaking  up  the  ground  than  by  the 
spade,  in  the  hands  of  women — as  the  men  mind  only  war  and 
hunting — so  their  increase  cannot  be  so  great  as  that  of  those 
places  where  they  have  better  conveniences.  Another  employ 
ment  of  the  women  is,  to  transplant  the  rice  when  it  grows  thicker 
in  one  place  than  in  another  ;  which  work,  and  the  cutting  of  it 
when  ripe,  takes  up  much  of  their  time,  for,  instead  of  reaping  it 
by  handfuls  with  a  hook,  they  cut  it  corn  by  corn,  some  four  or 
five  fingers  below  the  ear,  put  it  up  in  the  house,  and  never  beat  it 
but  when  necessary  for  their  subsistence,  that  is,  every  day.  The 
woman  of  the  house  sets  over  night  two  or  thr.^e  little  bundles  of 


50  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

it  a  drying  in  the  chimney-corner,  and  rising  the  next  morning  two 
hours  before  day,  she  beats  it  in  a  mortar,  and  makes  as  much 
clean  rice  as  is  requisite  for  the  family  that  day,  and  no  more. 
And  thus  they  live  during  the  whole  year. 

They  sow  also  two  or  three  kinds  of  fruit,  which  they  call 
ptingh,  quaco,  and  tarann,  somewhat  like  millet,  also  a  kind  of 
pulse,  much  like  the  French  bean.  They  have  also  several  sorts 
of  roots,  which  they  use  instead  of  bread,  and  which  in  effect  are 
sufficient  to  sustain  them,  though  they  had  no  rice  nor  any  other 
kind  of  fruit  or  corn.  They  have  ginger,  cinnamon,  sugar-canes, 
bananas,  lemons,  abundance  of  areea,  and  several  other  sorts  of 
fruits,  simples,  and  pulse,  not  known  in  this  country. 

They  make  a  kind  of  beverage,  which  is  as  strong  and  intoxi 
cates  a  man's  brains  as  soon  as  the  best  sack.  Their  way  of 
making  it  is  thus  : — In  warm  water,  they  set  a  certain  quantity  of 
rice  soaking,  which  they  afterwards  beat  in  a  mortar  till  it  be  re 
duced  to  a  paste.  Then  they  chew  some  rice-meal  in  their  mouths, 
which  they  spit  into  a  pot,  till  such  time  as  they  have  obtained  a 
quart  of  liquor,  which  they  put  to  the  paste,  instead  of  leaven  ;  and 
after  they  have  kneaded  all  well  together,  till  they  have  brought 
it  to  baker's  dough,  they  put  it  into  a  great  earthen  pot,  which  they 
fill  up  with  water,  and  let  it  remain  there  for  two  months.  By 
this  means  they  make  one  of  the  best  and  most  pleasant  liquors 
that  a  man  need  drink.  This  is  their  wine,  which  is  stronger  or 
weaker,  according  to  the  time  it  remains  in  the  pot ;  and  the  older 
it  is,  the  better  and  sweeter  it  is.  They  sometimes  keep  it  five 
and  twenty  or  thirty  years.  What  is  towards  the  mouth  of  the 
pot  is  as  clear  as  rock  water,  but  at  the  bottom  there  are  only 
dregs,  such  as  are  sufficient  to  turn  a  weak  stomach  ;  and  yet  the 
islanders  make  it  one  of  their  delicacies,  and  eat  it  with  spoons, 
having  first  stirred  it  about,  with  a  little  water  put  into  it.  When 
they  go  into  the  country,  they  carry  along  with  them  a  little  pot  of 
this  stuff,  and  a  gourd-bottle  full  of  water,  and  so  they  are  fur 
nished  with  meat  and  drink.  They  make  use  of  the  upper  part 
of  this  beverage  as  a  dram,  to  comfort  the  heart,  and  eat  what  is 
in  the  bottom  ;  whence  it  comes  that  they  spend  most  part  of  their 
rice  in  this  composition. 

When  the  women  have  no  work  to  do  about  their  grounds, 
they  go  a-fishing,  and  particularly  to  get  oysters,  which  the 
islanders  prefer  above  all  meat  whatever.  They  have  a  way  of 
salting  the  fish  slightly  as  soon  as  it  is  taken,  with  the  shell,  and 
whatever  is  within  it,  and  they  eat  them,  for  the  want  of  salt,  with 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  51 

all  the  filth,  nay,  with  the  worms,  which  sometimes  are  bred  within 
them. 

The  men,  especially  the  younger  sort,  to  the  age  of  twenty-four 
to  twenty-five  years,  do  nothing  at  all ;  but  when  they  are  come  to 
forty,  they  help  to  do  something  about  the  grounds,  where  they  con 
tinue  night  and  day  with  their  wives,  in  little  huts,  and  return  not 
to  the  village  till  some  necessity  or  diversion  calls  them  thither. 

They  have  several  kinds  of  hunting,  and  use,  in  their  sport, 
snares,  slender  pikes,  and  bows  and  arrows.  They  spread  their 
snares  or  nets  in  the  woods,  cross  those  paths  which  the  deers  and 
wild  boars  are  wont  to  make,  and  force  those  creatures  into  them  ; 
or  else,  they  spread  them  in  the  open  fields,  with  the  convenience 
of  a  great  cane,  one  end  of  which  they  plant  in  the  ground  and 
the  other  is  bowed  down,  and  fastened  to  certain  little  sticks,  upon 
which  they  lay  a  snare  covered  with  a  little  earth,  which,  as  soon 
as  the  wild  beast  touches,  the  cane  is  suddenly,  as  it  were,  unbent, 
and  catches  him  by  one  of  the  feet.  The  hunting  with  pikes  is 
done  thus  : — The  inhabitants  of  two  or  three  villages,  being  armed 
with  two  or  three  pikes,  meet  together  at  a  certain  place  appointed, 
and  having  divided  themselves  into  several  parties,  they  send  their 
dogs  into  the  woods,  to  drive  out  the  game  into  the  fields,  where 
they  meet,  and  make  a  great  ring,  a  league  or  more  in  circumfe 
rence,  within  which,  when  they  have  once  gotten  the  deer  and 
wild  boars,  it  seldom  happens  that  any  of  them  escape  without  be 
ing  killed  or  hurt.  The  pike  itself  is  of  cane,  six  or  seven  feet  in 
length,  having  an  iron  at  the  top,  with  several  hooks,  so  that  having 
entered  into  the  beast,  it  is  beyond  any  man's  strength  to  get  it 
out ;  yet  the  iron  is  not  made  so  fast  to  the  wood,  but  it  comes  off 
at  the  first  bush  the  beast  runs  into  ;  and  to  the  end  it  may  still 
annoy  the  deer,  there  is  a  cord  fastened  to  it,  which  holds  both, 
and  at  the  top  of  the  iron  there  is  a  little  bell,  by  which  the  beast 
is  discovered  wherever  it  goes.  They  destroy  so  great  a  number 
of  deer  by  this  kind  of  hunting,  that  not  being  able  to  spend  all 
they  take  themselves,  they  sell  the  flesh  of  them  to  -the  Chinese, 
for  little  garments,  sweet-wood,  and  other  commodities,  eating 
themselves  only  the  umbles  and  paunch,  which  they  salt  with  the 
filth  in  them,  and  indeed  care  not  much  for  them,  till  when  they 
are  thus  corrupted.  Sometimes,  while  they  are  hunting,  they 
cut  off  a  piece  and  eat  it  immediately,  so  that  the  blood  runs  about 
their  mouths  ;  and  if  they  find  any  young  ones  in  the  belly  of  the 
female,  whether  having  come  to  any  form  or  not,  they  eat  them 
with  the  skin  and  hair,  as  a  thing  very  delicate. 


52  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

Their  military  engagements  are  thus  prosecuted  : — They  never 
begin  any  war  till  the}r  have  first  declared  it  against  the  village  by 
which  they  conceive  themselves  injured,  and  then  they  go  by 
small  parties  of  five-and-twenty  or  thirty  men,  and  hide  them 
selves  near  the  fields  ;  and  if  they  find  any  in  the  huts,  where 
aged  persons  reside,  they  kill  them,  cut  off  their  heads,  and  if  they 
have  time  enough,  the  hands  and  feet,  and  sometimes  they  cut  the 
whole  body  to  pieces,  that  every  one  may  carry  away  his  share, 
and  show  the  marks  of  his  courage  at  his  return.  If  the  country 
take  the  alarm,  so  as  they  cannot  quite  cut  off  the  head,  they  think 
it  enough  to  cut  off  the  hair,  which  they  carry  away  as  a  noble  de 
monstration  of  their  victory  ;  which  is  accounted  among  them  a 
very  considerable  one,  though  in  an  exploit  of  this  nature  there 
happens  to  be  but  one  man  killed.  Sometimes  they  venture  so  far 
as  to  enter  into  the  village,  and  break  open  some  house,  but  be 
cause  that  cannot  be  done  without  noise,  they  go  upon  such  a  de 
sign  with  so  much  precipitation,  that  lest  they  should  be  intercepted 
in  their  return,  they  kill  all  they  meet,  and  then  flee.  They  also 
use  stratagems,  and  make  ambushes,  according  to  their  way,  and 
sometimes  they  engage  in  the  open  field,  where  they  fight  with 
great  animosity  ;  but  the  death  of  one  man  passes  among  them 
for  an  absolute  defeat,  and  obliges  those  who  have  sustained  that 
loss  to  make  an  immediate  retreat. 

The  pikes  they  use  in  their  wars  are  made  in  a  different  manner 
from  those  they  hunt  with — the  iron  at  the  top  having  no  branches 
nor  hooks,  and  is  made  quite  fast  to  the  body  of  the  pike.  Their 
bucklers  are  so  large  that  they  nearly  cover  the  whole  body ;  their 
swords,  on  the  contrary,  are  short,  but  broad.  They  use  also 
knives,  made  like  those  of  the  Japanese,  and  bows  and  arrows. 

When  several  villages  make  an  association  among  themselves  to 
carry  on  a  war  jointly  against  other  villages,  the  command  of  their 
forces  is  not  bestowed  on  one  chief,  who  has  authority  sufficient  to 
force  himself  to  be  obeyed  ;  but  such  among  them  as  have  been  so 
fortunate  as  to  cut  off  divers  heads  upon  several  occasions,  find 
volunteers  enough  to  follow  them  in  their  military  exploits,  from 
no  other  consideration  than  that  of  participating  of  the  glory  of 
their  commander.  They  think  it  enough  to  bring  away  the  hair, 
or  even  only  a  pike  belonging  to  their  enemies,  for  which  they 
make  a  solemn  triumph,  and  appoint  a  day  of  thanksgiving.  They 
carry  the  heads  iu  procession  all  about  the  villMire,  singing  hymns 
to  their  gods,  and,  in  their  way,  visit  their  friends,  who  make  them 
drink  of  the  best  arrack,  and  accompany  them  to  the  pagode, 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  53 

where  they  boil  the  head  till  there  he  nothing  left  but  the  bones, 
on  which  they  sprinkle  some  wine,  sacrifice  several  swine  to  their 
gods,  and  feast  for  fifteen  days  together.  They  do  the  same  when 
they  have  brought  home  only  the  hair  or  a  pike,  which,  with  the 
bones  of  their  enemies,  they  keep  as  carefully  as  we  do  gold,  silver, 
or  jewels.  When  a  house  is  on  fire,  they  abandon  all  to  save  these 
relics.  They  tender  great  respect  to  those  who  have  had  the  good 
fortune  to  bring  home  an  enemy's  head,  and  no  person  comes  near 
him  but  with  a  certain  veneration,  for  fifteen  days  after  his  doing 
such  an  exploit,  nor  speak  to  him,  unless  with  such  extraor 
dinary  submissions  as  that  a  sovereign  prince  could  not  expect 
greater. 

There  is  no  lord  in  this  island  that  has  any  superiority  or  advan 
tage  over  the  rest  of  the  people.  Their  condition  is  equal,  save 
that  in  every  village  there  is  a  kind  of  senate,  consisting  of  twelve 
persons,  which  are  changed  every  two  years.  The  two  years 
being  expired,  those  who  quit  their  places  pull  off  their  hair  from 
their  eye-brows,  and  on  both  sides  of  their  heads,  to  show  that 
they  have  been  magistrates.  The  senators  are  chosen  from  per 
sons  much  about  the  same  age,  about  forty  years ;  for  though 
they  have  no  almanac,  and  cannot  reckon  their  years,  yet  they  re 
member  well  enough  the  course  of  the  moon,  and  take  particular 
notice  of  those  who  are  born  within  the  same  month,  and  about 
the  same  year.  This  magistrate  has  no  authority  to  force  himself 
to  be  obeyed,  or  to  put  his  commands  in  execution.  All  the 
power  he  has,  is  only  to  give  orders  for  an  assembly  to  be  held, 
concerning  such  affairs  as  may  be  thought  of  importance,  to 
confer  among  themselves  thereof,  and  to  "invite  all  the  heads  of 
families  to  meet  in  one  of  their  pagodes,  where  they  state  to  them 
how  things  stand,  propose  what  they  think  fit  to  be  done,  and 
endeavor  to  bring  the  rest  to  be  of  the  same  opinion  with  them 
selves.  All  the  senators  speak  one  after  another,  and  use  all  the 
eloquence  they  possess  to  press  their  reasons  the  more  home. 
They  will  speak  half  an  hour  together,  using  such  high  expres 
sions,  with  so  much  ease,  and  with  such  apt  gestures,  that 
what  we  are  taught  by  art  comes  near  what  nature  has  bestowed 
on  these  people,  who  can  neither  read  nor  write.  While  one 
speaks,  all  the  rest  are  perfectly  silent,  and  not  so  much  as  a  cough 
can  be  heard,  though  their  assemblies  many  times  consist  of°a 
thousand  persons.  When  all  the  senators  have  done  speaking,  the 
rest  put  the  business  to  deliberation,  with  an  absolute  freedom  of 
either  complying  with  the  judgment  of  the  senate,  or  opposing  it, 


54  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

after  they  have  considered  the  good  or  evil  which  may  accrue  to 
them  thereby. 

All  the  power  these  magistrates  have,  consists  in  causing  what 
their  priestesses  command  to  be  put  into  execution,  in  preventing 
aught  to  be  done  which  may  offend  the  gods,  and  in  punishing 
such  as  do  offend  them.  They  also  make  reparations  to  private 
persons  who  have  been  injured  by  others  ;  not  by  causing  the  of 
fenders  to  be  imprisoned  or  punished  with  death,  or  other  corporal 
punishments,  but  in  condemning  them  to  pay  a  piece  of  cloth,  a 
deer-skin,  a  certain  quantity  of  rice,  or  a  pot  of  their  arradc,  by 
way  of  satisfaction,  according  to  the  character  of  the  crime. 

There  is  a  certain  season  of  the  year,  in  which  they  go  entirely 
naked,  saying  they  do  it  from  the  consideration,  that  if  they  did 
not  do  so,  the  gods  would  not  cause  it  to  rain,  and  the  rice  would 
not  grow.  If,  during  the  time  the  senators  meet  with  any  one  that 
has  aught  about  his  waist,  the  cloth,  or  whatsoever  it  be,  is  confis 
cated,  and  he  is  adjudged  to  a  penalty,  which  at  most  is  but  two 
deer-skins,  or  a  certain  quantity  of  rice,  amounting  to  the  same 
value.  Accordingly  it  is  one  of  the  principal  functions  of  the 
senators  during  this  time,  morning  and  evening,  to  be  about  the 
avenues  of  the  village,  and  to  punish  those  they  find  delinquent. 

The  senators,  on  the  other  hand,  are  obliged  to  observe  a  certain 
manner  of  life,  about  the  time  that  the  rice  grows  ripe  ;  for,  during 
that  time,  they  are  forbidden  drinking  to  excess,  the  eating  of 
sugar  and  fat,  and  chewing  of  Areca,  being  persuaded,  that  the 
people  would  not  only  slight  them,  but  also  that  the  gods  would 
send  the  deer  and  wild  boars  into  the  rice  to  destroy  it. 

The  magistrate  has  no  power  to  punish  murder,  theft  or  adul 
tery  ;  but  such  as  are  injured  do  themselves  justice.  When  the 
theft  is  discovered,  he  who  has  been  robbed,  goes,  accompanied  by 
his  friends,  to  find  the  person  who  has  robbed  him,  and  takes 
out  of  his  house  what  he  thinks  sufficient  to  make  him  satisfaction, 
by  an  accommodation  he  makes  with  the  other  ;  but  if  he  finds  any 
opposition,  he  declares  open  hostility  against  him,  till  such  time  as 
he  has  made  him  satisfaction.  He  who  finds  himself  injured  in  his 
reputation,  by  adultery  committed  with  his  wife,  revenges  himself 
another  way,  viz  :  he  takes  out  of  the  house  of  the  adulterer,  two 
or  three  pigs,  as  a  satisfaction  for  the  injury  he  has  received.  The 
friends  and  relations  on  both  sides  settle  the  differences  arising  be 
tween  private  persons,  in  the  case  of  murder,  and  to  regulate  the 
civil  concernment. 

Among  them  there  is  so  great  an  equality  of  condition,  that  they 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  55 

are  yet  ignorant  of  the  terms  master  and  servant.  But  this  does 
not,  however,  hinder  their  rendering  great  honor  one  to  another, 
and  express  a  great  respect  for  and  submission  to  one  another ; 
not  from  any  consideration  of  a  more  eminent  dignity,  or  upon  the 
account  of  wealth,  but  only  upon  that  of  age,  which  is  so  consid 
ered  among  them,  that  a  young  man  is  obliged  to  go  aside  to  make 
way  for  an  old  man,  and  turn  his  back  to  him,  as  a  mark  of  re 
spect,  till  he  has  passed,  and  continuing  in  that  posture,  even  though 
the  old  man  should  stand  still  to  speak  to  him.  No  young  man 
dares  deny  doing  what  the  other  commands  him,  though  he  should 
send  him  three  or  four  leagues  upon  some  business  of  his.  They 
are  the  ancient  men  who  have  the  chiefest  places,  and  are  the  first 
served  at  feasts. 

As  to  their  marriages,  the  men  are  not  permitted  to  marry  till 
they  are  twenty  or  twenty-one  years  of  age,  which  they  call  Saat 
Coffin  wang.  Till  they  are  sixteen  or  seventeen  they  are  forbid 
den  to  wear  long  hair,  so  they  cut  it  even  with  the  tip  of  the  ear ; 
and  as  they  have  neither  scissors  or  razors,  to  do  that  work  they 
make  use  of  a  kind  of  little  chopping-knife,  lay  down  the  hair  upon 
a  piece  of  wood,  and  cut  it  as  exactly  as  the  most  expert  barbers. 
They  draw  out  the  hair  of  their  faces  with  little  pincers  of  brass 
or  iron,  or  with  the  string  of  a  great  cane,  which  they  double,  and 
getting  the  hair  fast  between  it,  they  turn  the  string  till  the  hair 
is  taken  out.  In  the  seventeenth  year  of  their  age,  they  let  their 
hair  grow,  and  when  it  is  come  to  its  ordinary  length,  they  begin 
to  think  of  marriage.  Maids  never  cut  their  hair,  and  are  married 
as  soon  as  they  are  marriageable. 

Their  marriages  are  contracted  thus : — The  young  gallant  who 
has  an  inclination  to  a  maid,  sends  his  mother,  sister,  or  some 
kinswoman,  to  the  relations  of  the  maid,  to  show  them  what  he  in 
tends  to  bestow  on  his  mistress.  If  they  receive  his  addresses 
kindly,  and  are  satisfied  as  to  his  estate,  the  marriage  is  immedi 
ately  concluded,  so  that  the  young  man  may  consummate  it  the 
night  following.  The  wealth  which  the  most  able  among  them 
send  to  their  brides,  consists  of  seven  or  eight  of  their  scarfs  of 
silk  or  cotton,  with  which  the  women  cover  themselves  about  the 
waist,  as  many  little  waistcoats  of  the  same  stuff,  three  or  four 
hundred  bracelets  of  canes,  ten  or  twelve  rings  of  lattin,  or  deer's 
horn,  which  are  so  broad  that  they  hide  half  the  fingers,  and  so 
thick  that  when  the  ladies  have  them  on,  they  are  rather  a  trouble 
than  an  ornament  to  them,  four  or  five  girdles  of  coarse  cloth, 
ten  or  twelve  little  vestments,  which  they  call  Ethgrao,  and  are 


56  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

made  of  dog's  hair,  twenty  or  twenty-five  cangas,  or  China  gar 
ments,  a  bag  of  dog's  hair,  as  large  as  a  man  can  well  carry,  which 
they  call  in  their  language  Ayam  mamiang,  a  kind  of  head-gear, 
made  like  a  mitre  of  straw  and  dog's  hair,  and  lastly,  four  or  five 
pair  of  stockings  of  deer-skin,  so  that  all  put  together  may  amount 
to  about  forty  crowns  at  most.  Others,  who  are  not  so  rich,  give 
only  three  or  four  bracelets,  and  certain  garments,  all  not  amount 
ing  to  more  than  two  or  three  crowns. 

The  marriage  being  thus  concluded,  the  young  gallant  goes  in 
the  evening  to  his  bride,  at  her  father's  house,  and  endeavors  to 
get  in  by  stealth,  shunning  both  fire  and  light,  lest  he  should  be 
seen,  and  so  creeps  into  the  bed,  where  the  marriage  is  consum 
mated.  This  he  does  for  many  years  after  his  marriage,  leaving 
before  day,  and  returning  at  night  to  his  wife,  so  concealing  him 
self  from  those  of  the  household,  that  to  call  to  his  wife  for  to 
bacco,  or  any  thing  else  he  stands  in  need  of,  he  only  hems,  and 
permits  her  to  return  to  the  company  she  was  in  before.  The  rea 
son  why  this  course  is  pursued,  is,  that  it  is  thought  a  shame  for 
her  to  leave  her  relations,  to  go  to  her  husband.  Their  bedsteads 
are  made  of  bamboos,  or  canes.  A  baven  serves  for  a  bolster,  and 
a  deer-skin  for  a  bed  and  all  things  belonging  to  it. 

The  women  live  thus  with  their  fathers,  and  till  the  ground 
belonging  to  the  family,  while  the  husband  lives  at  his  own  house, 
and  provides  only  for  himself.  They  never  see  one  another  in  the 
day-time,  unless  they  appoint  it  to  be  in  some  remote  place,  where 
they  may  not  be  seen  speaking  together  ;  or,  unless  the  young 
man  goes  to  the  house,  when  he  knows  there  is  no  body  but  his 
wife  at  home  ;  yet  he  will  not  enter,  till  he  sends  some  one  to 
know  whether  it  may  be  done  without  any  inconvenience  to  her. 
If  she  thinks  fit  he  should  see  her,  she  comes  to  the  door,  and 
makes  him  a  sign  to  enter ;  but  if  she  desires  not  his  company, 
she  sends  him  away.  The  children  they  have  remain  with  the 
mother  till  they  are  thirteen  years  of  age,  and  then  the  father 
takes  them  home. 

As  soon  as  a  Formosan  is  weary  of  his  wife,  he  leaves  her,  and 
marries  another  ;  with  this  difference,  however,  that  if  he  puts  her 
away  without  a  cause,  the  presents  he  sent  her  shall  remain  hers  ; 
but  if  she  be  convicted  of  adultery,  or  chance  to  be  so  transported 
with  passion  as  to  revile  her  husband  in  words,  or  affront  him  other 
wise,  she  is  bound  to  make  restitution.  Divorce  is  reciprocally 
free  to  both  parties,  so  that  wedlock  no  more  obliges  the  women 
than  it  does  the  men  ;  and  it  often  happens  that  both  of  them 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  57 

change  their  conditions.  They  condemn  polygamy,  though  some 
of  them  marry  two  or  three  wives.  But  as  there  is  neither  law 
nor  magistrate  to  punish  any  crime  wherein  there  is  no  civil  con 
cernment,  this  remains  unpunished,  as  well  as  adultery  ;  for,  pro 
vided  they  can  conceal  it  from  their  own  wives,  and  her  husband, 
whom  they  abuse,  they  may  confidently  and  without  any  scandal, 
seek  their  fortunes  elsewhere.  A  man  never  finds  any  incestuous 
marriages  among  them  ;  nor  that  a  man  takes  a  wife  within  four 
degrees  of  consanguinity  or  affinity  ;  nor  do  they  care  a  man  should 
ask  after  their  wives,  as  how  they  do,  whether  they  be  handsome  or 
not,  of  what  friends  they  come,  &c. 

Boys,  from  four  years  of  age  and  upwards,  nay,  married  men, 
when  they  do  not  lodge  with  their  wives,  lie  not  in  their  houses, 
but  in  a  pagode  or  mosquite,  where  the  males  of  fourteen  or  fifteen 
families  meet  in  the  evening,  and  lie  there  upon  little  couches  or 
bedsteads  of  canes. 

Their  houses  are  spacious,  and  fairer  than  those  ordinarily 
seen  in  the  Indies.  They  are  all  raised  five  or  six  feet  from  the 
ground,  and  have  four  doors,  one  towards  every  quarter  of  the 
compass  ;  sqme  have  two  of  a  side,  and  are  three  or  four  stories  high. 
They  have  no  other  ornament  than  what  they  obtain  from  the 
heads  of  deer  and  wild  boars,  with  which  they  are  covered  both 
within  and  without.  You  find  in  them  only  certain  stuffs  with 
which  they  cover  themselves  ;  and  deer-skins,  which  in  their  trade 
with  the  Chinese,  is  to  them  instead  of  money.  All  the  household 
stuff  they  have  in  their  houses,  are  only  spades  to  dig  the  ground 
with,  pikes,  bows,  arrows,  and  some  other  arms.  But  what  they 
account  most  precious,  are  the  heads  or  other  trophies  taken  from 
their  enemies.  Instead  of  dishes,  they  use  little  troughs  of  wood, 
such  as  among  us  are  set  before  swine.  Their  drinking-pots  are  of 
earth  or  cane  ;  and  they  also  boil  their  rice  in  earthen  pots. 

Rice  is  their  ordinary  subsistence  ;  and  if  they  put  either  fish  or 
flesh  with  it,  ^  they  eat  not  of  it  till  it  be  corrupted  and  full  of 
worms.  Their  drink  is  not  bad,  especially  to  those  who  have  not 
over  weak  stomachs,  or  know  not  how  it  is  made  ;  but  on  the  con 
trary,  it  is  wholesome  and  very  pleasant. 

They  have  no  set  day  for  either  rest  or  devotion,  and  keep  no 
holydays  ;  yet  they  do  meet  on  certain  days  to  be  merry,  and  make 
good  cheer  ;  every  quarter  meeting  for  that  purpose,  in  its  own  pa- 
god<5,  whither  the  women  also  come,  dressed  in  the  richest  things 
they  have,  and  clad  after  such  a  manner  as  one  cannot  well  de 
scribe.  Their  richest  clothing  is  made  of  dog's  hair.  As  we  shear 


58  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

sheep  to  make  woollen  stuffs  of,  so  they  cut  off  the  hair  of  their 
dogs  once  a-year,  and  dying  it  red,  make  stuffs  of  it,  which  they 
esteem  as  highly  as  we  do  velvet  or  the  best  scarlet. 

The  ceremonies  here  performed  upon  the  death  of  any  one  are 
very  remarkable.  Immediately  after  the  decease  of  any  one,  they 
beat  a  drum  before  his  door  to  acquaint  the  village  therewith. 
This  drum  is  made  of  the  trunk  of  a  large  tree,  so  that  it  may  be 
heard  at  a  great  distance,  and  upon  that  noise  all  the  people  come 
to  the  door  of  the  deceased.  The  women  each  bring  a  pot  of  their 
arrack,  and  having  sufficiently  drank  to  the  memory  of  the  deceased, 
they  commence  dancing  upon  a  great  empty  round  chest,  so  that 
their  motion,  which  is  not  very  violent,  makes  a  dull  and  doleful 
noise,  suitable  to  the  sorrow  they  would  express.  Eight  or  ten 
women  at  a  time  get  upon  the  chest,  in  two  ranks,  who  turn  their 
backs  one  to  another,  and  gently  moving  their  arms  and  feet,  go 
several  times  about  the  chest,  till  such  time  as  they  think  fit  to 
make  way  for  others  ;  and  this  exercise  continues  about  two  hours. 
The  next  day,  or  two  days  after,  they  begin  to  think  of  the  body, 
not  in  order  to  burial,  as  we  do,  nor  to  burn  it,  but  to  dry  it.  To 
do  that,  they  make  in  some  part  of  the  house  a  scaffold  of  canes, 
raised  five  or  six  feet  from  the  ground,  to  which  they  fasten  the 
body  by  the  hands  and  feet,  and  they  make  a  great  fire  about  it  to 
dry  it,  killing,  in  the  meantime,  a  great  many  swine,  and  feasting 
for  nine  days  together  ;  during  which  time  they  wash  the  body 
every  day,  yet  that  does  not  hinder  the  whole  house,  nay,  indeed, 
the  neighborhood,  from  being  infected.  After  nine  days,  it  is  taken 
away,  to  be  wrapt  up  in  a  mat,  after  which  they  place  it  on  another 
scaffold,  higher  than  the  former,  and  surrounded  with  several  gar 
ments  like  a  pavilion,  and  then  they  reiterate  their  dancing  and 
feasting.  The  body  remains  in  this  condition  till  the  third  year, 
and  then  they  take  the  bones  out  of  it,  and  bury  them  in  some 
part  of  the  house,  with  the  same  ceremonies  of  feasting  and 
dancing. 

At  the  village  of  Theosang,  they  have  an  extraordinary  custom 
They  fasten  a  rope  about  the  necks  of  those  who  suffer  much  pain 
in  their  sickness,  raise  them  up  by  force  to  a  great  height,  and  let 
them  fall  down  with  great  violence  ;  by  which  means  they  are  in 
deed  put  out  of  all  further  pain. 

As  to  religion,  it  may  be  said  they  have  but  very  little.  Of  all 
the  inhabitants,  not  one  can  read  or  write,  and  yet  they  have  cer 
tain  traditions  upon  which  they  have  framed  a  certain  shadow  of 
religion  ;  for  they  believe  the  world  has  been  from  all  eternity,  and 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  59 

shall  last  eternally.  They  believe  the  immortality  of  the  soul ; 
and  thence  it  comes,  that  when  any  one  dies,  they  build  before  his 
door  a  little  hut  of  boughs  of  trees,  set  banners  at  the  four  corners, 
and  within  the  hut  a  wooden  vessel  full  of  water,  with  a  cane 
spoon,  being  persuaded  that  the  souls  of  the  deceased  return  every 
day  to  the  hut,  to  purify  themselves.  It  is  true,  most  of  them  do 
it  purely  in  compliance  with  custom,  knowing  not  the  reason  why  ; 
but  aged  persons  are  not  ignorant  of  it.  They  believe  also  that  souls 
shall  find  good  or  evil  in  the  other  life,  according  to  what  they 
have  done  in  this,  and  affirm,  that  to  go  out  of  this  world  into  the 
other,  they  pass  over  a  very  narrow  bridge  of  canes,  under  which 
runs  a  channel  full  of  all  kind  of  filth,  into  which  the  wicked  being 
fallen,  do  there  languish  eternally ;  but  that  the  good  souls  pass 
into  a  pleasant  and  delightful  country,  of  which  they  speak,  much 
after  the  manner  the  poets  speak  of  the  Elysian  fields.  But  there 
are  very  few  who  comprehend  these  mysteries,  or  think  of  any 
other  life  than  the  present. 

They  adore  several  pretended  divinities,  among  them  two — one 
called  Tamagisanhach  and  the  other  Sariahsingh.  The  former 
has  his  abode  in  the  south,  and  contributes  to  the  generation  of 
man,  who  receives  from  this  god  only  what  is  excellent  and  accep 
table  either  in  his  body  or  mind.  They  affirm  that  his  wife,  whom 
they  call  Taxankpanda,  lives  in  the  east,  from  whence  she  is 
heard  when  it  thunders  towards  that  quarter,  speaking  to  her  hus 
band,  Tainagisanhach,  and  chiding  him  for  suffering  the  earth  to 
be  too  long  without  rain,  and  her  husband  causes  it  immediately  to 
rain.  The  other  god  (Sariahsingh,)  has  his  retreat  in  the  north, 
and  destroys  all  the  excellency  which  Tamagisanhach  has  bestowed 
on  man,  by  disfiguring  his  face  with  the  small-pox,  and  sending 
him  several  other  conveniences.  Whence  it  comes  they  invoke 
them  both — one  that  they  may  not  be  injured  by  him,  and  the 
other  that  they  may  prevent  Sariasingh  from  doing  them  any  mis 
chief.  Besides  these,  they  have  two  other  gods°  who  have  the 
oversight  of  war,  named  Talasula  and  Tapaliape  ;  but  they  are 
invoked  only  by  the  men. 

We  believe  that  there  is  not  any  nation  but  makes  use  of  men 
in  their  religious  service  of  their  divinity,  but  here  the  women  only 
are  employed  for  the  purpose.  They  call  them  Inibs,  and  all  their 
worship  consists  of  prayer  and  sacrifices.  The  sacrifices  and  of 
ferings  which  they  make  their  gods,  are  swine,  rice,  areca,  some  of 
their  kind  of  drink,  deer,  and  wild  boar's  heads.  Having  fed 
heartily  upon  them,  the  priestesses  rise,  and  make  a  long  prayer, 


60  JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE. 

during  which  one  shall  see  their  eyes  turning  in  their  heads ;  they 
then  fall  to  the  ground,  and  make  dreadful  cries  and  shrieks.  Af 
ter  these  eiforts,  they  lie  down  upon  the  ground,  immovable  as  sta 
tues,  and  become  so  heavy  that  five  or  six  persons  can  hardly  raise 
them.  It  is  while  they  are  in  this  posture,  as  they  affirm,  that 
their  gods  communicate  themselves  to  them,  for  an  hour  or  more. 
Then  they  get  on  the  top  of  the  pagode,  go  from  one  end  of  it  to 
the  other,  and  there  say  their  prayers  again ;  which  being  ended, 
they  strip  themselves  entirely  naked. 

Every  house  has  a  particular  place  appointed  for  the  devotions 
of  the  family,  where  they  invocate  the  gods,  and  where  the  women 
make  their  offerings  of  what  is  spent  every  day  in  the  house  ;  but 
in  case  of  sickness,  or  some  other  misfortune,  they  call  the  Inibs  to 
do  that  service,  which  is  performed  with  many  extravagant  cere 
monies.  They  also  pretend  to  foretell  good  and  ill  fortune,  rain 
and  fair  weather,  and  to  have  the  power  to  drive  away  the  devil, 
after  a  very  ridiculous  manner.  They  pursue  him  with  a  great 
noise,  having  a  Japanese  knife  in  their  hand,  and  affirm 'that  by 
that  means,  they  drive  him  away  so  far  as  that  he  is  forced  to 
cast  himself  into  the  sea,  or  at  least  into  some  river,  where  he  is 
drowned.  There  are  to  be  seen  also  at  cross-ways  and  upon  great 
roads  a  kind  of  altars,  laden  with  offerings  for  their  gods,  and  many 
other  absurd  devotions  may  be  observed  among  them,  which  the 
Dutch  have  endeavored  to  abolish  by  degrees,  by  introducing 
Christianity  into  the  country,  in  which  they  have  hitherto  had 
very  good  success. 

The  ceremonies  observed  among  the  Formosans  at  the  placing  of 
the  first  bamboo  of  a  house,  but  more  particularly  that  of  a  tem 
ple,  which  bears  a  very  near  affinity  to  our  laying  the  first  stone, 
are  very  particular.  Upon  cutting  the  bamboo,  a  particular  prayer 
is  addressed  to  the  Deity  who  presides  over  the  building.  Before 
they  enter  upon  their  work,  a  considerable  quantity  of  pinang  and 
rice  are  presented  to  the  gods,  who  are  formally  invited  to  come 
and  take  possession  of  their  new  tenement,  to  protect  it,  &c.  Af 
ter  this,  every  one  present  is  obliged  to  give  an  account  of  what 
dreams  he  had  the  preceding  night ;  and  he  who  was  the  most 
happy  in  his  slumbers,  sets  the  first  hand  to  the  new  undertaking. 
He  presents  pinang,  and  some  such  liquor  as  is  provided  for  that 
purpose,  to  the  gods,  and  begs  of  them  to  incline  him  to  be  dili 
gent  and  industrious.  When  the  fabric  is  reared  to  a  certain  height, 
the  proprietor  goes  in  and  makes  an  oblation  for  every  one  present, 
without  exception.  When  they  have  made  such  progress  as  that 


1    JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  61 

nothing  is  wanting  but  to  raise  the  roof,  before  it  is  covered,  there 
are  several  particular  women  employed  to  discover  by  their  art  of 
divination,  whether  the  edifice  will  be  durable.  For  this  purpose 
they  take  bamboos,  and  fill  them  with  water,  and  squirt  it  out  of 
their  mouths.  The  manner  in  which  this  stream  flows  down  upon 
the  ground,  determines  the  duration  of  the  fabric.  The  cere 
mony  concludes  in  a  long  series  of  excessive  drinking,  in  honor  to 
the  gods  who  are  invited  to  their  revels  by  a  form  of  prayer,  in 
which  they  implore  their  aid  and  assistance,  and  present  them 
a  lumper.  The  sacrifice  of  a  hog  is  a  kind  of  assurance  of  good 
success  to  the  new  erection,  as  well  as  to  the  proprietor.  The 
head  of  the  victim  which  is  sacrificed,  must  be  turned  towards 
the  east,  because  the  god  who  resides  in  that  quarter  is  superior  to 
all  the  rest.  The  victim  is  cut  all  to  pieces,  but  in  such  a  man 
ner  as  that  the  head  is  preserved  entire  :  And  those  sacred  relics 
are  laid  upon  everything  on  which  they  are  desirous  to  draw  down  the 
benediction  of  the  gods — on  their  coffers,  for  instance,  that  they 
may  be  filled  with  riches  ;  on  their  swords  and  bucklers,  that  they 
may  be  inspired  with  courage  and  resolution  to  vanquish  their  ene 
mies,  &c.  As  to  the  priestess,  she  is  always  handsomely  recom 
pensed  for  her  prayers  and  pains  ;  besides  which,  she  is  always  al 
lowed  a  considerable  share  of  the  sacrifice,  and  always  maintains 
her  interest  in  these  idolaters,  who  imagine,  after  such  sacrifices, 
the  devil  dares  not  touch  the  least  thing  whatever  which  belongs  to 
them. 

Their  festivals  are  spent,  for  the  most  part,  in  the  sacrifice  of 
hogs.  They  drink  at  them  to  great  excess,  and  recount  their 
dreams,  their  debauches,  and  their  triumphs,  &c.,  and  sometimes 
they  strip  themselves  naked  when  they  pay  their  adoration  to  their 
deities.  At  some  of  their  festivals,  the  men  will  appear  all  naked, 
at  others  the  women,  and  sometimes  again  the  men  and  the  women 
promiscuously,  without  any  regard  to  decency  or  distinction  of 
sex.  The  extravagant  deportment  of  the  sect  called  the  Ada 
mite^  who  used  to  strip  themselves  naked  in  their  assemblies,  seve 
ral  years  ago,  makes  this  practice  of  the  Formosans  somewhat 
more  easy  to  be  believed. 


JAPANESE    ISLANDS. 


[From  MALTE    BRUN'S    Geography,  3  vols.,  4to.    Boston  :  1836.] 


JAPAN  ;     THE    ISLANDS    OF    IESSO  J     THE     KURILE,     AND     LOO-CHOO 
ISLANDS.       CRITICAL    INQUIRIES    ON    IESSO. 

To  the  east  of  Mantchooria  lies  the  basin  of  the  Sea  of  Japan, 
the  north  end  of  which  has  been  named  by  La  Perouse,  the  Chan 
nel  of  Tartary.  Steep  shores,  destitute  of  large  rivers,  surround 
this  dark,  foggy,  and  tempestuous  mediterranean.  On  the  north 
it  communicates  by  two  straits  with  the  Sea  of  Okhotsk.  One  of 
them,  near  the  mouth  of  the  river  Amur,  separating  the  continent 
from  Seghalien  Island,  is  choked  up  with  sand  covered  with  reeds, 
and  does  not  admit  the  passage  even  of  a  small  boat.  La  Perouse 's 
Strait,  known  formerly  under  the  name  of  the  Strait  of  Tessoi, 
affords,  on  the  east,  a  passage  into  the  Sea  of  lesso,  a  part  of  the 
Sea  of  Okhotsk.  The  Strait  of  Songaar  forms  a  communication 
between  the  Sea  of  Japan  and  the  great  Eastern  Ocean,  or  rather, 
what  is  called  the  Northern  Pacific.  On  the  south,  the  Strait  of 
Corea  opens  into  the  Chinese  seas.  A  chain  of  considerable  islands 
forms  the  barrier  by  which  the  Japanese  Mediterranean  is  separated 
from  the  Great  Ocean  ;  and  this  chain,  which  is  more  than  sixteen 
hundred  miles*  long,  is  connected  again  with  the  Kurile  Islands  on 
the  north-east  and  with  those  of  Loo-choo  on  the  south.  The 
Japanese  occupy  the  greater  part  of  these  islands. 

In  the  north  of  the  Japanese  Empire,  two  great  islands  form, 
with  a  number  of  small  ones,  an  independent  Archipelago.  It  is 
here  that  geographical  criticism  amused  itself  with  sketching  the 
famous  country  of  lesso.  At  first  it  was  believed  that  this  country, 
known  by  its  connection  with  Japan,  was  a  continent  or  a  large 
island  between  Asia  and  America ;  then  it  was  confounded  with 

*  "  600  Fr.  leagues." 


64  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

Kamtchatka,  or  rather  was  joined  with  the  country  then  called 
Russian-Tartary,  for  Kamtchatka  was  not  known  till  1696. 

At  last,  the  voyage  of  the  Dutch  navigator,  De  Yries,  command 
ing  the  ship  Castricom,  threw  the  first  ray  of  light  on  this  part  of 
the  world.  It  was  found  to  a  certainty  that  these  lands  were  as 
much  separated  from  the  continent  of  Asia  on  the  north-east  as 
from  Japan  on  the  south.  But  three  points  continued  doubtful. 
The  land  seen  by  De  Vries  presented  one  well  marked  island,  the 
States  Island ;  but  to  the  east,  the  extent  of  the  Company's  Land 
was  vaguely  understood.  Some  accounts  of  little  authenticity,  and 
among  others  that  of  Jean  de  Gama,  gave  rise  to  the  idea  that  this 
land  extended  to  America.  On  the  other  hand,  the  Castricom 
having  coasted  the  land  of  Matsumai  or  lesso  on  the  east  and 
north-east,  was  repelled  from  the  Strait  of  Tessoi  by  the  currents. 
The  fogs  prevented  her  even  from  seeing  it ;  and  when  she  touched 
on  the  southern  and  eastern  coast  of  Seghalien  Island,  it  was  con 
sidered  as  forming  a  continuation  of  lesso.  Some  geographers 
might  thus  have  believed  that  all  these  coasts,  instead  of  forming 
two  islands,  belonged  to  the  same  peninsula  of  Chinese  Tartary. 
The  log-book  of  the  Dutch  vessel,  the  Breske,  not  having  been 
consulted,  it  was  not  known  that  the  navigators  belonging  to  that 
ship  had  determined  the  Strait  of  Songaar  to  be  such  as  we  now 
know  it.*  The  north  point  of  Japan  being  placed  two  or  three 
degrees  too  far  south,  created  an  immense  gap  between  that  coun 
try  and  lesso,  where  the  Japanese  charts  laid  down  a  very  narrow 
arm  of  the  sea.f  About  the  same  time,  some  particulars  were 
known  through  the  Chinese  missionaries  respecting  the  Island  of 
Seghalien,  and  the  existence  of  a  strait  called  Tessoi.  The  Jesuit, 
Father  Des  Anges,  even  saw  this  strait,  described  its  terrible  cur 
rents,  and  learned  that  the  land  beyond  it,  the  Island  of  Seghalien, 
was  named  Amo-Moxori.  This  name  signifies  the  Isle  of  the 
Ainos  ;J  but  in  1620  this  name  had  no  meaning  among  geogra 
phers,  and  they  could  draw  from  it  no  conclusion.  D'Anville 
made  two  attempts  to  delineate  these  countries,  and  by  a  chance 
not  uncommon  in  geographical  criticism,  his  last  idea  was  the  most 
remote  from  the  truth.  He  gave  the  Strait  of  Tessoi  its  proper 
place,  but  he  connected  the  south  part  of  the  Island  of  Seghalien, 

*  Witsen,  Noord-en-Oost-Tartarye,  2d  edt.  p.  138. 

t  Knempfer's  Japan,  I.  78.  (Dohm's  German  edition.) 

|  Jlino,   the  name  of  the  nation  or  people  which  inhabits  lesso,  the 

Kuriles  and  Seghulien.     Modjeri,  island.     Vocabulary  of  the  language 

of  lesso,  communicated  in  MS.  by  M.  Titsingh. 


THE     PAGOD     OF     THE     JAPANESE     IDOL  DAYBOT. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  65 

or  A'ino-Moxori,  with  the  continent  of  Mantchooria,  then  called 
rhine.se-Tartary,  and  figured  this  same  island,  under  very  small 
dimensions,  opposite  to  the  mouth  of  the  river  Amur.* 

The  Russians,  in  visiting  the  Kurile  Islands  adjoining  their  pos 
sessions  in  Kamtchatka,  necessarily  arrived  at  lesso.  The  Cossack 
Kosirewski  reached,  in  1713,  the  Isle  of  Koonasheer,  making  part 
of  the  coast  of  the  lesso  of  the  Dutch.  In  1736,  Spangenberg,  a 
Dane,  in  the  Russian  service,  examined  the  Isles  of  Ooroop,  or  the 
Company's  Land  ;  that  of  Atorkoo,  which  is  States  Island  ;  also 
Koonasheer,  Tchikotan,  and  Matsunmi,  or  lesso.  He  even  made 
Japan,  but  he  had  neither  ships  nor  instruments  corresponding  to 
his  talents  and  his  courage.  At  last  the  Russian  Potouchkew,  in 
1777,  sailed  by  the  west,  round  the  Islands  of  Atorkoo  and  Ooroop. 
These  discoveries  were  placed  too  far  to  the  south, t  from  the 
respect  paid  to  geographical  systems  on  the  position  of  Songaar. 
Two  bad  sketches  of  these  discoveries,  taken  from  the  Russian 
records,  and  published  by  M.  Lesseps,  completed  the  mass  of 
confusion  and  fruitless  conjecture  in  which  the  subject  was  in 
volved. 

At  last  the  unfortunate  La  Perouse  commenced  the  discovery 
of  the  true  method.  He  entered  by  the  Sea  of  Japan,  found  the 
channel  which  separates  Mantchooria  from  the  countries  of  lesso, 
penetrated  to  the  sandy  shallow  strait  which  separates  these  coun 
tries  from  the  continent,  traversed  another  strait  to  which  his  name 
has  since  been  properly  given,  and  thus  obtained  for  us  a  view  of 
this  Archipelago  altogether  new. 

The  English  navigator,  Broughton,  has  confirmed  the  correctness 
of  the  Dutch  charts  and  those  of  Kaempfer,  with  regard  to  the 
Strait  of  Songaar  or  Matsumai.  In  consequence  of  the  investiga 
tions  of  this  gentleman,  the  northern  coast  of  Japan  has  obtained 
its  right  position  in  latitude.  But  Broughton  has  given  geographers 
a  new  subject  of  dispute,  by  maintaining  that  there  is  no  strait  be 
tween  Mantchooria  and  Seghalien  Island. 

La  Perouse,  forced  by  winds  and  other  circumstances  to  leave 
this  channel  before  he  had  explored  it  to  the  end,  had  interrogated 
with  much  care  the  natives  both  of  the  island  and  of  the  continent. 
The  former  assured  him  that  their  country  was  surrounded  with 

*  D'Anville,  Carte  ge'ne'rale  de  la  Tartarie  Chinoise  et  Carte  de 
1'Asie,  IIe  part.— Ph.  Buache,  Consid.  He'og.  et  Phys.  sur  les  Ddcouv. 
p.  75,  &c. 

f  Charts  of  the  Russian  discoveries,  published  at'  Petersburg!!,  1773 
and  1787. 


66  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

water,  and  gave  him  a  sketch  of  the  strait  which  separated  it  from 
the  continent.*  The  people  of  the  continent  told  him  that  the 
boats  which  came  from  the  mouth  of  the  river  Amur  to  the  bay  of 
De  Castries,  were  dragged  over  a  narrow  isthmus  of  sandy  ground 
covered  with  sea-weeds.  |  This  navigator  remarked,  besides,  that 
the  depth  of  the  water  rapidly  decreased  at  the  extremity  of  the 
channel,  and  that  no  current  was  perceivable  in  it.  He  seems  to 
have  been  satisfied  that  the  strait  existed,  but  that,  obstructed  by 
sand  and  sea-weeds,  it  only  afforded  a  narrow  passage  to  small 
boats.  Broughton  goes  farther.  He  says,  that  having  been  twenty- 
two  milesj  farther  to  the  north  than  La  Perouse,  he  arrived  at  a 
bay  which  was  only  two  fathoms  deep,  and  which  was  shut  in  on  all 
sides  by  a  low  and  sandy  ground.  He  is  persuaded  that  this  tongue 
of  land,  which  was  examined  by  his  boats,  is  in  no  part  interrupted, 
and  that  Seghalien  is  a  peninsula.  Mr.  Krusenstern,  who  did  not 
go  near  this  strait,  but  visited  that  which  is  situated  to  the  north 
of  the  mouth  of  the  river  Seghalien,  supports  the  opinion  of 
Broughton  by  extended  reasonings.  §  The  water  which  he  found 
in  the  gulf  formed  by  this  river  being  almost  fresh,  furnished  a 
specious  argument,  which  appeared  decisive  to  him  and  his  com 
panions.  If  the  Grulf  of  Seghalien  communicated  ever  so  little 
with  the  Channel  of  Tartary,  the  salt  waters  of  that  arm  of  the 
sea  would  have  mingled  with  those  of  the  gulf.  M.  de  Krusen 
stern  supports  his  views  by  the  testimony  of  the  inhabitants  of  De 
Castries  Bay,  quoted  by  La  Perouse,  and  by  the  observations  of 
Broughton,  and  says,  he  entertains  no  doubt  of  the  existence 
of  a  sandy  isthmus,  rendering  the  land  of  Seghalien  a  peninsula ; 
but  he  thinks  that  this  is  of  very  recent  formation,  and  that  Segha 
lien  was  really  to  be  considered  as  an  island  at  the  time  when  even 
the  modern  Japanese  and  Chinese  charts  were  constructed,  all  of 
which  represent  it  as  detached  from  the  continent. 

It  is  to  be  regretted  that  nautical  arid  political  considerations 
prevented  Krusenstern  from  substantiating  on  the  spot  the  existence 
of  this  isthmus.  His  reasonings  as  they  stand  are  not  unanswerable. 
Two  or  three  windings  of  the  beach,  some  islets  and  sand-banks, 
two  or  three  narrow  canals  filled  with  the  enormous  rushes  which 
grow  over  the  whole  of  this  coast,  encumbered  also  with  floating  mea- 

*  La  Perouse,  III.  p.  36.  f  Idem.  p.  72. 

J  "  8  Fr.  leagues." 

§  Krusenstern's  Voyage  Round  the  World,  II.  p.  191—195.  (Original 
German  edition.) 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  67 

dows  of  sea-weeds,  would  afford  a  sufficient  explanation  of  the  fact 
that  the  salt  water  of  the  Channel  of  Tartary  did  not  extend  to  the 
Grulf  of  Seghalien.  If  to  the  west  of  this  shallow  strait  there  is  a 
tongue  of  low  land  almost  divided  by  two  small  rivers,  as  there 
certainly  is  one  to  the  north  of  the  mouth  of  the  Amur,  at  the 
place  which  the  Russians  call  Gilazkaia  Perewoloca,  and  the 
Chinese  Gok*  it  is  quite  natural  to  suppose  that  the  people  of  the 
continent  have  sometimes  dragged  their  light  boats  over  such  a 
stripe  of  land,  to  avoid  the  difficult  navigation  of  the  strait  itself. 
This  is  what  the  Cossacks  of  the  seventeenth  century  did,  when 
coming  down  the  Amur,  and  wishing  to  reach  Udskoi,  they  pre 
ferred  carrying  their  boats  over  the  tongue  of  land  Gilazkaia,  to 
the  plan  of  doubling  the  promontory,  which  M.  Krusenstern  calls 
Cape  Romberg.  According  to  this  hypothesis,  which  is  singularly 
favored  by  the  very  remarkable  details  of  a  map  of  M.  D'Anville,f 
we  may  conceive  how  Broughton  may  have  been  deceived  by  mis 
taking  a  cove  in  the  strait  for  the  strait  itself.  Besides,  if  this 
navigator  found  a  sandy  isthmus,  even  supposing  it  to  have  been  of 
considerable  width,  why  did  he  not  perceive  the  sea  on  its  opposite 
side  ? 

For  these  reasons,  till  such  time  as  new  light  is  thrown  on  the 
question,  every  candid  geographer  will  retain  the  strait  pointed  out 
by  D'Anville,  by  the  missionaries,  and  by  the  Chinese  and  Japanese 
charts,  as  separating  Seghalien,  or  Tchoka,  as  it  is  also  called,  from 
the  continent  of  Mantchooria. 

Krusenstern  examined  with  great  care  the  western  shores  of  the 
Isle  of  lesso,  and  the  south-eastern  and  northern  shores  of  Segha 
lien  Island.  His  account,  and  those  of  La  Perouse  and  Broughton, 
are  the  only  published  sources  from  which  certain  ideas  can  be 
formed  of  this  Archipelago  ;  but  the  kindness  of  M.  Titsingh,  a 
Dutch  gentleman  who  resided  a  long  time  at  Japan,  enables  us  to 
avail  ourselves  of  two  Japanese  descriptions  for  details  which  throw 
a  new  light  on  the  geography  and  history  of  these  countries.  One 
is  called  "  leso-Ki,  or  a  description  of  lesso,  by  Arai-Tsikogo-no- 
Kami,  instructor  of  the  Ziogoen  (military  emperor)  Tsoena-Josi," 
written  in  1720.  The  other  is  called  "  leso-Ki,  or  a  description 
of  lesso,  with  the  history  of  the  rebellion  of  Samsay-In,  by  Kan- 
namon,  Japanese  interpreter,"  written  in  1752.  Besides  these, 

*  Muller's  Memoir  on  the  River  Amur,  in  Busching's  Geog.  Mag.  II. 
607,  508. 

f  Asie,  IIP  part.  2e  feuille. 


68  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

M.  Titsingh  has  communicated  an  account  of  two  Japanese  maps, 
which  appear  in  a  periodical  work,  entitled  the  "  Annales  des  Voy 
ages."  We  shall  take  the  northern  coast  of  Japan  for  our  point 
of  departure. 

The  Isle  of  Matsumai,  situated  to  the  north  of  that  of  Niphon, 
is  called  in  the  Japanese  language  lesso,  or  "  the  Coast ;"  it  also 
receives  the  name  of  Mo-Sin,  or  "  the  Hairy  Bodies."  The  Mo- 
Sins  formerly  occupied  the  northern  parts  of  Japan  as  far  as  the 
mountain  Ojama.  Driven  back  into  their  own  island,  they  have 
there  been  repeatedly  subdued ;  and  it  is  only  in  the  south 
part  of  the  Island  of  Seghalien  that  they  preserve  their  indepen 
dence.  According  to  Krusenstern,  the  Mo-Sins  call  themselves 
Ainos.*  This  nation  is  distinguished  from  the  Japanese  by  a 
stature  somewhat  taller,  and  a  more  robust  frame.  They  have 
very  thick  black  beards,  and  the  hair  of  their  heads  is  black  and 
somewhat  frizzled.  Both  the  men  and  women  tattoo  their  lips 
with  figures  of  flowers  and  animals.  The  rich  among  them  dress 
in  Japanese  or  Chinese  manufactures  ;  the  common  people  wear  a 
stuff  made  of  a  fibre  obtained  from  a  species  of  willow  bark.  At 
the  early  age  of  ten  the  children  learn  to  dive  in  the  sea,  and  to 
leap  over  tight  ropes.  The  Ainos  excel  in  both  exercises.  Some 
of  them  can  leap  six  or  seven  feet  high.  They  hunt  the  deer  ; 
their  principal  arms  are  the  bow  and  arrows.  Small  detachments 
of  Japanese  can  beat  thousands  of  the  Ainos.  The  hereditary 
chiefs  of  the  villages  acknowledge  themselves  the  vassals  of  the 
Japanese  Prince  of  Matsumai,  and  pay  him  a  tribute  of  the  skins 
of  otters,  seals,  bears,  elks  and  beavers,  likewise  of  salmon,  fal 
cons,  and  other  productions  of  their  country.  They  live  together 
without  established  laws,  and  almost  without  religious  worship  ;  at 
least  a  few  libations  and  the  lighting  of  fires  in  honor  of  Kamoi,  a 
Japanese  deity,  are  the  only  religious  ceremonies  that  have  been 
observed  among  them.  They  have  no  alphabet  and  no  coin. 
They  trade  entirely  by  barter.  They  repair  to  one  of  the  Kurile 
islands,  lay  down  their  goods  on  the  beach,  and  return  on  board 
their  vessels ;  the  Kurilians  come  down,  examine  the  goods,  and 
place  their  own  by  the  side  of  them  ;  and  by  a  series  of  such  nego- 
ciations  in  dumb  show  their  bargains  are  concluded.  They  allow 
polygamy ;  adultery  they  resent  and  revenge.  If  an  attempt  is 
made  by  a  married  woman  to  seduce  a  man,  he  demands  her  ear 
rings,  and  with  these  pledges  in  his  hand  he  is  safe  from  the  at- 

*  Krusensteru's  Voyage,  II.  p.  74. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  69 

tacks  of  the  injured  husband.  Brothers  marry  their  sisters.  Their 
tribes  are  so  many  separate  family  associations,  which  seldom  form 
mutual  alliances.  Their  lamentations  for  the  dead  are  expressed  by 
mock-fights  among  the  relations,  in  which  bloody  wounds  are  some 
times  inflicted.  To  these  curious  accounts  given  by  the  Japanese 
writers,  very  little  has  been  added  by  European  navigators.  Brough- 
ton  informs  us  that  these  people  are  uncommonly  hairy  over  the 
whole  body.  Krusenstern  considers  this  statement  as  an  exagge 
ration,  although  it  is  supported  by  the  testimony  of  the  Dutch,  and 
appears  to  be  confirmed  by  the  Japanese  accounts. 

The  language  of  the  Amos  seems  to  be  equally  foreign  to  the 
Japanese,  the  Mantchoo,  and  the  Kamtchadale.  On  comparing 
about  a  hundred  well-chosen  words  with  the  corresponding  terms 
in  several  of  the  languages  of  Asia,  and  of  Oceanica,  we  can  find 
no  indication  of  affinity  ;  but  a  more  intimate  acquaintance  with 
the  structure  and  the  roots  of  many  of  these  languages  would  be 
requisite  to  enable  us  to  pronounce  with  any  decision  on  the  ques 
tion.  This  language,  though  less  sonorous  and  less  mellow  than 
the  Japanese,  has  no  savage  rudeness  in  its  articulation. 

The  following  are  a  few  specimens  of  it : — 


Night,  atziroo. 

Man,  okkay. 

(In  Japanese  otoko.) 

Woman,  mennokoosi. 

Father,  fanpe. 

Mother,  tafoo. 

(In  Japanese  fa-fa.) 

Fire,  abe* 


Heaven,  likita. 

Earth,  sirikata. 

Sun,  tofskaf. 

Moon,  koonetsoo. 

Stars,  noro. 

Mountain,  kimla. 

Island,  modjiri. 

Shore,  siri. 

Day,  tokaf. 

The  Isle  of  lesso  presents  on  all  sides  lofty  mountains,  covered 
with  a  beautiful  verdure.  The  name  In-soo,  given  to  the  island, 
according  to  Broughton,  expresses  this  circumstance — the  first  syl 
lable  signifying  high,  and  the  second,  green."\  It  abounds  with 
firs,  willows,  and  many  other  trees.  TussilagosJ  and  the  Kamt- 
chatkan  lily§  thrive  in  it,  showing  that  the  climate  is  moist  and 
cold.  There  are  many  creeping  shrubs.  The  reeds  have  the 
same  enormous  size  as  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  Amur.  Among 
the  cultivated  vegetables  of  which  trials  have  been  made  by  the 
Japanese,  millet,  peas,  and  beans,  have  succeeded.  The  animals 

*  Ieso-Ki  of  Kannamon,  MS.  f  In-tsooi. 

\  Colt's-Foot.  §  "  Lis  saranne." 


70  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

of  the  island  are  eagles,  three  sorts  of  falcons,  bears,  and  deer. 
They  take  the  bears  when  very  young,  give  them  to  their  women 
to  sucklo,  bring  them  up  like  favorite  dogs  or  pigs,  and,  when 
grown  up,  confine  them  in  cages  till  fat  enough  for  killing.  The 
family  mourn  over  the  death,  yet  eat  the  body  of  the  animal ;  a 
custom  which  reminds  us  of  the  Ostiaks.*  Otters  and  seals  are 
described  by  the  two  Japanese  authors,  under  many  different 
names.  Whales  come  to  the  bays  and  river-mouths  in  quest  of 
the  immense  swarms  of  vising,  a  kind  of  sprats,  which  are  found 
there.  Salmon  also  abound  to  such  a  degree  that  they  may  be 
taken  with  the  hand.  The  sea-leech  is  caught  and  sold  to  the 
Japanese.  Several  of  the  fuci  are  used  as  common  articles  of 
food. 

Matsumai,|  or  "  the  Town  of  the  Strait,"  (Matsi  being  the  word 
for  a  strait),  is  built  near  the  south  end  of  the  island.  It  is  a  Ja 
panese  fortress,  and  inaccessible  by  land.  Other  military  posts 
extend  along  the  western  coast  all  the  way  to  the  northern  point. 
In  coasting  the  western  shore,  we  meet  with  the  islands  of  Osima, 
Kosima,  Okosiri,  Riosiri,  (which  contains  the  Pic  de  Langle  of  La 
PerouseJ),  and  Hefoonsiri.  The  large  gulf  which  extends  into 
the  country,  is  called  by  the  Russians  the  Gulf  of  Strogonof. 
The  last  station  to  the  north  is  Notsjiab,  the  Notzamboo  of  Kru- 
senstern.§  Soyea  is  on  a  bay  farther  to  the  east.  On  the  north 
west  coast  the  A'inos,  though  subject  to  Japan,  live  by  themselves. 
Atkis,  their  principal  village,  is  on  the  north-east  coast.  A  Rus 
sian  officer,  M.  Laxmann,  visited  in  1792  the  harbor  of  Kimoro, 
which  belongs  to  it.j|  M.  Titsingh's  manuscript  contains  no  such 
name  as  this  last  ;**  but  Atkis  is  indicated  under  that  of  Atskesi. 
A  firth  or  strait  which  has  received  no  name,  separates  the  Isle  of 
lesso  from  that  of  Chikotan,  one  of  the  Kurile  islands,  claimed  by 
the  Japanese.  The  south-east  coast  has  been  surveyed  by  the 
Dutch  and  by  Broughton.  The  country  is  covered  with  magnifi 
cent  forests.  Volcano  Bay  is  a  circular  basin  of  a  very  picturesque 
appearance.  There  is  every  reason  to  suspect  the  existence  of  a 
volcano  in  a  state  of  activity  in  this  quarter,  although  it  has  not 
been  positively  ascertained.  The  Japanese  divide  this  island  into 
five  districts,  but  we  are  unacquainted  with  their  respective  limits. 

*  See  Book  XXXVIII.  p.  356,  (Malte  Brun.)  f  "  Matsimai." 

|  Krusenstern's  Voyage,  II.  56.  §  Idem.  II.  60. 

||  Storch's  Russia  under  Alexander  I.  fascic.  6— (In  German.) 
**  "  Among  two  hundred  proper  names." 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  71 

To  the  north  of  the  Island  of  Matsumai,  the  long  Island  of  Se- 
ghalicu  extends,  called  by  the  Japanese  Oku  lesso,  or  the  Upper 
lesso,  sometimes  Kita  lesso,  which  means  either  Northern  lesso, 
or  the  lesso  of  Kitay,  (China.)  The  Amos,  according  to  our  Ja 
panese  geographers,  call  it  Karato,  to  which  name  the  Japanese 
add  the  termination  sima,  signifying  island.  According  to  Kru- 
senstern,  the  name  given  to  it  by  the  natives  is  Saldan  ;  according 
to  La  Perouse,  Tchoka, ;  but  the  latter  appears  to  be  only  the 
name  of  a  leading  village,  which  is  written  Tchuchin,  on  M. 
D  Anville's  map.  The  other  two  names  may  probably  also  turn 
out  to  be  local. 

La  Perouse,  who  visited  the  west  coast,  gives  a  very  favorable 
account  of  this  people,  taken  in  a  moral  point  of  view.  The  in 
telligence  of  these  poor  islanders  struggles  against  a  severe  climate. 
They  live  by  fishing  and  hunting.  They  tattoo  their  persons,  and, 
like  the  Amos  of  lesso,  they  make  stuffs  of  the  willow  bark.  Their 
language  contains  some  German  and  some  Mantchoo  terms.  A 
boat  in  their  language  is  kahani,  in  German,  kahn.  The  word 
ship  has  exactly  the  same  meaning  with  them  as  in  English.*  So 
has  the  word  two,  as  pronounced  by  the  English.  In  lesso  tsoot- 
soob  is  the  word  for  the  number  two.  This  island,  very  high  in 
the  middle,  becomes  flat  towards  the  south  end,  where  it  seems  to 
have  a  soil  favorable  for  cultivation.  Vegetation  is  extremely 
vigorous.  Pines,  willows,  oaks,  and  birches,  are  the  principal 
forest  trees.  The  surrounding  sea  is  full  of  fish.  The  rivers  and 
streams  abound  in  salmon  and  trout  of  the  best  quality.  The  hills 
are  covered  with  rose  trees,  with  angelica,  and  Kamtchatkan 
lilies.t 

Krusenstern  examined  Aniwa  Bay  at  the  south  end  of  the  island. 
Here  the  Japanese  had  an  establishment,  which  the  Russians  have 
destroyed  ;  and  it  is  supposed  that  the  latter  nation  mean  to  colo 
nize  it.  The  whole  eastern  coast,  examined  by  the  same  navigator, 
presented  woody  valleys,  behind  which  mountains  covered  with 
snow  seemed  to  lose  themselves  in  the  clouds.  J  At  the  51st  de 
gree  of  latitude  the  ground  becomes  low,  and  nothing  is  to  be  seen 
except  sandy  downs  and  hills. §  The  south  part  is  inhabited  by 
the  Amos.  The  east  coast  seems  to  be  uninhabited ;  the  north- 

*  "  Chip,  vaisseau  ;  ship."   The  translation  above  is  correct,  if  the  word 
chip  is  spelt  after  the  French  orthography. — P. 
t  Voyage  de  M.  La  Perouse,  IV.  p.  73.  III.  40,  43. 
}  Krusenstern,  II.  p.  92,  96,  144.  §  Idem.  p.  153. 


72  JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE. 

west  coast,  near  the  mouth  of  the  river  Amur,  is  occupied  by  a 
colony  of  Mantchoos. 

To  the  north-east  of  the  Isle  of  lesso,  a  chain  of  islands  ex 
tends  all  the  way  to  the  south  point  of  Kamtchatka.  The  Rus 
sians  call  them  the  KurUes.  They  reckon  twenty-two  of  them, 
including  lesso.  The  inhabitants  of  this  last  isle  reckon  thirty- 
six,  which  they  comprehend  under  the  name  of  Kooroo-Misi,  which 
is  probably  of  Japanese  etymology,  and  signifies  the  "Road  of 
Sea-weeds  ;^  kooroo,  signifying  a  species  of  fucus,  and  mitsi,  a  road. 
The  charts  in  Krusenstern's  voyage  lay  down  only  twenty-six  ;  the 
others  will  be  discovered  when  the  eastern  shore  of  lesso  is  better 
explored.  D'Anville  lays  down  twenty-nine  to  the  north  of  the 
Boussole  channel,  and  thirty-four  in  all.  This  Archipelago  is  na 
turally  divided  into  two  parts,  the  chain  on  the  south  of  the  Bous 
sole  channel,  and  that  on  the  north.  The  one  which  is  nearest 
lesso,  and  is  claimed  by  the  Japanese  government,  may  be  called 
the  Great  Kuriles  ;  and  the  other,  adjoining  to  Kamtchatka,  the 
Little  Kuriles. 

The  latter,  inhabited  by  Kamtchadales  who  left  their  native 
country  on  the  approach  of  the  Russians,  present  nothing  but  a 
chain  of  precipitous  barren  rocks,  which  are  mostly  volcanic.  Po- 
romu-Shir*  is  the  largest.  Sumtchu  shows  some  indications  of  sil 
ver  mines.  Ana-Kutan,  Arama-Kutan,  Syas-Kutan,f  and  several 
others,  contain  extinguished  volcanoes.  That  of  Rashotka,  called 
Sarytchew  Peak,  by  Krusenstern,  is  constantly  burning,  and  also 
that  of  Ikarma.  In  Usi-Shir  there  are  warm  springs  issuing  with 
violent  jets. 

The  Great  Kuriles  promise  more  considerable  advantages  to  in 
telligent  colonists.  That  of  Ooroop,J  the  "  Company's  Land"  of 
the  Dutch,  the  Nadeshda  of  some  Russian  maps,  and  the  Ooroowoo 
of  the  Japanese  manuscript,  leso-Ki,  has  firs  and  cherry  trees. 
Here  begin  the  hairy  Kurilians  of  the  same  race  with  the  Ainos  of 
lesso  and  Seghalien.  Etorpoo,  the  "  States  Island"  of  the  Dutch, 
the  Atorkoo  of  Krusenstern's  map,  and  the  leiorofo  of  the  Japanese, 
contains  fine  forests,  which,  however,  are  at  times  seriously  threat 
ened  by  an  adjoining  volcano  in  the  same  island.  The  plains  and 
mountains  of  Koona-Shir  are  covered  with  the  most  beautiful 
larches  and  firs.  The  Pinus  ccmbra  thrives  in  it.  It  was  proba- 

*  Shir  or  siri  is  the  term  for  an  island  in  the  language  of  lesso. 
f  Kutan  is  from  Kotang,  the  lesso  term  for  a  country. 
}  "  Urup," 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  73 

bly  at  Chikotan  that  Steller  and  Spangenbcrg  believed  they  saw 
vines,  and  even  the  wild  citron  of  Japan.  These  navigators  cer 
tainly  did  not  find  the  oak  and  the  walnut,  except  on  the  coast  of 
lesso. 

It  is  among  the  Great  Kurilcs  that  we  are  to  look  for  a  part  of 
the  alleged  discoveries  of  Beniowski.*  This  enthusiast  imagined 
that  he  saw  at  Koonashir,  considerable  towns.  There  was  a  pearl- 
fishery  on  its  coast.  His  Tchulgan-Idzon,  rich  in  copper,  and 
Maanas-Idzon,  abounding  in  gold,  are  no  more  to  be  found.  But 
the  Japanese  geographers  point  out  in  the  Isle  of  lesso,  a  district 
called  Figasi,  and  a  village  called  Kawa,  which  are  evidently  the 
isles  of  Fiassi  and  Kawith  of  the  Polish  navigator.  His  accounts 
of  silver  and  copper  mines,  horses,  red  pearl  or  coral,  which  he 
found  in  these  countries,  contain  nothing  incredible.  In  giving 
the  town  of  Matza  2000  houses  he  probably  exaggerates ;  but  the 
town  exists,  and  is  called  Matzige.f  It  is  on  the  whole  rather 
rashly  that  this  navigator  has  been  charged  with  intentional  impos 
ture. 

We  now  proceed  to  describe  a  country  more  frequently  treated 
in  detail  than  those  we  have  just  examined.  The  three  islands  of 
Niphon,  Kiusiu,  and  Sikokf,  surrounded  with  a  multitude  of  small 
er  islands,  form  the  kingdom,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  the 
Empire  of  Japan,  The  Chinese  at  first  called  it  Yang-hoo,  or 
the  "  Workshop  of  the  Sun  ;"  then  they  called  it  Noo-Kooe,  or 
"  the  Kingdom  of  Slaves  ;"  and  finally,  Je-pen,  or  Je-poon,  "Coun 
try  of  the  Rising  Sun."J  Marco  Polo  knew  it  under  the  cor 
rupted  name  of  Xipangu.  The  isle  of  Kiusiu  has  from  north  to 
south  a  diameter  of  nearly  two  degrees,  or  130  miles, §  and  its 
greatest  length  is  about  220. ||  That  of  Sikokf  is  100  miles  long, 
and  55  broad.**  The  large  Island  of  Niphon  lies  south-west  and 
north-east ;  its  length  is  not  less  than  1600  miles,"!"!"  but  ^s  breadth 
is  in  every  part  moderate.  Its  medium  breadth  is  not  more  than 
160  miles, JJ  though  it  may  be  the  double  of  this  between  the  ex 
tremities  of  two  projecting  points.  The  surface  of  the  Japanese 
states  may  be  reckoned  at  122,720  square  miles. §§  The  popula 
tion  is  rated  at  between  15  and  30  millions  by  the  most  moderate 

*  See  his  Voyage,  translated  by  Forster,  I.  368. 

f  Manuscript  Chart  of  Titsingh. 

t  Krempfer's  History  of  Japan,  I.  73,  74,  (German  edition.) 

§  "50Fr.  leagues."  ||  "  80  Fr.  leagues." 

"*  36  by  20  Fr.  leagues."  ft  "  300  Fr.  leagues." 

it  "  80  Fr.  leagues."  $§  "  16,000  sq.  Fr.  leagues." 


74  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

authors.  This  regular  and  flourishing  state,  at  the  further  ex 
tremity  of  Asia,  is  withdrawn  from  the  researches  of  travelers  by 
the  cautiousness  of  its  policy. 

The  whole  country  is  full  of  mountains  and  hills,  and  its  coasts 
beset  with  steep  rocks,  which  are  opposed  to  the  waves  of  a  stormy 
ocean.  The  plains  are  pervaded  by  numerous  rivers  and  small 
streams.  But  the  hills,  the  mountains,  and  the  plains,  enriched 
with  many  singular  plants,  present  the  interesting  picture  of  hu 
man  industry  amidst  the  traces  of  the  revolutions  of  nature.  The 
most  celebrated  mountain  of  Japan  is  that  of  Foosi,  which  is 
covered  with  snow  through  nearly  the  whole  year.  In  the  neighbor 
hood,  the  mountains  of  Faconi  surround  a  small  lake  of  the  same 
name.*  Some  of  the  mountains  contain  volcanoes.  The  greater 
part  of  them  abound  in  evergreen  trees  and  limpid  springs.  It  is 
said  that  there  is  near  Firando  an  island  entirely  volcanic  ;  and 
several  others  of  the  same  kind  are  mentioned  in  the  surrounding 
seas.f  In  the  province  of  Figo  there  is  a  volcano  which  gives  out 
many  flames. 

The  rivers  of  Japan  cannot  have  a  long  course.  The  Jedo- 
Gawa,  which  passes  by  Osaka,  has  several  bridges  of  cedar,  from 
300  to  860  feet  long.  The  Ojin-gawaJ  and  the  Fusi-gawa  are  also 
broad  and  rapid  rivers.  In  Japanese  history,  the  river  Oomi  is 
mentioned  as  having  in  one  night  issued  out  of  the  earth. 

One  of  the  largest  lakes  is  that  of  Oitz,  from  which  two  rivers 
proceed,  one  towards  Miaco,  and  the  other  to  Osaka.  This  lake  is 
fifty  Japanese  leagues  long,  each  league  being  as  much  as  a  horse 
goes  in  an  hour  at  an  ordinary  pace  ;  its  breadth  about  a  third. 
The  delightful  plain  which  surrounds  it  is  rendered  sacred  by  con 
taining  3000  pagodas. 

These  islands  experience  by  turns  the  extremes  of  heat  and 
cold.  The  summer-heat,  however,  is  frequently  alleviated  by  the 
sea-breezes.  In  winter  the  north  and  north-east  winds  are  ex 
ceedingly  sharp,  and  bring  along  with  them  an  intense  frost.  Du 
ring  the  whole  year  the  weather  is  variable,  and  much  rain  falls, 
particularly  in  the  satsald  or  rainy  month,  which  begins  at  mid 
summer^  According  to  observations,  the  highest  degree  of  heat 
at  Nangasaki  is  98°  in  the  month  of  August,  and  the  greatest  cold 

*  Thunberg,  t.  III.  p.  164.,  (Langle's   translation.) 
f  Kaempfer,  t.  I.  p.  166,  (French  translation.) 
J  The  word  gawa  signifies  river,  as  it  does  in  Celtic. 
§  Thunberg,  t.  III.  p.  234. 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  75 

35°  in  January.  The  snow  lies  some  days  on  the  ground,  even  in 
the  southern  parts.  Thunder  is  heard  almost  every  night  in  sum 
mer  ;  storms,  hurricanes,  and  earthquakes,  are  very  frequent.  The 
genial  rains  conspire  with  human  labor  and  manure  to  overcome 
the  natural  sterility  of  the  soil. 

The  laws  enjoin  agriculture  as  one  of  the  rigorous  duties  of  the 
Japanese.  Every  spot  is  under  cultivation,  with  the  exception  of 
the  most  impracticable  mountains.  Exempt  from  all  feudal  and 
ecclesiastical  exactions,  the  farmer  cultivates  the  land  with  zeal  and 
success.'*  There  are  no  commons.  If  a  piece  of  land  lies  without 
culture,  a  neighboring  farmer  who  is  more  active,  is  at  liberty  to 
take  possession  of  it.  There  are  no  meadows  ;  but  the  attention 
paid  to  manure  is  very  great.  On  the  sides  of  steep  hills  stone 
walls  are  raised,  which  sustain  plots  of  ground  sown  with  rice  or 
with  vegetables.  Rice  is  the  principal  grain.  Buckwheat,  rye, 
barley,  and  wheat,  are  rarely  cultivated  ;|  potatoes  are  of  indiffe 
rent  quality  ;  but  various  sorts  of  beans,  peas,  turnips,  and  cabbage 
succeed  well.  The  rice  is  sown  in  April,  and  reaped  in  Novem 
ber.  In  this  last  month  wheat  is  sown,  to  be  harvested  in  the  fol 
lowing  June.  Barley  also  lies  in  the  ground  during  winter. 

The  plants  of  Japan  very  much  resemble  those  of  China,  which 
is  probably  owing  to  a  mutual  interchange  of  the  most  useful 
species.  The  tea-shrub  grows  without  culture  in  the  hedges.  The 
most  superb  bamboos  abound  in  all  the  low  grounds ;  ginger,  black 
pepper,  sugar,  cotton,  and  indigo,  though  perhaps  originally  from 
the  more  southern  parts  of  Asia,  are  cultivated  in  Japan,  with 
great  success  and  in  large  quantities.  In  the  interior  the  sides  of 
the  lower  mountains  produce  the  Indian  laurel,  and  the  camphor- 
tree  ;  likewise  the  Rhns  vernix,  the  bark  of  which  yields  a  gum 
resin  which  is  regarded  as  the  leading  ingredient  of  the  inimitable 
black  Indian  varnish.  Besides  the  sweet  China  orange,  there  is  a 
wild  species  peculiar  to  Japan,  the  Citrus  Japonica.  The  Euro 
pean  vegetation  is  mingled  with  that  of  southern  Asia.  The  larch, 
the  cypress,  and  the  weeping-willow,  which  make  their  appearance 
in  all  the  temperate  countries  between  Japan  and  the  Mediterra 
nean,  terminate  here,  The  case  is  similar  with  the  Papavtr  Som- 
nifcrum,  or  opium-bearing  poppy,  the  Jalap,  and  the  lilac. 

The  Japanese  have  none  of  our  apples,  but  they  have  pears  of 
considerable  size,  shaddocks,!  Kaki  figs,  or  Japanese  date-plums, 

*  Thunberg,  t.  IV.  p.  80,  &c.        f  Kaempfer,  I.  120,  &c.,  (in  German.) 
t  "  Pamplemousses." 


76  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

(Diospyros  kaki,)  and  large  oranges.  (They  have  the  art  of 
making  sweet-meats,  and  preserving  a  variety  of  fruits  with  spices, 
such  as  bananas,  the  bread-fruit  (jacquier,)  strawberries,  cocoa- 
nuts,  and  many  others.)  They  procure  oil  for  cookery  as  well 
as  for  light  from  sesamum,  from  the  sumachs,  from  the  Taxus  ging- 
ko*  from  the  Laurus  camphora,  the  Laurus  glauca,  the  Melia 
azedarach,  or  common  bead-tree,  and  the  cocoa-nut.  They  raise  a 
great  abundance  of  silk-worms.  The  cotton-plant  furnishes  them 
with  light  stuffs,  and  the  Urtica  nivea  with  durable  cordage  ;  they 
make  paper  and  fans  of  the  bark  of  a  species  of  mulberry,  of  the 
Liciiala,  and  the  Borassu-s  flaldliformis  ;  bottles  of  the  calabash, 
combs  of  the  Myrica  nagi,  and  all  sorts  of  furniture  of  the  Lindera, 
different  species  of  pine,  box-wood,  cypress,  and  the  Taxus  macro- 
phijllti,  or  long-leaved  yew.  The  eye  is  delighted  with  the  mixture 
of  cocoa-trees,  fan-leaved  palms,  cycases,  and  arborescent  mimosas, 
which  adorn  the  sea-beach.  The  hedges  by  which  the  possessions 
are  divided,  are  composed  ofLycium  Japonicum,  three-leaved  oran 
ges,!  Gardenias,  Viburnums,  and  Thuyas,  besides  several  twining 
plants,  of  which  they  make  arbors  and  covered  walks.  Several 
plants  useful  in  medicine  are  also  found  here,  such  as  the  Conval- 
laria  Japonica,  Acorus  aromaticus,  Smilax  China,  in  the  virtues 
of  which  they  were  instructed  by  the  Swedish  traveler  Thunberg  ; 
the  Cor  chorus  Japonicus,  the  Laurus  camphora,  the  moxa,  the 
snake-wood, J  and  the  mungo-root. 

The  maxims  of  Japanese  industry  have  almost  banished  from 
the  empire  two  domestic  animals,  which  in  all  other  countries  are 
the  most  common,  goats  and  sheep.  The  first  are  deemed  hurtful  to 
agriculture,  and  the  wool  of  the  second  is  superseded  by  cotton  and 
silk.  Pigs  are  also  proscribed,as  pernicious  to  agriculture  ;  the  neigh 
borhood  of  Nagasaki  is  the  only  place  where  any  are  to  be  seen,  and 
they  have  probably  been  introduced  by  the  Chinese. §  These 
islands  produce  on  the  whole  but  few  quadrupeds.  In  Thun- 
berg's  opinion,  one  province  of  Sweden  contained  as  many  or  more 
horses  than  the  whole  empire  of  Japan  ;  there  are  very  few  cattle  ; 
a  variety  of  the  buffalo,  with  a  hump  on  the  back,  is  employed  in 
agriculture,  and  very  small  oxen  ;  yet  the  caprice  or  personal  taste 
of  the  sovereign  has  created  a  law  of  the  State  in  favor  of  dogs, 
which  are  fed  at  the  expense  of  the  towns,  and  are  treated  with 

*  Salisburia  adiantifolia,  or  Gingko  biloba. — P. 

f   Citrus  Trifoliata. — P.  \   Strychnos  Colubrina. — P. 

§  Thunberg,  IV.  p.  95. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  77 

much  kindness  and  respect.  The  principal  food  of  the  Japanese 
consists  of  fish  and  vegetables.  Fowls  and  ducks  are  kept  chiefly 
for  the  sake  of  their  eggs.  They  add  to  the  ordinary  vegetables 
many  sorts  of  marine  plants,  Fud  and  Ulvae,  which  are  prepared 
iu  various  ways.  Game  is  not  plenty  ;  there  are  wild  geese,  phea 
sants  and  partridges,  but  very  few  wild  quadrupeds.  The  bear  met 
with  in  the  northern  parts  is  black,  with  two  white  spots  of  a  cres 
cent  form  on  the  shoulders  ;  the  flesh,  which  is  eaten,  is  compared 
to  mutton,  but  is  tougher.  The  wolf  is  sometimes  seen  in  the 
northern  provinces  ;  there  are  also  some  foxes  ;  the  latter  are  held  in 
universal  detestation,  and  considered  as  evil-spirits  clothed  with  an 
animal  body. 

The  precious  metals,  gold  and  silver,  abound  in  the  empire  of 
Japan.  This  was  well  known  at  one  time  to  the  Portuguese,  and 
afterwards  to  the  Dutch,  who  exported  considerable  cargoes.  Gold 
is  found  almost  everywhere  ;  but,  in  order  to  keep  up  its  value  by 
scarcity,  there  is  a  prohibition  against  digging  beyond  a  determi 
nate  depth  ;  and  no  mine  can  be  opened  or  worked  without  the 
express  permission  of  the  emperor,  who  claims  two-thirds  of  the 
produce,  leaving  a  third  to  the  proprietor  of  the  land.  Gold  is 
found  in  small  quantities  in  the  sand,  but  the  greater  part  of  it  is 
extracted  from  copper  pyrites.  The  purest  and  richest  mines  are 
at  Sado,  in  the  largest  of  the  small  islands  adjoining  Niphon  ;  those 
of  Suremga  hold  the  next  rank.  Silver  seems  to  have  been  formerly 
more  abundant ;  the  Japanese  consider  it  as  rarer  than  gold, 
though  here,  as  everywhere  else,  it  is  of  inferior  value  in  exchange. 
It  is  said  that  there  are  rich  silver  mines  in  the  Province  of  Bun- 
go,  and  the  most  northerly  parts  near  Kattami ;  but  the  two  islands 
called  the  Gold  and  Silver  Islands,  (Ginsima  and  Kinsima),  are 
probably  fabulous  creations  of  national  vanity,  unless  we  should 
suppose  them  to  be  indications  of  some  ancient  commercial  con 
nection  with  Mexico,  or  imitations  of  the  tales  of  Ptolemy  on  the 
regio  aurea  et  regio  argzntta. 

Copper,  mixed  largely  with  gold,  forms  the  chief  wealth  of  seve 
ral  provinces,  and  the  most  valuable  of  their  exports.  The  finest 
and  most  malleable  comes  from  Saruga,  Astinga,  Kino,  and  Kuni  ; 
the  last  is  considered  as  the  most  malleable  ;  that  of  Saruga  con 
tains  the  largest  proportion  of  gold.  There  is  also  a  great  num 
ber  of  copper  mines  in  Satsuma.  Iron  seems  to  be  rarer  in  this 
country  than  any  other  metal ;  but  it  is  found  in  the  provinces  of 
Mimasalla,  Bitsju,  and  Bisen.  The  Japanese  do  not  make  so  much 
use  of  it  as  most  other  nations ;  they  employ  it,  however,  in  the 


78  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

manufacture  of  arms,  of  knives,  scissors,  and  other  necessary  in 
struments.  The  gold  and  copper  are  coined  into  money. 

M.  Thunberg  received  some  amber  in  a  present,  brown,  yellow, 
and  iridescent,  which  was  said  to  have  been  found  in  the  country  ; 
sulphur  is  found  in  great  abundance,*  and  pumice-stone,  showing 
the  former  existence  of  volcanoes.  We  are  informed  that  mineral 
coal  is  found  in  the  northern  provinces  ;  there  are  red  agates  with 
white  veins,  which  are  used  for  making  buttons  and  snuff-boxes. | 
According  to  Kaempfer,  calamine  is  imported  from  Tonquin,  but 
tin  is  found  in  the  Province  of  Bungo  ;  perhaps  this  pretended  tin 
is  only  the  white  copper  of  China.  A  reddish-colored  naphtha  is 
employed  for  burning,  in  lamps.  Thunberg  saw  asbestos,  porce 
lain-earth,  and  white  marble.  J  Sulphuret  of  mercury  in  its  primi 
tive  crystalline  form,  and  in  lamellated  masses,  has  been  brought 
from  Japan.  Baron  Wurmb,  a  German  savant  settled  at  Batavia, 
received  from  Japan,  abestos,  capillary  schorl,  hydrophane,  and 
the  atmospheric  stones  formerly  called  thunder-stones,  denominated 
in  Japanese  kaminary  sakki.§  There  are  several  warm  mineral 
springs,  to  which  the  inhabitants  resort  for  various  diseases. || 

The  empire  is  divided  into  about  seventy  principalities,**  ruled 
by  chiefs,  who  are  vassals  of  the  Emperor  of  Kubo.lft 

The  capital  of  the  empire  of  Japan  is  called  ledo,  [Jeddo], 
and  is  situated  on  a  bay  on  the  east  coast  of  Niphon.  The  houses 
are  only  one  or  two  stories  high,  with  shops  in  front.  The  harbor 
of  this  place  is  so  shallow,  that  a  European  vessel  is  obliged  to  an 
chor  thirteen  or  fourteen  miles JJ  off  from  the  shore.  ^  The  Em 
peror's  palace  is  surrounded  with  stone  walls,  and  ditches  with 
draw-bridges.  It  would  form  of  itself  a  considerable  town,  being 
about  fifteen  miles  round, §§  while  the  whole  city  is  nearly  sixty.  |||[ 

*  Thunberg,  t.  IV.  p.  402. 
f  Krcmpfer,  I.  p.  121,  122,  (in  German.) 
}  Thunberg,  III.  p.  203. 

§  Verhandelingen  van't  Bataviaasch  Genootschaap,  V.  566. 
||  Ksempfer,  I.  p.  167,  (French.) 

**  These  principalities  are  called  Kolff,  in  the  Japanese  language. 
ft  The  empire  of  Japan  is  divided  into  sixty-four  provinces.     Bulletin 
de  Ferussac. — P. 

ft  "  5  French  leagues."  §§  Thunberg,  IV.  p.  54. 

||  ||  Krempfer ,  II.  271 ,  344.  ledo,  according  to  a  native  plan  of  the  city, 
is  7  ris  long,  by  5  broad.  The  Us  of  China  (ris  ?)  is  629  yards  ;  conse 
quently,  if  this  is  also  the  measure  of  the  ris,  the  city  is  about  2  1-2 
miles  long,  by  rather  more  than  1  3-4  miles  broad,  or  4403  by  3145 
yards. — P. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  79 

ledo  is  the  residence  of  all  the  feudatory  princes  for  one  half  of 
the  year.  Their  families  are  always  kept  there  as  a  sort  of  hostages 
for  their  fidelity.  The  palace  consists  of  a  great  number  of  apart 
ments,  and  occupies  an  immense  space.  The  hall  of  a  hundred 
mats  is  600  feet  long  and  300  wide.  The  palace  has  a  square 
tower,  a  mark  of  pre-eminence,  which  is  forbidden  the  grandees,  in 
the  capital ;  but  each  of  them  enjoys  a  similar  prerogative  in  his 
own  territory.  The  roofs  are  adorned  with  gilt  dragons  ;  the 
columns  and  ceilings  exhibit  an  elegant  display  of  cedar,  camphor- 
wood,  and  other  valuable  kinds  of  timber  ;  but  the  whole  furniture 
consists  of  white  mats,  adorned  with  golden  fringes. 

The  houses  of  private  individuals  are  of  wood,  painted  white,  so 
as  to  have  the  appearance  of  stone  ;  the  upper  story  serves  as  a 
wardrobe  and  store-room  ;  the  ground  floor  is  in  one  large  apart 
ment,  divisible  at  pleasure  into  smaller  portions  by  sliding  partitions. 
Neither  chairs  nor  tables  are  used,  mats  being  the  only  seats ;  the 
Emperor  himself,  when  he  gives  an  audience  to  any  of  his  subjects, 
is  seated  on  a  carpet. 

Going  north-east  from  ledo,  we  find  two  of  the  principal  towns, 
G-asima  and  Namboo.  In  a  south-west  direction  we  have  the  town 
of  Odowara,  where  catechu,  erroneously  called  Japan-earth,  is  pre 
pared  ;  Okosaki,  with  its  magnificent  bridge  ;  and  Kwana,  one  of 
the  wealthiest  in  the  empire,  where  there  is  a  strong  castle  sur 
rounded  with  water.  It  is  the  capital  of  the  fertile  province  of 
Owari,  which  gives  its  name  to  a  bay. 

Miaco,  the  second  city  of  the  empire,  is  in  an  inland  situation, 
in  a  level  plain  150  miles*  south-west  of  ledo.  It  is  the  principal 
seat  of  manufactures  and  trade.  There  the  imperial  coin  is  struck. 
It  is  the  seat  of  the  chief  priest  or  Da'iri,  with  his  court  of  literati, 
and  the  place  where  all  the  books  are  printed.  Kaempfer  informs 
us  that,  according  to  a  census  taken  in  1674,  the  population  of  this 
place  amounted  to  405,642  persons,  of  whom  182,070  were  males 
and  223,572  females,  independently  of  the  numerous  court  of  the 
Dairi.f  The  vast  palace  of  this  Japanese  Pope  is  inaccessible  to 
strangers  ;  but  the  temples  of  this  holy  city  have  been  visited  and 
described.  That  of  Daiboots  is  the  richest  building  in  Japan, 
though  only  of  wood.  The  gilt  image  of  the  divinity,  sitting  on  a 
flower  like  the  Hindoo  idols,  is  twenty-five  feetj  broad  between  the 
shoulders,  and  capable  of  containing  several  people  in  the  palm  of 
his  hand.  The  pyramidal  roofs  of  the  temples  and  palaces  har- 

*  "  54  French  leagues."  f  Ksempfer,  II.  247.  J  "  4  toises." 


80  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

monize  agreeably  with  the  wooded  hills  surrounding  the  city,  and 
from,  which  several  limpid  rills  flow.* 

The  five  provinces  adjoining  to  Miaco,  reserved  for  the  mainten 
ance  of  the  imperial  court,  are  comprehended  under  the  name  of 
Grokinai  ;  they  abound  in  rice  and  vegetables.  In  one  of  them, 
called  Sitz  or  Sidsjow,  we  find  the  important  city  of  Osacca,  the 
port  of  Miaco,  and  one  of  the  most  flourishing  cities  of  the  empire. 
The  canals  by  which  it  is  intersected,  and  which  are  crossed  by 
bridges  of  cedar,  remind  us  of  Venice.  The  pleasures  which  pre 
vail  there,  together  with  the  great  abundance  and  easy  price  of 
provisions,  attract  a  gieat  many  who  are  in  quest  of  voluptuous  in 
dulgence. f  Fiogo,  in  the  same  province,  on  the  Gulf  of  Osacca, 
possesses  a  harbor  protected  by  a  very  large  mole.  Mooroo,  in  the 
Province  of  Farima,  is  furnished  with  a  natural  harbor.  Horses' 
hides  are  manufactured  into  leather  at  this  place  in  the  manner  of 
the  Russians. 

The  towns  on  the  northern  and  western  coasts  of  the  island  of 
Niphon  are  only  known  to  us  by  name.  The  case  is  the  same  with 
those  of  the  whole  Island  of  Sikokf,  which  have  not  been  visited 
by  travelers.  In  the  Island  of  Kiusiu,  we  distinguish  the  famous 
harbor  of  Nangasaki  or  Nagasaki,  the  only  one  in  which  foreign 
vessels  are  allowed  to  anchor,  this  privilege  itself  being  at  present 
confined  to  the  Dutch  and  Chinese.  This  place  was  formerly 
nothing  more  than  a  village,  and  is  indebted  to  Portuguese  com 
merce  for  its  prosperity  and  importance.  Nangasaki  contains 
eighty-seven  streets,  each  130  yards J  long,  which  is  the  length 
legally  assigned  to  a  street ;  the  houses  therefore  may  be  reckoned 
at  a  thousand.  When  approached  by  sea,  this  city  presents  views 
which  would  be  sought  for  in  vain  in  the  most  celebrated  of  our 
picturesque  gardens.  A  rock  238  paces  long,  is  the  only  place  in 
which  the  Dutch  merchants  are  allowed  to  reside,  where  they  live 
in  a  state  of  seclusion  and  solitude  worse  than  monkish,  immersed 
in  a  total  ignorance  of  the  whole  world  beside. 

The  Isle  of  Kiusiu,  or  of  Saikokf,  which  once  formed  a  separate 
kingdom, §  still  contains  the  following  large  towns  :— Sanga,  cele 
brated  for  beautiful  women,  and  a  manufacture  of  almost  trans 
parent  porcelain  ;  Kokura,  the  place  from  which  they  pass  to 
Simonoseki  in  the  Isle  of  Niphon  ;  and  Cangoxima,  where  the 
Portuguese  landed  when  they  first  discovered  this  country.  The 

*  Ksempfer,  II.  234,  305,  339,  &c.  f  Kcempfer,  II.  223. 

t  "  60'toises."  §  Ksempfer,  II.  p..  6,  201 


'P^^—^;; ! 

i      a     1  •    •=, 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  81 

Islands  of  Firando  and  Amakusa  had  great  celebrity  at  that  epoch, 
from  being  the  first  seats  of  the  Christian  religion.  The  Isle  of 
Tsusima,  between  Kiusiu  and  Corea,  forms  a  principality  which 
was  tributary  to  the  Coreans  before  it  became  subject  to  the 
Japanese.  The  Archipelago  of  Gotto  terminates  Japan  on  the 
south-west. 

To  the  south,  the  Island  of  Likeo,  which  we  must  not  confound 
with  the  Islands  of  Lieu-kieu,  is  separated  from  Kiusiu  by  a  nar 
row  strait.  It  is  governed  by  a  Dairi,  or  native  pontiff,  who  is  a 
vassal  to  the  Prince  of  Satsuma.  The  inhabitants  raise  two  crops 
of  rice  in  the  year.  They  cultivate  their  fields  to  the  music  of 
songs  accompanied  by  the  lyre.  It  is  separated  by  Yan  Piemen's 
Strait  from  the  Island  of  Tanao-sima,  and  a  chain  of  smaller 
islands,  extending  in  the  direction  of  the  Archipelago  of  Lieu-kieu. 

To  the  south-east  the  Japanese  empire  includes  a  small  Archi 
pelago,  containing  a  burning  volcano,  and  traces  of  several  subter 
raneous  fires,  now  extinguished.  The  most  considerable  island  is 
called  Fatsisio,  which  is  500  feet*  high,|  and  steep  on  all  sides  ;  so 
that  it  is  only  accessible  by  means  of  ladders  of  ropes  fixed  to  the 
tops  of  the  rocks.  Here,  it  is  said  that  loose  women,  who  have 
been  disgraced  and  exiled,  weave  silk  stuffs,  according  to  strange 
designs  dictated  by  a  devious  imagination. 

The  Japanese  are  well  formed,  free  and  easy  in  their  movements, 
of  a  hardy  constitution,  and  of  middling  stature.  Their  yellowish 
complexion  sometimes  inclines  to  brown,  and  at  others  passes  into 
a  pale  white.  The  women  of  distinction,  seldom  exposing  them 
selves  to  the  air  without  a  veil,  preserve  complexions  equally  fair 
with  those  of  our  European  ladies.  It  is  by  a  peculiarity  in  the 
eyes  that  the  Japanese  are  chiefly  distinguished.  They  are  farther 
from  a  round  shape  than  in  any  other  people — oblong,  small,  and 
sunk,  they  appear  as  if  constantly  winking.  Their  eyelids  form  a 
deeper  furrow,  and  their  eyebrows  are  placed  a  little  higher  than 
we  generally  find  them  in  other  nations.  They  have  for  the  most 
part,  large  heads,  short  necks,  broad  snubby  noses,  and  the  hair 
black,  thick,  and  glossy  from  being  habitually  anointed. 

In  these  physical  characters  we  may  perhaps  trace  a  mixture  of  | 
a  Chinese  with  a  Mongolian  or  Mantchooriau  race.  J  The  Japanese  ' 
history,  after  describing  a  series  of  gods  and  demi-gods,  says,  that '. 

*  "  80  toises." 

f  Fat  si  signifies  ten,  and  sjo  eight,  in  the  Japanese  language. 
|  De  Guignes,  Histoire  cles  Huns.     Gatterer,  Manuel  d'Hist.  Univ.  II* 
part.  I'e  Vol.  p.  441.     Ksernpfer,  I.  87,  88. 


82  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

the  nation  owed  the  first  steps  of  its  civilization  to  a  Chinese  colony. 
Their  annals  go  back  to  a  Chinese  monarch  called  Sin-Moosa. 
They  represent  him  with  the  head  of  a  bull,  because  he  taught 
them  agriculture  and  the  management  of  cattle.  But  the  language 
of  the  Japanese,  a  more  authentic  document,  gives  no  evidence  of 
any  foreign  extraction  of  these  islanders.  It  contains  few  Chinese 
terms.  It  has  no  resemblance  to  that  of  Mantchooria,  of  lesso,  or 
of  the  Kurile  Islands.  The  resemblances  said  to  have  been  found 
by  a  learned  person,  between  the  Japanese  and  Tartar  languages, 
have  long  remained  without  confirmation.*  The  Japanese  words 
are  not  monosyllabic  like  the  Chinese  ;  the  conjugations  and  the 
syntax  have  a  distinct  and  original  character,  j  The  Japanese  or 
Yomi  language  is  employed  in  poetry  and  conversation.  The 
Bonzes  write  their  theological  books  in  Chinese,  which  is  to  them 
what  Latin  is  to  us. 

If  it  is  said  that  the  indigenous  Japanese  have  been  subjugated 
by  a  tribe  of  Mongols  or  Mantchoos,  who  adopted  the  language  of 
the  conquered,  at  what  epoch  are  we  to  fix  such  an  invasion  ?  The 
sacred  era  of  the  Japanese  goes  back  to  the  establishment  of  the 
hereditary  succession  of  the  Ddiris,  or  ecclesiastical  Emperors, 
which  was  660  years  before  the  Christian  era.  This  dynasty  re 
tained  its  power  till  the  year  1585  of  our  vulgar  era.  In  this 
interval  two  invasions  had  been  repelled,  that  of  the  Mantchoos  in 
799,  the  accounts  of  which  are  accompanied  with  many  fables.  In 
1281,  the  Mongols,  under  Mangoo  Khan,  having  conquered  China 
fourteen  years  before,  attempted  to  take  possession  of  Japan.  The 
learned  Amiot  has  given  us,  in  a  work  translated  from  the  Chinese,J 
the  history  of  that  expedition  according  to  the  Chinese  authors. 
In  this  history,  the  Chinese  army,  joined  to  that  of  the  Coreans, 
amounted  to  100,000.  The  Coreans  furnished  900  ships  of  war  ; 
but  that  great  armada  was  dispersed  in  a  dreadful  storm — an  event 
which  the  Japanese  attribute  to  the  protecting  care  of  their  gods. 
All  the  acquisitions  which  the  population  of  Japan  may  have 
received  from  the  continent  of  Asia  are  confined  to  some  colonies 
of  Chinese  and  Corean  emigrants. 

The  Japanese  are  probably,  like  all  the  principal  nations  of  the 

*  Bayer,  Thesaur.  epist.  La  Croz.  I.  54. 

f  Thunberg,  Observations  in  linguam  Japonicam,  in  Nov.  Act.  Upsal. 
1792,  V.  p.  258-273.  Hervas,  Catalogo  de  las  Lenguas,  II.  64. 

\  An  introduction  to  the  History  of  the  Nations  tributary  to  China, 
composed  by  order  of  the  Emperor  Kang-Hi.  MS.  in  the  Imperial 
Library. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  83 

•world,  so  far  aboriginal  that  their  origin  is  beyond  the  reach  of  his 
tory.  If  they  came  from  the  continent,  they  must  have  left  it 
previously  to  the  formation  of  the  present  languages.  They  have 
some  obscure  accounts,  that  besides  their  race  there  were  two 
others  in  the  island  of  Niphon,  the  Mosins,  or  hairy  Kurilians,  in 
the  north,  and  a  nation  of  negroes  in  the  south.  Perhaps  the  lat 
ter  were  the  Haraforas  of  the  Philippine  Islands.  Many  other 
primitive  races,  in  these  insulated  regions,  may  have  shone  in 
their  day,  and,  unknown  to  the  rest  of  the  world,  have  become 
extinct. 

In  the  year  1128,  the  Da'iri,  or  ecclesiastical  Emperor,  who  is 
descended  from  the  national  gods,  was  weak  enough  to  appoint  a 
military  chief,  called  the  Kubo  or  Tzioogoon.  The  power  of  this 
great  functionary,  consolidated  by  hereditary  succession,  grew  by 
victories  and  by  intrigues,  till  in  1585  the  Kubo  deprived  the 
Dai'ri  of  the  last  semblance  of  political  authority.  Ever  since  this 
revolution  the  government  of  Japan  may  be  considered  as  an  abso 
lute  and  hereditary  monarchy,  supported  by  a  great  number  of 
subordinate  hereditary  princes,  also  absolute,  whose  submission  to 
the  supreme  power  is  secured  by  their  reciprocal  jealousies  and  the 
hostages  which  they  give.  Each  prince  disposes  of  the  revenues 
of  his  own  fief  or  government.  By  them  he  defrays  the  expenses 
of  his  court,  maintains  a  military  force,  repairs  the  highways,  and 
supplies  all  the  demands  of  the  civil  list.  The  daimios  or  princes 
of  the  first  degree,  and  the  siomios  who  are  their  inferiors  in  rank, 
possess  a  dignity  which  is  hereditary.  The  siomios  are  not  only 
obliged  to  leave  their  families  in  the  capital,  but  also  to  reside  there 
six  months  in  the  year. 

Travelers  admire  the  Japanese  laws.  Kaempfer  gives  them  the 
preference  over  those  of  Europe.  Justice  is  administered  in  the 
most  expeditious  manner.  The  parties  appear  in  person  before 
the  judge,  who  passes  his  sentence  without  delay.  But  this  tra 
veler  gives  no  account  of  any  legal  code.  He  also  reduces  the 
value  of  his  authority,  by  insisting  on  the  pretended  advantage 
arising  from  the  law  by  which  the  visits  of  foreigners  are  prohibited, 
and  no  Japanese  is  allowed  under  pain  of  death  to  leave  his  coun 
try.  According  to  Thunberg,  the  laws  of  this  country  are  few, 
but  executed  with  the  utmost  rigor,  and  without  respect  of  per 
sons  ;  only  that  the  rich,  when  found  guilty,  are  allowed  to  get  off 
by  paying  pecuniary  fines.*  Ordinary  offences  are  punished  with 

*  Thunberg,  t.  IV.  p.  64. 


84  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

death  ;  but  the  sentence  must  be  signed  by  the  Emperor's  privy 
council.  The  moral  education  of  children  being  a  political  duty, 
parents  are  rendered  accountable  for  the  crimes  of  those  whose 
early  vices  they  ought  to  have  repressed.  The  police  is  vigilant. 
Not  only  is  there  in  each  town  a  chief  magistrate  of  police,  called 
the  Nimban,  but  the  inhabitants  of  each  street,  being  accountable 
in  a  body  for  the  offences  committed  by  any  one  of  their  number, 
nominate  a  commissioner  who  watches  over  the  safety  of  lives  and 
property.  In  each  village  there  is  a  place  surrounded  with  pali 
sades,  containing  in  the  middle  an  inscription  in  large  characters, 
consisting  of  a  code  of  police  regulations.*  It  must,  however,  be 
confessed,  that  Varenius,  a  well-informed  Dutch  writer,  gives  a  less 
favorable  idea  of  the  laws  of  Japan.  The  punishments  in  the 
seventeenth  century  were  marked  with  the  utmost  cruelty.  To 
hack  the  criminal  to  pieces,  to  open  his  belly  with  a  kuife,  to  sus 
pend  him  with  iron  hooks  fixed  in  his  sides,  or  to  throw  him  into 
boiling  oil,  were  common  modes  of  punishment.  The  great  were 
allowed  the  privilege  of  ripping  up  their  bowels  with  their  own 
hands. |  Valentin  also  describes  the  legislation  of  Japan  as  fero 
cious  and  sanguinary.  When  we  are  told  that  crimes  are  rare  in 
this  country,  we  are  not  to  infer  that  the  laws  must  be  excellent. 
How  can  it  be  otherwise  in  a  country  where  every  citizen  is  respon 
sible  for  the  offences  of  his  neighbor — and  where  families  and 
entire  villages  are  visited  with  the  extremity  of  punishment  for  the 
fault  of  an  individual  ?  Such  institutions,  if  they  lessen  the  num 
ber  of  crimes,  deprive  innocence  of  its  tranquillity,  and  society  of 
its  enjoyments.  Would  it  not  be  better  to  run  the  risk  of  being 
robbed  once  or  twice  in  one's  life,  than  to  be  every  moment  in 
dread  of  having  one's  bowels  laid  open  to  atone  for  robberies  com 
mitted  by  our  neighbors  ?  All  that  can  be  said  in  their  favor  is, 
that  such  terrible  restraints  may  be  rendered  necessary  by  the  de 
graded  condition  of  human  nature.  But  allowing  the  standard  of 
private  morals  to  be  the  lowest  that  can  be  imagined,  it  is  a  mis 
taken  notion  to  suppose  that  the  efficacy  of  the  laws  is  in  propor 
tion  to  their  atrocity.  The  accountableness  of  a  portion  of  the 
community  for  crimes  which  the  united  vigilance  of  that  portion  is 
capable  of  preventing,  is  to  a  certain  extent  wise  and  politic,  but 
it  ought  not  to  go  beyond  pecuniary  fines  ;  and  it  is  only  just  where 

*  Thunberg,  IV.  72. 

f  See  the  plates  of  the  work  entitled  "  Ambassades  des  Hollandais  au 
Japon." 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  85 

those  who  are  liable  in  such  payments  have  the  exclusive  manage 
ment  of  the  prevention  of  crimes.  Cruelties  to  those  who  have 
forfeited  their  lives  are  in  all  cases  to  be  avoided  ;  and  when  prac 
ticed  towards  individuals  who  are  not  the  actual  offenders,  they  are 
sure  symptoms  of  a  hideous  barbarism,  which  imagines  that  the 
abuse  of  the  members  of  the  community  is  the  best  method  of  in 
suring  a  due  reverence  for  the  laws. 

The  accounts  of  travelers  concur  in  assigning  to  Japan  a  pro 
digious  population.  Even  the  mountains,  of  which  this  country 
chiefly  consists,  are  turned  to  the  best  account  by  industrious  culti 
vators  ;  and  the  Tokaido,  the  principal  of  the  seven  great  roads  of 
Japan,  is  sometimes  as  much  crowded  with  travelers  as  the  streets 
of  any  European  capital  are  with  passengers.*  Varenius,  follow 
ing  the  best  authorities, "j"  reckons  the  number  of  troops  kept  by  the 
princes  and  governors  at  368,000  infantry  and  38,000  cavalry ; 
and  according  to  the  same  author,  the  Kubo  or  Emperor  has  an 
army  of  his  own,  amounting  to  100,000  infantry  and  20,000 
cavalry  ;  making  in  all  468,000  infantry  and  58,000  cavalry.  If 
this  statement  is  correct,  we  may  reckon  the  population  at^  twenty 
or  thirty  millions  of  souls. 

The  navy  of  the  Japanese  is  not  worth  mentioning.  Their  ves 
sels  are  flat  in  the  stern,  and  incapable  of  withstanding  the  waves 
of  a  heavy  sea  ;  and,  though  the  mariner's  compass  is  used  among 
them  as  well  as  among  the  Chinese,  they  are  very  awkward  and 
ignorant  sailors.  It  is  indeed  hardly  conceivable  how  they  could 
attempt  in  former  times  to  keep  up  an  intercourse  with  Formosa, 
and  even  with  Java,  as  they  are  said  to  have  done.  Their  naviga 
tion  to  the  north,  according  to  some  Japanese  maps,  extended  as 
far  as  the  American  coast  in  the  neighborhood  of  Behring's  Straits, 
which  they  called  Foosang.  At  present  they  scarcely  venture  far 
ther  than  lesso  ;  and  the  inhabitants  of  that  island  speak  of  their 
voyages  to  Rakkosima,  or  (<  the  Country  of  Sea-Lions,"  which  is 
probably  either  Behring's  Island  or  Kamtchatka,  as  the  Greeks  did  * 
of  the  voyage  of  the  Argonauts.  J 

Varenius  has  given  an  account  of  the  revenues  of  Japan,  for 
each  province  separately.  He  makes  the  sum  total  2834  Dutch 
tons  of  gold,  which,  valuing  the  ton  at  L.  10,000  will  be  upwards 
of  twenty  millions  sterling,  without  reckoning  the  provinces  and 

*  Thunberg,  t.  H.  p.  345.  III.  p.  282  and  318. 
f  Varenius'  Description  of  Japan,  c.  IX. 

\  leso-Ki,  d'Arai-Tsikoego,  MS. 


86  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

towns  which  depend  immediately  on  the  Emperor.  But  these 
revenues  should  not  be  considered  as  national,  being  paid  in  kind 
to  the  different  princes.  The  Emperor,  besides  the  large  revenue 
of  the  royal  domains  and  his  own  provinces,  possesses  a  consider 
able  treasure  in  gold  and  silver. 

The  Japanese  are  divided  into  two  leading  sects  of  religion,  that 
of  Sinto  and  that  of  Budso.  The  first  acknowledges  a  Supreme 
Being,  who  is  too  exalted  to  receive  the  homage  of  men,  or  to  look 
after  their  interests  ;  but  they  admit  as  objects  of  veneration  some 
deities  of  subordinate  rank,  to  whom  they  pray  as  mediators.  They 
maintain  that  the  souls  of  the  virtuous  occupy  the  regions  of  light 
adjoining  to  the  heaven  of  heavens,  while  the  souls  of  the  wicked 
wander  through  the  air  till  they  have  expiated  their  sins.  Though 
the  doctrine  of  the  transmigration  of  souls  is  foreign  to  that  creed, 
the  rigid  adherents  of  the  Sinto  sect  abstain  from  all  animal  food, 
abhor  the  shedding  of  blood,  and  will  not  touch  a  dead  body.* 
They  call  their  gods  Sin  or  Kami,  and  the  temples  Mia.  These 
last  consist  of  several  apartments  and  galleries,  formed,  according 
to  the  custom  of  the  country,  by  partitions,  which  are  removed  and 
replaced  at  pleasure.  Straw  mats  are  laid  on  the  floors,  and  the 
roofs  form  on  each  side  a  projection  sufficient  to  cover  a  sort  of 
raised  path  surrounding  the  temple,  on  which  the  people  walk.  In 
these  temples  no  figure  is  remarked  that  can  be  considered  as  re 
presenting  the  invisible  Supreme  Being ;  but  they  sometimes  pre 
serve  in  a  box  a  small  image  of  some  secondary  divinity.  A  large 
metallic  mirror  is  placed  in  the  middle  of  the  temple,  to  remind 
the  worshipers  that,  as  every  spot  on  the  body  is  there  faithfully 
represented,  the  faults  of  the  soul  are  seen  with  equal  clearness  by 
the  eyes  of  the  immortals.!  The  feasts  and  ceremonies  of  their 
worship  are  agreeable  and  cheerful,  because  they  consider  their 
deities  as  beings  who  take  pleasure  in  dispensing  happiness. 

The  sect  of  Budso  is  originally  from  Indostan,  arid  is  the  same 
with  that  of  Budha  or  Boodh,  which  is  said  to  have  been  formed 
either  in  Thibet  or  the  Island  of  Ceylon,  about  eight  centuries  be 
fore  the  Christian  era.  Spread  over  Ava,  Siam,  China,  and  Corea, 
this  sect  adopts  some  maxims  from  other  religions  ;  but  it  preserves 
the  doctrine  of  transmigration.  It  threatens  the  wicked  with  a 
dreadful  hell,  where  it  describes  a  bridge  for  souls,  abysses  of  water 
and  fire,  and  other  imagery  borrowed  from  the  Alpine  regions  of 
Thibet.  It  also  promises  to  the  righteous  a  paradise  of  gay  fields, 

*  Thunberg,  IV.  p.  19.  f  Thunberg,  IV.  p.  21. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  87 

houses,  and  towns,  like  that  of  Swedenborg.  This  paradise,  called 
Gokurak,  is  ruled  by  the  god  Araida.  Boodhism  is  so  mixed  with 
the  Siuto  or  old  religion  of  Japan,  that  it  is*  difficult,  and  perhaps 
will  become  in  time  impossible,  to  make  any  discrimination  between 
the  dogmas  of  the  two. 

Japan  has  a  set  of  moralists  or  philosophers,  whose  doctrine  goes 
under  the  name  of  Sjooto.  It  has  some  affinity  to  that  of  the 
Epicureans,  although  its  professors  acknowledge,  with  Confucius, 
that  virtue  is  the  purest  source  of  pleasure.  These  philosophers 
believe  in  the  existence  of  a  soul  of  the  world,  but  do  not  worship 
any  subordinate  deities  ;  they  have  no  temples  or  religious  ceremo 
nies.  It  has  been  said  that  these  deists  favored  Christianity,  and 
that  their  number  has  decreased  since  the  persecution  of  that  reli 
gion,  as,  in  order  to  avoid  incurring  suspicion,  they  made  a  point 
of  offering  an  ostensible  homage  to  the  gods  of  their  country. 

From  the  year  1549  till  1638,  missionaries  of  the  order  of  the 
Jesuits  labored  in  propagating  their  faith.  They  did  not  find  this 
nation  so  ready  as  many  others  to  embrace  a  plausible  creed, 
merely  because  it  was  urged  with  earnest  importunity.  Their  con 
version  could  only  be  effected  by  arguing  with  them  and  resolving 
their  doubts.  In  these  intellectual  efforts  they  obtained  in  the  first 
instance  great  success.  Several  of  the  governors  or  tributary  kings 
openly  professed  Christianity ;  and  in  one  district  the  Jesuits  ob 
tained  the  entire  prohibition  of  every  other  religion.  Soon,  how 
ever,  the  zeal  of  the  grandees  began  to  cool.  They  differed  mate 
rially  in  one  point  of  practice,  viz.,  polygamy — refusing  to  part 
with  their  numerous  trains  of  wives.  The  whole  missionaries  were 
ordered  to  leave  the  country.  This  mandate  not  being  speedily 
put  in  force,  the  Jesuits  remained,  but  kept  themselves  extremely 
quiet.  Afterwards  some  zealous  barefooted  friars  arrived  from  the 
Philippine  Islands,  whose  open  proceedings  revived  the  severities 
of  the  government ;  some  of  them  were  crucified,  and  others  had 
their  ears  cut  off.  At  the  same  time  a  Portuguese  vessel  having 
been  taken  near  Orudo,  was  found  to  contain  a  quantity  of  arms. 
A  strict  examination  being  made,  the  captain  exculpated  himself 
from  the  imputation  of  conspiracy  ;  but,  being  subsequently  inter 
rogated  by  the  Japanese  officer  on  the  subject  of  the  extensive 
conquests  of  the  Portuguese  nation,  of  which  he  had  boasted,  he 
said  that  these  were  made  by  sending  missionaries,  who  converted 
a  large  proportion  of  the  people,  after  which  an  armed  force  was 
landed,  and,  being  joined  by  these  converts,  soon  made  themselves 
masters  of  the  country.  The  rage  of  the  sovereign  Tayoosama 


88  JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE. 

then  knew  no  bounds,  and  a  persecution  of  the  bloodiest  descrip 
tion  was  immediately  begun.  In  1590,  20,000  Christians  were 
put  to  death  ;  and  according  to  the  accounts  of  the  missionaries, 
the  massacre  of  1638  involved  37,000.  But  some  cotempory 
authors  tell  us  that  there  were  altogether  no  more  than  20,000 
Christians  in  the  kingdom.*  These  disasters  are,  in  part,  ascribed 
to  the  pretensions  to  power  and  the  political  intrigues  of  the 
Jesuits,  throwing  an  odium  on  the  religion  which  they  professed. 
It  is  very  probable  that  the  commercial  jealousy  which  the  Dutch 
harbored  against  the  Portuguese,  had  a  share  in  the  bloody  proceed 
ings.  Ever  since  that  memorable  epoch,  the  Catholic  religion  has 
been  held  in  abhorrence  in  Japan.  The  missionaries  were  perhaps 
too  forward  in  setting  fire  to  the  places  consecrated  to  the  native 
worship.  It  is  very  probable  that,  if  a  band  of  Japanese  mission 
aries  should  land  at  Havre-de-Grace,  and  set  fire  to  the  Cathedral 
of  Rouen,  the  French  police  would  treat  them  with  no  small 
severity. 

The  civilization  of  the  Japanese  seems,  like  that  of  the  Chinese, 
to  be  stationary  ;  but  Japan  has  germs  of  improvement  which  offer 
some  possible  prospect  of  a  moral  revolution.  The  brave  and  in 
telligent  Japanese  comes  nearer  to  the  Eurepean,  by  possessing  a 
more  masculine  character  and  a  higher  degree  of  civil  liberty. 
We  are  told  that  their  learned  language  is  the  ancient  Chinese,  and 
that  their  written  characters  have  a  still  greater  resemblance  with 
those  of  China  ;  but  those  of  tke  Japanese  stand  for  letters,  and 
not  for  entire  words.  The  Chinese  cannot  read  a  Japanese  book  ; 
but  every  well-educated  Japanese  can  read  the  books  of  China. 
M.  Titsingh,  who  is  now  engaged  in  a  great  work  on  Japan,  has 
brought  with  him  several  printed  books  which  do  honor  to  the  skill 
of  that  nation.  Their  types  are  not  movable,  and  they  print  only 
one  side  of  the  paper.  This  gentleman  has  in  his  possession  a 
superb  Herbal,  drawn  and  colored  both  with  taste  and  accuracy  ; 
he  has  brought  maps  and  plans  very  handsomely  colored  ;  and 
which,  though  they  have  neither  latitudes  nor  longitudes,  will  not 
be  without  their  use  in  chorography.  They  have,  since  600  years 
before  the  Christian  era,  been  in  the  practice  of  engraving  their 
money  and  the  coats  of  arms  of  their  principal  families. |  The 
Dutch  language  is  read  and  spoken  in  this  Asiatic  country.  Medi 
cine  and  natural  history  begin  to  be  taught  from  Dutch  books. 

*  Plat,  de  bono  Statu.  Relig.  lib.  II.  cap.  30. 

f  M.  Titsingh,  quoted  by  Charpentier-Cossigny.  in  his  Voyage  to  Bengal, 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  89 

Hitherto  their  physicians  have  been  very  ignorant  men.  Their 
astronomers  adhere  to  an  extremely  inconvenient  division  of  time. 
The  year,  which  is  lunar,  sometimes  begins  in  May,  sometimes  in 
February.  Seven  times  in  nineteen  years,  an  intercalary  month 
restores  it  to  the  solar  course.  The  schools  or  colleges,  however, 
seem  to  be  superior  to  those  of  any  other  Asiatic  country.  Flog 
gings  and  bowlings  are  not  the  sounds  with  which  they  ring,  but 
solemn  songs,  in  honor  of  their  heroes  and  national  gods.  Poetry 
is  held  in  honor.  In  some  arts  the  Japanese  surpass  the  im 
provements  of  European  industry.  They  have  excellent  copper 
smiths,  blacksmiths,  and  armorers.  Glass-works  are  common  in 
Japan,  and  they  even  make  telescopes  ;  their  pictures  are  loaded 
with  brilliant  colors,  but  in  composition  and  design  they  are  de 
fective. 

Their  houses,  which,  on  account  of  earthquakes,  have  only  two 
stories,  would  not  please  the  taste  of  an  European,  nor  would  their 
furniture  or  their  dress ;  but  all  these  objects  evince  the  industry 
and  ingenuity  of  the  people.  Divided  into  several  apartments  by 
movable  partitions,  the  interior  of  the  house  is  ornamented  with 
paintings,  and  gilt  and  colored  paper ;  their  furniture  glitters  with 
a  bright  and  unchangeable  varnish  ;  their  clothes  wide,  but  tucked 
up  with  a  sort  of  elegance,  are  of  substantial  cotton  and  silk  stuffs, 
generally  made  in  the  country ;  they  also  make  their  own  clasps, 
buckles,  and  other  trinkets  which  belong  to  the  female  attire,  straw 
slippers,  (which  are  left  at  the  door  when  they  enter  a  house), 
hats  of  flags*  which  they  wear  in  traveling,  and  indeed,  almost 
every  article  subservient  to  their  luxury  or  convenience.  The 
carriages  in  which  their  ladies  ride,  seem  to  be  elegant  and  commo 
dious.!  They  procure  a  kind  of  spirit  from  rice,  which  they  call 
saqui  or  zakki,  possessed  of  a  powerful  intoxicating  quality.  J 

A  Japanese  is  certainly  in  some  respects  rather  a  ludicrous  ob 
ject — his  head  half  shaved  ;  the  hair  which  is  left,  accumulated 
on  the  crown  of  his  head  ;  the  enormous  covering  of  oiled-paper 
in  which  he  is  wrapped  up  when  he  travels  ;  his  salutations,  which 
consists  in  bending  his  body  repeatedly  almost  to  the  ground  ;  and 
the  fan  which  he  constantly  holds  in  his  hand,  present  an  extraor 
dinary  figure.  They  entertain  a  high  sense  of  honor,  and  observe 
towards  each  other  the  most  ceremonious  politeness  ;  their  courte 
sies  and  ceremonies  are  infinite  ;  they  have  many  books  teaching 

"  D'herbe."  f  Ambassade  au  Japon,  p.  98,  145. 

t  Titsingh,  in  the  "  Verhandelingen  van  het  Bataviaasch  genootschap 


90  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

how  to  take  a  draught  of  water,  how  to  give  and  receive  presents, 
and  all  the  other  minutia)  of  behavior.  Their  chiefs  are  said  not 
so  much  to  resemble  our  counts  and  dukes  as  tributary  sovereigns, 
like  those  of  Arragon  and  Castile ;  they  are  supposed  the  entire 
proprietors  of  the  laud,  part  of  which  they  keep  tor  the  support  of 
themselves  and  their  families,  and  divide  the  rest  among  their 
nobles  who  have  vassals  under  them.  The  Japanese,  proud  of 
the  minute  cleanliness  of  his  habits,  despises  the  Europeans  as  a 
dirty  race  ;  he  has  no  idea  of  our  keenness  in  dispute,  and,  even 
when  loaded  with  injuries,  does  not  utter  one  vehement  expression  ; 
but  his  pride  is  deep,  rancorous  and  invincible,  and  the  poignard, 
which  is  inseparable  from  his  person,  is  employed  as  an  instrument 
of  vengeance,  when  the  object  does  not  expect  it,  or  to  destroy  his 
own  life,  in  case  vengeance  is  impossible. 

The  law  allows  only  one  wife  to  the  Japanese,  but  the  concu 
bines  live  in  the  same  house.  The  wife  is  at  the  absolute  disposal 
of  the  husband  ;  and  when  she  incurs  his  displeasure,  she  has  no 
appeal.  Connubial  infidelity  is  rare  among  them,  although  they 
are  subjected  to  no  system  of  seclusion.  In  cases  of  divorce,  they 
are  obliged  to  go  constantly  with  the  head  shaved.  In  their  mar 
riage  ceremonies  there  is  an  agreeable  simplicity ;  the  woman 
standing  up  at  the  foot  of  the  altar,  lights  a  torch,  at  which  the 
man  lights  another.  It  is  also  the  custom  for  the  young  bride  to 
throw  the  playthings  of  her  childhood  into  the  fire. 

The  bodies  of  people  of  rank  when  they  die  are  burned,  those 
of  others  are  buried.  The  festival  of  lanterns  is  celebrated  as  in 
China,  to  which  is  added  the  custom  of  visiting  the  graves  at  stated 
times;  the  manes  are  regaled  with  food  and  drink,  and  treated 
with  songs  and  compliments. 

The  public  amusements  consist  of  dramatic  entertainments, 
which  are  said  not  to  be  inferior  to  those  of  polished  nations.  The 
great  number  of  dancing  girls  and  boys*  announces  the  relaxation 
of  public  morals,  which  is  also  evinced  by  the  great  number  of  in 
famous  houses,  which  are  more  scandalously  protected  here  than 
in  any  other  count ry.| 

Inland  communication  is  greatly  facilitated  by  well-kept  roads  ; 
nor  are  there  any  duties  to  interrupt  the  progress  of  trade.  The 
harbors,  though  shut  against  the  commercial  enterprise  of  Euro- 

*  "  Des  danseuses  en  grand  nombre,  et  sturtout  dcs  danseurs  plus 
qu'effemin^s." 

f  Ksernpfer,  II.  9. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  91 

peans,  are  filled  with  large  and  small  craft.  The  shops  and  mar 
kets  teem  with  all  sorts  of  commodities.  In  the  towns  there  are 
large  fairs,  which  attract  a  numerous  concourse  of  people.  The 
Chinese  is  the  most  important  branch  of  their  foreign  trade.  They 
import  raw  silk,  sugar,  turpentine,  and  drugs  ;  they  export  copper 
in  bars,  varnish,  and  gum-lac.  According  to  Titsingh  and  Thun- 
berg,  the  profits  of  the  Dutch  trade  to  Japan  are  not  very  consid 
erable  ;  two  vessels  only  are  employed  in  it.  The  Japanese 
money  is  singular  in  its  form.  Mr.  Titsingh  has  some  pieces  in 
his  possession  which  have  a  convex  eliptical  shape  ;  the  gold  pieces 
are  called  kobangs ;  the  silver  ones,  which  are  called  kodama, 
sometimes  have  a  figure  of  Da'ikok,  the  god  of  riches,  seated  on 
two  casks  of  rice,  with  a  hammer  in  his  right  hand  and  a  bag  in 
his  left.*  M.  Titsingh 's  collection  of  coins  goes  as  far  back  as  600 
years  before  Christ. 

Such  is  this  singular  Asiatic  country,  too  much  extolled  by  the 
traveling  naturalists,  as  Thunberg,  and  too  much  vilified  by  the 
missionaries.  The  former  saw  there  only  a  magnificent  botanic 
garden  ;  the  latter,  only  the  stains  left  by  the  blood  of  the  martyrs. 
The  description  of  Varenius  and  that  of  Valentine  seem  dictated 
by  the  discontents  of  the  Dutch  nation  at  the  time  at  which  they 
were  composed.  M.  Titsingh,  who,  while  exercising  the  functions 
of  Dutch  resident,  conciliated  the  esteem  and  confidence  of  the 
princes  of  the  imperial  blood  of  Japan,  is  employed  in  a  large  his 
torical,  political  and  geographical  work  on  this  country,  which  he 
seems  to  have  studied  with  greater  deliberation  and  greater  zeal 
than  any  one  before  him. 

The  two  chains  of  mountains  which  traverse  Corea  and  Japan 
seem  to  approach  one  another,  and  to  be  continued  along  the  bed 
of  the  sea,  so  as  to  form  a  series  of  little  Archipelagoes,  extending 
from  Japan  to  the  Island  of  Formosa.  In  this  maritime  region, 
which  is  little  known,  we  find  the  state  of  Loo-choo^  or  Lequeyo. 
The  difference  in  the  orthography  arises  from  this  circumstance, 
that  the  Chinese  letter  £,  similar  to  the  Swedish,  has  neither  the 
sound  of  the  English  cA,  or  tch,  nor  of  the  French  k ;  it,  therefore, 
can  only  be  imperfectly  expressed  by  some  combination  of  our  con 
sonants,  as  tkj  or  tgh.  This  is  a  very  flourishing  state,  and  worthy 
of  engaging  our  interest.  For  the  first  good  information  on  the 
subject  we  are  indebted  to  a  Chinese  ambassador  named  Soo-pa- 
koo-ang,  who  was  sent  thither  in  1719,  and  from  whose  writings 

*  Titsingh,  Verhandelingen  f  Lieu-Kieu. 


92  JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE. 

Father  Gaubil,  the  missionary,  has  extracted  his  account.*  Ksemp- 
fer  had  indeed  previously  mentioned  it  under  the  name  of  the  Is 
lands  of  Liquejo,  but  in  an  obscure  and  general  manner.  A  very 
few  years  ago,  the  principal  island  was  visited  by  two  British  ves 
sels,  which  had  gone  out  with  Lord  Amherst  to  China,  and  took 
the  opportunity  of  making  this  trip  during  that  nobleman's  stay. 

According  to  Gaubil,  these  islands  form,  as  we  have  already 
stated,  a  sort  of  chain,  or  series  of  little  Archipelagoes,  extending 
from  Kiu-Siu,  the  most  southerly  of  the  great  islands  of  Japan,  to 
the  Island  of  Formosa ;  there  are  in  all  thirty-six,  subject  to  the 
same  government.  To  the  south  of  Kiu-Siu,  there  are  seven 
small  islands,  and  a  large  one  called  Tanaxima,  belonging  to  the 
Japanese  empire,  and  to  the  south  of  these,  eight  others  which 
belong  to  the  king  of  Loo-Choo ;  they  are  called  Oofoo  Chima,  or 
the  islands  of  Oofoo  ;  the  principal  one  is  called  Oofoo,  in  the 
country  itself,  and  Tatao,  or  "  the  Great  Island,"  by  the  Chinese. 
These  islands  are  fertile  and  populous,  with  the  exception  of  Ki- 
kiai,  which,  however,  like  Oofoo,  contains  forests  of  fine  large 
cedars. 

On  the  south-west  of  these  is  the  great  Island  of  Loo-Choo ;  it 
is  about  fifty  miles  long  and  from  twelve  to  fifteen  broad.  The 
king  resides  at  its  south  end,  in  a  palace  called  Cheoole,  in  the 
neighborhood  of  the  capital  Kien-Ching,  which  has  a  sea-port 
named  Napakiang,  at  a  distance  of  five  miles  ;  this  place  was 
found,  by  the  observations  made  on  board  the  Alceste,  to  be  in  lat 
itude  25°  15  N.  and  in  127°  52'  1"  of  east  longitude;  this  is  its 
south-west  point,  the  main  body  of  the  island  extending  from  this 
north  and  a  little  easterly  ;  all  the  rocks  about  it  are  of  coral,  and 
immense  masses,  often  of  grotesque  shapes,  are  seen  everywhere 
along  the  sea-shore  ;  many  of  the  same  nature  are  found  on  the 
higher  land,  at  a  distance  from  the  beach,  the  origin  of  which  may 
be  considered  as  problematical,  and  is  supposed  by  some  to  have 
been  disguised  by  the  action  of  volcanic  fire  having  raised  them  to 
an  elevation  beyond  the  reach  of  the  ocean  in  which  they  were 
generated. |  To  the  west  of  this  island  there  are  ten  others,  well 
peopled  and  productive,  with  the  exception  of  Lung-hoang-chu,  or 
"  the  Sulphur  Island,"  so  called  from  the  quantities  of  that  sub 
stance  which  it  affords.  To  the  east  of  Formosa  there  are  seven 
teen  others,  all  dependent  on  the  King  of  Loo-Choo. 

The  natives  trace  their  history  back  to  a  period  long  anterior  to 

*  Lettres  Edifiantes,  XIV.  f  See  Captain  Hall's  account. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  93 

the  Christian  era  ;  but  they  had  no  communication  with  the  rest 
of  the  world  till  about  the  year  605,  when  they  were  discovered  by 
the  Chinese,  who  found  them  the  same  agreeable  and  polished 
people  as  they  now  are,  though  perhaps  less  on  the  Chinese  model 
in  some  particulars  than  they  have  since  been.  The  only  connec 
tion  which  they  have  had  with  their  neighbors  has  been  with  Japan 
and  China,  and  even  this  has  been  very  limited,  nor,  from  what 
we  know  of  these  nations,  are  they  liable  to  exhibit  much  change, 
or  likely  to  have  communicated  variations  of  fashion  or  of  habits  to 
others.  Graubil  says,  that  Loo-Choo  was  not  subjugated  till  seven 
centuries  after,  or  about  the  fourteenth  century,  and  he  adds,  that 
before  that  time  the  great  island  was  divided  into  three  political 
communities,  whence  it  is  called  in  some  maps,  u  the  Island  of  the 
Three  Kings." 

The  climate  of  Loo-Choo  is  one  of  the  most  propitious  in  the 
world.  Refreshed  by  the  sea-breezes  which  blow  over  it  at  every 
period  of  the  year,  it  is  free  from  the  extremes  of  heat  and  cold. 
The  land  does  not  contain  those  marshes  which  are  so  great  a 
source  of  disease  in  the  warmer  latitudes,  and  the  people  appear  to 
those  who  have  visited  them  to  enjoy  robust  health.  Nature  has 
been  bountiful  in  all  her  gifts  to  that  favored  country.  Such  is  the 
felicity  of  its  soil  and  climate,  that  vegetable  productions,  very  dif 
ferent  in  their  nature,  and  generally  found  in  regions  very  distant 
from  each  other,  grow  here  side  by  side.  Not  only  the  orange  and 
the  lime,  but  the  Indian  banyan  and  the  Norwegian  fir,  the  tea- 
plant  and  sugar-cane,  all  flourish  together.  It  abounds  in  rice, 
wheat,  melons,  pine-apples,  ginger,  pepper,  camphor,  dye-woods, 
wood  for  fuel,  silk,  wax,  and  salt ;  it  also  yields  coral  and  pearls. 
The  animals  are  oxen,  sheep,  horses,  deer,  and  poultry.  Almost 
the  whole  animal  creation  here  is  of  diminutive  size,  but  all  excel 
lent  in  their  kind  ;  the  bullocks  seldom  weigh  more  than  350  Ibs. 
but  are  plump  and  well  conditioned,  and  the  beef  very  fine  ;  their 
goats  and  pigs  are  reduced  in  the  same  proportion,  their  poultry 
forming  the  only  exception. 

The  men  are  a  very  small  race,  the  average  height  not  exceed 
ing  five  feet  two  inches,  but  sturdy  and  athletic  ;  the  women  are 
of  corresponding  stature.  They  have  a  good  deal  of  the  Corean 
physiognomy,  with  increased  mildness.  They  have  nothing  of  the 
drowsy  and  elongated  eye  of  the  Chinese.  The  few  Chinese  and 
their  descendants  settled  here  have  no  appearance  of  having  freely 
mixed  with  the  Loo-Chooans,  both  their  features  and  dispositions 
being  wholly  distinct.  They  show  no  mixture  of  Indian  blood,  be- 


94  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

ing  quite  as  fair  as  the  southern  Europeans  ;  even  those  who  are 
most  exposed,  are  scarcely  so  swarthy  as  persons  of  the  same  class 
of  society  in  Spain  and  Portugal.  They  are  a  well-bred  and  cul 
tivated  race.  They  have  a  priesthood  of  13onzes,  who  are  gene 
rally  educated  in  Japan.  Their  books  on  religion,  morality,  and 
science,  are  in  the  Chinese  character,  but,  for  common  purposes, 
the  Japanese  letters  are  employed.  Their  language  differs  both 
from  the  Chinese  and  Japanese,  though  possessing  many  words 
in  common  with  both.  The  Emperor  Kyang-Hi  established  a  li 
brary  in  the  principal  island  in  1720,  and  ordered  a  temple  to  be 
built  to  Confucius.  To  the  latest  visitors,  the  crews  of  the  Al- 
ceste  and  Lyra,  this  people  appeared  amiable  in  the  highest  degree. 
The  friendliness  and  cordiality  of  the  respectable  persons  who  com 
posed  these  crews  gave  them  an  opportunity  of  cultivating  a 
knowledge  of  their  character,  and  exchanging  with  them  sentiments 
which  did  the  highest  honor  to  both  parties,  and  appear  peculiarly 
affecting  as  occurring  between  races  who  met  from  such  an  immense 
local  distance,  and  had  derived  all  their  ideas  from  sources  which 
in  the  lapse  of  ages  had  no  mutual  communication.  On  such  scenes 
as  are  depicted  in  the  narratives  of  Mr.  M'Leod,  surgeon  of  the 
Alceste,  and  Captain  Hall  commanding  the  Lyra,  the  mind  enjoys 
a  most  agreeable  repose,  after  having  long  traveled  over  pictures 
in  moral  and  political  geography  which  exhibit  so  many  deplorable 
instances  of  the  inhumanity  arising  from  unrestrained  passions,  and 
from  errors  which  generate  antipathies  that  lacerate  in  the  deepest 
manner  the  peace  of  society.  The  effect  of  this  moral  and  social 
excellence  is  heightened  by  the  delicious  picture  which  the  country, 
rich  by  nature  and  admirably  improved  by  art,  exhibits  to  the  eye, 
refuting  the  dogmatism  of  those  who  maintain  that  the  abundance 
of  the  means  of  pleasure  has  an  invariable  effect  in  vitiating  the 
heart,  and  that  virtue  is  nowhere  to  be  found  but  in  scenes  in  which 
the  scantiness  and  simplicity  of  the  gifts  of  nature,  set  limits  to  the 
wanderings  of  human  inclination. 

"  From  a  commanding  height  above  the  ships,"  says  Mr.  M'Leod. 
"  the  view,  is  in  all  directions,  picturesque  and  delightful.  On  one 
hand  are  seen  the  distant  lands  rising  from  a  wide  expanse  of 
ocean,  while  the  clearness  of  the  water  enables  the  eye  to  trace  all 
the  coral  reefs  which  protect  the  anchorage  immediately  below.  To 
the  south  is  the  city  of  Napafoo,  the  vessels  lying  at  anchor  in  the 
harbor,  with  their  streamers  flying  ;  and  in  the  intermediate  space 
appear  numerous  hamlets  scattered  about  on  the  banks  of  the  rivers 
which  meander  in  the  valley  beneath.  Turning  to  the  east,  the 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  95 

houses  of  Kint-ching,  the  capital  city,  built  in  their  peculiar  style, 
are  observed  opening  from  among  the  lofty  trees  which  surround 
and  shade  them,  rising  one  above  another  in  gentle  ascent  to  the 
summit  of  a  hill,  which  is  crowned  by  the  king's  palace  ;  the  inte 
resting  grounds  between  Napafo  and  Kint-ching,  a  distance  of  some 
miles,  being  ornamented  by  a  continuation  of  villas  and  country 
houses.  To  the  north,  as  far  as  the  eye  can  reach,  the  higher 
land  is  covered  with  extensive  forests."  About  half  a  mile  from, 
this  eminence  the  traveler  is  led  by  a  foot-path  to  what  seems 
only  a  little  wood  ;  on  entering  which,  under  an  archway  formed 
by  the  intermingling  branches  of  the  opposite  trees,  he  passes  along 
a  serpentine  labyrinth,  intersected  at  short  distances  by  others. 
Not  far  from  each  other,  on  either  side  of  these  walks,  small  wicker 
doors  are  observed  ;  on  opening  any  of  which  he  is  surprised  by 
the  appearance  of  a  court-yard  and  house,  with  the  children, 
and  all  the  usual  cottage-train,  generally  gamboling  about ;  so 
that,  while  a  man  fancies  himself  in  some  sequestered  retreat, 
he  is  in  fact  in  the  middle  of  a  populous  but  invisible  village. 

They  found  many  of  these  islanders  persons  of  great  intelli 
gence  and  address.  One  individual  was  particularly  characterized, 
whose  name  was  Madera,  a  man  of  rank  and  influence  in  the 
government,  who  came  on  board  in  the  disguise  of  a  person  of  mean 
condition,  for  the  purpose  of  learning  the  character  and  intentions 
of  these  visitors,  and  gradually  and  frankly  unfolded  his  real  cha 
racter  in  proportion  as  his  confidence  in  this  respect  increased.  A 
series  of  anecdotes  is  related,  showing  his  aptness  in  acquiring  both 
the  language  and  the  ideas  of  the  English.  He  delighted  in  re 
ceiving  information  ;  and  his  remarks  were  always  pertinent.  The 
map  of  the  world,  with  the  track  of  the  ship  across  the  various 
oceans  from  Britain  to  Loo-Choo,  with  the  different  intervening 
continents  and  islands,  when  pointed  out,  he  and  others  traced  with 
great  care,  and  seemed  at  last  to  comprehend,  though  such  objects 
were  entirely  new  to  them,  and  though  they  appear  to  have  had  no 
idea  of  the  figure  or  vast  extent  of  the  globe.  Madera  was  gay  or 
serious,  as  occasion  required,  but  always  respectable,  and  all  his 
countrymen  seem  to  be  gifted  with  a  sort  of  politeness  which 
might  be  fairly  termed  natural,  having  in  it  nothing  constrained  or 
studied. 


DO 


I 


*$ 

't 

o 

^ 


•S 


HC 

O 


•s 

•? 


i 


1 


Observers. 

p!  O  /- 

l«j 

"11 

|J| 

.2                           , 
1                                 I 

C                                               o 

? 

B        «  e                                    B  «  » 

••'.:        III!          HI 

..to           g    .  «  g                           g  ~°  H    
SS          S  S  =           a  E  5  2                           Sa-SEEEES 

22        22«         £2o«                       t2j'°'T=2"ror!:>2 

d 
.  c 

fcJOO 
0 

ja 

!:  «*   «»:::    11  »»» 

\  A 

•3 

\* 

i° 

•« 

»0  0                CO^H                  0000      .      .      .                        00         OOOOOCi 

i—  1                                       r-i   r-  (                        CO                     CQ                                                           CO                                                                 Tf 

C^I-H                Cl'OCO                  COOCOO,..                        COOS         OMCO*OOt^- 

> 

:  :     g  :  •  :          :  •  -.3  :  :  •     2       •  :      !  1  :,.•;: 

j-  :    A"  :  :•  :          :  j-  :  ^  :  :  :     5  3  4  J         :  :  :  £  1 

'cJ 
u 

8 
| 

S 

i 

T3 

'£.N^r,§     .'^3   ji>        5     cd   »     I  3     1;2   0"       <S5O     ^   >"          -&'a'2^'!S. 
g^OO     !  S  ffl         *     ^5     '  M  3  T5  ^               °-^M        '•sWSbD- 

P-    2-^-3  ^"3          ^  1     ^2  §  ^-        "       ^"^     P-<S  >><u  «  i 
O          42      u>-           O  1      2£o          o       OO      Ot^pSHO1 

1 

Observers. 

Krusenstern. 

Mom 

.  ..|S|IP?|!     i        5lf{ 

.5 
t*- 

CD 

•- 

I 

C 
* 

fck  o 

sj 

g.  min.sec. 
42  45  15 

:>  >o  >o  o      10           ira           Tf                         ^                us  >o           "O      10 

Ir^COr-irtUS                                              «S                             ^Ttrt 

5  10  O  CT>         O                O                CO                                      C»                         i-H  'f                O         O» 
S^tCOm^                o                «3                                      10                         >OCO                ri         « 

? 

P 

~ 

•3 

"rt 

1   " 

5OOO.               O              ^                                   o                       >OO              OCO 

i      :         :                             4t               :  :     o         : 

on 

SEGHALTEX. 
Cape  Elizabeth,  

Is  :      i                3  11       o  ll'lll   i 

If       i      §             a     f-        S^S|«^     ; 

3?i       :      §             w°l        -  JII's'S     : 
j  PL,  <i  ;             Q                       p  c^-          5  w  Z  -«  jr 

»-                                                  ""^cd^                   vj  •—  ^«g  H^ 

|ll|l              gg-S              |§l 
l22o2           5                 5^2 

XACA    DEITY    OF    JAPAN. 


OF    JAPAN. 


[From  the  WONDERS  OF  NATURE  AND  ART.     By  the  Rev.  Thos.  Smith.    Revised 
by  James  Mease,  M.  D.    14  vols.     Philadelphia  :  1806. 


SITUATION,    CLIMATE,    SOIL,    AND    PRODUCTIONS. 

THIS  large  and  powerful  Empire  consists  of  a  great  number  of 
islands  [3,850,]  between  the  eastern  coast  of  Asia  and  the  western 
coast  of  America,  extending  from  130  to  147  degrees  east  longi 
tude,  and  from  30  to  41  degrees  north  latitude.  Though  most  of 
the  European  nations  call  this  country  Japan,  the  inhabitants  give- 
it  the  name  of  Niphon,  from  the  largest  island  belonging  to  it ;  and 
the  Chinese  call  it  Chiphon,  or  the  "  Basis  of  the  Sun,"  on  account 
of  its  eastern  situation.  Most  of  the  islands  which  compose  it  are 
environed  by  mountains,  rocks,  and  a  boisterous  sea  ;  and  the  creeks 
and  bays  are  so  choked  up  with  shoals,  sand,  or  mud,  that  sailing 
about  them  is  extremely  dangerous. 

These  islands,  lying  in  the  fifth  and  sixth  climates,  would  be 
much  hotter  in  summer  than  England,  were  they  not  refreshed  by 
the  sea-breezes,  to  which  they  are  much  exposed  by  their  elevated 
situation.  They  have  great  falls  of  snow  in  winter,  commonly  fol 
lowed  by  severe  frosts.  The  rains  in  summer  are  very  violent, 
particularly  in  June  and  July,  which,  on  that  account,  are  called 
the  water  months  ;  and  the  country  is  also  subject  to  dreadful  storms 
of  thunder  and  lightning,  as  well  as  hurricanes,  which  frequently 
do  a  great  deal  of  damage. 

The  soil  is  naturally  sterile  and  mountainous,  but  the  unremitting 
industry  of  the  natives  has  been  attended  with  such  success,  that  it 
produces  a  variety  of  grain,  fruits,  &c.,  for  exportation  as  well  as 
for  home  consumption.  The  seas,  lakes,  and  rivers  abound  with 
fish,  red  and  white  coral,  pearls,  marine  plants,  and  shells,  the  last 
of  which  are  not  inferior  to  those  that  are  brought  from  Amboyna, 


98  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

the  Moluccas,  and  other  easterly  islands.  The  woods  and  forests 
are  well  stocked  with  horses,  elephants,  deer,  oxen,  buffaloes,  sheep, 
hogs,  and  other  useful  animals  ;  and  some  of  the  mountains  contain 
rich  mines  of  gold,  silver,  copper,  tin,  lead,  and  iron,  whilst  others 
abound  with  several  sorts  of  marble  and  precious  stones. 

Among  the  great  variety  of  trees  found  in  this  country,  the 
cedars  exceed  all  of  that  kind  for  straightness,  height,  and  beauty  ; 
and  are  found  in  great  profusion  on  most  of  the  principal  islands. 
The  Japanese  citron  is  a  thorny  shrub,  the  trunk  of  which  acquires, 
by  age  and  culture,  the  thickness  of  a  tree.  The  fruit  resembles 
a  middle-sized  orange  ;  but  the  pulp  is  glutinous,  of  an  unpleasant 
smell,  and  a  harsh,  disagreeable  taste. 


VOLCANOES,    SPRINGS,   WHIRLPOOLS,    &C. 

Japan  is  remarkable  for  its  burning  mountains  ;  particularly  near 
Firando,  there  is  a  small,  rocky  island,  that  has  been  burning  and 
trembling  for  many  centuries,  and  at  a  small  distance  from  the 
coast  is  another,  which  has  thrown  out  lava  and  other  combustible 
matter  at  different  intervals,  for  many  ages. 

Earthquakes  are  so  frequent  in  Japan  that  the  natives  dread 
them  no  more  than  Europeans  do  storms  of  thunder  and  lightning ; 
and  ridiculously  imagine  them  to  be  caused  by  a  huge  whale  creep 
ing  under  the  ground.  Yet  the  shocks  are  sometimes  so  violent, 
and  last  so  long,  that  whole  cities  are  destroyed,  and  many  thou 
sands  of  the  inhabitants  buried  under  the  ruins.  Particularly  in 
the  year  1703,  an  earthquake,  attended  by  a  great  fire,  which 
broke  out  at  the  same  time,  destroyed  almost  the  whole  city  of 
Jeddo,  together  with  the  king's  palace,  and  two  hundred  thousand 
of  the  inhabitants. 

It  ought  not  to  be  omitted  that  on  the  coast  of  Japan  there  are 
two  remarkable  and  dangerous  whirlpools.  One,  near  Simabara, 
is  at  high-water  even  with  the  surface  of  the  sea ;  but  the  tide  no 
sooner  begins  to  ebb,  than,  after  some  violent  turnings,  it  suddenly 
sinks  to  the  depth  of  fifteen  fathoms,  swallowing  up  with  great 
force,  the  ships,  boats,  and  whatever  comes  within  its  reach,  dash 
ing  them  to  pieces  against  the  rocks  at  the  bottom,  where  they 
sometimes  remain  under  water,  and  at  others  are  thrown  out  again 
at  several  miles  distance.  The  other,  which  lies  near  the  coast  of 
the  Province  of  Kijnokuni,  rushes  with  a  loud,  boisterous  noise, 
about  a  small,  rocky  island,  which  by  the  violence  of  the  motion  is 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  99 

kept  in  perpetual  trembling.  But,  though  this  has  a  very  formi 
dable  appearance,  it  is  esteemed  less  dangerous  than  the  other  ; 
for  its  noise  being  heard  at  a  considerable  distance,  it  may  be 
easily  avoided. 

BUILDINGS. 

The  Japanese  affect  a  plainness  and  neatness  in  their  buildings. 
Their  houses  are  mostly  of  wood,  though  some  of  the  better  sort 
have  a  stone  foundation ;  and  they  are  but  one  story  high,  like 
those  of  China,  on  account  of  the  frequent  hurricanes  and  earth 
quakes  to  which  the  country  is  subject.  The  chief  furniture  of  the 
houses  of  the  nobility  is  likewise  rather  elegant  than  sumptuous, 
consisting  of  cabinets,  screens,  beds,  &c.,  of  the  best  sort,  but  they 
do  not  affect  a  show  of  plate,  jewels,  and  other  costly  ornaments. 
Porcelain  vessels  which  the  Japanese  make  very  large  and  exqui 
sitely  fine,  are  the  chief  embellishments  of  their  rooms,  excepting 
curious  cimeters,  and  other  kinds  of  armory.  What  appears  most 
splendid  are  the  ceilings  of  their  halls,  stair-cases,  and  summer- 
houses,  which  are  commonly  of  fine  cedar,  and  beautifully  gilded 
and  painted.  Before  their  houses  they  have  usually  a  spacious 
court,  with  an  ascent  of  three  or  four  steps,  and  a  similar  descent 
behind,  which  leads  into  the  gardens. 

The  palace  of  the  Japanese  Emperor  at  Jeddo,  the  capital  of 
his  dominions,  is  not  less  magnificent  and  spacious  than  that  of  the 
Emperor  of  China.  It  is  surrounded  by  three  high  walls,  and  as 
many  deep  ditches,  with  large  intervals  between  each  ;  and  the 
water  is  conveyed  from  one  ditch  to  another  by  subterranean  pipes, 
so  that  they  are  always  equally  full.  These  walls  have  eight  or 
nine  stately  gates  opposite  to  each  other,  and  between  every  two 
gates  there  is  first  a  level  piece  of  ground,  and  then  an  ascent  by 
steps  into  certain  outworks,  with  another  area  beyond  them,  where 
a  thousand  men  may  be  drawn  up  on  any  emergency  ;  so  that  the 
avenues  to  the  imperial  apartments  are  sufficiently  secured.  In 
the  space  between  the  first  and  second  wall  live  the  princes,  chi"r 
nobility,  and  governors  of  the  provinces,  in  stately  edifices,  accord 
ing  to  their  rank  and  office  ;  and  the  ornaments  and  furniture 
within  are  answerable  to  their  external  appearance ;  it  being 
esteemed  a  mark  of  respect  to  their  monarch  to  strive  to  excel  one 
another  in  the  riches  and  splendor  of  their  houses  and  furniture. 
Between  the  second  and  third  wall  live  the  Emperor's  relations  and 
principal  counselors,  each  in  separate  apartments,  or  rather  palaces, 


100  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

extremely  grand  and  beautiful.  In  the  centre  of  all,  within  the 
third  inclosure,  are  the  imperial  apartments,  consisting  of  a  great 
number  of  spacious  halls,  lodgings,  offices,  &c.,  for  the  Emperor, 
his  wives,  and  attendants,  all  of  them  richly  furnished.  These 
apartments  are  three  rows  of  buildings,  nine  stories  high,  formed 
on  the  top  like  pyramids,  and  crowned  with  large  gilded  dolphins. 
The  ceilings  of  the  halls  and  chambers  are  plated  with  gold  and 
silver,  curiously  wrought,  and  enriched  with  a  variety  of  precious 
stones.  The  hangings  are  of  the  richest  silk,  flowered  with  silver 
and  gold,  pearl,  and  other  embellishments.  In  the  hall  of  audience, 
where  the  Emperor  receives  homage  or  ambassadors,  there  is  a 
throne  of  massy  gold,  set  with  large  gems  of  inestimable  value. 
The  roof,  which  is  very  lofty,  is  also  plated  with  gold,  richly 
enameled  with  curious  figures  and  landscapes,  and  supported  by 
stately  gilded  columns.  The  gardens  behind  the  apartments  are 
laid  out  in  an  elegant  taste,  and  are  most  agreeably  diversified  and 
adorned  with  terraces,  canals,  fish-ponds,  water-works,  and  other 
ornaments.  Nor  must  we  omit  to  mention  the  noble  theatre  in  the 
area  before  this  inner  court,  where  plays  are  frequently  acted  for 
the  diversion  of  the  imperial  family.  Upon  the  whole,  this  amaz 
ing  palace,  or  rather  assemblage  of  palaces,  which  is  five  or  six 
miles  in  circumference,  looks  like  a  populous  and  opulent  city  with 
in  itself,  inhabited  by  princes  and  nobles,  and  by  the  eldest  sons  of 
all  the  great  men  of  the  empire,  who  are  educated  there,  and  kept 
as  pledges  of  their  fathers'  fidelity.  All  these  contribute  to  form 
a  most  splendid  court,  their  dress,  equipages,  &c.,  being  extremely 
beautiful  and  sumptuous. 

At  Meaco,  formerly  the  capital  of  Japan,  there  is  the  most 
magnificent  and  sumptuous  temple  in  the  whole  empire.  It  is  as 
long  and  as  high  as  St.  Paul's  church  in  London,  the  dome  ex- 
cepted,  and  is  all  built  of  free-stone.  It  has  an  arched  roof,  sup 
ported  by  a  great  number  of  pillars  ;  and  has  a  vast  many  altars 
and  idols  in  it,  particularly  a  gigantic  one  of  gilt  copper.  This 
temple  stands  upon  the  top  of  a  hill,  and  on  each  side  of  the  ascent 
there  are  fifty  stone  pillars,  ten  paces  distant  from  one  another ;  on 
the  tops  of  these  are  so  many  large  lanterns  or  lamps,  which  being 
lighted  in  the  night-time,  make  a  pretty  appearance. 

The  temples  at  Jeddo  arc  very  numerous  and  splendid,  particu 
larly  that  of  Amida,  one  of  their  principal  deities,  which  is  almost 
covered  with  gold.  The  statue  of  that  deity  is  on  horse-back, 
placed  on  a  magnificent  altar,  covered  with  plates  of  the  same 
metal ;  and  the  housings  of  the  horse  are  also  embroidered  and 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  101 

enriched  with  pearls,  diamonds,  and  other  gems  of  immense  value. 
Nothing  can  be  more  ugly  and  frightful,  however,  than  the  figure  in 
which  he  is  represented  ;  and  indeed  many  other  idols  of  these 
eastern  nations  are  formed  in  the  most  monstrous  shapes  ima 
ginable. 

Of  all  the  religious  structures,  however,  in  this  country,  that  of 
Daibud  is  not  only  the  largest,  but  the  most  remarkable.  This 
temple  stands  on  ninety-six  pillars,  and  has  several  lofty,  but  nar 
row  entrances.  The  body  of  this  pile  consists  as  it  were  of  two 
stories,  which  run  into  each  other,  and  consequently  have  a  double 
roof ;  the  uppermost  of  which  is  supported  by  painted  pillars  about 
two  yards  in  diameter. 

The  image  of  the  idol  Daibud,  which  stood  in  the  middle  of  the 
temple,  is,  on  account  of  its  enormous  size,  enough  to  strike  any 
spectator  with  emotions  of  terror  and  awe.  It  is  in  a  sitting  pos 
ture,  and  raised  about  two  yards  from  the  ground,  with  its  legs 
placed  before  it,  in  the  Indian  manner.  The  ears  are  pendu 
lous,  the  hair  short  and  curling,  the  shoulders  naked,  the  body 
covered  with  a  wrapper,  the  right  arm  elevated,  and  the  left  laid 
edgewise  against  the  belly.  So  enormous  is  the  magnitude  of  this 
symbolical  representation  of  the  greatness  of  the  deity,  that  six 
men  may  sit  on  the  palm  of  his  hand.  This  idol,  and  the  sect  that 
worships  it,  derive  their  origin  from  India,  at  some  very  remote 
period. 

M.  Thunberg  informs  us,  that  his  astonishment,  at  the  contem 
plation  of  this  enormous  statue,  had  not  yet  ceased,  when  he  was 
carried  to  another  temple,  nearly  as  majestic,  and  worthy  of  ad 
miration.  This  was  dedicated  to  Quanwon,  and  his  image,  together 
with  his  dii  minores,  to  the  number,  as  it  was  said,  of  thirty-three 
thousand  three  hundred  and  thirty-three,  are  arranged  in  twelve 
rows  within  its  walls.  These  are  of  different  magnitudes,  and  are 
placed  according  to  their  height,  the  smallest  being  in  front,  so 
that  they  may  be  all  seen  at  one  view. 

The  monstrous  Colossus*  at  Meaco,  is  reckoned  among  the  rarities 

*  This  is  a  name  given  to  any  stcitue  of  an  enormous  or  gigantic  size. 
The  most  eminent  of  this  kind  was  the  Colossus  of  Rhodes,  which  was  a 
brazen  statue  of  Apollo,  whose  height  was  seventy  cubits,  or  one  hundred 
and  five  feet,  and  every  part  proportionable,  the  thumb  being  so  big  that 
few  men  could  grasp  it  with  their  arms,  and  every  finger  of  the  size  of  an 
ordinary  statue.  One  of  its  feet  stood  on  one  side  of  the  mouth  of  the 
harbor,  and  the  other  on  the  opposite  side,  so  that  ships  under  sail  passed 
between  its  legs.  It  was  the  work  of  Chares,  a  disciple  of  Lysippus,  who 


102  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

of  that  country,  and  is  therefore  proper  to  be  mentioned.  It  is 
one  of  their  principal  idols  or  deities,  is  all  of  gilt  copper,  and  is 
seated  in  a  chair  seventy  feet  high.  No  less  than  fifteen  men, 
they  say,  can  stand  conveniently  on  its  head  ;  and,  its  other  parts 
being  proportionable,  one  may  from  thence  form  a  judgment  of  its 
enormous  size.  The  Japanese  indeed,  as  well  as  the  Chinese,  are 
so  addicted  to  idolatrous  worship,  that  every  place  swarms  with 
idols  ;  they  have  them  not  only  in  their  temples,  but  in  other  pub 
lic  and  private  buildings,  and  even  in  their  highways,  streets,  and 
markets. 


CUSTOMS,    MANNERS,    RELIGION,    AND    GOVERNMENT    OF    THE 
JAPANESE. 

The  inhabitants  of  Japan  are,  in  general,  active,  easy  in  their 
motions,  and  stout  limbed  ;  though  of  inferior  strength  to  the 
northern  inhabitants  of  Europe.  The  men  are  of  a  middling  size, 
and  not  much  inclined  to  corpulency.  Their  skin  is  of  a  yellowish 
color,  sometimes  bordering  on  brown,  and  sometimes  on  white,  ac 
cording  to  their  exposure  to  the  effects  of  the  sun.  Ladies  of  dis 
tinction,  who  seldom  go  abroad  without  being  covered  from  the  sun 
and  air,  are  remarkably  fair. 

The  distinguishing  characteristic  of  the  Japanese  is  their  oblong, 
small  eyes,  in  which  respect  they  resemble  the  Chinese.  Their 
eye-brows  are  also  placed  pretty  high,  and  the  eyelids  form,  in  the 
great  angle,  a  deep  furrow.  Their  heads  are  generally  large  ;  their 


spent  twelve  years  in  making  it ;  and,  after  it  had  stood  above  1300  years, 
it  was  thrown  down  by  an  earthquake.  When  the  Saracens  made  them 
selves  masters  of  Rhodes,  the  statue  was  found  upon  the  ground  broken 
and  demolished,  and  was  sold  to  a  Jew,  who  loaded  nine  hundred  camels 
with  the  metal;  which,  therefore,  allowing  eight  hundred  weight  to  each 
load,  (besides  the  diminution  we  may  suppose  it  had  suffered  by  rust  and 
theft  in  a  long  course  of  time),  amounted  to  720,000  pounds  weight,  or 
three  hundred  and  sixty  tons — a  prodigious  quantity  of  brass  to  be  em 
ployed  in  forming  one  single  statue  !  Some  of  the  moderns  have  doubted 
whether  there  ever  was  such  a  statue  at  Rhodes  as  the  Colossus  above  de 
scribed,  and  indeed  the  extravagant  dimensions  ascribed  to  it  would  tempt 
one  to  doubt  the  truth  of  the  relation.  But,  being  mentioned  by  so  many 
writers  of  reputation,  it  is  more  than  probable  that  there  was  at  Rhodes 
an  image  of  a  prodigious  size,  dedicated  to  the  sun ;  though  the  hyperbo 
lical  or  figurative  expressions,  used  by  some  writers,  concerning  it,  may 
have  given  occasion  to  others  to  magnify  its  dimensions  considerably 
beyond  the  truth. 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  103 

necks  short ;  their  hair  black,  thick,  and  glossy ;  their  noses,  though 
not  flat,  are  rather  short  and  thick. 

These  people  may,  in  general,  be  reckoned  intelligent,  brave, 
courteous,  industrious,  frugal,  and  upright ;  but,  at  the  same  time, 
those  virtues  are  frequently  tarnished  by  the  opposite  vices.  In. 
all  their  enterprises  they  display  sense  and  steadiness,  as  far  as  the 
lights  they  have  received  can  be  supposed  to  guide  them  ;  and  in 
stead  of  being  ranked  among  savage  nations,  they  must  be  allowed 
to  have  made  very  great  advances  in  civilization.  Their  mode  of 
government,  their  regulations  respecting  foreign  commerce,  their 
manufactures  and  industry,  evince  proofs  of  policy,  steadiness,  and 
spirit.  Far  from  indulging  in  the  idle  vanity  of  personal  decora 
tions,  which,  among  some  Oriental  nations,  are  most  ridiculously 
tawdry,  they  study  merely  comfort  and  convenience,  and  leave  glit 
tering  finery  to  the  slaves  of  fashion  or  extravagance. 

Liberty  is  the  ruling  passion  of  the  Japanese  ;  but  it  is  liberty 
founded  on  order  and  secured  by  law — not  the  wild  fire  of  anarchy 
and  licentiousness.  They  are  submissive  to  the  laws,  not  to  any 
arbitrary  power  ;  and  they  execrate  the  inhuman  traffic  in  slaves, 
which  the  Dutch  and  other  nations  carry  on. 

The  rights  and  immunities  of  the  rich  and  the  indigent  are 
equally  protected  ;  and  the  uncommon  severity  of  the  laws,  joined 
to  the  certain  execution  of  them,  serves  to  keep  every  one  within 
proper  bounds.  Even  foreigners  are  secured  in  all  their  established 
rights  ;  nor  are  there  any  fraudulent  attempts  or  open  attacks 
made  on  them,  while  they  refrain  from  encroachments  on  the 
natives.  • 

Some  of  the  institutions  of  this  Empire  are  unparalleled  in  the 
whole  world.  It  is  death  for  a  native  to  leave  the  empire  ;  nor 
are  any  strangers  suffered  to  come  among  them,  except  a  few  Dutch 
and  Chinese,  who  are  watched  like  state  prisoners. 

With  respect  to  courtesy  and  submission  to  their  superiors,  few 
nations  can  be  compared  to  the  Japanese.  Subordination  to 
government  and  obedience  to  their  parents,  are  inculcated  into 
children  in  their  early  infancy ;  and  in  every  situation  of  life  they 
are,  in  this  respect,  instructed  by  the  example  rather  than  the 
precepts  of  their  elders.  Various  modes  of  salutation  are  estab 
lished  between  different  ranks,  and  these  are  strictly  and  invariably 
attended  to. 

They  carry  their  curiosity  and  inquisitiveness  to  a  great  length, 
which  may  be  ascribed  to  their  desire  to  obtain  information.  They 
frequently  tire  the  Dutch  with  their  questions,  which,  however, 


104  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

always  display  shrewdness  and  a  love  of  knowledge.  The  physi 
cian  who  attends  the  factory,  is  highly  regarded  by  the  Japanese 
on  account  of  his  learning  ;  and  they  consult  him  as  an  oracle,  not 
only  on  subjects  connected  with  his  profession,  but  on  every  branch 
of  science  which  they  presume  he  must  be  acquainted  with. 

Frugality  seems  to  have  fixed  its  residence  in  Japan,  for  this 
virtue  is  equally  esteemed  in  the  imperial  palace  as  in  the  poorest 
cottage.  It  is  in  consequence  of  this,  that  the  lowest  ranks  are 
contented  with  their  humble  pittance,  because  they  are  not  morti 
fied  with  the  sight  of  the  accumulated  stores  of  the  rich,  dissipated 
in  wantonness  and  luxury.  And  it  is  a  remarkable  fact,  that,  in 
this  populous  empire,  scarcely  a  beggar  or  a  needy  person  is  to  be 
found. 

The  major  part  of  the  people  are  neither  parsimonious  nor  ava 
ricious  ;  but  they  have  a  rooted  aversion  to  intemperance  in  eating 
and  drinking.  As  the  soil  is  solely  devoted  to  the  production  of 
necessaries,  so  those  necessaries  are  not  wasted  by  converting  them 
to  noxious  or  idle  purposes. 

Of  their  good  nature  and  hospitality  M.  Thunberg  had  many 
convincing  proofs,  even  though  they  have  too  much  reason  to  detest 
the  Europeans,  who  traffic  with  them,  for  bad  conduct  and  fraudu 
lent  dealings.  They  are  lofty,  it  is  true,  and  cannot  be  moved  by 
menaces  ;  but  they  may  be  soothed  to  tenderness  by  mild  conduct, 
and  brought  to  listen  to  reason. 

Justice  is  universally  worshiped,  not  in  form  but  in  reality. 
The  monarch  never  injures  any  of  his  neighbors  ;  and  no  instance 
is  to  be  found  in  which  he  ever  appeared  ambitious  of  extending 
his  dominions  by  conquest.  Numberless  proofs  are  recorded  of  the 
heroism  of  the  people  against  foreign  invasion  or  internal  disorder  ; 
but  not  one  can  be  produced  of  their  encroachments  upon  the  lands 
or  properties  of  others. 

In  their  tribunals,  causes  are  adjudged  without  delay  and  with 
out  partiality.  The  guilty  find  no  asylum  ;  the  innocent  need  no 
advocate.  Even  in  their  engagements  with  Europeans,  no  articles 
of  a  treaty  once  concluded  is  ever  altered,  unless  by  the  fault  of 
the  latter. 

Superstition  is  one  great  defect  in  their  character  ;  but  this  is 
owing  to  their  ignorance,  not  only  of  science,  but  of  true  religion. 
Pride  also  is  another  great  vice  in  this  nation.  They  believe  they 
are  descended  from  the  gods  ;  and  consequently  regard  Europeans 
as  beings  of  a  very  inferior  rank  in  the  scale  of  creation. 

Of  their  valor  and  unconquerable  spirit  there  are  many  proofs, 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  105 

and  such  as  might  be  regarded  as  romantic,  were  they  not  verified 
by  historical  evidence. 

As  on  the  one  hand  the  Japanese  are  haughty  and  intrepid,  so 
on  the  other  they  are  resentful  and  unforgiving.  They  do  not, 
however,  show  their  hatred  by  violence  or  warmth  of  temper,  but 
with  an  unconceivable  tangfroid,  wait  with  patience  for  an  oppor 
tunity  of  revenge.  Abuse  them,  despise  them,  or  touch  their 
honor  as  much  as  you  please,  they  will  never  answer  a  single  word 
but  merely  with  a  long  eh  !  eh  !  testify,  as  it  were,  their  surprise, 
and  brood  in  silence  over  their  revenge,  which  no  justification,  nor 
length  of  time,  nor  change  of  circumstances  can  ever  efface  till  they 
have  executed  their  malice. 

Their  language  is  written  like  that  of  the  Chinese,  in  straight 
lines,  upwards  and  downwards ;  but  the  letters  are  entirely  diffe 
rent,  and  the  tongue  on  the  whole  so  dissimilar,  that  those  two 
neighboring  nations  cannot  understand  each  other  without  an  inter 
preter.  The  Chinese  language,  however,  is  much  read  and  written 
at  Japan,  and  is  used  by  the  learned  in  particular.  Strangers  are 
strictly  prohibited  from  learning  Japanese  ;  yet  M.  Thunberg  con 
trived  to  make  some  progress  in  the  current  tongue  of  this  country, 
and  even  formed  a  vocabulary  of  some  of  its  most  usual  colloquial 
terms. 

The  dress  of  Japan  is  perfectly  national  and  uniform.  From 
the  monarch  to  the  lowest  subject,  it  has  undergone  no  variation 
from  caprice,  fashion,  or  any  other  cause,  for  the  space  of  two 
thousand  five  hundred  years.  It  consists  universally  of  long  and 
wide  night-gowns,  of  different  lengths,  according  to  sex  or  situation, 
and  of  different  degrees  of  fineness,  according  to  the  circumstances 
of  the  wearer.  The  men  seldom  wear  more  than  two  or  three  of 
them  at  once  ;  but  the  women  have  often  thirty  or  forty  of  them, 
all  so  thin,  as  not  to  weigh  more,  collectively,  than  four  or  five 
pounds.  These  gowns  are  fastened  round  the  body  by  a  belt, 
which,  for  the  men,  is  about  four  inches  broad,  and  for  the  women 
twelve  inches,  tied  in  a  knot  or  rose.  In  this  the  males  fasten 
their  sabre,  fan,  tobacco-pipe  and  pouch,  and  sometimes  their 
medicine-box. 

Stockings  are  not  wanted,  because  the  night-gowns  descend  to 
the  ankles  ;  but  spatterdashes  are  sometimes  made  of  cotton-stuff. 
The  shoes  are  the  meanest  part  of  the  Japanese  attire,  and  they 
are  generally  made  of  rice  straw  ;  but  people  of  distinction  have 
fine  slips  of  ratan.  The  Japanese  never  enter  their  houses  with 
their  shoes  on,  but  always  leave  them  at  the  door. 


106  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

The  mode  in  which  this  people  dress  the  hair  is  peculiar  to 
themselves,  and  at  the  same  time  as  general  as  the  use  of  the 
night-gown.  The  men  shave  the  whole  of  their  head  down  to  the 
nape  of  the  neck,  leaving,  however,  some  on  the  temples,  which 
being  greased  and  turned  back,  is  tied  with  that  remaining  behind 
at  the  top  of  the  head,  with  several  rounds  of  white  string  made 
of  paper.  Priests,  physicians,  and  youths  before  the  age  of  matu 
rity,  are  the  only  persons  who  are  exempted  from  this  custom. 
The  two  former  shave  their  heads  all  over  ;  and  boys  suffer  their 
hair  to  grow  till  such  time  as  their  beards  begin  to  appear. 

The  Kubo,  or  secular  emperor,  is  lord  of  the  whole  country,  and 
under  him  rules  a  prince  or  governor  in  each  province.  The 
princes  that  are  first  in  dignity  are  called  Daimio  ;  those  of  an  in 
ferior  rank  Siomio.  If  any  of  them  be  guilty  of  misdemeanors, 
he  is  amenable  to  the  Emperor,  who  can  dismiss  him,  banish  him 
to  some  island,  or  even  inflict  capital  punishment  upon  him.  It  is 
also  incumbent  on  all  those  princes  to  perform  a  journey  annually 
to  the  imperial  court,  to  reside  there  six  months,  and  to  keep  their 
family  constantly  there,  as  hostages  for  their  allegiance. 

But  besides  this  monarch,  there  is  a  spiritual  or  ecclesiastical 
emperor  called  the  Dairi,  whose  power  at  present  is  wholly  confined 
to  the  concerns  of  religion,  and  the  establishment  of  the  church  ; 
nevertheless,  this  spiritual  regent  derives  his  descent  in  a  direct  and 
uninterrupted  line  from  the  ancient  rulers  of  the  country,  for  more 
than  the  period  of  two  thousand  years. 

The  veneration  which  is  paid  to  the  Dairi  falls  little  short  of 
those  divine  honors  which  are  alone  due  to  the  Deity.  He  is 
brought  into  the  world,  lives,  and  dies  within  the  precincts  of  his 
court.  His  hair,  nails,  and  beard  are  esteemed  so  sacred,  that  they 
are  never  suffered  to  be  cleaned  or  cut  by  day-light,  but  only  in 
the  night,  and  when  he  is  asleep.  He  never  eats  out  of  the  same 
plate,  nor  drinks  out  of  the  same  cup  more  than  once  ;  but  such 
vessels  are  constantly  broken  to  pieces,  that  they  may  not  fall  into 
unhallowed  hands. 

Within  the  precincts  of  his  palace  scarcely  any  know  his 
name  till  after  his  decease.  His  whole  court,  with  very  few 
exceptions,  are  of  his  own  race  ;  all  of  whom,  who  are  not  pro 
moted  at  the  secular  court,  have  rich  benefices  and  convents  given 
them. 

The  Dairies  power,  however,  is  much  retrenched  ;  and  he  now 
derives  his  principal  revenues  from  the  city%nd  district  of  Meaco, 
from  a  stipulated  allowance  from  the  Kubo's  treasury,  and  from 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  107 

titles  which  he  has  the  exclusive  right  of  conferring ;  even  the 
secular  emperor  receives  titles  of  distinction  from  his  hand. 

The  Kubo  is  obliged  to  consult  a  council  of  six  persons,  who  are 
mostly  men  in  years,  and  possessed  of  sound  judgment.  Besides 
the  considerable  presents  he  receives  from  the  governors  of  pro 
vinces,  he  has  certain  crown  lands  and  imperial  cities,  which  are 
more  particularly  his  property  ;  and  their  native  produce  or  manu 
facture  is  taxed  to  his  revenue.  In  the  same  manner  each  of  the 
princes  derives  a  tribute  from  his  respective  province,  with  which 
he  maintains  his  household  troops,  defrays  the  expenses  of  keeping 
the  roads  in  repair,  and  supports  his  family  in  the  necessary  style 
of  dignity. 

The  military  weapons  of  Japan  consist  of  bows,  arrows,  cime- 
ters,  halberts,  and  guns.  Their  bows  are  very  large,  and  their 
arrows  long.  Fire-locks  are  not  in  common  use  in  the  army  ;  they 
are  chiefly  possessed  by  persons  of  consequence,  and  are  always 
displayed  in  their  apartments  on  an  elevated  stand.  They  have  a 
few  pieces  of  artillery  at  Nagasaki,  and  at  the  imperial  palace  at 
Jeddo,  which  seem  to  have  been  formerly  taken  from  the  Portu 
guese,  and  are  only  used  in  saluting,  or  perhaps  are  neglected  for 
seven  years  together. 

The  cimeter  is  the  chief  and  choicest  weapon,  and  this  is  con 
stantly  worn  by  every  person  above  the  rank  of  a  peasant.  It  is 
about  a  yard  in  length,  somewhat  inclining  to  a  curve,  and  has  a 
broad  back ;  the  blade  is  of  incomparable  good  temper,  and  the 
oldest  are  always  the  most  valued.  They  are  far  preferable  to  the 
Toledos,  and  will  cut  a  large  nail  without  turning  the  edge.  Ac 
cording  to  the  Japanese  accounts,  they  will  cleave  a  man  asunder 
from  head  to  foot. 

A  good  cimeter  is  frequently  sold  for  a  hundred  rix-dollars,  and 
it  is  considered  by  the  natives  as  the  most  precious  part  of  their 
property.  The  hilt  is  furnished  with  a  round  and  substantial 
guard,  without  any  bow,  and  is  full  six  inches  long.  The  scabbard 
is  thick  and  rather  flat,  and  sometimes  covered  with  the  finest  sha 
green.  They  never  use  an  appropriate  belt ;  but  always  stick  the 
cimeter  into  their  girdle  on  the  left  side,  with  the  edge  upwards, 
which  looks  extremely  ridiculous. 

Most  crimes  are  punished  with  death,  a  sentence  which  is  inflicted 
with  less  regard  to  the  magnitude  of  the  crime,  than  to  the  auda 
city  of  the  attempt  to  transgress  the  hallowed  laws  of  the  empire, 
and  to  violate  justice. 

Fines  and  pecuniary  mulcts,  they  regard  as  equally  repugnant  to 


108  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

reason  nnd  equity  ;  as  the  rich  are  thereby  absolved  from  all  pun 
ishment  ;  a  procedure  which  seems  to  be  the  very  height  of 
absurdity  and  iniquity.  If  the  horrid  crime  of  murder  be  per 
petrated  in  a  town,  not  only  the  murderer  himself,  but  sometimes 
his  relations,  dependents,  and  neighbors,  are  involved  in  the 
calamity,  according  as  they  have  been  more  or  less  accomplices 
in  the  crime,  or  have  neglected  the  means  of  preventing  its 
perpetration. 

Dealing  in  contraband  goods  is  death  without  mercy  ;  and  the 
punishment  extends  to  every  individual  concerned  in  the  traffic, 
both  buyer  and  seller.  The  general  mode  of  executing  the  sen 
tence  of  the  law,  is  by  decapitation  with  a  cimeter  in  prison  ; 
though  crucifixion  and  other  painful  modes  of  death  are  sometimes 
exhibited  in  public,  by  way  of  terror. 

Paganism  is  universally  prevalent  in  Japan  ;  but  the  different 
religious  sects  are  numerous,  and  maintain  very  opposite  tenets  ; 
yet,  notwithstanding  this,  they  live  together  in  great  harmony  and 
concord,  nor  consider  difference  of  opinion  as  a  cause  of  dissension. 
The  ecclesiastical  emperor  appoints  the  principal  priests  ;  and  every 
sect  has  its  respective  temples  and  idols. 

The  number  of  these  fictitious  deities  is  so  great,  that  almost 
every  trade  has  its  tutelary  divinity,  after  the  manner  of  the  ancient 
Greeks  and  Romans.  The  Japanese,  however,  are  not  wholly 
ignorant  of  the  existence  of  an  eternal,  omnipotent  Spirit,  supreme 
in  power  and  might ;  but  their  knowledge  in  this  respect  is  blended 
with  fable  and  obscured  by  mystery. 

Their  temples,  of  which  we  have  already  observed,  they  have  a 
great  variety,  are  generally  built  in  the  suburbs  of  towns,  on  the 
highest  and  most  eligible  spots.  The  priests  in  each  are  very  nu 
merous,  though  they  perform  scarcely  any  other  functions  than  to 
keep  the  temple  clean,  to  light  the  fires  and  lamps,  and  to  present 
offerings  of  flowers  to  their  idols.  No  sermons  are  preached,  no 
hymns  are  sung ;  but  such  as  please  to  pay  their  devotions,  are  at 
all  times  welcome  to  approach,  and  to  leave  their  offerings.  Even 
strangers  are  not  forbidden  to  enter  these  sanctuaries  of  religion ; 
and  when  there  is  a  difficulty  in  procuring  other  lodgings,  they  may 
be  accommodated  in  them. 

They  have  some  confused  notions  of  the  immortality  of  the  soul, 
and  of  a  future  state  of  rewards  and  punishments.  According  to 
their  tradition,  the  souls  of  the  virtuous  have  a  place  assigned  them 
immediately  under  heaven,  while  those  of  the  wicked  are  doomed 
to  wander  to  and  fro  under  the  canopy  of  the  sky,  in  order  to 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  109 

expiate  their  sins.  Consequently  the  transmigration  of  souls  has 
no  place  in  their  faith. 

The  whole  tenor  of  their  doctrine  has  no  other  object  than  to 
render  mankind  virtuous  in  this  life  ;  their  chief  and  universal  care 
is,  to  preserve  a  good  conscience,  and  to  pay  due  obedience  to  the 
laws  of  their  sovereign.  They  abstain  from  animal  food,  are  loth 
to  shed  blood,  and  will  not  touch  any  dead  body.  Whoever  offends 
in  these  points  is  considered  unclean  for  a  certain  period.  The 
only  devils  they  acknowledge,  are  those  which  reside  as  souls  in 
foxes ;  these  animals  being  considered  as  very  noxious  and  danger 
ous  in  this  country. 

Though  the  professors  of  this  religion  are  persuaded  that  their 
gods  know  all  things,  and  that  therefore  it  is  unnecessary  to  pray 
to  them,  they  have,  nevertheless,  both  churches  and  stated  holidays. 
Their  gods,  or  idols,  they  denominate  Sin,  or  Kami ;  and  their 
churches  are  called  Mia.  In  these  edifices  there  is  no  visible  re 
presentation  of  the  Almighty,  though  they  sometimes  keep  a  little 
image  in  a  box,  the  emblem  of  the  inferior  divinity,  to  whom  the 
temple  is  dedicated. 

The  usual  holidays  in  Japan  are  the  first  day  of  every  month, 
when  they  rise  early  in  the  morning,  dress  themselves  in  their  best 
attire,  and  pay  their  respects  to  their  friends  and  superiors,  wishing 
them  joy  of  the  new  month.  This  custom  has  been  universally 
observed  from  very  remote  ages.  The  full  of  the  moon,  or  the 
15th  day,  is  another  holiday,  on  which  people  resort  to  the  temples 
in  greater  numbers  than  on  the  first.  The  third  festival  is  of 
less  consequence,  and  falls  on  the  28th,  or  the  day  before  the  new 
moon. 

Besides  these  monthly  festivals,  they  celebrate  five  more,  the 
first  and  principal  of  which  is  New  Year's  Day.  The  country  at 
this  time  is  given  up  to  pastime  and  festivity  ;  and  indeed  the  whole 
of  the  first  month  is  set  apart  for  pleasure  throughout  the  empire. 
The  second  annual  festival  falls  on  the  third  day  of  the  third 
month  ;  the  third  on  the  fifth  day  of  the  fifth  month  ;  the  fourth 
on  the  seventh  day  of  the  seventh  month  ;  and  the  fifth  on  the 
ninth  day  of  the  ninth  month.  All  these  making  uneven  numbers 
are  reckoned  unlucky  days,  and  no  business  is  undertaken  on  them, 
but  they  spend  them  in  mirth  and  mutual  congratulations.  It  is  a 
maxim  among  the  Japanese,  that  the  gods  take  delight  .in  seeing 
mankind  joyful  and  happy  ;  and  in  this  respect  they  honor  their 
benignity  and  other  lovely  attributes. 

Pilgrimages  are  annually  performed  to  some  of  the  most  cele- 


110  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

brated  temples,  particularly  to  the  temple  of  Isie,  which  is  conse 
crated  to  Tensio-Diii-Sin,  the  most  ancient  of  their  gods.  This 
temple  is  very  old,  and  has  no  other  ornaments  than  a  mirror,  and 
slips  of  white  paper,  hung  about  the  walls,  denoting  that  nothing 
impure  can  be  acceptable  to  God  ;  and  that  from  his  all-seeing  eye 
nothing  can  be  hid. 

The  Emperor,  who  cannot  personally  visit  this  temple,  an 
nually  sends  an  ambassador  in  his  stead ;  and  all  his  subjects, 
of  every  rank  and  condition,  are  bound  to  undertake  a  pilgri 
mage  hither  at  least  once  in  their  lives  ;  though  many,  from  a 
principle  of  devotion,  go  very  often,  and  sometimes  practice  great 
austerities. 

Nunneries  have  been  established  in  this  country  upwards  of  a 
thousand  years,  though  with  respect  to  number,  they  fall  infinitely 
short  of  those  in  Europe. 

The  Christian  religion  was  first  planted  in  Japan  by  the  Jesuit 
missionaries  in  1549,  and  in  a  short  time  made  a  rapid  progress. 
But  the  Portuguese,  inflated  with  their  success,  and  relying  on  the 
number  of  their  proselytes,  began  to  behave  with  pride  and  ava 
rice,  which  occasioned  different  persecutions  ;  and  in  1596,  having 
superciliously  treated  a  prince  of  the  empire,  their  doom  was 
sealed  ;  and  they  were  not  only  extirpated  themselves,  but  all  their 
converts  were  put  to  the  sword,  after  an  unremitting  persecution 
of  forty  years. 

The  Japanese  being  persuaded  that  the  unwarrantable  conduct 
of  the  Christians,  was  the  inseparable  consequence  of  their  doc 
trines,  took,  from  that  time  the  most  efficacious  means  to  prevent 
the  true  faith  from  ever  being  re-established  in  their  dominions, 
and  the  Portuguese  were  strictly  prohibited  from  ever  approaching 
their  coasts.  The  Portuguese,  indeed,  richly  merited  their  fate  ; 
for  it  afterwards  appeared,  that  they  had  entered  into  a  conspiracy 
against  the  emperor  and  government.  This  being  discovered  by 
the  Dutch,  then  at  war  with  them,  and  communicated  to  the  im 
perial  court,  gained  that  nation  the  establishment  they  have  since 
enjoyed. 

The  year  in  this  country  is  measured  by  lunations,  so  that  some 
have  twelve,  and  others  thirteen  months  ;  consequently  the  termi 
nation  and  commencement  of  the  year  are  not  on  the  same  day,  or 
always  in  the  same  month.  Every  fifteenth  day  is  allowed  for  a 
cessation  from  labor.  Day  and  night  taken  together,  are  divided 
into  twelve  hours  only ;  and  the  whole  year  through,  they  regulate 
themselves  by  the  rising  and  setting  of  the  sun.  The  hour  of  six 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  Ill 

they  reckon  at  sun-rise,  and  the  same  at  sun-set,  so  that  noon  and 
midnight  are  always  at  nine. 

Time  is  measured  by  burning  matches,  twisted  like  ropes,  and 
divided  by  knots.  When  one  of  these,  after  being  lighted  up,  has 
burned  to  a  knot,  which  denotes  the  elapse  of  a  certain  portion  of 
time,  in  the  day,  this  is  made  known  by  certain  strokes  on  bells,  . 
and  in  the  night,  by  striking  two  pieces  of  wood  against  each  other. 
The  Japanese  era  commences  with  Nin-o,  six  hundred  and  sixty 
years  before  the  birth  of  Christ. 

A  few  days  after  the  commencement  of  the  new  year,  the  horrid 
ceremony  is  performed  of  trampling  on  such  images  as  represent 
the  Cross,  the  Virgin  Mary,  and  her  Divine  Son.  This  is  done  for 
the  sake  of  imprinting  on  the  mind  of  the  people  an  abhorrence 
of  the  Christian  doctrine,  which  the  Portuguese  attempted  to  in 
troduce,  and,  at  the  same  time,  to  discover  if  any  remains  of  it 
still  exist  in  Japan  ;  for  which  reason  the  ceremony  is  chiefly  per 
formed  in  such  places  as  were  formerly  most  frequented  by  the 
Christians.  In  the  town  of  Nagasaki  it  continues  four  days,  after 
which  the  images  are  laid  by  till  the  next  year.  Every  native  in 
habitant  except  the  governor  and  his  attendants,  must  be  present 
at  this  diabolical  ceremony ;  but  it  is  not  true,  as  some  have  pre 
tended,  that  the  Dutch  residents  are  obliged  to  participate  in  it. 

Philosophers  and  moralists  are  regarded  in  this  country  in  the 
same  light  as  priests  and  sacred  persons ;  and  their  tenets  are  em 
braced  with  equal  ardor  with  those  of  the  spiritual  sects.  The 
morality  of  Confucius  is  in  high  estimation.  This,  it  is  well  known, 
originated  in  China,  and  seems  to  resemble  the  ancient  doctrines 
of  Epicurus. 

Ladies  do  not  eat  with  the  men,  but  by  themselves.  Rice  sup 
plies  the  place  of  bread,  and  is  boiled  with  every  kind  of  provisions. 
Fish  and  fowls  are  very  plentiful,  and  are  eaten  in  abundance ;  but 
miso-soup,*  boiled  with  fish  and  onions,  is  the  customary  food  of  the 
common  people. 

Tea  and  sakki  constitute  the  principal  beverage  of  the  Japanese  ; 
for  wine  and  distilled  liquors  they  can  scarcely  be  prevailed  on  to 
taste.  Hitherto  they  have  not  suffered  themselves  to  be  corrupted 
by  European  modes  of  living,  but  still  retain  their  original  tempe 
rance  and  frugality. 

Sakki  is  a  kind  of  fermented  liquor  prepared  from  rice.  It  is 
tolerably  bright,  and  bears  some  resemblance  to  wine,  though  its 

*  Misos  are  small  beans  like  lentils,  the  produce  of  the  delichos  soja. 


112  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

taste  is  somewhat  singular,  and  not  very  palatable.  When  fresh, 
it  is  whitish,  but  afterwards  it  acquires  a  brown  color,  from  lying  in 
wooden  casks.  This  drink  is  vended  in  every  tavern,  and  is  used 
to  promote  hilarity  as  well  as  at  meals.  It  is  always  drank  warm 
by  the  Japanese,  and  when  taken  in  any  quantity,  soon  heats  and 
inebriates  them  ;  but  its  effects  vanish  in  a  few  minutes,  and  are 
generally  succeeded  by  a  disagreeable  head-ache.  It  is  sometimes 
transported  to  Batavia  as  an  article  of  commerce  ;  but  there  it  is 
drank  cold  before  meals,  in  order  to  create  an  appetite. 

Tea  is  in  such  universal  use,  that  no  person  of  any  rank  under 
takes  a  journey,  without  a  servant  to  carry  his  tea-equipage.  The 
tea-shrub  is  indigenous  here,  and  is  met  with  most  frequently  on. 
the  borders  and  margins  of  cultivated  lands,  or  on  such  moun 
tains  and  downs  as  are  incapable  of  being  cultivated  to  better 
advantage. 

Though  gravity  forms  the  general  character  of  this  nation,  they 
have,  nevertheless,  their  pleasures,  their  sports,  and  festivities. 
Some  of  these  are  connected  with  their  religion,  others  may  in 
many  respects  be  compared  to  European  plays  or  interludes. 

Of  those  which  have  a  relation  to  their  religious  belief,  the  lan 
tern-festival,  or  feast  of  lamps,  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable.  It 
is  celebrated  towards  the  end  of  August,  and  lasts  for  three  days. 
The  Japanese  call  it  Bang ;  and  it  was  originally  instituted  in 
memory  and  honor  of  the  dead,  who,  they  believe,  return  annually 
to  their  kindred  and  friends,  on  the  first  afternoon  of  these  games, 
where  they  remain  till  the  second  night,  on  which  they  are  again 
sent  away. 

To  welcome  them  on  their  arrival,  they  hang  a  number  of  lamps 
round  the  tombs  on  bamboo  stakes  ;  and  when  the  souls  of  the 
deceased  are  to  take  their  leave,  they  fabricate  a  small  vessel  of 
straw,  filled  with  lights  which  they  carry  at  midnight  in  procession, 
with  music  and  loud  cries,  and  launch  it  on  the  waves,  where  it  is 
left  to  be  consumed  or  swallowed  up. 

Dr.  Thunberg  had  an  opportunity  of  seeing  plays  acted  several 
times,  both  in  Nagasaki  and  afterwards  on  his  journey  to  the  impe 
rial  court  at  Osaka.  The  actors  are  always  dressed  in  a  very 
grotesque  manner,  so  that  a  stranger  would  be  apt  to  imagine  they 
exhibited  themselves  to  frighten,  rather  than  to  entertain  the  audi 
ence.  Their  gestures  are  equally  uncouth  and  extravagant ;  and 
the  plots  are  of  a  piece  with  the  acting.  In  short,  the  dramatic 
performances  of  Japan  can,  in  no  respect,  be  put  in  competition 
with  those  of  Europe.  But  they  have  the  same  purpose  every 


Ullllllll!lllllll!lllllllj||!j  111 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  113 

where — to  amuse  the  idle  and  frivolous,  and  to  fill  the  pockets  of 
the  players. 

Among  the  games  played  by  the  Japanese,  is  one  called  siolouts, 
or  the  game  of  the  goose.  In  playing  this  they  make  use  of  a 
thick  checkered  paper,  with  different  figures  delineated  on  each 
square.  A  die  being  thrown,  each  person  marks  his  chance  on  the 
representations  in  the  square. 

Marriages  are  solemnized  here  with  little  pomp,  and  generally  on 
an  eminence  without  the  towns,  in  the  presence  of  the  relations 
and  priests.  The  bridegroom  and  bride  advance  together  to  an 
altar  erected  for  that  purpose,  each  holding  a  torch,  while  the 
priest  is  employed  in  reading  a  certain  form  of  prayer.  The 
bride  then  lights  her  torch,  and  holds  it  out  to  the  bridegroom, 
who  kindles  his  from  it ;  and  the  congratulations  of  the  guests 
terminate  the  ceremony.  Polygamy  is  not  allowed  here,  nor  are 
the  women  confined  ;  but  divorces  and  mistresses,  or  concubines, 
are  tolerated. 

The  married  women  are  generally  distinguished  from  the  single, 
by  having  their  teeth  stained  black,  which,  in  their  opinion,  is  a 
capital  charm,  but  in  the  eyes  of  an  European,  is  very  disgusting. 
This  black  dye  is  derived  from  urine,  filings  of  iron,  and  sakki  5  it 
is  foetid  and  corrosive,  and  eats  deeply  into  the  teeth.  Some  begin 
to  use  this  ornament  as  soon  as  they  are  betrothed,  as  a  mark  of 
consequence. 

M.  Thunberg  observes,  that,  however  much  strangers  are  de 
spised  or  feared  by  the  Japanese,  on  the  sea-coast,  nothing  could 
exceed  the  civility  and  respect  with  which  he  and  his  retinue  were 
received  in  their  journey  to  the  imperial  court.  When  they  ar 
rived  on  the  borders  of  a  province,  they  were  always  met  by  a 
deputy  from  the  governor,  who  tendered  them  his  services,  and  saw 
them  safe  through  his  master's  jurisdiction  ;  and,  in  short,  had  the 
embassy  been  composed  of  princes  of  the  country,  they  could  not 
have  experienced  more  homage  and  attention.  Even  the  lower 
class  of  the  people  exhibited  the  same  tokens  of  submission  as  they 
do  to  their  own  grandees  of  the  first  rank ;  they  bowed  their  heads, 
and  frequently  turned  their  backs,  which  is  a  sign  of  high  respect, 
as  intimating  an  acknowledgment  that  they  were  unworthy  to  look 
on  them. 

The  roads  in  Japan  are  broad,  and  furnished  with  ditches  to 
carry  off  the  water.  They  are  generally  kept  in  good  repair  ;  but 
before  the  Dutch  make  their  annual  journey  to  the  capital,  they 
are  freshly  strewed  with  sand,  and  every  species  of  filth  is  removed. 


]  14  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

In  hot  and  dusty  weather,  they  are  also  watered  ;  and  their  sides 
are  frequently  planted  with  hedges  of  various  kinds. 

Mile-posts  are  set  up,  which  not  only  indicate  the  distance,  but 
also  point  out  the  road  ;  and,  in  fact,  nothing  is  omitted  that  can 
contribute  to  the  security  and  accommodation  of  the  traveler, 
which  might  be  expected  among  a  people  far  advanced  in  civiliza 
tion.  The  roads  of  Japan,  however,  when  once  made,  cost  little 
to  keep  them  in  a  perfect  state  of  repair.  No  wheel-carriages  for 
pleasure  are  known  in  this  empire  ;  and  travelers  either  go  on  foot 
or  on  horseback,  unless  they  are  of  high  rank,  when  they  are  car 
ried  in  cangos,  which  bear  some  resemblance  to  the  shape  of  a 
sedan-chair,  but  are  destitute  of  its  elegance  or  convenience. 

The  Japanese  either  burn  their  dead  or  bury  them  in  the  earth. 
The  former  seems  to  have  been  the  most  ancient  practice,  though 
it  is  now  less  prevalent  than  the  other,  except  for  persons  of  dis 
tinction.  The  ashes  are  carefully  collected,  and  after  some  time 
are  buried  in  the  earth. 

When  a  prince  or  grandee  dies,  there  are  commonly  ten  or 
twenty  youths  of  his  household,  and  such  as  were  his  greatest 
favorites,  who  put  themselves  to  a  voluntary  death  at  the  place 
where  his  body  is  burned  ;  and  their  ashes  are  generally  deposited 
in  a  magnificent  sepulchre. 

ARTS,    MANUFACTURES,    COMMERCE,    ETC. 

The  Japanese  are  very  ingenious  in  most  handicraft  trades,  and 
excel  the  Chinese  in  several  manufactures,  particularly  in  the 
beauty  and  variety  of  their  silks,  cottons,  and  other  stuffs  ;  and  it 
is  universally  allowed,  that  no  other  nation  comes  up  to  them  in  the 
tempering  and  fabricating  of  swords,  cimeters,  and  other  weapons. 
They  are  also  particularly  famous  for  their  beautiful  cabinets,  and 
for  their  fine  varnish  and  lacquer,  which  are  also  valuable,  that  a 
quantity  of  the  best  sort  made  in  Japan  will  sell  for  twenty  times 
as  much  as  an  equal  quantity  of  that  which  is  made  in  Europe.* 

Paper  is  fabricated  in  Japan  from  the  bark  of  the  morus  papy- 
riferarf  a  species  of  mulberry,  and  sometimes  from  the  morus 
indica.  It  is  used  for  a  variety  of  purposes,  not  usual  in  other 
countries,  and  its  manufacture  is  consequently  very  considerable. 

[*  The  tree  which  yields  this  valuable  varnish  is  the  rhus  vernix,  a  na 
tive  of  Pennsylvania.] 

[f  This  tree  flourishes  in  Pennsylvania.] 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  115 

Filagree-work  in  gold  and  silver,  is  made  both  in  China  and 
Japan  ;  but  it  seems  to  have  been  originally  invented  by  the  natives 
of  Sumatra,  who  are  celebrated  for  producing  such  elegant  work, 
with  tools  that  an  European  could  not  deem  sufficiently  perfect  for 
the  most  ordinary  purposes. 

Though  the  Japanese  have  made  as  much  progress  in  science  as 
can  be  expected  from  the  opportunities  they  have  been  favored  * 
with,  yet  it  is  not  to  be  expected  that  they  have  reached  the  heights 
of  Europeans  in  this  respect.  Astronomy  is  in  great  favor  "and 
repute,  but  they  are  unable  without  the  aid  of  Chinese  almanacs 
to  form  a  true  calendar,  or  to  calculate  eclipses  with  precision. 
Medicine,  from  their  ignorance  of  anatomy,  can  never  become  very 
flourishing ;  the  knowledge  of  diseases  is  extremely  imperfect ;  and 
botanical  medicines  constitute  the  whole  of  their  remedies ;  and 
even  their  simples  are  used  only  in  diuretic  and  diaphoretic  decoc 
tions.  Their  physicians  feel  the  pulse,  but  very  tediously — not 
quitting  it  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour,  and  examining  first  one,  and 
then  the  other  arm,  being  totally  unacquainted  with  the  circulation 
of  the  blood.  Of  natural  philosophy  and  chemistry  they  have 
little  idea,  except  what  they  have  borrowed  from  their  intercourse 
with  Europeans. 

[One  of  their  remedies  is  the  moxa,  a  caustic,  applied  in  almost 
every  disease.  It  is  made  of  the  leaves  of  the  artemisia  vulgar  is, 
or  mugwort,  and  being  set  on  fire,  is  placed  on  the  part  affected. 
The  flame  is  not  visible.  The  astrologers  are  consulted  on  the  oc 
casion,  who  have  fingers  of  the  human  body,  drawn  like  the  man  in 
our  almanacs,  with  all  its  parts  marked,  to  which  moxa  is  to  be 
applied.  Pricking  with  the  needle,  is  also  in  use,  for  a  dreadful 
species  of  colic,  common  in  Japan.  A  similar  method  of  cure  is 
practiced  in  China,  according  to  Dr.  Gillan,  physician  to  Macart 
ney's  embassy. 

The  famous  catechu  or  Terra  Japonica,  is  an  extract  from  the 
mimosa  catechu,  a  small  tree,  which  also  grows  on  the  mountains  in 
India  ;  not  the  areca  catechu,  as  has  been  supposed.  It  is  sold,  per 
fumed,  in  Japan,  and  used  chiefly  by  the  women  to  fasten  their 
teeth,  and  give  a  sweetness  to  their  breath.  It  is  powerfully 
astringent,  and  frequently  used  by  us  in  cases  of  relaxations  of  the 
bowels.] 

They  pretend,  like  the  Chinese,  to  have  been  the  inventors  of 
printing,  and  they  excel  that  people  in  the  neatness  of  cutting  their 
wooden  blocks  as  well  as  the  goodness  of  their  ink  and  paper ;  but 
they  are  totally  unacquainted  with  the  use  of  fusible  types. 


116  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

The  coins  used  in  this  country  are  of  various  denominations  ; 
such  as  Old  Kobangs,  New  Kobangs,  Itjibs,  Itoganne,  Kodama, 
Nandiogjn,  Kosju,  Seni,  Kir,  and  G-omome  Gin.  They  are  gene 
rally  simple  and  unadorned,  and  many  have  no  determined  value, 
so  that  it  is  indispensably  necessary  to  weigh  them.  The  Kobang 
is  the  largest  Japanese  gold  coin,  and  ought  rather  to  be  considered 
as  a  medal  than  a  piece  of  money  ;  it  is  a  flat,  oblong  plate  of 
gold,  rounded  off  at  the  four  corners,  nearly  of  the  thickness  of  a 
farthing,  and  is  stamped  on  one  side  with  fine  lines  and  different 
impressions  of  the  Dairi's  arms.  On  the  reverse  are  inscribed 
several  large  letters,  authenticating  the  genuineness  of  the  coin. 
Among  the  silver  coins,  the  Kodama  is  the  most  variable,  as 
well  with  respect  to  its  shape  and  size  as  to  the  impression  it 
bears.  Of  this  coin  some  are  oblong,  circular,  convex,  flat,  and 
spherical. 

Sometimes  they  are  stamped  with  more,  sometimes  with  fewer 
letters ;  and  occasionally  they  only  bear  the  image  of  Daikokf,  the 
Plutus*  of  Japan,  or  the  merchant's  god.  He  is  represented  sit 
ting  on  two  barrels  of  rice,  with  a  hammer  in  his  right  hand  and  a 
sack  at  his  left ;  and  the  Japanese  believe  him  to  be  invested  with 
the  power  of  producing  in  any  spot  which  he  strikes  with  his  ham 
mer,  whatever  he  is  for  the  moment  disposed  to  have. 

Vessels  about  ninety  feet  long  rank  among  the  largest  built  in 
this  country ;  nor  are  any  other  allowed,  lest  some  of  the  natives 
should  be  tempted  to  go  to  sea  in  them,  and  quit  the  empire. 
They  are  generally  constructed  of  fir  or  cedar,  and,  properly  speak 
ing,  have  only  one  deck,  though  the  cabin,  which  is  tolerably  large 
and  commodious,  forms  another  partial  deck.  The  most  singular 
circumstance,  however,  is,  that  the  cabin  projects  over  both  "sides 
of  the  bark,  and,  of  course,  has  not  a  very  elegant  appearance. 
During  fine  weather,  these  vessels  are  rowed  ;  and  when  they  arrive 
in  any  harbor,  the  mast  is  commonly  struck,  and  an  awning  spread, 
which  protects  the  passengers  from  the  weather. 

The  Islands  of  Japan  were  accidentally  discovered  by  the  Por 
tuguese  in  1542,  from  being  driven  on  their  coasts  by  a  storm  ;  and 
the  discoverers  were  not  only  well  received,  but  carried  on  a  lucra 
tive  trade  with  the  natives  for  nearly  a  hundred  years.  The  Eng 
lish  also  had  some  traffic  with  these  distant  islands;  but  in  160J, 

*  By  the  favor  of  a  Japanese  interpreter,  M.  Tlmnberg  procured  a 
series  of  the  ancient  coins  of  Japan,  some  of  them  upwards  of  a  thousand 
years  old,  which,  at  his  return  to  his  native  country,  lie  presented  to  the 
valuable  collection  of  his  Swedish  mnjc.sry  at  Drotniugholm. 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  117 

the  Dutch  supplanted  all  the  other  nations  of  Europe,  and  obtained 
a  monopoly,  which  at  first  was  highly  beneficial,  but  has  been  gra 
dually  cramped  till  it  ceases  to  yield  much  profit,  Indeed,  the 
jealousy  of  the  Japanese  and  the  avarice  of  the  Dutch,  have  gone 
hand  in  hand  to  occasion  this  diminution  of  commercial  advantages  ; 
for,  in  proportion  as  the  latter  attempted  to  secure  illicit  gain,  the 
former  abridged  the  immunities  they  had  originally  granted. 

Nagasaki  harbor  is  the  only  place  where  the  Dutch  and  Chinese 
ships  are  allowed  to  enter.  The  town  is  one  of  the  five  called  Im 
perial  j  and  on  account  of  its  foreign  commerce,  is  one  of  the  most 
bustling  in  the  empire.  It  belongs  separately  to  the  secular  em 
peror,  who  appoints  a  governor  in  his  name,  who  is  annually 
changed  ;  but,  after  the  expiration  of  a  year,  generally  returns  to 
his  post ;  so  that,  in  fact,  there  are  two  governors,  one  in  office  and 
the  other  out. 

The  town  is  surrounded  on  the  land-side  by  high  mountains,  that 
slope  off  gradually  toward  the  harbor,  which  is  generally  full  of 
shipping. 

The  Island  of  Dezima,  which  the  Dutch  rent  for  a  factory,  may 
be  considered  merely  as  a  street  belonging  to  Nagasaki.  It  has  a 
communication  with  it  by  a  bridge,  and  at  low  water  is  only  sepa 
rated  from  it  by  a  ditch.  Dezima  is  only  six  hundred  paces  long, 
and  one  hundred  and  twenty  in  breadth  ;  and  in  this  small  place 
the  Dutch  are  cooped  up,  guarded  in  the  day  time,  and  locked  in 
at  night.  The  company's  store-houses  are  fire-proof;  but  the 
other  buildings  are  all  constructed  of  wood  and  clay,  in  the  style  of 
Nagasaki.  On  this  island  the  interpreters  have  their  college, 
where  a  great  number  of  them  assemble  during  the  trafficking  sea 
son  ;  but  when  the  ships  are  gone,  only  one  or  two  come  there,  who 
are  regularly  relieved  every  day. 

The  Chief  for  the  Dutch  commerce  is  changed  annually.  Form 
erly,  when  trade  was  more  flourishing,  two  voyages  thither  were 
sufficient  to  make  his  fortune ;  but  now  he  is  obliged  to  make  three 
or  four,  to  procure  a  competency.  Two  ships  annually  sail  from 
Batavia,  and  return  about  the  end  of  the  year.  The  princi 
pal  exports  from  Japan  are  copper,  camphor,  lacquered  wood 
work,  porcelain,  silks,  rice,  and  other  articles.  The  copper  is 
the  finest  in  the  world,  and  is  cast  into  small  bars,  of  a  lively  bright 
color. 

The  imports  to  Japan  by  the  Dutch,  are  sugar,  elephants'  teeth, 
sappan  wood,  tin,  lead,  bar-iron,  chintzes,  Dutch  cloth,  cloves,  tor 
toise-shell,  China  root,  and  Costus  Arabicus.  The  private  trade 


118  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

includes  a  number  of  inferior  articles,  such  as  saffron,  Venice 
treacle,  ratans,  spectacles,  mirrors,  watches,  &c. 

Among  the  articles  of  private  trade,  we  must  notice  unicorns' 
horns,  for  the  Japanese  have  an  extraordinary  opinion  of  their 
medical  virtues  and  powers  to  prolong  life,  fortify  the  animal 
spirits,  strengthen  the  memory,  and,  in  fine,  to  cure  all  complaints. 
The  discovery  of  this  predilection  was  accidental.  One  of  the 
chiefs,  on  his  return  home,  had  sent  some  curiosities  to  an  inter 
preter,  his  friend,  and  among  the  rest  was  a  large  twisted  Green 
land  unicorn's  horn,  by  the  sale  of  which  the  interpreter  became 
extremely  rich,  and  a  man  of  consequence.  From  that  lime  the 
Dutch  have  imported  so  many,  that  the  value  is  greatly  reduced, 
nevertheless,  when  all  smuggling  was  obliged  to  be  laid  aside,  M. 
Thunberg  sold  as  many  as  enabled  him  to  pay  the  debts  he  had 
contracted,  and  to  expend  one  thousand  two  hundred  rix-dollars  on 
his  favorite  science. 

Ninsi-root,  called  Sam,  by  the  Chinese,  likewise  sells  very  high. 
It  grows  in  the  northern  parts  of  China,  particularly  in  Corea.  A 
bastard  kind,  brought  from  America,  perhaps  the  Ginseng-root,  is 
often  brought  hither  by  the  Dutch  ;  but  this  is  strictly  prohibited 
by  government,  lest  it  should  be  fraudulently  sold  for  the  genuine 
sort. 

Both  the  Dutch  company  and  individuals  are  prohibited  from 
exporting  from  hence,  Japanese  coin,  maps,  charts,  and  books,  at 
least  such  as  are  relative  to  the  country  ;  and  all  sorts  of  arms, 
particularly  their  cimeters,  which,  in  strength  and  goodnes  of  manu 
facture,  we  have  already  observed  are  unrivaled. 

The  weights  of  Japan  are  thus  regulated — one  pickel  makes  one 
hundred  and  twenty-five  pounds,  one  catje  sixteen  thails,  one  thail 
ten  mas,  and  one  mas  ten  conderyns. 

The  money  current  in  trade  is  reckoned  in  a  similar  manner  ; 
so  that  one  thail,  which  answers  nearly  to  a  Dutch  rix-dollar, 
is  equal  to  ten  mas  ;  and  one  mas  to  ten  conderyns.  Kambang 
money,  as  it  is  called,  or  the  money  of  the  country,  is  never  paid 
in  hard  cash,  as  it  cannot  be  exported  ;  but  there  is  merely 
an  assignment  made  on  it,  and  bills  are  drawn  for  such  a  sum  as 
will  be  requisite  for  a  whole  year's  supply.  Hence  the  com 
merce  here  cannot  be  considered  in  any  other  light  than  barter  ; 
at  least  the  money  received  in  the  island  must  always  be  laid  out 
again  in  it. 

Though  the  Chinese  are  the  only  Asiatic  nation  that  trade  to 
Japan,  and  they  still  employ  a  good  number  of  ships,  their  privi- 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  119 

leges  are  much  curtailed,  since  they  were  imprudent  enough  to 
introduce  into  Japan  Catholic  books,  printed  in  China.  They  are 
now  confined  to  a  small  island,  like  the  Dutch,  and  strictly  searched 
whenever  they  go  in  or  out. 

Custom-houses  are  not  known,  either  in  the  interior  part  of  the 
country  or  on  its  coasts,  and  no  customs  are  demanded,  either  on 
imports  or  exports,  from  strangers  or  natives — an  exemption  which 
few  other  countries  possess.  But  no  prohibited  goods  can  be 
smuggled  into  the  country,  on  account  of  the  vigilance  that  is  used 
to  prevent  it.  All  persons,  as  well  as  merchandises,  are  so  strictly 
searched,  that  the  hundred  eyes  of  Argus  may  be  said  to  be  em 
ployed  on  this  occasion. 

When  an  European  goes  ashore,  he  is  first  examined  on  board, 
and  then  as  soon  as  he  lands — not  in  a  superficial  manner,  but  with 
more  strictness  than  even  decency  will  sometimes  warrant.  His 
name  is  put  down,  and  he  receives  a  permit,  from  the  intention  of 
which  he  cannot  deviate  without  extreme  danger.  Even  the 
Japanese  themselves,  not  high  in  office,  are  examined  minutely, 
when  they  go  on  board  the  ship.  By  this  means,  and  the  severe 
punishments  which  attend  the  detection  of  smuggling,  either  in 
foreigners  or  natives,  a  contraband  trade  is  almost  impossible  to  be 
carried  on. 

The  interpreters  are  all  natives  of  Japan,  and  speak  with  more 
or  less  accuracy  the  Dutch  language.  They  are  generally  divided 
into  three  classes,  according  to  the  perfection  with  which  they 
can  acquit  themselves  in  this  vocation.  The  superior  class  is 
composed  of  doctors,  the  second  of  assistants,  and  the  third  of 
apprentices  ;  or,  rather,  ranks  and  gradations,  answering  to  those 
titles. 

The  interpreters  are  extremely  fond  of  European  books,  and 
yearly  increase  their  stock  by  the  favor  of  the  merchants.  They 
are  also  very  inquisitive  into  European  customs  and  sciences,  and 
are  the  only  persons  who  practice  medicine  on  any  just  principles. 
Several  clerks  always  accompany  them,  as  well  to  the  ships  as  to 
their  college,  in  the  Island  of  Dezima,  who  perform  the  most 
tiresome  part  of  their  business,  in  keeping  accounts  and  writing 
permits. 

As  the  intercourse  of  the  Japanese  with  foreigners  is  extremely 
limited,  the  greatest  part  of  their  commerce  must  be  amongst 
themselves. 

Their  inland  trade  is  very  flourishing,  and  in  every  respect  free 
and  uncontrolled.  The  harbors  are  covered  with  coasting-vessels 


120  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

and  boats,  and  the  high  roads  are  crowded  with  travelers,  transport 
ing  their  wares  from  one  place  to  another. 

Though  merchants  frequently  accumulate  great  wealth,  their 
profession  is  never  reckoned  honorable  ;  nor  can  they  purchase 
titles,  or  raise  themselves  to  a  higher  rank.  On  the  contrary, 
they  are  always  despised,  and  the  public  at  large  entertain  the 
most  contemptible  opinion  of  them,  under  the  impression  that 
their  wealth  has  been  procured  at  the  expense  of  their  fellow- 
citizens. 


EMPIRE    OF    JAPAN 


[From  Goodrich's  Pictorial  Geography.] 


EXTENT 

This  Empire  consists  of  several  islands  in  the  Pacific  Ocean, 
lying  between  latitude  29°  and  47°  north,  and  longitude  128°  and 
150°  east,  and  separated  from  the  Continent  by  the  Sea  of  Japan 
and  the  Channel  of  Tartary.  It  has  an  area  of  240,000  square 
miles,  and  a  population  of  26,000,000  souls.  The  principal  islands 
of  the  group  are  Niphon,  Sikoko,  Kiusiu,  and  Yesso,  or  Maternal. 
The  southern  part  of  Seghalien  belongs  to  Japan,  and  the  northern 
to  China.  Some  of  the  Kurile  Islands  also  belong  to  the  former. 
The  lofty  mountains  which  intersect  the  principal  islands,  and  the 
exposure  to  the  sea-breezes,  render  the  climate  cool.  Earthquakes 
are  common. 

PRODUCTIONS. 

Rice,  hemp,  and  silk,  and  the  various  tropical  fruits  are  pro 
duced  in  abundance  in  the  southern  parts.  The  milky  juice  of 
the  varnish-trees  supplies  the  beautiful  lacquer,  or  japan.  The 
tea-tree  and  bamboo  are  indigenous.  Agriculture  is  carried  to 
great  perfection ;  and  as  there  are  few  cattle  or  sheep,  there  are 
no  meadows  ;  and  fences  are  not  necessary.  The  corn  fields,  cot 
ton  plantations,  rice  grounds,  and  mulberry  orchards,  are  often 
very  extensive. 

TOWNS. 

Ycdo,  [Jeddo] ,  the  Capital,  upon  the  Island  of  Niphon,  is  one 
of  the  largest  and  most  populous  cities  in  the  world,  having  a  cir 
cuit  of  53  miles,  and  a  population  of  1,300,000  souls.  The  port 


122  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

is  shallow,  and  accessible  only  to  small  vessels.  The  houses  are 
constructed  of  bamboo,  covered  with  mortar,  and  are  two  stories 
high.  Paper  supplies  the  place  of  glass,  and  the  floors  are  covered 
with  matting.  The  palace  of  the  Emperor  is  nearly  15  miles  in 
circumference,  and  is  strongly  fortified.  The  citadel,  or  inner  fort, 
is  inhabited  by  the  imperial  family,  and  the  outer  fortress  by  the 
nobility.  The  "  hall  of  a  hundred  mats"  is  600  feet  long  and  300 
wide,  with  the  doors  and  cornices  finely  lacquered,  and  the  locks 
and  hinges  richly  gilded. 

Kio,  or  Meaco,  was  for  a  long  time  the  Capital,  and  contains 
the  most  remarkable  edifices.  It  is  also  the  residence  of  the  Dairi, 
or  descendent  of  the  ancient  Emperors,  who  is  the  spiritual  head 
of  the  empire.  The  Dairi's  palace  is,  in  itself,  a  town  surrounded 
with  walls  and  ditches  ;  the  imperial  palace  is  also  a  large  building. 
The  Temple  of  Fokosi,  paved  with  squares  of  white  marble,  and 
adorned  with  96  columns  of  cedar,  is  about  1000  feet  in  length, 
and  contains  a  colossal  statue  of  Buddha,  83  feet  in  height.  The 
Temple  of  Kwansoon  is  little  inferior  to  the  preceding ;  in  the 
midst  sits  the  goddess  with  thirty-three  hands,  surrounded  by 
crowds  of  subordinate  deities  ;  and  innumerable  statues  of  all  sizes, 
and  richly  gilt,  are  placed  around  on  shelves — the  Japanese  say 
there  are  33,333.  The  population  is  stated  to  amount  to  500,000. 
Meaco  is  the  centre  of  Japanese  commerce  and  manufactures. 
Silks,  tissue,  soy  and  lacquered  wares,  are  purchased  here  in  their 
greatest  perfection,  and  all  the  money  of  the  empire  is  coined, 
and  most  of  the  books  are  printed  here. 

Nangasaki,  on  the  Island  of  Kiusiu,  is  the  only  port  in  which 
foreign  vessels  are  suffered  to  come  to  anchor. 


GOVERNMENT. 

The  Kubo,  or  Jogun,  (commander-in-chief ),  is  the  real  sove 
reign,  and  his  power  is  absolute.  The  government  is  a  hereditary 
monarchy,  sustained  by  a  great  number  of  Damios,  (hereditary 
princes),  who  are  themselves  kept  in  subjection  by  their  mutual 
jealousies,  and  by  being  obliged  to  give  hostages.  Many  of  them 
are  even  required  to  leave  their  families  in  the  Capital,  and  to 
reside  there  themselves  half  the  year.  The  Dairi  retains  the  title 
of  Emperor,  and  the  appearances  of  authority,  but  he  is  confined 
in  the  palace  at  Meaco,  which  he  never  quits,  except  on  a  visit  to 
some  of  the  principal  temples. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  123 


MANUFACTURES    AND    COMMERCE. 

The  Japanese  excel  in  working  in  copper,  iron  and  steel.  Their 
silk  and  cotton  goods,  porcelain,  paper  of  the  bark  of  the  mulberry, 
lacquered  ware,  (thence  called  japanned],  and  glass,  are  also  made 
in  great  perfection.  Their  foreign  commerce  is  inconsiderable. 
The  Japanese  are  forbidden  to  go  out  of  the  country  ;  and  the 
port  of  Nangasaki  is  open  only  to  the  Chinese,  Coreans  and  Dutch, 
and  even  to  them,  under  great  restrictions.  The  inland  and  coast 
ing  trade  is,  however,  extensive.  The  ports  are  crowded  with  ves 
sels,  and  the  fairs  thronged  with  merchants. 

RELIGION. 

There  are  three  forms  of  religion  prevalent  in  Japan.  The  re 
ligion  of  Sinto  is  founded  upon  the  worship  of  Genii,  or  subordi 
nate  gods,  from  whom  the  Dairi  is  supposed  to  be  descended.  The 
Genii,  or  Kami,  are  the  souls  of  the  virtuous,  who  have  ascended 
to  heaven  ;  in  their  honor  are  erected  temples,  in  which  are  placed 
the  symbols  of  the  deity,  consisting  of  strips  of  paper,  attached  to 
a  piece  of  wood.  These  symbols  are  also  kept  in  the  houses  ;  and 
before  these  are  offered  the  daily  prayers  to  the  Kamis.  The  do 
mestic  chapels  are  also  adorned  with  flowers  and  green  branches ; 
and  two  lamps,  a  cup  of  tea,  another  of  wine,  are  placed  before 
them.  Some  animals  are  also  venerated  as  sacred  to  the  Kamis. 
The  sacrifices  offered  at  certain  seasons,  consist  of  rice,  cakes, 
eggs,  &c.  Buddhism  was  introduced  into  Japan  from  Corea,  and 
in  many  cases  is  so  far  mingled  with  the  religion  of  Sinto,  that  the 
same  temples  serve  for  both,  and  accommodate  the  images  of  the 
Kamis,  together  with  those  of  Buddhist  gods.  The  priests  of 
Budda,  in  Japan,  are  called  Bonzes,  and  they  are  numerous,  com 
prising  both  males  and  females.  They  are  under  a  vow  of  celibacy ; 
and  there  are  here  as  in  other  Buddhist  countries,  large  convents 
for  both  sexes.  The  doctrine  of  Confucius  has  also  been  brought 
into  the  country,  and  has  many  followers 

INHABITANTS. 

The  Japanese  have  a  brown  complexion,  black  hair,  and  the 
oblique  eye,  which  characterizes  the  Chinese.  They  are  middle- 
sized,  well-formed,  and  active,  and  in  character  intelligent,  cour 
teous,  industrious  and  honest,  but  suspicious  and  vindictive.  They 


124  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

are  more  cleanly  than  the  Chinese,  and  more  ready  to  adopt  the 
improvements  of  other  nations.  Women  hold  a  higher  rank  than 
in  China.  They  are  educated  with  the  same  care  as  men,  and 
enjoy  the  same  degree  of  liberty  as  in  European  countries.  Most 
of  the  arts  and  sciences  have  been  borrowed  from  the  Chinese,  and 
in  many  respects  the  Japanese  are  still  much  behind  that  indus 
trious  people. 

The  Japanese  are  a  religious  people,  and  their  religion  deals 
much  in  festivals,  of  which  they  have  five  great  annual  ones,  be 
sides  three  smaller  monthly  ones,  celebrated  rather  with  noisy 
mirth  and  revels,  than  with  religious  observances.  Pilgrimage  is 
the  custom  to  which  they  are  most  strongly  addicted,  and  which 
they  practice  with  the  greatest  zeal.  The  roads  in  summer  are 
thronged  with  crowds  of  devotees  on  their  way  to  some  sacred  spot. 
Isje,  the  grand  temple  of  the  chief  of  the  celestial  spirits,  is  the 
most  holy  of  those  venerated  shrines. 

Christianity  was  introduced  in  1549,  and  extirpated  in  1638. 
No  form  of  Christianity  is  now  tolerated.  Marriage  is  performed 
in  the  temples.  The  bride  lights  a  torch  at  the  altar,  and  the 
bridegroom  another  at  hers,  which  constitutes  the  ceremony.  The 
funeral  observances  are  similar  to  the  Chinese. 

The  buildings  in  Japan  are  of  excessively  slight  materials,  and 
the  walls  are  of  clay.  The  interior  is  divided  into  partitions  with 
paste-board,  and  the  walls  are  covered  with  paper,  which  with  the 
rich  is  elegantly  painted  and  varnished.  As  the  natives  sit  on  the 
floor,  there  is  no  occasion  for  the  furniture  which  decorates  our 
apartments.  Pomp  is  chiefly  displayed  in  the  number  and  beauty 
of  the  mats  with  which  the  floor  is  spread,  and  the  imperial  hall  is 
called  the  "  hall  of  the  thousand  mats."  Fires  are  frequent,  and 
of  course  very  destructive  in  the  cities.  The  food  of  the  Japanese 
is  simple,  and  not  only  animal  food,  but  even  milk  and  anything 
made  of  it,  is  avoided.  Rice  is  the  great  article  of  food,  and  tea 
and  sacki,  or  rice-beer,  are  universally  consumed.  The  dress  is 
plain  ;  it  consists  merely  of  a  large  loose  robe,  resembling  a  bed 
gown,  made  of  silk  or  cotton,  and  varying  with  the  different  ranks 
only  in  fineness.  Straw  shoes,  which  are  put  off  at  the  door,  are 
worn  ;  the  head,  which  is  shaved,  is  generally  left  uncovered,  ex 
cept  on  journeys,  when  it  is  covered  with  a  huge  cap  of  straw  or 
oiled  paper.  The  Japanese  are  great  travelers ;  and  this  is  partly 
owing  to  their  frequent  pilgrimages,  and  partly  to  their  great  in 
land  trade.  The  princes  also  make  their  annual  tours  with  large 
retinues. 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  125 

MIAKO, 

THE    ECCLESIASTICAL    CAPITAL    OF    JAPAN. 


[From  M'Culloch's  Geographical  Dictionary.] 


,  [MeacoJ,  a  large  city,  and  the  ecclesiastical  capital  of 
the  Japanese  Empire,  in  the  Island  of  Niphon,  on  the  Yedogawa, 
230  miles  west-by-south  from  Yedo,  [Jeddo]  ;  latitude  35°  24' 
north,  longitude  153°  30'  east.  Population,  (according  to  the  Dutch 
traders,  on  whom,  however,  little  reliance  can  be  placed),  600,000, 
exclusive  of  the  Dairi,  or  Mikado's  court,  supposed  somewhat  to 
exceed  50,000.  It  is  situated  in  a  spacious  plain,  inclosed  on  all 
sides  by  high  mountains,  and  almost  entirely  formed  into  fine  gar 
dens,  interspersed  with  temples,  monasteries,  and  palaces.  It  is 
nearly  four  miles  in  length,  and  about  three  miles  broad,  with  nar 
row  but  regular  streets,  lined  by  houses  two  stories  high,  built  of 
wood,  lime  and  clay ;  most  of  them  being  very  slightly  and  poorly 
constructed.  The  sacred  Mikado,  or  Supreme  Emperor,  emphati 
cally  "  the  Son  of  Heaven,"  has  his  residence  on  the  north  side  of 
the  city,  in  a  quarter  comprising  about  a  dozen  streets,  and  separated 
from  the  rest  of  the  buildings  by  walls  and  ditches ;  but  owing 
to  the  great  diminution  of  the  revenues,  furnished  by  the  Sjogun, 
or  Viceroy,  (the  substantial  sovereign),  the  whole  is  reported  to  have 
a  very  shabby  and  dilapidated  appearance — little  in  accordance 
with  the  rank  of  a  being  more  divine  than  human  !  On  the  west 
part  of  the  town  is  another  palace,  built  of  stone,  and  strongly  for 
tified  ;  it  belongs  to  the  Sjogun,  who  resides  in  it  when  he  comes 
to  pay  his  respects  to  the  Emperor.  This  practice,  however,  has 
long  been  discontinued,  and  the  building  is  now  used  for  the  ac 
commodation  of  certain  functionaries,  sent  thither  from  Yedo. 
to  watch  the  proceedings  of  the  Da'iri.  The  members  of  this  court, 
who  view  themselves  as  a  species  of  superior  beings  to  the  rest  of 
the  Japanese,  are  chiefly  engaged  in  the  study  of  literature  and 
science  ;  the  Da'iri  being  in  fact,  the  highest  college  in  Japan  for 
the  cultivation  of  theology,  and  various  other  branches  of  learning. 
The  almanacs,  formerly  imported  from  China,  are  now  constructed, 
including  the  calculation  of  Eclipses,  in  the  Da'iri  college  ;  and  at 
least  three-fourths  of  all  the  works  published  in  Japan,  are  pro 
duced  by  the  literati  of  Miako,  some  of  whom,  however,  are  con- 


126  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

nectcd  with  other  colleges  and  high  schools,  wholly  independent 
of  the  Dairi. 

This  city  is  likewise  the  principal  manufacturing  depot  of  the 
empire  ;  every  kind  of  handicraft  known  in  Japan  being  carried 
to  the  greatest  perfection.  Nearly  every  house  has  its  attached 
shop,  well  provided  with  every  description  of  goods,  and  the  japan 
ned  wares,  carved  ornaments,  &c.,  of  Miako,  are  unequaled  either 
in  Japan  or  China.  Miako  is  one  of  the  places  visited  by  the  Dutch 
traders,  when  they,  once  in  four  years,  pay  their  respects  to  the 
Sjogiin  at  Yedo.  They  usually  spend  some  days  here,  which  are 
chiefly  occupied  in  making  purchases  of  Japanese  manufactures. 
Various  celebrated  temples  (of  which  there  are  many  though  not 
described,)  are  freely  exhibited  to  them;  and  in  the  gardens  at 
tached  to  one  of  these  buildings,  tents  are  pitched  for  the  purpose, 
not  only  of  giving  a  sumptuous  entertainment  to  the  Captain  Ho- 
landa,  (as  they  term  the  Dutch  president  of  the  mission),  but  also 
of  gratifying  the  curiosity  of  the  natives  with  a  sight  of  a  few 
strangers,  from  a  distant  land. — (For  further  particulars,  see  "  J&- 
pan,"  also  "  Manners  and  Customs  of  the  Japanese,"  p.  140-157, 
Siebold,  i.  and  ii.) 

NANGASAKI. 

JVangasaki,  a  large  town,  and  sea-port  of  Japan,  on  the  south 
west  side  the  Island  of  Kiu-siu,  and  the  only  place  in  that  empire 
accessible  to  Europeans,  600  miles  west-south-west  from  Yedo  ; 
latitude  32°  43  north,  longitude  1 30°  1 1'  47"  east.  Population  from 
60,000  to  70,000.  It  is  situated  on  the  slope  of  a  hill,  and  like 
every  other  Japanese  town,  is  regularly  built,  with  wide  and  clean 
streets.  The  houses,  however,  are  low,  none  containing  more  than 
one  good  story,  to  which  is  added,  in  some,  a  sort  of  cockloft,  in 
others,  a  low  cellar ;  all  are  constructed  of  wood  and  a  mixture  of 
clay  and  chopped  straw,  but  the  walls  are  coated  with  a  cement 
that  gives  them  the  appearance  of- stone.  The  height  of  the  street- 
front,  and  even  the  number  of  the  windows  are  determined  by 
sumptuary  laws.  Oiled  paper  supplies  the  place  of  glass,  and  the 
windows  are  further  protected  from  the  weather  by  external  wooden 
shutters  and  Venetian  blinds.  A  Verandah,  into  which  the  different 
rooms  open,  runs  round  the  outside  of  the  houses,  to  which  are  in 
variably  attached  curiously  laid-out  gardens.  Large  detached  fire 
proof  store-rooms  belong  to  each  dwelling,  and  are  so  constructed 
as  fully  to  answer  their  purpose  of  preserving  the  valuables 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  127 

of  the  inhabitants  from  the  conflagrations  so  common  here  and 
elsewhere  in  Japan.  The  chief  public  buildings  are  the  palaces 
of  the  Governor  and  Grandees  of  the  empire,  some  of  which  cover 
a  considerable  extent  of  ground.  There  are  also  in  the  town  and 
neighborhood  6 1  temples,  or  yasiros,  usually  on  commanding  emi 
nences,  and  inclosed  in  large  gardens — the  habitual  resort  of  plea 
sure  parties.  These  buildings  are  as  plain  and  little  ornamented 
as  the  private  dwellings,  and  comprise  also,  apartments,  which  are" 
let  out  to  travelers,  or  used  for  banqueting  rooms,  and  other  pur 
poses.  The  tea-houses,  or  bagnios,  are  another  favorite  resort  of 
the  natives,  and  of  these,  according  to  Siebold,  there  are  750  in 
Nangasaki.  The  artificial  Island  of  Dezima,  to  which  the  Dutch 
merchants  are  rigorously  confined,  is  about  600  feet  in  length  by 
240  feet  in  breadth  ;  a  few  yards  from  the  shore,  close  to  which 
stands  the  town,  connected  with  it  by  a  stone  bridge,  closed  by 
a  gate  and  guardhouse,  constantly  occupied  by  soldiery.  Neither 
Dutch  nor  Japanese  may  pass  the  gate  without  being  searched. 
The  number  of  European  residents  is  limited  to  eleven,  and  the 
menial  service  is  performed  exclusively  by  Japanese,  all  of  whom, 
except  courtesans,  are  compelled  to  leave  the  island  at  sunset. 
Prom  this  imprisonment  the  Dutch  are  allowed  to  escape  twice  or 
thrice  a  year,  rather  to  be  exhibited  to  the  great  as  a  curiosity 
than  out  of  indulgence.  A  corps  of  constables  and  interpreters 
(the  latter  of  whom  form" a  regular  guild,  receiving  salaries  from  the 
Sjogun,)  are  appointed  to  watch  over  their  minutest  actions,  and 
the  most  degrading  servilities  are  exacted  even  from  the  opperhoofd, 
or  president  of  the  mission,  by  the  meanest  officers  of  the  Japanese 
government.  As  respects  trade,  the  Dutch  are  placed  under  re 
strictions  elsewhere  unparalleled  ;  but  these  and  other  particulars 
have  already  been  detailed  in  the  general  article  "  Japan,"  to 
which  the  reader  is  referred.  The  harbor  of  Nangasaki  extends 
north-east  and  south-west,  about  seven  miles,  being  in  most  places 
less  than  a  mile  in  width.  Ships  lie  in  five  or  six  fathoms  water, 
within  gun-shot  of  the  town,  and  protected  from  all  winds. — (Sie 
bold,  i.  ch.  1.  2.  ;  "  Crawfurd^s  Hist,  of  the  Indian  Archipelago," 
iii.  305-308  ;  "Manners  and  Customs  of  the  Japanese^  "  24-57.) 


128  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 


THE   KUBILE   ISLANDS. 

Kurile  Islands,  a  chain  of  small  islands  connecting  the  peninsula 
of  Kamtschatka  with  the  large  islands  forming  the  Empire  of  Japan. 
They  are  chiefly  dependent  on  Russia  ;  but  the  three  farthest 
south  belong  to  Japan.  They  extend  between  latitude  43°  40' 
and  51°  north,  and  longitude  143°  50'  and  156°  20  east,  and  oc 
cupy  a  length  of  more  than  700  miles.  Population  unknown,  but 
very  small.  The  surface  is  very  irregula — rsome  of  the  heights 
rising  nearly  6000  feet  above  the  ocean,  while  in  other  parts  deep 
and  narrow  valleys  are  almost  on  a  level  with  the  sea.  Volcanic 
eruptions  and  earthquakes  are  of  common  occurrence  ;  and  the  ge 
ological  constituents  of  the  islands,  examined  by  Lutke  and  others, 
being  wholly  of  igneous  origin,  indubitably  show  their  connection 
with  the  great  volcanic  band  passing  south-south-west  from  Kamt 
schatka  to  the  Island  of  Formosa,  through  more  than  30  degrees 
of  latitude.  The  shores  are  abrupt  and  difficult  of  approach  ;  the 
coast-currents  are  very  violent,  especially  on  the  east,  or  ocean 
side  ;  and  continual  fogs  hovering  over  the  islands,  render  access 
extremely  difficult.  The  animals  and  plants  differ  little  from 
those  found  in  Kamtschatka,  and  the  minerals  consist  chiefly  of 
iron,  copper,  and  sulphur.  The  inhabitants  mostly  engage  in 
hunting  and  fishing — the  former  supplying  them  not  only  with 
meat,  but  also  with  furs,  which  serve  as  money  for  the  Russian 
Americans,  Japanese  and  Dutch,  while  the  latter  furnishes  oil, 
whalebone  and  spermaceti.  Agriculture  is  confined  to  the  islands 
belonging  to  Japan.  The  inhabitants  of  the  north  islands  resem 
ble  the  Kamtschatdales  in  honesty,  openness  of  character,  hospi 
tality  and  shyness  to  strangers.  Those  in  the  south  islands  are 
Amos,  a  race  similar  to  the  Japanese.  These  islands  were  dis 
covered  between  1713  and  1720  ;  but  it  must  be  acknowledged 
that  they  are  very  little  known,  even  after  the  lapse  of  more  than 
a  century,  and  the  labors  of  Broughton,  Krusentern,  and  other 
travelers. — (^  Lutke's  Voyages,"  tome  iii. ;  Diet.  Geog.) 

ISLAND  OF  FORMOSA. 

Formosa,  (Chin.  Tae-wan,  or  "  Terrace  Bay"),  an  Island  in  the 
Chinese  Sea,  belonging  partially  to  China,  between  latitude  22° 
and  25°  30'  north,  and  longitude  120°  30'  and  122°  east ;  about 
80  miles  from  the  Chinese  coast,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  the 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  129 

Channel  of  Fo-kien,  and  170  miles  north  from  Luzon,  the  chief 
of  the  Philippine  Islands.  Length,  north  to  south,  about  250 
miles;  breadth  in  its  centre,  about  80  miles;  area  15,000  square 
miles.  Population  uncertain,  but  perhaps  between  2,000,000  and 
3,000,000. — (Canton  Register,  1833.) 

A  chain  of  mountains  runs  through  the  island  in  its  entire  length, 
forming  in  general,  the  barrier  between  the  Chinese  on  the  west 
and  the  independent  natives  of  the  unexplored  country  on  the  east 
side.  On  many  of  its  summits,  snow  remains  during  the  most 
part  of  the  summer,  and  Humboldt  has  supposed  that  a  portion  of 
it  reaches  an  absolute  elevation  of  upwards  of  12,000  feet.  It  ex 
hibits  distinct  evidence  of  former  volcanic  action  in  some  extinct 
craters;  in  other  parts  flames,  mephitic  gases,  &c.,  burst  out  of 
the  earth ;  and  sulphur,  naptha  and  other  volcanic  products  are 
abundant.  Some  parts  of  the  coast  present  bold  head-lands,  but 
all  the  west  shore  is  flat,  and  surrounded  with  quicksands.  Its 
harbors,  which  were  formerly  very  good,  have  become  nearly  use 
less,  except  to  junks  of  very  small  tonnage,  from  the  rapid  increase 
of  the  land  on  the  sea,  so  that  at  present  Formosa  has  but  one 
good  port,  that  of  Kelung,  at  its  north  extremity . 

"  That  portion  of  Formosa  which  is  possessed  by  the  Chinese, 
well  deserves  its  name ;  the  air  is  wholesome,  and  the  soil  very 
fruitful.  The  numerous  rivulets  from  the  mountains  fertilize  the 
extensive  plains  which  spread  below ;  but  throughout  the  island 
the  water  is  unwholesome,  and  to  unacclimated  strangers,  often 
very  injurious.  All  the  large  plain  of  the  south  resembles  a 
vast  well-oultivated  garden.  Almost  all  grains  and  fruits  may  be 
produced  on  one  part  of  the  island  or  another ;  but  rice,  sugar, 
camphor,  tobacco,  &c.,  are  the  chief  productions. 

11  Formosa  has  long  been  familiarly  known  as  the  granary  of  the 
Chinese  maritime  provinces.  If  wars  intervene,  or  violent  storms 
prevent  the  shipment  of  rice  to  the  coast,  a  scarcity  immediately 
ensues,  and  extensive  distress,  with  another  sure  result — multiplied 
piracies  by  the  destitute  Chinese.  The  quantity  of  rice  exported 
from  Formosa  to  Fuh-keen  and  Che-keang  is  very  considerable, 
and  employs  more  than  300  junks.  Of  sugar,  there  annually  ar 
rive  at  the  single  port  of  Teen-tsin  (in  China,)  upwards  of  seventy 
laden  junks.  The  exportation  of  camphor  is  likewise  by  no  means 
small.  Much  of  the  camphor  in  the  Canton  market  is  supplied  from 
Formosa." — (  Chinese  Repository,  ii.  419,  420. )  Besides  the  forego 
ing  products ;  wheat,  maize,  millet,  kitchen  vegetables  of  many  kinds, 
truffles,  &c.;  colocasia>  a  kind  of  arum,  the  root  of  which  is  a  chief 


130  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

article  of  food  in  the  interior ;  oranges,  bananas,  cocoa  and  areca 
nuts,  peaches,  figs,  melons,  and  numerous  other  European  and 
Asiatic  fruits  are  cultivated.  Chesnut  woods  are  plentiful ;  and  in 
the  north  especially  a  good  deal  of  timber  for  ship-building  is  ob 
tained.  Pepper,  aloes,  coffee,  a  kind  of  green  tea,  but  different 
from  the  Chinese,  cotton,  hemp  and  silk,  are  other  important 
articles  of  culture.  The  ox  and  buffalo  are  used  for  tillage  and 
draught ;  horses,  asses,  sheep,  goats  and  hogs  are  abundant.  The 
leopard,  tiger,  wolf,  &c.,  inhabit  the  island,  but  do  not  infest  its 
cultivated  portion  ;  pheasants,  hares,  and  other  kinds  of  game  are 
very  numerous.  Grold  is  supposed  to  be  found  in  the  east  part  of 
Formosa,  as  it  is  seen  in  the  hands  of  the  inhabitants  ;  but  the 
minerals  are  salt  and  sulphur,  of  which  latter  a  good  deal  has  been 
sent  to  China  since  1819  for  the  manufacture  of  gunpowder. 

The  Chinese  colonists  of  the  island  are  mostly  from  the  opposite 
province  of  Fo-kien,  and  have  emigrated  principally  from  poverty. 
They  are  a  laborious  and  industrious  race,  well-disposed  toward 
foreigners,  but  very  turbulent  in  respect  to  the  home  authorities, 
who  maintain  only  a  very  precarious  sway  over  them — the  Formo- 
sans  having  frequently  risen  in  open  rebellion  against  their  mother 
country.  The  greater  part  of  them  are  cultivators  of  the  soil ;  but 
many  of  the  Amoy  men  (from  which  district  a  great  number  of 
the  emigrants  have  come,)  are  merchants,  fishermen,  and  sailors. 
The  trade  with  China  is  very  extensive.  The  chief  exports  to 
that  country  have  been  mentioned.  The  principal  imports  thence 
are  tea,  silk  and  woolen,  and  other  kinds  of  manufactured  goods. 
The  trade  is  mostly  in  the  hands  of  the  Fo-kien  merchants,  who 
have  also  advanced  the  chief  part  of  the  capital  necessary  for  the 
cultivation  of  the  soil.  As  many  as  100  junks  a  month  are  esti 
mated  to  leave  Fo-kien  for  the  west  coast  of  Formosa,  where,  how 
ever,  they  are  obliged  to  lie  at  a  great  distance  from  the  shore, 
while  carts  with  wheels,  destitute  of  spokes,  drawn  by  buffaloes, 
are  used  to  carry  the  cargoes  to  them  through  the  water.  There 
are  no  junks  strictly  belonging  to  the  island ;  all  the  shipping  is 
the  property  of  the  Amoy  merchants. — (Gutzlaff.} 

The  native  inhabitants  of  the  east  of  Formosa  bear  no  resem 
blance  to  the  Chinese ;  but  they  have  apparently  an  alliance  with 
the  Malay  or  Polynesian  tribes.  u  They  are  of  a  slender  shape, 
olive  complexion,  wear  long  hair,  are  clad  with  a  piece  of  cloth 
from  the  waist  to  the  knees,  blacken  the  teeth,  and  wear  ear-rings 
and  collars.  In  the  south,  those  who  are  not  civilized  live  in  cot 
tages  of  bamboo  and  straw,  raised  on  a  kind  of  terrace  three  or 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  131 

four  feet  high,  built  like  an  inverted  funnel,  and  from  fifteen  to 
forty  feet  in  diameter.  In  these  they  have  neither  chair,  table, 
bed,  nor  any  movable  article.  They  tattoo  their  skin.  In  the 
north  they  clothe  themselves  with  deer-skins.  They  have  no 
books  or  written  language  ;  neither  have  they  any  king  or  common 
head,  but  petty  chiefs  and  councils  of  elders,  and  distinguished 
men,  much  like  the  North  American  Indians.  It  does  not  ap 
pear  whether  they  have  any  separate  priesthood,  but  it  is  probable 
that  there  is  none  beyond  the  conjurers  and  enchanters  of  all  sav 
age  tribes,  nor  any  ancient  and  fixed  ceremonies  of  divine  worship 
or  system  of  superstition.  They  are  represented  by  the  Chinese 
as  free  from  theft  and  deception  among  themselves,  and  just  to 
wards  each  other,  but  excessively  revengeful  when  outraged." — 
(Chinese  Repository ',  ii.  419).  The  Chinese  territory  in  Formosa 
having,  for  a  lengthened  period,  been  gradually  extending,  the 
really  independent  tribes  have  receded  toward  the  east  coast ; 
some  of  the  others  have  become  partially  civilized,  settled  in  vil 
lages,  and  intermixed  with  the  border  Chinese. 

Formosa,  together  with  the  Pang-hoo  Islands,  composes  a/00,  or 
department,  under  the  province  of  Fo-kien,  and  immediately  sub 
ject  to  its  governor.  It  is  divided  into  five  keens,  or  districts. 
The  capital  Tae-wan,  is  described  as  ranking  among  Chinese  cities 
of  the  first  class,  in  the  variety  and  richness  of  its  merchandize, 
and  in  population.  It  stands  on  the  west  coast,  in  about  latitude 
23°  north  and  longitude  120°  32  east,  surrounded  by  a  wall  and 
ditch.  Its  principal  streets  are  from  thirty  to  forty  feet  broad,  and 
for  many  months  of  the  year  are  covered  with  awnings,  to  keep  off 
the  sun.  On  a  small  island  opposite  the  city,  the  Dutch  in  1634, 
built  Fort  Zealand,  which  commanded  the  harbor,  the  entrance 
to  which  is  now  choked  up.  The  Chinese  garrison  in  Tae-wan, 
amounts  to  about  10,000  men  ;  the  total  armed  force  usually  sta 
tioned  in  the  island  may  be  estimated  at  about  double  that  num 
ber — all  infantry.  The  revenue  derived  by  China  from  Formosa, 
amounted  in  1820  to  11,240  bushels  of  corn  and  7341  oz.  of  sil 
ver  ;  the  public  expenditure  to  482  bushels  of  corn  and  5000  oz. 
of  silver. 

The  Chinese  appear  not  to  have  been  acquainted  with  Formosa 
till  about  1430,  after  which  its  coasts  became  the  resort  succes 
sively  of  several  Chinese  pirates.  The  Japanese  had  planted  colo 
nies  in  the  north,  and  at  one  period  the  greater  part  of  the  island 
belonged  to  them  ;  but  the  Dutch,  having  been  allowed  to  settle  on 
the  west  coast,  gradually  dislodged  all  their  opponents,  including 


132  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

the  Spanish  and  Portuguese,  (both  of  whom  tried  to  gain  a  foot 
ing),  and  became  sole  masters  of  the  island  about  1632.  After 
the  conquest  of  China  by  the  Tartars,  in  1 644,  a  Chinese  chief, 
with  an  army  of  Chinese  refugees,  determined  to  conquer  Formosa, 
and  finally  expelled  the  Dutch  from  it  in  1662.  In  1688,  how 
ever,  the  new  dynasty  was  overthrown  by  the  continental  Chinese, 
aided  by  the  Dutch ;  and  the  authority  of  China  has  been  ever 
since  maintained  over  the  island,  though  assailed  by  repeated  in 
surrections. — (Hitter,  Asien  Erdkunde,  iii.  858-881  ;  Klaproth; 
La  Perouse ;  Gutzlaff •  Chinese  Repository,  &c). 


ISLAND  OF  COREA. 

Corea,  (called  by  the  natives  Chaou-Seen,  by  the  Chinese 
Kmou-le,  and  by  the  Manchoo  Tartars,  Sol-ho},  a  maritime 
country  of  North  East  Asia,  tributary  to  China,  consisting  of  a 
large  oblong-shaped  peninsula,  with  an  adjoining  portion  of  the 
continent,  and  a  vast  number  of  islands,  which  are  especially  nu 
merous  on  the  west  coast.  The  whole  of  the  dominions  lie  be 
tween  latitude  33°  and  43°  north,  and  longitude  123°  50'  and 
129°  30'  east ;  having  east  the  Sea  of  Japan,  south  the  Straits  of 
Corea,  west  the  Yellow  Sea,  and  Gulf  of  Leao-tong,  north-west  the 
province  of  Leao-tong,  and  north  Manchoo  Tartary.  From  the 
latter  it  is  separated  by  a  mountain  chain,  and  the  Thu-men-kiang 
river,  and  from  Leao-tong,  mostly  by  a  wooden  wall  or  palisade. 
Length,  north-west  to  south-east,  550  miles  ;  average  breadth  of  the 
peninsula,  about  130  miles.  Total  area,  inclusive  of  islands,  pro 
bably  about  80,000  square  miles.  Corea  is  generally  mountainous. 
A  mountain  range  runs  through  it  longitudinally,  much  nearer  its 
east  than  its  west  coast.  The  east  declivity  of  this  range  is  steep 
and  rugged  ;  its  west  one  declines  gradually  into  a  fertile  and  well- 
watered  country.  All  the  principal  rivers  run  west  and  discharge 
themselves  into  the  Yellow  Sea  ;  the  chief  is  the  Ya-lu-kiang,  in  the 
north-west,  which  is  navigable  for  large  ships  to  about  22  miles, 
and  for  small  vessels  for  a  distance  of  nearly  120  miles  above  its 
mouth.  The  coast,  as  well  of  the  islands  as  of  the  continent,  are 
generally  rocky,  and  difficult  of  access,  though  there  are  some  spa 
cious  and  secure  harbors.  The  climate  of  the  north  is  very  rigo 
rous.  The  Thu-mcn-kiang,  for  six  months  in  the  year,  is  thickly 
frozen  over,  and  'barley  is  the  only  kind  of  corn  capable  of  being 
cultivated  in  that  region — even  the  south,  though  in  the  same  lati- 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  133 

tude  with  Sicily  and  Malta,  is  said  to  experience  sometimes  very 
heavy  falls  of  snow.  The  climate  of  this  part  of  Corea,  however, 
must  be  on  the  whole  mild,  since  cotton,  rice  and  hemp  are  staple 
products;  and  Gutzlaff  conjectures  (Voyages,  &c.,  p.  319,)  that 
many  other  plants,  common  to  the  south  of  Europe,  flourish:  Gutz 
laff  observes — "  In  point  of  vegetation,  the  coast  of  Corea  is  far  su 
perior  to  that  of  China,  where  barren  rocks  often  preclude  any  at 
tempt  at  cultivation  ;  but  here,  where  the  land  is  fertile,  the  inhab 
itants  do  not  plough  the  ground,"  (p.  337).  Agriculture  may  be 
better  farther  inland,  but  on  the  coast  it  is  much  neglected.  Wheat, 
millet,  and  ginseng,  are  among  the  chief  articles  cultivated.  To 
bacco  was  introduced  by  the  Japanese  about  the  beginning  of  the 
17th  century,  and  potatoes,  by  Gutzlaff  and  Lindsay,  in  1832.  The 
orange,  citron,  hazel-nut,  pear,  chesnut,  peach,  mulberry,  morus 
pipyrifercb)  Fucus  sacchannus ,  and  the  wild  grape,  are  common  ;  but 
the  art  of  making  wine  from  the  latter  seems  to  be  unknown — an 
ardent  liquor  is,  however,  made  from  rice.  The  mountainous  parts 
of  the  north  are  covered  with  extensive  forests.  Pines  are  very 
abundant  on  the  coasts ;  and  in  the  interior  there  is  a  species  of 
palm  producing  a  valuable  gum,  from  which  a  varnish,  giving  an 
appearance  little  inferior  to  gilding,  is  made.  Oxen,  hogs,  and 
other  domestic  animals,  common  to  Europe,  are  reared  :  There  is 
a  spirited  breed  of  dwarf  horses  not  exceeding  three  feet  in  height ; 
panthers,  bears,  wild  boars,  cats  and  dogs,  sables,  (whose  skin  form 
an  important  article  of  tribute),  deer,  and  an  abundance  of  game, 
storks  and  waterfowl  of  many  sorts,  are  found  ;  caymans  of  30  or 
40  feet  in  length,  are  said  to  be  met  with  in  the  rivers,  and  veno 
mous  serpents  are  not  rare.  In  the  winter,  whales,  seals,  &c., 
visit  the  shores.  The  mineral  kingdom  produces  gold,  silver,  iron, 
rock-salt  and  coal. 

PEOPLE,  &c. — The  population  has  been  estimated  at  15,000,000  , 
but  there  are  no  real  grounds  for  this  estimate,  which  we  have 
little  doubt,  is  greatly  beyond  the  mark.  Gutzlaff  represents  the 
coasts  as  thinly  inhabited.  We  have  elsewhere  stated  that  the 
Coreans  are  superior  in  strength  and  stature  to  the  Chinese  and 
Japanese,  but  that  they  are  inferior  to  either  in  mental  energy  and 
capacity,  (Anti.,  p.  182).  They  are  gross  in  their  habits,  eat  vo 
raciously,  and  drink  to  excess.  The  dress  of  both  men  and  women 
is  very  similar  to  that  of  the  Chinese,  though  the  Coreans  do  not, 
like  that  people,  cut  off  their  hair.  Their  houses  are  also  like  those 
of  China,  being  built  of  bricks  in  the  towns,  and  in  the  country  are 
mere  mud  hovels  ;  each  house  is  surrounded  by  a  wooden  stockade. 


134  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

Their  language  or  languages  are  peculiar,  differing  from  those  of 
their  immediate  neighbors.  In  writing  they  use  alphabetic  cha 
racters,  though  the  symbolic  characters  of  the  Chinese  are  also 
understood  and  sometimes  resorted  to.  They  have  a  copious  lite 
rature,  and  are  very  fond  of  reading,  as  well  as  of  music,  dancing 
and  festivities.  Polygamy  is  permitted  ;  but  the  women  do  not 
appear  to  be  under  such  restraint  as  in  China. — (McLeod}.  The 
religion  of  the  upper  orders  is  that  of  Confucius,  while  the  mass 
of  the  people  are  attached  to  Buddhism  ;  but  neither  appears  to 
have  much  influence.  Christianity  which  was  introduced  by  the 
Japanese,  appeared  to  be  extinct  when  Gutzlaff  visited  Corea  in 
1832. 

MANUFACTURES,  TRADES,  &c. — The  manufactures  are  few — 
the  principal  are  a  kind  of  grass  cloth,  straw  plait,  horse-hair  caps, 
and  other  articles  for  domestic  use  ;  a  very  fine  and  transparent 
fabric  woven  from  filaments  of  the  urtica  japonica,  cotton  cloth,  and 
a  very  strong  kind  of  paper,  made  of  cotton,  rice  paper,  &c.; 
which  articles,  together  with  ginseng,  skins,  some  metals,  horses, 
and  silk,  constitute  the  chief  exports.  What  trade  there  is,  is 
principally  with  Japan,  from  which  they  import  pepper,  aromatic 
woods,  alum,  buffalo,  goat  and  buck's  horns,  and  Dutch  and  Ja 
panese  manufactured  goods.  There  is,  however,  some  trade  with 
China,  carried  on  at  Fung-wang-Ching,  (the  Phoenix-town}  ^  be 
yond  the  Leao-tong  border  ;  but  this  trade  is  conducted  with  great 
secrecy,  in  consequence  of  the  jealousy  of  the  government  of  any 
intercourse  with  foreigners.  This  jealousy  is  so  great,  that  no 
Chinese  is  allowed  to  settle  in  Corea,  or  any  Corean  to  leave  his 
own  country  ;  Europeans  are  scarcely  ever  suffered  to  land  or  re 
main  any  length  of  time  on  the  coast ;  and  the  north  frontier  is 
abandoned  for  many  miles,  in  order  that  no  communication  should 
take  place  with  the  Manchoo  Tartars.  Little  skill  in  ship-building 
is  displayed  by  the  Coreans  ;  their  junks  do  not  carry  more  than 
200  tons,  and  are  quite  unmanageable  in  a  heavy  sea.  In  the 
construction  of  their  fishing  boats,  not  a  nail  is  used.  Metallic  ar 
ticles  and  money  are  rare.  The  only  coin  in  circulation  is  of  cop 
per  ;  but  payment  is  often  made  in  silver  ingots. 

Corea  is  divided  into  eight  provinces.  King-hi-tao,  the  capital, 
is  placed  on  the  Kiang  river,  in  about  37°  40  north  latitude,  and 
127°  20'  east  longitude,  or  about  the  centre  of  the  kingdom.  The 
government  is  said  to  be  despotical.  Most  of  the  landed  property 
in  the  country  belongs  to  the  king,  of  whom  it  is  held  in  different 
portions  as  fiefs,  which  revert  to  the  sovereign  at  the  decease  of 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  135 

the  occupier.  Besides  the  revenues  from  these  domains,  a  tenth 
part  of  all  kinds  of  produce  belongs  to  the  king.  Justice  is  in 
many  respects  very  rigid.  Rebellion,  as  in  China,  is  punished  by 
the  destruction  of  the  rebel,  with  his  entire  family,  and  the  confis 
cation  of  their  property.  None  but  the  king  may  order  the  death 
of  an  official  person.  The  master  has  always  power  over  the  life 
of  his  slave.  For  minor  crimes  the  general  punishment  is  in  the 
bastinado,  which  is  pretty  constantly  at  work.  The  Chinese  inter 
fere  but  little  with  the  internal  administration  of  Corea ;  but  the 
king  can  neither  assume  the  government,  nor  choose  his  successor 
or  colleague,  without  the  authority  of  the  Court  of  Pekin,  to  which 
he  sends  tribute  four  times  a  year  ;  the  tribute  consists  of  ginseng- 
root,  sable  skins,  white  cotton,  paper,  silk,  horses,  silver  ingots, 
&c.  The  Corean  ambassador  is  treated  at  Pekin  with  but  little 
consideration.  There  seems  reason  to  believe,  that,  like  some 
other  states  in  Asia,  Corea  is  tributary  to  the  more  powerful  na 
tions  on  either  side,  and  that  it  also  sends  a  yearly  tribute  to  Ja 
pan,  consisting  of  ginseng,  leopards,  &c.,  skins,  silks,  white  cotton 
fabrics,  horses,  &c.;  but  for  which  an  acknowledgment  is  made  in 
gold  articles,  fans,  tea,  presents  of  silver  to  the  ambassadors,  &c. 

HISTORY. — Corea  was  known  to  the  Chinese  from  a  very  early 
period,  and  is  reported  to  have  been  civilized  by  the  Chinese  sove 
reign  Khil-su,  about  1 120  years  before  our  era.  After  experiencing 
several  revolutions,  it  was  invaded  and  conquered  by  the  Japanese 
in  1692,  who,  however,  abandoned  their  conquest  in  1698 — the 
Coreans  having  called  in  the  aid  of  China  during  that  struggle. 
Corea  has  since  formed  a  subordinate  part  of  the  Chinese  Empire. 
— Ritter's  Asien  Erdkunde,  iii.  573-647  ;  Du  Halde  ;  Klaproth  ; 
Timkowski ;  Gutzlaff's  Three  Voyages,  &c. ;  Lindsay,-  McLeod ; 
&c.;  Malte  Brun.) 


THE    JAPANESE    EMPIRE. 


[From  Memoirs  of  a  Captivity  in  Japan,  by  Captain  Golownin,  of  the  Russian 

Navy.] 


PRODUCTIONS    OF    THE    COUNTRY TRADE    AND    COMMERCE. 

Agriculture — Manufactures — Fisheries — Making  of  Salt — Natural  Pro 
ducts  :  Cotton,  Silk,  Copper,  Iron,  Timber,  Tea,  Tobacco,  Horses,  Cattle, 
Hemp,  Lead,  Tin,  &c.  ;  Pearls,  Marbles,  Fruits,  Vegetables,  &c. — 
Domestic  Animals — Poultry — Wild  Animals — Birds — Fish,  &c. — State 
of  the  Fine  Arts — Foreign  Trade — Custom  Houses — Smuggling  Regula 
tions — Coins — Paper  Currency — Trade  with  the  Chinese  and  Dutch. 

THOUGH  the  Japanese  possessions  extend  through  only  a  few 
degrees  of  latitude,  the  climate  of  the  country  is  uncommonly  di 
versified.  The  cause  of  this  is  to  be  attributed  to  the  situation  of 
the  country.  This  diversity  of  the  climate  causes  a  great  variety 
in  the  productions  of  the  soil.  The  principalities  of  Tzyngaru, 
Nambu,  and  the  Island  of  Matsmai,  with  other  northern  posses 
sions,  where  the  ground  is  covered  with  snow  about  five  months 
together,  produce  many  plants  that  belong  to  the  frigid  zone  ;  and 
in  the  southern  possessions  of  Japan,  the  fruits  of  the  tropical 
climates  are  found  to  flourish. 

As  I  had  no  opportunity  to  visit  the  principal  islands  belonging 
to  Jap:m,  I  cannot  speak  of  their  productions  as  an  eye-witness, 
but  only  repeat  what  I  have  heard  from  the  Japanese,  and  describe 
what  I  could  infer  from  their  way  of  life,  and  what  I  saw  of  the 
articles  imported  into  the  Island  of  Matsmai. 

I  have  already  mentioned  the  causes  why  the  reader  cannot  ex 
pect  from  me  any  complete  description  of  the  Japanese  empire  ; 
still  less  can  I  satisfy  the  curiosity  of  a  naturalist,  who  might  wish, 
perhaps,  that  I  should  describe  every  shell  found  in  Japan.  Be 
sides  the  want  of  opportunities  to  examine  things  myself,  I  did  not 
possess  the  requisite  knowledge  to  observe  with  the  eye  of  a  natu 
ralist.  The  reader  will,  therefore,  not  take  it  amiss  if  I  make  my 
short  remarks  on  the  productions  of  Japan,  not  according  to  classes, 


138  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

or  a  systematic  arrangement,  for  instance,  according  to  the  king 
doms  of  nature,  but  enumerate  them  in  succession,  according  to  the 
greater  or  smaller  advantage  which  the  inhabitants  derive  from 
them.  The  chief  and  most  useful  productions  of  Japan  are  the 
following : — 

Rice,  fish,  radishes,  salt,  cotton,  silk,  copper,  iron,  timber,  tea, 
tobacco,  horses,  oxen,  hemp,  and  a  tree  which  they  call  kadzy, 
gold  and  silver,  lead,  quicksilver,  and  sulphur. 

I  doubt  whether  there  is  a  book  in  which  so  many  different  things 
are  brought  under  one  head,  and  treated  in  such  order  ;  however, 
this  does  not  deter  me,  and  I  consider  this  order  as  not  wholly  un 
natural.  Ilice  is  the  chief  production,  and  nearly  the  only  thing 
the  Japanese  use  for  bread  ;  it  is  to  them  what  rye  is  to  us  ;  nay, 
it  is  even  more  important ;  for  there  are  many  persons  in  Russia 
who  eat  no  rye  bread  ;  in  Japan,  on  the  contrary,  every  body,  from 
the  monarch  to  the  beggar,  lives  on  rice.  Besides,  in  all  Japan, 
they  make  of  the  straw,  shoes,  hats,  floor-mats  in  the  houses,  mats 
for  sacks  and  for  packing  up  goods,  a  kind  of  writing  paper,  and 
many  other  things  of  less  consequence,  but  useful  for  domestic  pur 
poses,  such  as  baskets,  brooms,  &c.  The  Japanese  also  extract 
from  rice  a  kind  of  brandy  or  wine,  and  the  weak  liquor  called  sagi. 

Fish  are  in  Japan  what  meat  is  in  Europe,  and  much  more, 
because  we  eat  many  kinds  of  meat  and  also  fish,  whereas,  in 
Japan,  but  few  people  eat  meat,  except  the  priests  •,  and  all,  with 
out  exception,  eat  fish.  Besides,  they  light  their  houses  with  fish 
oil,  which  is  made  in  great  quantities  in  the  northern  parts  of 
Japan.  Only  the  rich  burn  candles. 

The  radish  supplies  the  place  of  our  cabbage,  and  is  used  in 
soup  in  various  ways  ;  salted  radish  serves  them  also  instead  of  salt, 
to  all  their  food.  Whole  fields  are  sown  with  radishes  ;  they  are 
so  used  to  radish  soup,  that  a  scarcity  of  this  plant  would  be  very 
distressing  to  them. 

Salt  is  not  only  indispensable  for  their  daily  use,  but  serves  also 
for  the  curing  offish  ;  for  their  chief  fisheries  are  on  the  coasts  of 
the  Kurile  Islands  and  Sagaleen,  whence  many  hundred  ships  an 
nually  bring  them  to  ports  of  the  kingdom  of  Japan.  Two  means 
are  used  to  preserve  fish,  salting  and  drying  ;  but  the  large  fish 
cannot  be  so  dried  as  to  remain  long  fit  to  eat  in  the  warm 
climate. 

Silk  and  cotton,  besides  the  uses  to  which  they  are  generally  ap 
plied,  supply  also  the  place  of  our  wool,  hemp,  flax,  down,  feathers, 
and  furs  ;  for  whatever  is  worn  in  Japan  is  made  of  these  two  ar- 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  139 

tides.  They  likewise  make  of  cotton  stuff  traveling  cloaks,  cases 
for  arras,  and  other  things,  and  tobacco-pouches,  which  are  var 
nished  in  such  a  manner  that  they  may  be  taken  for  leather. 

Copper  and  iron  are  as  necessary  in  Japan  as  in  Europe.  Be 
sides  the  ordinary  uses  to  which  we  apply  it,  the  Japanese  cover  the 
roof's  of  their  houses,  which  they  desire  particularly  to  preserve 
with  copper,  and  also  cover  the  outward  joints  of  the  buildino-s 
with  the  same  metal,  that  the  rain-water  may  not  penetrate.  To 
bacco-pipes  are  also  made  of  it.  A  very  large  quantity  of  iron  is 
used  for  nails  ;  for  the  Japanese  houses  consist  of  boards  nailed, 
within  and  without,  with  iron  nails,  to  upright  pillars  which  are 
joined  by  cross-beams  ;  every  little  box,  too,  however  inconsider 
able,  is  fastened  together  with  nails. 

In  so  populous  a  country  as  Japan,  when  the  frequent  and 
violent  earthquakes  render  it  dangerous  to  erect  buildings  of  stone, 
timber  may  be  reckoned  among  the  chief  necessaries  of  the 
people. 

Tea  and  tobacco,  it  should  seem,  might  be  easily  dispensed  with  ; 
but  custom  and  fashion  often  operate  as  strongly  as  nature  ;  next 
to  food,  tea  and  tobacco  are  above  everything,  necessary  to  the  Ja 
panese.  He  smokes  his  pipe  continually,  and  sips  tea  with  it. 
His  little  pipe  is  filled  every  five  minutes,  and  after  a  few  puffs  laid 
down.  Even  during  the  night,  the  Japanese  get  up  for  a  few 
minutes  to  smoke  tobacco  and  drink  a  cup  of  tea,  which  serves  to 
quench  their  thirst,  instead  of  beer,  water,  and  kwass. 

The  Japanese  do  not  use  the  flesh  of  horned  cattle  for  food,  be 
cause  they  have  an  aversion  to  it  5  but  they  keep  some,  as  well  as 
horses,  to  draw  burdens. 

They  manufacture  of  hemp  the  coarse  cloth  for  workmen's 
dresses,  and  for  the  sails  of  their  ships  ;  but  they  make  their  cables 
and  ropes  of  the  bark  of  the  tree  called  kadzy,  without  using  tar 
or  any  other  resinous  matter.  Hence,  their  ropes  are  not  com 
parable,  either  for  strength  or  durability,  with  those  made  of  hemp  ; 
but  they  are  good  enough  for  their  limited  voyages,  in  which  they 
are  not  exposed  to  any  great  storm.  Besides,  the  cheapness  of  the 
materials  allows  them  to  have  new  ropes  more  frequently.  Of  this 
bark  they  often  make  also  thread,  lamp-wicks,  a  kind  of  cheap 
cloth,  writing-paper,  and  paper  for  Japanese  pocket-handkerchiefs. 

Gold  and  silver,  so  far  as  they  serve  for  magnificence  and  luxury, 
cannot,  indeed,  be  reckoned  among  the  necessaries  of  life  ;  but  if 
we  consider  the  advantage  and  the  means  which  they  afford  as 
money,  for  the  procuring  of  necessaries  and  the  exchange  of  home 


140  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

productions,  they  must  certainly  be  reckoned  among  the  chief 
necessaries  of  an  enlightened  nation,  and  on  this  account  I  mention 
them  here. 

Lead,  tin,  and  quicksilver  may  also  be  reckoned  as  chief  neces 
saries,  because  they  are  required  in  the  refining  of  gold  and  silver, 
and  also  in  the  manufacture  of  arms,  which  are  used  by  every  na 
tion  that  values  its  independence.  For  the  latter  reason,  brimstone 
comes  under  the  same  head. 

Rice  grows  in  such  great  abundance  in  the  middle  part  of  the 
Island  of  Niphon,  that  the  Japanese,  notwithstanding  the  extraor 
dinary  population  of  the  country,  do  not  want  to  import  it.  It  is 
true  they  receive  rice  from  China,  but  only  out  of  precaution,  lest, 
in  case  of  scarcity,  the  Chinese  government  should  make  a  difficulty 
to  permit  the  exportation  of  it,  and  exclude  it  from  the  number  of 
goods  which  form  the  usual  articles  of  trade  between  the  two  king 
doms.  The  northern  provinces  of  Japan,  viz.  :  the  principalities 
of  Nambu  and  Tzyngaru,  are  poor  in  rice,  and  receive  it,  for  the 
most  part,  from  other  countries ;  it  is  not  cultivated  in  Matsmai, 
Sachalin,  and  the  Kurile  Islands,  because  it  will  not  grow,  on  ac 
count  of  the  cold  climate.  We  saw,  indeed,  pieces  of  land  sown 
with  rice  in  Matsmai,  in  a  valley  near  Chakodade,  but  our  guards 
told  us  that  it  was  only  done  for  a  trial. 

The  Japanese  boil  out  of  rice  a  kind  of  thick  gruel,  and  eat  it 
at  all  their  meals,  instead  of  bread  ;  from  the  flour  of  rice  they 
prepare  cakes  and  divers  kinds  of  pastry,  which  resembles  our  con 
fectionary.  But  rice  is  not  the  only  bread-corn  of  the  Japanese  ; 
they  have  also  barley,  with  which  they  sometimes  feed  the  horses, 
and  make  cakes  and  other  things  from  the  flour  ;  maize,  which  they 
use  in  food  in  various  ways,  and  sometimes  roast  whole  ears,  and 
eat  the  grain  ;  many  kinds  of  beans,  which  are  a  favorite  dish  of 
the  Japanese  ;  they  sometimes  eat  them  merely  boiled  in  water, 
sometimes  in  treacle  or  soy  ;  small  beans  are  often  boiled  with 
thick  rice,  and  pass  for  a  great  delicacy.  The  Japanese  soy  is  also 
prepared  of  beans,  and  turned  sour  in  casks.  They  say  that  three 
years  are  required  for  preparing  the  best  soy.  Sweet  and  common 
potatoes  are  also  cultivated  in  Japan,  but  they  want  land  to  plant 
them.  The  Japanese  sweet  potatoes  are  quite  different  from  those 
I  saw  in  other  parts  of  the  world,  as  in  Portugal,  in  the  Island  of 
Madeira,  in  the  Brazils,  &c.,  &c.  They  resemble,  in  size,  our 
largest  potatoes,  only  that  they  are  a  little  longer,  the  skin  dark 
red,  the  inside  is  white,  the  taste  agreeable,  and  smells  like  the 
rose.  They  have  also  peas,  but  it  is  only  a  garden  plant  with 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  141 

them.  In  so  confined  and  populous  a  state  as  Japan,  and  such  a 
climate,  no  corn,  except  rice,  can  be  in  general  use,  because  only 
rice  can  grow  in  so  narrow  a  space,  in  such  abundance,  as  to  be 
sufficient  for  so  great  a  nation. 

I  cannot  exactly  state  what  kinds  of  fish  are  caught  in  the 
southern  and  middle  parts  of  the  coast  of  Japan,  and  in  the  rivers 
of  that  kingdom  ;  but  on  the  coasts  of  Matsmai,  Kunaschier, 
Eetooroop,  and  Sagaleen,  almost  all  kinds  of  fish  are  caught  in 
great  quantities,  which  they  have  in  Kamschatka,  and  of  which  I 
shall  speak  in  the  description  of  the  Japanese  possessions  in  the 
Kurile  Islands.  There  is  no  kind  of  sea-animal,  except  those 
which  are  poisonous,  that  the  Japanese  do  not  make  use  of;  whales, 
sea-lions,  all  kinds  of  seals,  sea-hogs,  sea-bears,  furnish  them  with 
palatable  food.  Hence,  there  is,  in  all  the  Japanese  possessions, 
no  coast  where  there  are  not  fisheries,  which  employ  a  number  of 
people.  They  catch  fish  on  the  coast  in  great  nets,  in  the  seas 
with  lines.  The  Japanese  do  not,  like  the  Europeans,  venture  to 
kill  whales  in  the  open  sea,  but  catch  them  in  creeks,  and  close  to 
the  coast,  in  very  strong  nets.  The  dead  sea-animals  which  the 
waves  have  cast  on  shore  serve  them  for  food ;  nay,  even  people 
of  the  highest  class  think  such  carrion  a  great  delicacy. 

The  Japanese  radish  is,  in  the  form  and  taste,  very  different 
from  ours  ;  it  is  thin,  and  extremely  long,  even  to  two  arsheens  in 
length.  The  taste  of  it  is  not  very  bitter,  but  sweetish,  almost 
like  our  turnips.  Whole  fields  are  covered  with  it.  A  great  part 
of  the  crop  is  salted,  the  other  part  is  buried  in  the  ground  for  win 
ter,  and  boiled  in  soup.  Not  even  the  radish  leaves  remain  unused  ; 
they  are  boiled  in  soup,  or  salted,  and  eaten  as  salad.  The  fresh 
leaves  also  of  this  plant  are  warmed  by  the  fire  till  they  smoke, 
and  then  put  in  a  packet  of  tobacco.  This,  say  the  Japanese, 
hinders  the  tobacco  from  drying  up,  and  gives  it  an  agree 
able  smell  and  taste.  I  really  did  convince  myself  of  the  former, 
but  did  not  perceive  the  latter,  perhaps  because  I  am  no  great 
smoker.  They  manure  the  radish  fields  with  night-  soil ;  this  we 
ourselves  saw  at  Matsmai.  In  some  places  they  use  the  same  ma 
nure  for  rice. 

Salt,  as  I  have  before  observed,  is  a  grand  article  of  con 
sumption  in  Japan.  The  Japanese  told  us  that  they  had  rock-salt, 
but  only  in  small  quantities  ;  and  as  it  is,  besides,  brought  from  the 
interior  of  the  kingdom,  and  not  easy  of  conveyance,  very  little  of 
it  is  used.  In  general,  they  use  sea-salt  in  almost  all  parts  of  the 
kingdom  ;  the  preparation  of  which  is  facilitated  by  the  extraor- 


142  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

dinary  sa,ltness  of  the  sea-water  near  the  tropics,  and  by  the  evapo 
ration  produced  by  the  heat.  The  Japanese  have,  therefore,  large 
pits  on  the  coast,  into  which  they  let  the  sea-water,  when  the  tide 
is  up  ;  the  evaporation  leaves  a  thick  sediment,  from  which  they 
boil  their  salt. 

According  to  the  description  of  the  Japanese,  their  cotton  must 
be  of  the  same  kind  as  I  have  seen  in  the  English  colonies  in  the 
West  Indies  ;  that  is,  it  grows  on  small  trees,  about  the  height  of 
a  man.  They  have,  however,  other  kinds  of  cotton,  but  I  was  not 
able  sufficiently  to  understand  their  descriptions.  The  country 
must  produce  an  immense  quantity,  as  almost  all  the  inhabitants  are 
clothed  in  it.  The  wadding  which  they  make  of  it  serves  them  in 
stead  of  furs.  They  also  line  their  mattresses,  and  their  morning- 
gowns,  which  latter  serve  them  as  quilts.  Of  cotton  they  likewise 
make  a  kind  of  writing-paper.  It  is  made  also  into  wicks,  of  which 
an  immense  quantity  must  be  used,  as  the  Japanese  always  keep  a 
light  during  the  night.  Rich  people  burn  candles,  as  I  have  said 
before,  and  the  poor,  fish-oil.  When  foreign  vessels  enter  their 
ports,  or  an  officer  of  distinction  arrives,  the  Japanese  hang  the 
whole  town  with  cotton-stuff.  In  a  word,  there  is  perhaps  no  other 
country  in  which  so  great  a  quantity  of  cotton  is  used  as  in  Japan  ; 
for  this  reason,  great  care  is  taken  to  extend  the  cultivation  of  it. 
As  an  instance  of  the  industry  and  activity  of  this  original  people, 
it  may  be  mentioned  that  they  import  from  the  Kurile  Islands, 
into  the  interior  of  Japan,  herrings  spoiled  by  keeping,  to  serve  as 
manure  for  the  cotton  plants.  They  first  boil  the  herrings  in  large 
iron  kettles ;  then  put  them  in  presses,  and  let  all  the  liquid  flow 
into  the  same  kettles,  from  which  they  take  the  oil  for  their  lamps. 
What  remains  of  the  herrings  is  spread  upon  mats,  and  laid  in  the 
sun  to  dry,  till  they  corrupt,  and  are  almost  converted  into  ashes. 
They  are  then  filled  into  sacks,  and  put  on  board  the  boats.  The 
earth  round  each  cotton-plant  is  manured  with  them,  which  causes 
the  crop  to  be  extremely  abundant. 

Japan  is  also  very  rich  in  silk.  We  had  the  proofs  before  our 
eyes.  Matsmai  is  reckoned  to  be  one  of  the  very  poorest  towns  ; 
yet  we  constantly  saw  people  of  all  ranks,  especially  women,  in  silk 
dresses.  On  festivals,  even  the  common  soldiers  wore  costly  silk 
dresses.  If  we  consider  the  great  population  of  the  Japanese  em 
pire,  the  quantity  of  silk  must  be  very  great,  even  if  only  rich 
people  dressed  themselves  in  it.  It  was  not,  indeed,  difficult  for 
the  Japanese  to  cultivate  this  production  to  a  great  extent,  as  it 
requires  only  a  good  climate  and  industry  ;  the  former  is  favor- 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  143 

able,  and  the  latter  is  possessed  by  the  Japanese  in  a  very  high 
decree. 

Copper  is  also  produced  in  Japan  in  great  abundance.  The  in 
habitants  cover  with  it  the  roofs  of  some  of  their  houses,  the  fore 
part  of  their  ships,  and  the  joints  in  the  houses.  They  manufac 
ture  of  this  metal  their  kitchen  utensils,  tobacco-pipes,  fire-shovels, 
&c.  Before  we  were  lodged  in  the  house,  and  still  lived  in  the 
prison,  our  furniture  corresponded  with  the  place  of  our  abode,  but 
the  hearth  was  covered  with  copper,  and  the  fire-shovel  was  of  the 
same  metal ;  this  shows  that  the  Japanese  do  not  set  any  great 
value  upon  it.  The  tea-kettles  alone  must  cause  an  immense  con 
sumption  of  copper  in  this  empire  ;  for  all  the  Japanese,  as  I  have 
said  above,  drink,  when  they  are  thirsty,  something  warm,  whether 
it  be  tea  or  water.  In  every  house,  therefore,  the  tea-kettle  stands 
constantly  on  the  fire,  which  must  finally  spoil  it.  The  Japanese 
copper  utensils  are,  however,  of  very  good  workmanship  ;  we  often 
wondered  at  the  durability  of  the  tea-kettles  which  we  made  use 
of,  for  they  stood  over  the  fire  for  months  together,  without  burn 
ing  through.  It  is  well  known  that  the  Dutch,  in  their  trade  with 
Japan,  derived  their  greatest  advantage  from  the  exportation  of  the 
Japanese  copper,  because  it  always  contains  a  large  portion  of  gold, 
which  the  Japanese  wanted  skill,  or  inclination,  to  extract  from 
it.  But  they  are  now  become  wiser,  and  give  the  Dutch  only  pure 
copper. 

With  respect  to  iron,  the  Japanese  do  not  possess  that  metal  in 
such  abundance  as  copper,  but  they  have  sufficient  to  supply  their 
absolute  wants  ;  and  if  the  government  exchanged  with  the  Dutch, 
copper  for  iron,  this  was  not  of  necessity,  but  because  iron  is  for 
many  purposes  preferable  to  copper.  As  the  Japanese  have  a  sur 
plus  of  the  latter,  both  they  and  the  Dutch  profited  by  this  ex 
change.  They  often  told  us,  that  the  trade  with  the  Dutch  did 
not  produce  them  the  least  advantage — only  some  medicines  and 
political  news,  which  the  Dutch  bring  them  from  Europe,  being  of 
importance  to  them.  If  the  Japanese  had  not  iron  sufficient  for 
their  absolute  wants,  they  would  certainly  set  more  value  on  Vnu 
trade  with  the  Dutch. 

Timber. — The  greater  part  of  the  Japanese  provinces  are  with 
out  wood.  The  extraordinary  population  of  the  kingdom  renders 
it  necessary  to  cultivate  every  spot  of  ground,  and  therefore  only 
the  mountains,  which  cannot  be  cultivated,  are  covered  with  woods. 
The  principality  of  Nambu,  which  lies  on  the  north-east  part  of  the 
Island  of  Niphon,  being  very  mountainous,  is  rich  in  timber,  with 


144  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

which  it  supplies  all  Japan,  in  exchange  for  provisions,  of  which  it 
does  not  produce  sufficient  for  the  support  of  its  inhabitants.  On 
the  mountains  of  the  Islands  of  Maternal,  Kunashier,  Eetooroop, 
and  Sagaleen,  there  are  forests  of  all  kinds  of  trees,  which  the  Ja 
panese  also  make  use  of.  We  saw  there  numbers  of  very  fine 
beams  ready  to  be  exported.  Notwithstanding  this,  the  Japanese 
draw  but  little  timber  from  these  islands,  because  it  is  so  difficult 
to  convey  it  from  the  interior  to  the  coasts,  and  they  have  not  yet 
felt  the  necessity  of  surmounting  these  obstacles.  If  this  should 
happen,  the  Japanese  will  soon  open  a  road  to  mountains  which 
other  nations  would  consider  as  inaccessible.  I  doubt  whether 
anything  would  be  impossible  for  the  zeal,  activity  and  patience  of 
this  people. 

The  Japanese  wished  to  know  the  Russian  name  for  some 
species  of  wood,  and  brought  to  us  pieces  and  branches  of  wood, 
asking  how  they  were  all  called  in  Russia.  We  made  use  of  this 
opportunity,  and  asked  where  these  trees  grew.  By  this  means 
we  learned  that  several  kinds  of  oaks,  palms,  (of  which  the  Ja 
panese  make  very  good  combs),  bamboo,  cypresses,  cedars,  yews, 
firs,  and  other  kinds  of  trees,  the  names  of  which  are  unknown  to 
us,  grow  in  these  islands. 

I  have  before  mentioned  that  habit  has  rendered  tea  one  of  the 
first  necessaries  of  life  among  the  Japanese.  Japan  produces  both 
green  and  black  tea.  The  first  is  considered  as  the  best,  and,  in 
fact,  is  so.  The  Japanese  even  prefer  it  to  the  Chinese  green  tea  ; 
but,  according  to  our  taste,  it  does  not  merit  this  preference.  With 
respect  to  the  black  tea,  it  is  very  bad,  and  the  Japanese  drink  it 
merely  to  quench  their  thirst,  whereas  they  look  upon  the  green 
tea  as  a  delicacy,  and  treat  their  company  with  it.  The  Japanese 
officers,  and  also  the  governor,  often  sent  us  green  tea  as  a  present ; 
but  then  the  interpreters  and  the  guards  assisted,  with  a  good  ap 
petite,  in  emptying  the  tea-kettle.  Tea  grows  in  all  the  southern 
provinces  of  Japan  ;  the  best  green  is  produced  in  the  principality 
of  Kioto,  in  which  Kio,  the  city  or  residence  of  the  spiritual  em 
peror,  is  situated.  In  this  province  tea  is .  cultivated  with  great 
care,  both  for  his  court  and  that  of  the  temporal  emperor. 

Tobacco  is  an  article  which  is  equally  indispensable  to  the  Ja 
panese.  The  Catholic  missionaries  were  the  first  who  introduced 
this  plant,  and  taught  them  its  use.  From  them,  too,  the  Japanese 
received  its  name,  and  still  call  it  tabaco  or  tabago.  It  is  astonish 
ing  how  the  use  of  this  worthless  herb  should  have  spread,  in  so 
short  a  time,  over  the  whole  earth,  as  it  is  entirely  without  taste, 


JA.PAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  145 

without  any  agreeable  smell,  without  use  to  the  health,  and  a  mere 
amusement  for  idle  people  !  Our  interpreter,  Teske,  one  of  the 
most  sensible  of  our  Japanese  acquaintance,  was  himself  a  great 
smoker,  but  often  said  that  the  Christian  priests  had  not  done  the 
Japanese  so  much  injury  by  the  introduction  of  their  faith,  which 
only  produced  among  them  internal  commotions  and  civil  wars,  as 
by  the  introduction  of  tobacco  ;  for  the  former  was  only  a  transi 
tory,  long-forgotten  evil,  but  the  latter  diverted,  and  probably 
would  do  for  centuries  to  come,  large  tracts  of  land  and  a  number 
of  hands  from  the  production  of  useful  and  necessary  articles, 
•which  are  now  dear,  but  might  otherwise  be  cheaper.  Besides,  the 
workmen  could  not  then  so  often  interrupt  their  labor,  but  now 
they  were  continually  resting  themselves  in  order  to  smoke  their 
pipes. 

I  do  not  know  how  many  species  of  this  plant  there  are  in 
nature,  nor  how  many  of  them  the  Japanese  have ;  but  I  saw 
various  kinds  of  prepared  tobacco  among  them,  from  the  most 
pleasant  to  the  most  disgusting.  They  cut  both  the  good  and  the 
bad  tobacco  very  small,  as  the  Chinese  do.  In  the  manufacture  of 
the  better  sort,  they  use  sagi  to  moisten  it,  and  sell  it  in  papers 
which  weigh  about  a  Russian  pound.  The  Japanese  consider  the 
tobacco  from  Sasma  as  the  best,  then  that  from  Nangasaki,  Sin- 
day,  &c.  The  worst  comes  from  the  province  of  Tzyngaru  ;  it  is 
strong,  of  a  black  color,  and  has  a  disgusting  taste  and  smell.  The 
tobacco  from  Sasma  is,  indeed,  also  strong,  but  it  has  an  agreeable 
taste  and  smell,  and  is  of  a  bright  yellow  color.  The  tobacco  from 
Nangasaki  is  very  weak,  in  taste  and  smell  perhaps  the  best,  and 
of  a  bright  brown  color.  The  tobacco  from  Sinday  is  very  good, 
and  was  always  given  us  to  smoke.  The  Japanese  manufacture 
tobacco  so  well,  that  though  I  was  before  no  friend  to  smoking, 
and  even  when  I  was  at  Jamaica,  could  but  seldom  persuade  myself 
to  smoke  a  Havana  segar,  yet  I  smoked  the  Japanese  tobacco  very 
frequently,  and  with  great  pleasure.  SnufF  is  not  used  in  Japan. 
But  enough  of  this  plant.  I  could,  indeed,  for  the  pleasure  of 
gentlemen  who  like  smoking,  write  some  sheets  more  on  the  article 
of  tobacco;  for  there  was  nothing  concerning  which  we  had  such 
frequent  opportunities  to  converse  with  the  Japanese.  The  literati, 
the  interpreters,  and  guards,  all  smoked,  and  used,  too,  different 
kinds  of  tobacco,  according  to  their  respective  taste  or  ability.  Out 
of  politeness,  they  frequently  offered  us  their  tobacco,  and  men 
tioned  its  name.  In  this  manner  a  conversation  usually  began 
upon  tobacco,  which  often  lasted  for  hours  together.  We  often 


146  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

had  no  opportunity  to  speak  of  other  more  important  things,  and, 
besides,  the  Japanese  did  not  all  like  to  converse  upon  them. 

The  Japanese  horses  are  small  and  weak.  They  resemble,  in 
size,  our  farmers'  horses,  but  are  much  thinner,  better  shaped,  and 
also  more  spirited,  as  the  Japanese  do  not  castrate  them,  but  always 
ride  on  stallions.  The  climate  permits  the  horses,  as  well  as  the 
horned  cattle,  always  to  eat  grass.  It  is  only  on  journeys,  or  after 
some  hard  labor,  that  a  little  barley  is  given  them.  But  in  Mats- 
mai  and  Sagaleen,  where  a  great  deal  of  snow  falls  in  the  winter, 
the  inhabitants  are  obliged  to  lay  up  a  provision  of  hay.  Among 
all  the  Japanese  horses  that  we  saw,  we  did  not  observe  a  single 
white  one,  but  mostly  dark  brown.  We,  therefore,  asked  the 
Japanese  if  there  were  no  white  horses  in  their  principal  island, 
and  were  answered  that  they  were  very  rarely  met  with.  They 
have  also  large  horses  in  Japan,  but  the  number  of  them  is  very 
small.  The  Japanese  never  shoe  their  horses,  for  they  have  no  occa 
sion  to  drive  over  ice,  and  have  no  pavement.  If  they  travel  dur 
ing  the  rainy  season  in  mountainous  places,  where  it  is  slippery,  they 
use  low  pieces  of  wood,  of  the  size  and  shape  of  an  ox's  or  liorse's 
hoof.  These  pieces  of  wood  are  laid  on  the  very  thick  skin  of  sea- 
lions,  or  other  marine  animals,  and  then  iron  nails  are  driven 
through  the  skin,  with  large  sharp  heads,  which  serve  instead  of 
shoes,  when  the  skin  is  bound  under  the  horse's  feet. 

The  horned  cattle  are  small  and  poor,  for  the  Japanese  do  not 
give  themselves  much  trouble  about  feeding  them,  as  they  use 
neither  meat  nor  milk. 

Hemp  grows  in  the  northern  provinces  of  Japan.  We  saw 
some  in  Matsmai.  I  have  already  mentioned  for  what  purposes 
the  Japanese  employ  it. 

The  tree  called  kadzy  grows  in  great  abundance,  and  is  of  the 
most  important  use  to  the  inhabitants.  The  Japanese  explained 
to  us  what  kind  of  a  tree  it  is,  but  I  never  understood  them  suffi 
ciently  to  describe  it. 

The  Japanese  possess,  in  several  parts  of  the  empire,  consider 
able  gold  and  silver  mines.  The  government,  however,  does  not 
permit  them  all  to  be  worked,  that  the  value  of  these  metals  may 
not  be  depreciated.  The  Japanese  use  gold  and  silver  for  various 
purposes  besides  coin.  Their  temples  are  ornamented  with  these 
metals  ;  people  of  distinction  wear  sabres,  with  gold  or  silver  hilts 
and  scabbards ;  rich  people  have  gold  and  silver  pipes ;  many 
lacquered  articles,  such  as  table  utensils,  boxes,  screens,  &c.,  are 
ornamented  with  gold  and  silver  ;  there  is  a  kind  of  gold  and  silver 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  147 

stuffs ;  nay,  we  were  told  that  in  the  principal  cities  there  are 
numerous  public  buildings  with  gilded  roofs.  In  the  houses  of  the 
princes  and  great  people,  there  are  many  ornaments  of  these 
metals,  and  the  ladies  frequently  wear  gold  and  silver  trinkets. 

Japan  has  sufficient  lead,  tin,  quicksilver,  and  sulphur,  for  the 
supply  of  its  wants.  They  cast  not  only  musket  bullets,  but  even 
cannon  balls  of  tin,  because  they  have  had  no  wars  for  these  two 
hundred  years.  If  it  was  with  them  as  in  Europe,  this  luxury  would 
soon  cease.  As  for  sulphur,  they  have  an  island  which  is  entirely 
covered  with  it,  and  which,  on  account  of  the  hot  springs,  is 
covered  with  a  constant  vapor.  This  island  is  one  of  the  seven 
wonders  of  the  Japanese  empire,  all  of  which  they  named  to  us. 

Having  thus  spoken  of  those  productions  of  Japan  which  supply 
the  chief  wants  of  this  enlightened  people,  I  proceed  to  those  which 
administer  rather  to  fashion  or  luxury,  or  are,  at  least,  less  neces 
sary.  They  are  the  following  : — 

Diamonds  and  pearls,  marble  and  other  kinds  of  stone,  the  cam 
phor-tree,  the  varnish-tree,  fruit  trees,  garden  plants,  various  wild 
plants,  domestic  and  wild  animals,  which  are  used  by  the  Japanese. 

Japan  produces  precious  stones,  but  of  what  kinds  we  were 
not  able  to  learn.  The  officers  who  had  seen  the  snuff-box  and 
other  things,  which  the  Japanese  Kodai  had  received  from  the  late 
Empress  Catherine  II.,  and  had  brought  with  him  to  Japan,  said 
that  there  were  such  stones  in  Japan  as  those  things  were  orna 
mented  with,  but  that  the  Japanese  artists  did  not  understand  how 
to  give  them  so  beautiful  a  polish. 

Japan  is  rich  in  pearls,  but  we  did  not  see  any  remarkably 
large. 

There  are  various  kinds  of  marble  in  Japan.  They  showed  us 
various  articles  made  of  white  marble,  with  small  blue  veins,  and 
of  another  kind  of  marble  like  that  which  Isaac's  church,  at  St. 
Petersburg,  is  built.  They  also  showed  us  seals,  made  of  corne 
lian,  agate,  jasper  and  other  stones,  with  which  I  am  unacquainted. 
On  the  coasts  of  the  principalities  of  Nambu  and  Tzyngaru,  there 
are  found  stones  of  different  colors,  and  of  the  size  of  a  nut,  which 
are  so  washed  by  the  waves  that  they  seem  almost  transparent,  like 
crystal.  The  Japanese  gave  me  twelve  red  and  twelve  white 
stones  of  this  kind  to  use  at  drafts,  but  the  sailor,  whom  I  ordered 
to  take  them  with  him,  lost  them. 

Many  Japanese  carry  perfumes  about  them ;  among  which  is 
camphor.  They  told  us  that  in  the  southern  part  of  Japan,  the 
tree  which  produces  it  grows  in  such  abundance,  that  notwithstand- 


148  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

ing  the  great  consumption  of  it  in  the  country,  large  quantities  are 
exported  by  the  Dutch  and  Chinese.  There  is  also  an  imitation 
of  camphor  in  Japan,  but  everybody  can  distinguish  it  from  the 
genuine. 

The  Japanese  varnish  is  celebrated  even  in  Europe.  The  tree 
which  produces  this  juice  grows  in  such  abundance  that  the 
Japanese  lacquer  all  their  table  utensils,  boxes,  saddles,  bows, 
arrows,  spears,  sheaths,  cartouch-boxes,  tobacco-boxes ;  in  their 
houses,  the  walls  and  screens,  and,  in  short,  every  trifle  that  they 
wish  to  ornament.  We  had  the  pleasure  to  see  a  masterpiece  in 
varnishing  : — It  was  a  bottle-case  belonging  to  the  governor,  who 
sent  it  for  us  to  look  at.  The  polish  on  it  was  so  beautiful  that  we 
could  see  our  faces  in  it  as  in  a  mirror.  The  natural  color  of  this 
juice  is  white,  but  it  assumes  any  color  by  being  mixed  with  it. 
The  best  varnish  in  Japan  is  usually  black  or  red,  and  almost 
everything  is  so  varnished ;  but  we  saw  also,  green,  yellow,  blue, 
and  other  varnish.  In  varnishing  they  also  imitate  marble.  The 
juice,  when  fresh,  is  poisonous,  and  very  injurious  to  those  who 
collect  it,  for  which  reason  they  employ  various  precautions ;  but 
after  it  has  stood  for  some  time  in  the  open  air,  it  loses  its  posion- 
ous  quality.  The  varnished  utensils  may  be  used  without  danger. 
The  Japanese  are  so  clever  in  varnishing,  that  you  may  pour  hot 
water  into  a  vessel  and  drink  it,  without  perceiving  the  slightest 
smell  of  the  paint.  This,  however,  is  true  only  with  respect  to 
vessels  of  the  best  workmanship  ;  in  others  you  smell  the  paint, 
even  if  warm  water  is  poured  into  them. 

The  Japanese  have  no  want  of  fruit  trees.  They  have  oranges, 
lemons,  peaches,  apricots,  plums,  figs,  cherries,  pears,  apples, 
chesnuts,  &c.  It  is  strange,  that,  with  a  climate  like  that  of  Japan, 
no  grapes  should  flourish  there.  The  Japanese  have  only  small 
wild  grapes,  which  are  very  sour,  and  are  salted  and  eaten  as  salad. 
The  reason,  perhaps,  is  that  they  grow  in  the  woods,  under  the 
shade  of  the  trees,  and  that  the  Japanese  do  not  understand  the 
culture  of  the  vine. 

Next  to  rice  and  fish,  vegetables  are  the  favorite  food  of  the 
Japanese.  They  have  melons,  water-melons,  gourds,  cucumbers, 
turnips,  carrots,  mustard,  &c.  We  could  not  learn  whether  they 
had  any  cabbages.  We  frequently  explained  to  them  what  kind 
of  a  plant  it  was,  and  even  made  them  a  drawing  of  one,  but  they 
always  said  that  they  had  nothing  like  it  growing  in  Japan.  Ex 
cept  melons  and  water-melons,  the  Japanese  eat  no  vegetables 
raw,  and  wore  much  surprised  when  they  saw  us  cat  raw  cucum- 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  149 

bers  with  salt  and  vinegar.  They  mix  their  mustard  with  vinegar, 
and  eat  it  with  fish. 

They  have  also  large  quantities  of  red  or  cayenne  pepper,  and 
poppies.  They  eat  the  pepper  raw,  with  various  dishes,  or  boil  it 
in  sugar,  and  use  it  as  a  preserve.  They  mix  the  poppy  with 
sugar  or  treacle,  and  eat  it  with  a  paste  made  of  pounded  rice. 
They  use  poppy-oil  to  fry  fish  in,  and  in  the  dressing  of  various 
dishes. 

Among  the  vegetable  productions  used  by  the  Japanese  for 
food,  are  sugar-cane,  black  and  red  currants,  bird  cherry,  (Prunus 
Padus,  Linn.),  various  herbs,  fungi,  sea-cabbage,  and  the  berries 
of  wild  roses,  or  hips,  which  grow  in  abundance  in  the  northern 
provinces  of  Japan.  The  Japanese  use  the  latter  as  a  medicine 
against  wind,  and  eat  them  raw. 

The  sugar-cane  is  rare  in  Japan,  jmd  the  sugar  which  it  yields 
is  black,  and  not  very  sweet ;  the  want  of  land,  which  serves  for 
the  cultivation  of  more  necessary  plants,  probably  hinders  the 
Japanese  from  cultivating  this  cane,  which  is  merely  an  article  of 
luxury. 

The  Japanese  salt  the  currants  and  bird-cherries,  and  eat  them 
instead  of  salad.  Of  the  herbs  poor  people  make  soup,  and  also 
eat  them  salted.  Pickled  mushrooms  are  considered  as  a  great 
delicacy  ;  they  are  boiled  in  soups,  salted,  or  laid  in  vinegar. 

With  respect  to  the  sea-cabbage,  this  plant,  which  is  disregarded 
almost  everywhere  else,  not  only  gives  food  to  millions  of  people  in 
Japan,  but  it  is  also  an  article  of  commerce.  The  Japanese  dry 
it,  and  then  use  it  in  soup,  or  wrapping  it  round  fish,  boil  and  eat 
both  together.  Often  they  broil  it  over  the  fire,  strew  salt  on  it, 
and  eat  it  without  any  further  dressing.  This  cabbage  serves 
chiefly  poor  people  for  their  support ;  but  the  rich  frequently  eat 
them  dressed  in  a  different  manner,  and  even  the  Emperor's 
kitchen  is  furnished  with  it. 

The  domestic  animals  of  the  Japanese,  besides  horses  and  oxen, 
which  I  have  mentioned  before,  are  swine,  dogs,  and  cats.  The 
first  are  used  as  food  by  those  sects  that  are  permitted  to  eat 
meat.  The  dogs  are  employed  in  the  chase  and  to  guard  the 
houses,  and  the  cats  perform  the  same  services  as  in  Europe, 
though  a  writer  upon  Japan  says,  that  the  Japanese  cats  do  not 
catch  mice.  This  is,  however,  false  ;  were  it  not,  nature  must 
deviate  in  Japan,  from  her  own  laws.  Besides,  experience  has 
convinced  us  of  the  contrary.  A  Japanese  he-cat  that  we  had 
understood  his  business  perfectly,  and  was  not  inferior  to  any  of 


150  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

his  European  brethren.  I  must  observe,  besides,  that  he  often 
amused  us  in  prison  by  his  tricks,  and  was  our  favorite,  and,  there 
fore,  was  never  in  want  of  food ;  yet  instinct  made  him  catch  the 
rats  and  mice.  If  European  writers  have  so  often  denied  to 
Japanese  animals  the  qualities  with  which  nature  has  endowed 
them,  can  we  wonder  that  they  painted  the  Japanese  in  such  false 
colors  ? 

Chickens  and  ducks  are  the  only  domestic  fowl  that  the  Japanese 
use  (though  but  seldom)  as  food.  Though  it  is  permitted  in  some 
sects,  yet,  from  attachment  to  these  animals,  they  do  not  like  to 
kill  them.  If  one  of  us  was  ill,  and  the  Japanese  wished  to  make 
him  some  chicken  broth,  as  they  had  heard  that  it  was  usually 
given  to  the  sick  in  Europe,  they  had  great  difficulty  in  finding 
anybody  who  would  sell  them  a  fowl,  though  they  offered  a  high 
price  for  one. 

The  Japanese  are  fond  of  eggs  ;  they  boil  them  hard,  and  eat 
them  at  the  dessert  like  fruit,  frequently  with  oranges.  For  us, 
they  boiled  them  in  soup  with  vegetables.  For  people  of  dis 
tinction,  fowls  are  kept  in  rooms,  where  they  lay  their  eggs,  and 
are  fed  with  rice.  The  great  people  would  not  eat  the  eggs  of 
fowls  that  run  about  at  their  will,  and  pick  up  what  they  can  find. 
Many  keep  also  swans,  geese,  and  turkeys,  but  merely  for  pleasure, 
as  we  do  peacocks,  which  they  also  have. 

Of  wild  quadrupeds,  the  Japanese  use  for  some  purposes  the 
following  : — Wild  boars,  bears,  deer,  hares,  and  wild  goats.  Those 
sects  which  are  allowed  to  eat  meat,  use  them  for  food  ;  and  in 
the  northern  parts  of  Japan,  where  the  winters  are  very  cold,  the 
poor  people  use  bear-skins  as  quilts.  The  rich  have  traveling-bags 
or  cases,  made  of  these  skins,  to  put  over  things  which  they  desire 
to  protect  against  bad  weather,  such  as  trunks  with  clothes,  bottle- 
cases,  and  the  like. 

The  gall  of  the  bear  is  made  by  them  into  a  solid  mass,  and 
used  as  a  strengthening  medicine  for  weakness  in  the  stomach  and 
other  disorders.  It  is  highly  valued  by  the  Japanese  for  its  medi 
cinal  virtue,  and  paid  for  at  a  high  price.  They  affirm  that  the 
gall  of  those  bears  which  are  killed  in  the  island  of  Niphon  is  far 
more  efficacious  than  that  of  the  bears  of  Matsmai,  which  latter  are 
therefore  less  esteemed.  The  hunters  often  practice  great  frauds 
in  the  sale  of  the  bear's  gall.  When  they  are  on  the  chase  they 
kill  all  the  animals  that  come  in  their  way,  and  take  out  the  gall. 
If  they  have  the  good  fortune  to  kill  a  bear,  they  carry  him  home 
as  publicly  as  possible,  in  order  to  attract  attention ;  and  as  the 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  151 

Japanese  miss  no  opportunity  of  purchasing  the  valuable  medicine, 
all  who  meet  the  hunters  ask  if  they  have  already  sold  the  bear's 
gall  ?  The  huntsman  then  gives  them  the  gall  of  some  other 
animal,  and  if  the  purchaser  is  not  a  judge,  he  is  defrauded.  In 
this  manner  they  will  sell  the  gall  of  a  bear  many  times  over. 
Many  of  the  Japanese,  however,  are  able  to  distinguish  by  the 
taste,  not  only  the  gall  of  any  animal  from  that  of  a  bear,  but  even 
the  gall  of  the  bear  of  Niphon  from  that  of  those  of  Matsmai. 
Our  interpreter,  Kumaddschero,  was  such  a  judge.  The  method 
of  using  this  remedy  is  very  simple — they  bite  off  little  pieces  and 
swallow  them. 

Of  deer-skins  the  Japanese  manufacture  a  kind  of  thick  anl 
fine  chamois  leather. 

Of  useful  insects  the  Japanese  have  silk-worms  and  bees.  The 
honey  which  the  latter  produce  is  employed  only  in  medicine,  and 
the  wax  used  only  by  apothecaries  for  plasters. 

In  the  third  and  last  division  of  the  productions  of  Japan,  I 
reckon  those  from  which  the  inhabitants  derive  little  or  no  advan 
tage  ;  among  them  I  may  mention  coals,  which  are  in  abundance 
in  Japan,  but  not  used. 

Raspberries,  wild  and  garden  strawberries,  which  we  esteem  so 
highly  in  Europe,  are  not  eaten  by  the  Japanese.  They  consider 
them  as  unwholesome.  These  fruits,  however,  are  really  not  at  all 
pleasant  in  Japan  ;  they  are,  indeed,  as  large  as  ours,  and  of  a 
dark  red  color,  but  they  are  not  sweet,  are  very  watery,  and  almost 
without  smell.  In  general  the  Japanese  eat  no  berries  that  grow 
on  herbs. 

The  following  wild  quadrupeds  are  found  in  Japan  : — Bears, 
panthers,  leopards,  wolves,  wild  dogs,  and  foxes.  Many  super 
stitious  Japanese  ascribe  to  the  last  the  power  of  the  devil.  In 
the  southern  and  middle  provinces  of  the  empire  there  are  monkeys 
of  a  small  race  ;  in  the  Island  of  Matsmai,  sables,  but  their  fur  is 
reddish,  and,  therefore,  does  not  bear  a  high  price.  Elephants, 
tigers,  lions,  camels,  apes,  greyhounds,  pointers,  setting-dogs,  and 
other  species  of  dogs  are  known  to  the  Japanese  only  from  drawings. 

There  are  numerous  kinds  of  birds  of  prey  in  Japan,  such  as 
eagles,  falcons,  hawks,  kites,  &c.  Of  wild  fowl,  the  sects  that  may 
eat  meat  use  geese  and  ducks  for  food.  Swans  and  cranes  are 
held  sacred,  and  nobody  dares  to  kill  them.  Of  singing  birds,  such 
as  we  also  have,  we  saw  in  cages,  starlings,  bullfinches,  and  green 
finches,  but  no  others.  The  Japanese  are  fond  of  singing-birds  in 
their  houses,  and  there  are  shops  that  deal  in  them. 


152  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

More  common  birds,  such  as  cuckoos,  ravens,  crows,  sparrows, 
&c.,  are  as  numerous  in  the  north  of  Japan  and  Maternal  as  with 
us.  Parrots  and  canary  birds  are  not  met  with  in  Japan.  On 
the  coasts  there  is  abundance  of  sea-fowl,  such  as  albatrosses,  cor 
morants,  various  species  of  gulls,  Greenland  pigeons,  &c. 

This  is  all  that  I  am  able  to  say  of  the  natural  productions  of 
Japan. 

In  speaking  of  the  manufactures  of  this  empire,  those  of  silk, 
steel,  porcelain,  and  lacquered  goods,  must  have  the  first  place. 

The  silk  manufactories  are  important,  not  only  on  account  of  the 
quantity  but  also  of  the  good  quality  of  the  articles  which  they 
furnish.  The  Japanese  make  several  kinds  of  stuffs  and  costly  ar 
ticles,  which  are  not  at  all  inferior  to  those  of  China. 

With  respect  to  steel  manufactures,  the  Japanese  sabres  and 
daggers  surpass  all  others  in  the  world,  those  of  Damascus,  per 
haps,  excepted.  They  bear  extraordinary  trials.  The  Japanese 
are  extremely  skillful  in  polishing  steel,  and  all  other  metals.  They 
make  metal  mirrors,  which  are  scarcely  inferior  to  looking-glasses. 
We  often  saw  carpenters'  and  cabinetmakers'  tools,  made  in  Japan, 
which  might  almost  be  compared  with  the  English.  Their  saws 
are  so  good  that  the  thinnest  boards  may  be  sawn  out  of  the  hardest 
wood. 

That  the  Japanese  lacquered  goods  surpass  those  of  other  nations 
is  notorious. 

The  Japanese  porcelain  is  far  superior  to  the  Chinese ;  but  it  is 
dearer,  and  manufactured  in  such  small  quantities,  that  it  is  insuffi 
cient  for  the  consumption  of  Japan  itself,  so  that  a  great  deal  of 
porcelain  is  imported  from  China.  The  Japanese  have  also  a 
more  ordinary  porcelain  and  earthen-ware,  but  they  are  both  coarse 
and  clumsy.  It  is  only  on  the  best  porcelain  that  they  employ 
much  time  and  labor. 

The  cotton  manufactories  must  be  extremely  numerous,  from  the 
universal  use  of  cotton-stuffs ;  but  the  Japanese  want  either  skill 
or  inclination  to  manufacture  good  articles  out  of  cotton.  At 
least,  we  never  saw  anything  particular  of  this  kind.  When  they 
saw  our  East  India  pocket-handkerchiefs  and  muslin  neck-cloths, 
they  would  not  believe  that  they  were  made  of  cotton. 

In  the  working  of  metals  the  Japanese  are  extremely  skillful, 
particularly  in  the  manufacture  of  copper  utensils. 

The  Japanese  understand  the  art  of  casting  metal  statues  ;  they 
also  carve  them  in  stone  and  wood ;  but,  to  judge  by  the  idols 
which  we  saw  in  the  temples  at  Maternal,  these  arts  are  very  im- 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  153 

perfect  among  them.  In  these,  as  well  as  in  painting,  engraving, 
and  printing,  they  are  far  behind  even  those  Europeans  among 
whom  these  arts  are  still  in  their  infancy.  In  carving,  they  are 
tolerably  skilled  ;  and  their  gold,  silver,  and  copper  coins  are  well 
executed.  They  follow  various  trades  with  success.  They  have 
great  distilleries,  in  which  they  distill,  from  rice,  their  brandy,  called 
sotsr,hio,  and  their  wine,  sagi  ;  also  tobacco  manufactories,  iron 
works,  &c.  Thousands  are  employed  in  the  manufacture  of  straw 
shoes,  hats,  and  mats.  The  manufactories  are  spread  over  the 
whole  kingdom,  but  the  principal  are  in  the  cities  of  Kio,  Yeddo, 
and  Osaga. 

The  Japanese  pursue,  with  equal  diligence,  various  other  species 
of  employment,  particularly  the  fishery.  They  catch  animals  of 
various  kinds  in  traps,  but  they  shoot  still  more  ;  they  use  dogs 
merely  to  trace  them.  They  take  birds  in  nets,  as  well  as  by 
shooting  them.  A  particular  method  is  employed  to  catch  small 
birds  ;  they  make  of  tar,  or  the  sap  of  a  tree,  a  thick  and  clammy 
paste,  with  which  they  smear  the  trunks  of  fallen  trees,  and  strew 
rice  around.  The  rice  tempts  the  birds,  which  stick  to  the  trees 
and  are  caught  in  flocks. 

Before  I  finish  my  account  of  the  industry  of  the  Japanese,  I 
must  observe  that  there  are  among  them,  as  among  all  nations,  idle 
people,  who  ramble  about  the  streets  and  public  houses,  and  seek 
their  living  by  juggler's  tricks  and  begging.  The  following  method 
by  which  idle  people,  especially  women,  gain  money,  deserves  par 
ticular  mention: — They  catch  a  number  of  snakes,  of  different 
sizes  and  colors,  from  which  they  extract  the  sting  so  skillfully  that 
they  cannot  do  any  mischief.  Then  they  strip  themselves  quite 
naked,  cover  merely  the  parts  which  decency  teaches  even  savages 
to  conceal,  and  wind  snakes  round  their  arms,  legs,  and  their  whole 
body.  In  this  manner  they  make  themselves  a  motley  covering  of 
the  open,  hissing  serpents'  heads ;  and  in  this  dreadful  and  brilliant 
costume,  they  ramble  about  the  streets,  sing,  dance,  and  play  all 
manner  of  antics,  to  obtain  a  reward,  or  rather  charity. 

Japan  may  certainly  be  called  a  commercial  state,  if  an  exten 
sive  national  trade  alone  gives  a  claim  to  this  title.  All  the  prin 
cipalities  and  provinces  of  this  populous  empire  have  a  commercial 
intercourse  with  each  other.  The  extraordinary  diversity  of  cli 
mate  produces,  in  the  different  provinces,  a  great  variety  of  arti,^  ^ 
which  all  mutually  want.  Necessity,  the  industry  and  activity  L 
the  people  give  them  means  to  make  use  of  the  productions  of  na 
ture  and  art. ;  so  that  the  inhabitants  of  the  whole  empire  carry  on 


154  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

a  commercial  intercourse  with  each  other,  both  by  land  and  water. 
The  latter  is  the  most  common.  The  sea  along  the  coasts,  and 
the  navigable  rivers,  are  covered  with  thousands  of  vessels,  which 
convey  goods  to  all  parts  of  the  empire. 

Though  their  navigation  is  wholly  confined  to  the  coasts,  and 
their  vessels  quite  unfit  for  long  voyages,  particularly  in  great  seas ; 
they,  however,  are  well  adapted  to  their  purposes.  Many  of  them 
are  above  100  feet  long,  and  uncommonly  broad.  The  largest  Ja 
panese  ships  can  carry  a  burthen  of  from  16,000  to  20,000  poods. 

The  Japanese  have  many  useful  regulations  and  institutions  for 
the  safety  of  navigation  ;  such  as  pilots  in  every  port,  to  conduct 
the  ships  in  and  out,  and  to  foretell  the  weather,  according  to  cer 
tain  signs,  in  order  to  advise  the  captains  either  to  sail,  or  to  wait. 
In  dangerous  places,  people  are  employed  to  keep  up  fires.  Upon 
eminences,  marks  are  set  up  for  the  direction  of  mariners,  &c. 
For  the  conveyance  of  goods  by  land,  where  it  cannot  be  made  by 
water,  good  roads  and  bridges  are  constructed.  Matsmai  is  merely 
a  Japanese  colony ;  yet,  notwithstanding  the  high  mountains  and 
precipices,  the  rapid  torrents,  and  the  rudeness  of  the  climate,  the 
roads  are  in  an  admirably  good  condition.  In  the  open  country, 
far  from  the  towns,  we  saw  bridges,  such  as  I  did  not  meet  with  in 
many  European  states,  and  in  provincial  towns. 

The  commercial  spirit  of  the  Japanese  is  visible  in  all  the  towns 
and  villages.  In  almost  every  house  there  is  a  shop  for  more  or  less 
important  goods  ;  and,  as  we  see  in  England  the  magnificent  maga 
zine  of  a  jeweler  next  door  to  an  oyster-shop,  so  we  see  here  a 
rich  silk  merchant  and  a  mender  of  straw  shoes  live  and  carry  on 
their  business  close  to  each  other.  In  their  regard  to  order,  the 
Japanese  very  much  resemble  the  English  ;  they  love  cleanliness 
and  the  greatest  accuracy.  All  goods  have,  in  Japan,  as  in  Eng 
land,  little  printed  bills,  on  which  are  noted  the  price,  the  use,  and 
the  name  of  the  article,  the  name  of  the  maker,  or  manufactory, 
and  often  something  in  their  praise.  Even  tobacco,  pomatum, 
tooth-powder,  and  other  trifles,  are  wrapped  up  in  papers,  on  which 
a  notice  of  the  quality  and  the  price  is  printed.  In  packing  up 
goods,  they  observe  the  same  order  as  in  Europe.  Rice  and  other 
grain  they  pack  in  sacks  made  of  straw.  They  have  no  casks  for 
liquids,  but  keep  them,  as  sotschio,  sagi,  soja,  &c.,  in  tubs  which 
hold  three  or  four  pailfuls.  These  tubs  have  only  wooden  hoops, 
and  are  broader  above  than  below  ;  in  the  top-board  there  is  a 
small  hole,  generally  square.  The  best  kind  of  sagi  is  kept  in 
large  earthen  jars.  Stufls  of  all  kinds,  tea,  &c.,  are  packed  up 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  155 

in  chests.  Silk  goods  are  laid  in  pieces,  in  separate  chests,  which 
are  made  of  very  thin  boards,  and  have  an  inscription,  indi 
cating  the  article,  the  name  of  the  maker,  the  measure  and  the 
quality. 

In  every  port  there  is  a  bureau,  or  custom-house,  which  has  the 
superintendence  of  the  loading  and  unloading  of  goods,  takes  care 
that  nothing  is  privately  imported  or  exported,  levies  the  duty,  and 
has  also  other  functions.  The  duty  for  almost  all  goods  imported 
is  paid  by  the  merchants  into  the  coffer  of  the  Emperor,  or  of  the 
Princes,  according  as  the  port  is  in  the  dominions  of  the  Emperor 
or  of  one  of  the  Princes.  The  superintendence  of  the  ships  in  the 
port  is  confided  to  an  officer,  whose  functions  nearly  correspond 
with  those  of  our  harbor-masters.  In  Japan,  they  are  also  super 
intendents  of  the  pilots.  Before  we  were  released  from  Japan, 
we  lived  at  Chakodade,  in  the  house  of  a  harbor-master,  and  saw 
that  a  great  many  seamen  and  other  persons  came  to  him  every 
morning,  whence  we  could  conclude  that  his  post  was  not  incon 
siderable. 

For  the  advantage  of  the  merchants,  and  to  facilitate  trade,  the 
government  publishes  a  kind  of  commercial  gazette,  which  contains 
an  account  of  the  prices  of  goods  in  the  different  parts  of  the  em 
pire.  In  the  same  manner,  the  public  is  informed  by  little  billets, 
of  the  good  crop  of  rice,  and  other  productions,  in  all  the  pro 
vinces  ;  nay,  from  the  time  that  the  corn  begins  to  shoot,  till  the 
harvest,  the  people  are  informed,  from  time  to  time,  of  its  condi 
tion.  This  attention  of  the  Japanese  government  to  the  general 
and  individual  interests  of  its  subjects,  is  highly  laudable,  and  may 
serve  as  one  reason  for  us  Europeans  no  longer  to  look  upon  the 
Japanese  as  barbarians. 

In  order  to  extend  trade  over  the  whole  empire,  and  give  the 
merchants  more  resources  and  facilities,  the  Japanese  have  intro 
duced  bills  of  exchange  and  promissory  notes,  such  as  are  met  with 
in  the  European  states,  under  the  protection  of  the  laws.  In  one 
of  the  southern  principalities  of  Japan  there  are  bank  notes,  which 
circulate  as  money.  There  are  three  kinds  of  coin  in  Japan — 
gold,  silver,  and  copper.  The  latter  are  round,  with  holes  in  the 
middle,  by  which  they  are  put  upon  a  string,  and  earned,  as  in  a 
purse.  This  money  is  called  by  the  Japanese  man.  When  they 
saw  our  copecs  they  compared  them  with  this  coin,  and  found  that 
four  Japanese  mon  made  one  cnpec.  The  gold  and  silver  coins  are 
longish,  four-cornered,  and  thicker  than  an  imperial.  The  name, 
value,  date  of  the  year,  and  name  of  the  maker  are  stamped  on 


156  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

each.  As  I  had  no  opportunity  of  learning  either  the  standard 
of  the  metal,  or  the  weight,  I  cannot  compare  them  with  our  coin. 

The  greatest  trade  by  land  is  carried  on  in  the  city  of  Kio,  the 
residence  of  the  Spiritual  Emperor.  This  city  does  not  lie  on  the 
sea,  but  is  very  populous,  and  has  manufactories  of  all  kinds  ;  it  is, 
therefore,  visited  by  merchants  from  all  parts  of  the  empire,  who 
cannot  convey  their  own  goods  thither,  or  bring  away  what  they 
purchase,  except  by  land.  Of  all  the  maratime  cities,  Yeddo,  the 
residence  of  the  Temporal  Emperor,  and  the  Osaga,  the  most 
beautiful  of  all  the  cities,  120  Japanese  ri,  (or  500  wersts),  south 
west  of  Yeddo,  carry  on  the  greatest  trade.  There  are,  besides, 
in  almost  every  Principality  that  borders  on  the  sea,  considerable 
commercial  cities. 

It  is  well  known  in  Europe,  how  restricted  the  trade  with 
foreigners  is  in  Japan.  The  cause  of  it  is  probably  the  distrust  of 
the  Japanese  government  of  the  Europeans,  and  their  bad  opinion 
of  them,  for  which  it  must  be  owned  that  the  Europeans  alone  are 
to  blame.  Whether  the  Japanese  government  judges  rightly  or 
not,  I  leave  others  to  decide,  and  will  merely  observe  that  the 
people  of  Japan,  in  general,  wish  to  trade  with  foreigners,  particu 
larly  Europeans.  The  enlightened  Japanese  reason  as  follows  : — 
"  The  people  are  blind,  as  far  as  regards  the  government  of  this 
kingdom,  and  only  know  superficially  what  most  nearly  concerns 
them.  They  cannot  see  two  steps  before  them,  and,  therefore, 
might  easily  fall  down  a  precipice,  unless  they  were  guided  by  per 
sons  who  can  see.  Thus,  the  Japanese,  without  considering  the 
bad  consequences  which  might  result  from  an  intercourse  with 
foreigners,  see  only  the  personal  advantage  which  they  might  derive 
from  trading  with  them." 

Till  the  attempt  of  the  Europeans  to  introduce  the  Christian  re 
ligion  into  Japan,  that  empire  carried  on  an  extensive  commerce 
with  all  the  East.  Japanese  ships  sailed  not  only  to  China  and 
the  Indian  Islands,  but  even  to  the  continent  of  India,  which  the 
Japanese  call  Tendzigu.  But  the  Christian  religion,  or  rather  the 
Catholic  preachers  of  it,  inspired  the  people  with  such  terror,  that 
the  government,  after  the  extirpation  of  Christianity,  two  centuries 
ago,  forbade  the  Japanese,  under  pain  of  death,  to  travel  to  foreign 
countries,  and  did  not  allow  foreigners  to  come  to  Japan,  except 
with  great  precautions,  and  in  small  numbers.  Japanese  ships  can 
now  only  trade  to  Corea  and  the  Likeo  (Loo-Choo)  Islands,  be 
cause  the  inhabitants  are  considered,  in  some  measure,  as  Japanese 
subjects,  as  they  pay  tribute.  Only  Corean,  Loo-Choo,  and  Ja- 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  157 

panese  ships  are  admitted  in  Japan,  but  in  small  number.  Of  the 
Europeans  only  the  Dutch  have  a  right  to  trade  with  them,  but  on 
such  hard  terms,  that  the  Dutch,  in  Japan,  more  resemble  prisoners 
than  free  men  who  are  engaged  in  a  commercial  intercourse  with  a 
friendly  power. 

The  Chinese  supply  the  Japanese  with  rice,  porcelain,  wrought 
and  unwrought  ivory,  nankeen,  moist  sugar,  ginseng-root,  medici 
nal  herbs,  alum,  and  divers  trifles,  such  as  fans,  tobacco-pipes,  &c. 
They  receive  from  the  Japanese,  in  return,  copper,  varnish, 
lacquered  goods,  salted  and  dried  fish,  sea-cabbage,  and  some  Ja 
panese  manufactures. 

From  the  Dutch  the  Japanese  receive  sugar,  spices,  ivory,  iron, 
medicines,  saltpetre,  alum,  some  sorts  of  colors,  cloth,  glass,  and 
other  European  articles,  such  as  watches,  looking-glasses,  mathe 
matical  instruments,  &c.  They  give,  in  return,  copper,  varnish, 
rice,  and  some  of  their  manufactures,  such  as  lacquered  articles, 
porcelain,  &c.  I  heard  that  the  Dutch  carry  on  a  very  advanta 
geous  trade  with  the  Japanese  goods  in  the  Malay  and  Molucca 
Islands. 

It  is  only  the  harbor  of  Nangasaki,  in  the  south  of  Japan,  that 
is  open  to  the  Chinese,  as  well  as  to  the  Dutch  ;  all  other  ports 
are  shut  against  them.  In  the  same  manner,  one  and  the  same 
method  is  uniformly  observed  by  the  Japanese  in  their  trade,  or 
rather  barter,  with  the  Chinese  and  Dutch.  When  a  ship  enters 
the  harbor  of  Nangasaki,  after  the  usual  ceremonies  and  questions, 
the  goods  are  landed.  Then  the  imperial  officers  (for  the  foreign 
trade  is  a  monopoly  of  the  Emperor's,)  examine  the  quality  and 
quantity  of  the  goods,  consult  together,  and  fix  the  price  on  those 
goods  which  the  owners  of  the  ship  desire  to  have  in  return.  The 
latter  must  either  accede  to  the  terms  of  the  Japanese,  or  take 
back  the  goods  ;  for  all  bargaining  is  impossible.  In  this  manner, 
the  Emperor  buys  foreign  goods,  by  the  medium  of  his  commis 
sioners,  and  sells  them  wholesale  to  the  Japanese  merchants,  who 
will  sell  them  by  retail.  To  judge  by  the  high  prices  which  are 
paid  in  Japan  for  Dutch  goods,  it  must  be  supposed  either  that  the 
Dutch  are  paid  exorbitantly  dear  for  them,  or  that  the  Emperor 
and  his  merchants  fix  high  prices  on  them  ;  probably  both  are 
gainers. 


HISTORICAL  SKETCH  OF  JAPAN. 


[From  the  New  York  Sun.] 


The  recent  movement  on  the  part  of  the  executive  government 
of  the  United  States,  having  for  its  object  the  fitting  out  and  con 
templated  dispatch  of  a  naval  expedition  to  the  Japanese  islands, 
has  naturally  directed  public  opinion  to  these  islands,  and  a  his 
torical  sketch  of  the  Empire  of  Japan  will  be  considered  appro 
priate  at  the  present  time.  The  following  is  a  brief  condensation  of 
the  information  given  in  various  histories  and  other  publications : — 

JAPAN,    ITS    SITUATION,    EXTENT,    ETC. 

The  Empire  of  Japan  is  composed  of  an  extensive  cluster  of 
islands  lying  near  the  coast  of  Corea,  on  the  eastern  side  of  Asia, 
in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean,  between  31°  and  41°  of  E.  lat.  and 
129°  and  142°  E.  long.  The  principal  islands  are  named  Niphon, 
Sikoke,  Kiusiu,  Awadsi,  Sado  and  Jesso ;  besides  which  the 
Japanese  have  also  colonized  the  southern  portion  of  the  island  of 
Sagalian,  and  claim  dominion  over  the  southern  half  of  the  Kurile 
Islands.  The  largest  and  most  important  island  is  Niphon,  which 
is  upwards  of  800  miles  in  length,  but  of  irregular  form,  and  of 
various  breadths ;  the  other  islands  are  of  inconsiderable  size  and 
note.  The  whole  superficial  area  of  the  Empire  is  estimated  at 
about  260,000  square  miles. 

DISCOVERY    AND    SETTLEMENT    BY    EUROPEANS. 

Fernando  Mendez  Pirto,  a  Portuguese,  sailing  in  a  Chinese 
junk  from  Macao  to  the  Sikes  islands,  was  wrecked  on  the  Japanese 
coast  in  1542,  and  he  has  the  honor  of  being  the  first  European 
discoverer  of  Japan.  It  was  soon  after  visited  by  the  Spaniards, 
and  their  first  visit,  like  the  original  discoverer  of  the  island,  was 
owing  to  a  shipwreck.  In  the  year  1545,  the  Christian  religion 
was  introduced  by  the  Jesuit  missionaries,  and  made  rapid  pro 
gress.  Many  of  the  princes  and  persons  of  high  rank  became 
converts,  and  a  public  embassy  was  sent  from  the  Japanese  coast 
with  letters  and  valuable  presents  to  the  Roman  Pontiff. 


160  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

THE    EXTIRPATION    OF    THE    CHRISTIANS 

The  Portuguese,  who  had  settled  in  great  numbers  in  Japan, 
intoxicated  by  the  extent  of  their  commerce  and  the  success  of 
,their  religion,  became  so  obnoxious  to  the  natives  by  their  avari 
cious  and  domineering  conduct,  that  the  representatives  of  the 
heathen  priests  became  at  length  sufficiently  powerful  to  procure  a 
prohibition  from  the  Emperor  against  the  new  religion.  A  violent 
persecution  was  commenced  against  the  Christians,  of  whom  20,000 
are  said  to  have  been  put  to  death  in  the  year  1590.  Still  the 
number  of  proselytes  continued  to  increase,  and  in  1591  arid  1592 
twelve  thousand  were  converted  and  baptized.  One  of  the  Em 
perors,  with  his  whole  court  and  army,  embraced  the  Christian 
name  ;  and  had  the  Portuguese  acted  with  ordinary  prudence  and 
gentleness,  their  cause  must  have  triumphed ;  but  the  insolence  of 
some  of  their  prelates  to  some  prince  of  blood,  provoked  a  new 
persecution  in  the  year  1596,  which  was  carried  on  without  inter 
ruption  for  the  space  of  40  years,  and  ended  in  the  year  1638, 
with  the  extermination  of  the  Christians,  and  the  banishment  of 
the  Portuguese  from  the  country. 

INTERCOURSE    WITH    THE    DUTCH. 

In  1600  a  squadron  of  five  ships,  which  sailed  from  the  Texel 
for  the  East  Indies,  was  lost  in  the  Straits  of  Magellan,  with  the 
exception  of  one  Dutch  ship,  steered  by  an  Englishman  by  the  name 
of  William  Adams,  which  reached  the  harbor  of  Bango  in  lat. 
35°  30'.  Adams  was  fortunate  enough  to  ingratiate  himself  with 
the  Emperor  of  Japan,  who  loaded  him  with  presents,  but  would 
not  consent  to  his  returning  home.  The  accounts  he  sent  to 
Batavia,  with  the  prospects  he  held  out  of  a  beneficial  commerce 
between  the  two  countries,  induced  the  Dutch  East  India  Company 
to  dispatch  a  ship  thither  in  1609  ;  and  thus,  through  the  interven 
tion  of  one  individual,  are  the  Dutch  indebted  for  their  establish 
ment  at  Japan.  They  are  the  only  people  that  have  contrived  to 
retain  the  favor  of  the  Japanese,  who,  under  humiliating  restric 
tions,  permit  them  to  carry  on  a  trade,  limited  to  the  dispatch  of 
two  small  ships  annually  from  Batavia  to  Japan.  Nearly  at  the 
same  time,  the  English  also,  by  means  of  their  countryman  Adams, 
had  permission  to  build  a  factory  on  the  Island  of  Firando  ;  but 
though  they  were  well  received,  and  allowed  to  traffic  on  advan 
tageous  terms,  the  trade  was  abandoned  for  reasons  hitherto  un 
explained  ;  the  Dutch  thus  commenced,  and  they  yet  remain  the 
only  European  merchants  in  Japan. 


.. 


JAPAN    AND    THE   JAPANESE.  161 

The  imports  comprise  raw  silk,  woolen,  cotton  and  linen  cloths, 
sugar,  dye-woods,  seal-skins,  pepper  and  other  spices,  mercury, 
cinnabar,  glass-ware,  &c.  The  exports  consist  chiefly  of  copper 
in  bars,  and,  to  a  small  amount,  camphor,  silk  fabrics,  lacquered 
ware,  porcelain,  &c. 

GEOGRAPHY    OF    JAPAN. 

Very  little  is  known  regarding  the  geography  of  Japan.  The 
principal  cities  of  the  Empire  are  Miyako,  (the  capital),  Jeddo, 
Uara,  Osaka,  situated  in  the  island  of  Niphon.  Nangasaki  on  the 
west  coast  of  Nin-sui,  an  open  town,  with  narrow  winding  streets,  is 
the  only  place  where  foreigners  are  allowed  to  trade.  Its  harbor 
is  one  of  the  best  in  the  world.  Of  the  Japanese  coast,  it  may  be 
observed  generally,  that  they  are  in  most  places  rocky  and  pre 
cipitous,  presenting  a  chain  of  bold  promontories,  deep  bays,  and 
rugged  peninsulas,  abounding  with  shoals  and  islets ;  the  whole 
invested  with  a  turbulent  sea,  where  the  navigation  is  intricate  and. 
dangerous.  The  largest  river  is  said  to  be  the  Jodo  or  Zc.do, 
which  rises  from  the  great  central  lake  of  Oitz,  and  pursues  a 
south-west  course.  The  Ujin,  Haka,  and  Oomi,  figure  in  tTapanese 
history ;  the  latter  is  said  to  have  burst  from  the  ground  in  one 
night.  Over  the  "Wogofa  and  Jedogarva  are  projected  cedar- 
bridges  from  300  to  360  feet  long.  There  are  various  other  rivers 
of  which  little  is  known.  The  lake  Oitz  sends  forth  two  rivers,  and 
is  said  to  be  50  Japanese  leagues  in  length,  but  of  inconsiderable 
breadth.  Among  the  mountains  are  volcanoes,  and  in  the  province 
of  Figo,  one  constantly  emits  flame.  The  principal  mountain  is 
Fusi,  which  is  covered  with  snow  the  greatest  part  of  the  year,  but 
the  courses  of  the  different  ranges  have  not  been  traced,  or  at  least 
we  have  no  account  of  them. 

CLIMATE,    SOIL,    AND    PRODUCTIONS. 

The  climate  of  Japan  is  variable  throughout  the  year.  The 
heat  of  summer  would  be  insupportable  were  it  not  moderated  by 
the  sea-breezes.  The  rainy  months  begin  at  mid-summer,  when 
abundance  of  rain  falls.  In  winter,  the  wind  blowing  from  the 
Arctic  Ocean,  makes  the  cold  severe  ;  snow  falls  in  large  quantitiesr 
and  is  followed  by  intense  frost.  Hurricanes  and  earthquakes  are 
not  uncommon,  and  thunder-storms  also  frequently  occur.  The 
face  of  the  country  is  diversified  by  mountains,  hills  and  valleys, 
and  is  well  watered  by  rivers  and  lakes,  the  general  aspect  present 
ing  a  soil  cultivated  with  industry  and  freedom.  Even  the  moua- 


162  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

tains  arid  hills  form  no  obstacle  to  cultivation.  Agriculture  being 
held  in  high  estimation  in  Japan,  it  meets  with  the  greatest 
encouragement  from  the  Government.  In  the  southern  districts 
rice  is  raised  in  large  quantities,  and  forms  the  usual  food  of  the 
inhabitants.  Wheat  is  little  used,  but  barley,  buckwheat,  beans, 
potatoes,  melons,  &c.,  are  raised  in  abundance.  Ginger  and  pepper 
are  the  principal  spice  plants.  Cotton  and  tobacco  are  also  grown  ; 
next  to  rice,  however,  tea  is  the  grand  object  of  cultivation.  The 
greatest  care  is  bestowed  upon  manuring  and  cleaning  the 
ground.  Thunberg  (in  his  travels)  affirms  that  the  soil  throughout 
Japan  is  naturally  barren,  and  has  been  rendered  so  remarkably 
productive  only  by  the  labor  and  skill  of  the  husbandman. 

The  metallic  wealth  of  the  country  is  very  abundant,  and  gold, 
silver,  copper,  iron,  lead,  tin  and  sulphur  are  abundant-.  Pit-coal 
is  not  uncommon  in  the  northern  provinces.  Red  agate,  asbestos, 
porcelain  clay,  pumice-stone,  and  white  marble,  are  also  found; 
5nd  there  are  several  mineral  waters  which  are  used  by  the  natives 
in  the  case  of  various  diseases.  The  natural  forest  produces  oaks, 
firs  and  cypresses  ;  there  is  also  the  gum-varnish  tree,  the  camphor- 
laurel,  aJid  many  others  of  great  value.  Among  the  wild  animals 
may  be  enumerated  bears,  boars,  foxes,  dogs,  monkeys,  hares,  &c. 
Buffaloes  ana  beefs  are  not  numerous,  and  are  used  only  for 
draught.  The  horses  are  small,  and  used  only  by  the  nobility — 
while  sheep  and  pigs  are  almost  unknown.  Dogs  are  held  sacred 
by  the  men,  and  cats  are  the  constant  companions  and  pets  of  the 
women.  Birds  are  numerous,  and  of  various  species.  Snakes, 
tortoises,  lizards,  scorpions,  centipedes  and  white  ants  abound. 
Fish,  which  is  an  important  object  to  the  Japanese  and  a  principal 
part  of  their  subsistence,  are  very  numerous  around  the  coasts, 
especially  salmon,  perch,  eels,  shrimps,  oysters,  crabs;  and  the  flesh 
of  whales,  which  are  killed  by  harpoons,  is  sold  in  the  markets  as 
an  ordinary  article  of  food  among  the  poorer  people. 

CHARACTERISTICS    AND    DRESS    OF    THE    JAPANESE. 

The  Japanese  are  a  mixed  race  of  Mogul  and  Malay  origin. 
Their  language  is  polysyllabic,  and  has  an  alphabet  of  47  letters, 
which  are  written  in  five  different  forms,  one  of  which  is  used 
exclusively  by  the  men,  and  another  by  the  women.  The  people 
of  this  nation  are  well  made,  active,  free  and  easy  in  their 
motions,  and  stout-limbed.  The  men  are  middle-sized,  and  in 
general  not  corpulent,  yellow  complexions,  oblong  black  eyes, 
which  are  sunk  in  the  head,  short  and  flat  noses,  broad  head,  and 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  163 

black  hair.  They  are  said  to  be  an  intelligent  and  provident 
people,  inquisitive  and  ingenious,  frank  and  good-humored,  upright 
and  honest,  brave  and  unyielding,  capable  of  concealing  and  con- 
troling  their  feelings  in  an  extraordinary  degree,  but  distrustful, 
proud,  unforgiving  and  revengeful.  The  usual  dress  of  the 
Japanese  is  a  short  upper  garment,  with  wide  sleeves,  and  a  com 
plete  gown  underneath,  fastened  around  the  neck,  and  reaching 
quite  down  to  the  feet. 

The  rich  are  clothed  in  silks,  the  poor  in  coarse  woolen  stuffs. 
The  upper  garment  is  generally  black,  the  under-dress  is  of  mixed 
colors.  Every  one  has  his  family-arms,  about  the  size  of  a  half  dol 
lar,  wrought  into  his  clothes  in  different  places.  In  winter  they  wear 
five  or  six  dresses  over  each  other.  Instead  of  shoes,  they  have 
soles,  merely,  of  straw,  fastened  to  the  great  toe  by  a  loop.  They 
do  not  use  parasols  in  sunshine,  nor  umbrellas  in  rainy  weather ; 
but  in  traveling,  conical  caps,  fans,  umbrellas,  and  cloaks,  made  of 
oiled  paper,  are  commonly  used.  They  pay  great  attention  to  the 
ornamenting  and  dressing  of  their  hair,  which  is  collected  in  a  tuft 
on  the  crown  of  their  head,  and  they  study  great  cleanliness  of 
person. 

HOUSES    AND    MODE    OF    LIVING. 

In  Japan  the  houses  are  of  wood,  never  exceeding  two  stories, 
the  upper  ones  consisting  chiefly  of  garrets  and  lumber-rooms. 
Though  the  house  is  commodious,  it  consists  in  general  of  one  room, 
capable,  by  movable  partitions  and  screens,  of  being  divided  into 
apartments.  Neither  tables  or  chairs  are  used,  the  people  sitting 
squat  on  straw-mats,  in  which  position  they  eat  their  food. 

The  diet  of  the  Japanese  is  composed  of  a  greater  variety  of 
articles  than  that  of  any  people  in  the  world.  Not  content  with 
the  many  kinds  of  wholesome  and  nutritive  food  supplied  by  the 
produce  of  their  lands  and  waters,  they  contrive  by  their  modes  of 
preparing  their  victuals,  to  render  the  less  valuable,  and  even  the 
poisonous  parts  of  animal  and  vegetable  substances  useful,  or  at 
least  harmless  articles  of  subsistence.  At  meals,  the  portion  for 
each  person  is  served  up  in  neat  vessels  of  porcelain  or  japanned 
wood,  which  are  large  basins,  furnished  with  lids.  The  guests 
salute  each  other  with  a  low  bow  before  they  begin  to  eat ;  and, 
like  the  Chinese,  take  up  food  by  means  of  two  small  pieces  of  wood, 
held  between  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  and  used  with  the 
greatest  dexterity,  so  as  to  pick  up  the  smallest  grain  of  rice.  Be 
tween  each  dish  they  drink  warm  Jacki  [sagi] ,  or  rice-beer,  out  of 


164  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

shallow  saucers,  and  at  the  same  time  occasionally  take  a  bite  of  a 
hard-boiled  egg. 

Some  of  the  most  common  dishes  are  fish  boiled  with  onions  and 
a  kind  of  small  bean,  or  dressed  in  oil.  Fowls  stewed  and  pre 
pared  in  various  modes,  and  boiled  rice,  which  supplies  the  place 
of  bread  for  all  their  provisions.  Oils,  mushrooms,  carrots,  and 
various  bulbous  roots,  are  used  in  making  up  their  dishes.  It  is 
customary  to  eat  three  times  a  day ;  at  eight  o'clock  in  the  morn 
ing,  two  in  the  afternoon,  and  eight  in  the  evening.  The  women 
eat  by  themselves,  apart  from  the  men.  The  practice  of  smoking 
tobacco,  which  is  supposed  to  have  been  introduced  into  Japan  by 
the  Portuguese,  is  very  common  with  both  sexes. 

MARRIAGE    AND    FUNERAL    CEREMONIES. 

Polygamy  is  allowed  in  Japan,  though  in  general,,  all  but  one 
female,  who  is  acknowledged  a  wife,  are  merely  regarded  as  concu 
bines.  This  is  the  case  with  the  higher  classes.  The  women  are 
allowed  a  higher  station  than  in  the  most  Oriental  countries.  She 
is  the  companion  and  not  the  slave  of  the  man.  Marriages  are 
solemnized  in  the  open  air,  in  the  presence  of  the  priests  and  rela 
tions  of  the  parties,  without  much  pomp  or  solemnity.  The  bride 
groom  and  bride  advance  to  an  altar,  erected  for  the  purpose,  with 
a  torch  in  their  hands,  and  while  the  priest  reads  a  form  of  pray 
er,  the  bride,  having  lighted  her  torch  at  a  burning  lamp,  holds  it 
out  to  the  bridegroom,  who  lights  his  torch  from  hers.  The  guests 
then  congratulate  the  new  married  couple,  and  the  ceremony  is 
concluded.  Prostitution  is  carried  on  to  a  horrid  extent,  and  so 
little  discredit  is  attached  to  the  prostitutes,  that  they  are  received 
without  remark  in  respectable  society. 

The  bodies  of  persons  of  distinction  at  death  are  burned,  while 
others  are  interred.  The  funeral-pile  is  erected  in  a  small  house 
of  stone  fitted  for  the  purpose,  and  provided  with  a  chimney.  The 
body  is  brought  thither,  accompanied  by  men  and  women,  and  at 
tended  by  a  numerous  train  of  priests,  who  are  continually  occupied 
in  singing.  Upon  reaching  the  place  for  burning,  one  of  the  priests 
sings  the  eulogy  of  the  deceased,  and  having  thrice  waved  a 
lighted  torch  over  the  body,  throws  it  away.  It  is  then  picked  up 
by  one  of  the  children,  or  other  relatives  of  the  deceased,  and  ap 
plied  to  the  burning  pile.  The  clothes  are  carried  away  in  a  costly 
vessel,  and  preserved  for  some  time  in  the  house,  but  afterwards 
buried  in  the  earth.  Those  who  are  not  burned  are  inclosed  in 
a  wooden  chest  and  let  down  into  a  grave  in  the  customary  man- 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  165 

ner.    Fragrant  spices  are  thrown  into  the  grave,  and  flowers  plant 
ed  on  the  earth  which  covers  it. 


RELIGION    AND    EDUCATION. 


The  established  or  state  religion  of  Japan  is  that  of  Buddha,  but 
it  has  many  varieties,  and  much  superstition  prevails  amoug  its  vo 
taries.  The  peculiar  tenet  of  the  Buddha  sect  is,  that  the  soul  of 
men  and  of  beasts  are  equally  immortal,  and  that  the  souls  of  the 
wicked  are  condemned  to  undergo  punishment  and  purification,  by 
passing  after  death  into  the  bodies  of  the  lower  animals.  The  an 
cient  sect  called  Sinto  (though  its  adherents  are  few,)  seems  to 
have  been  originally  simple  and  pure  in  its  tenets.  They  consider 
the  founders  of  the  empire  as  the  immediate  descendants  of  the 
Supreme  G-od,  who  came  down  from  Heaven  into  Japan,  and  have 
continued  without  interruption  to  exercise  sovereign  authority. 

They  believe  the  spirit  of  their  ruler  to  be  immortal,  and  consider 
the  Supreme  Being  too  great  to  be  addressed  in  prayer,  except 
through  the  mediation  of  the  Mikaclo,  the  Son  of  Heaven,  or  the 
inferior  spirits  called  Kami,  to  whom  temples  are  specially  erected. 
They  have  some  conception  of  the  soul's  immortality,  and  believe 
that  a  happy  abode  immediately  under  heaven  is  assigned  to  the 
spirits  of  the  virtuous,  while  those  of  the  wicked  shall  be  doomed 
to  wander  to  and  fro  under  the  firmament.  Their  practical  pre 
cepts  are  directed  to  lead  a  virtuous  life,  and  obey  the  laws  of  the 
sovereign.  The  Dairi,  or  ecclesiastical  sovereign,  seems  to  be  the 
grand  head  of  all  the  sects,  and  appoints  the  priests.  Every  sect 
has  its  respective  church  and  peculiar  idols.  The  inferior  divini 
ties  are  innumerable,  as  almost  every  trade  has  its  tutelar  god  ; 
and  in  one  temple  no  less  than  33,333  are  said  to  be  ranged  around 
the  Supreme  Deity. 

Monks,  religious  beggars,  and  singing  girls,  go  about  the  coun 
try  and  levy  considerable  sums.  In  literature  the  Japanese  are 
said  to  excel.  They  study  medicine  and  astronomy,  history,  poe 
try,  and  several  of  the  natural  sciences  are  cultivated,  and  there  is 
a  prevalent  taste  for  drawing,  engraving  and  music.  The  samsic 
or  guitar  is  ever  invariably  made  a  part  of  female  education,  as  the 
piano  is  in  enlightened  countries.  Schools  generally  abound.  The 
children  are  stimulated  to  emulation  and  worthy  achievements  by 
the  recital  of  songs  in  praise  of  their  deceased  heroes.  A  few  of 
the  more  studious  acquire  the  Chinese  language,  and  some  of  the 
physicians  are  able  to  understand  the  Dutch,  and  even  the  Latin. 
The  Japanese  have  many  of  the  arts  in  a  perfection  not  yet  at- 


166  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

tained  by  their  more  civilized  cotemporaries.  In  those  of  smeltin^ 
and  refining  metals  they  excel.  Their  copper,  iron  and  steel,  are 
celebrated  for  their  purity.  The  finer  products  of  European  art 
are  imitated  by  them,  and  telescopes,  thermometers,  clocks  and 
watches,  are  manufactured  at  Kangasaki. 

GOVERNMENT,    LAWS    AND    POPULATION. 

The  form  of  government  in  Japan  is  pure  despotism.  The  sove 
reignty  was  formerly  vested  in  the  Dairi  or  spiritual  monarch,  but 
in  1593,  the  Kubo  or  military  commander,  usurped  the  chief  civil 
power,  and  the  Dairi  has  ever  since  been  the  tool  in  the  government, 
though  he  has  been  left  the  entire  superintendence  of  religion  and 
education.  All  public  acts  must  have  his  sanction,  and  to  him 
alone  belongs  the  power  of  conferring  honorary  distinctions.  The 
general  executive  government  is  confided  to  several  councilors  ; 
the  supreme  judicial  council  is  composed  of  five  daimios  who  assist 
the  Kubo  in  deciding  on  political  offences,  and  a  senate  of  fifteen 
daimios  form  the  ordinary  court  of  criminal  and  civil  law.  The 
laws  are  severe  and  often  sanguinary,  and  death  by  decapitation 
and  crucifixion  are  ordinary  punishments.  Minor  offences  are 
punished  by  exile  to  the  penal  settlements  of  Falsisio — banishment, 
imprisonment,  torture,  &c.  ;  and  it  often  happens  that  the  Courts 
visit  with  punishment  not  only  the  delinquent,  but  his  relations  and 
friends,  or  the  stranger  that  has  happened  to  witness  the  crime. 
The  prisons  are  gloomy  and  frightful  dungeons,  and  the  police  are 
extremely  strict.  The  whole  government  is  conducted  under  a 
state  of  terrorism,  and  no  part  of  it  is  free  from  restraint. 

The  public  revenues  are  derived  from  taxes,  on  lands  and  horses. 
The  amount  of  the  population  is  entirely  unknown,  but  has  been 
variously  estimated.  Balbi,  in  the  assumption  that  Japan  is  equally 
populous  with  China,  rates  it  at  25,000,000  ;  but  as  China  rates 
double  the  number  this  geographer  has  assigned  to  it,  the  popula 
tion  of  Japan  should,  on  this  principle,  amount  to  fifty  or  sixty 
millions.  All  travelers  who  have  visited  Japan,  agree  in  stating, 
that  an  overflowing  population  is  seen  moving  about  the  streets  and 
highways.  We  must  reckon  Japan  one  of  the  most  populous 
countries,  in  proportion  to  the  extent  of  surface,  in  the  world.  The 
army,  in  time  of  peace,  is  rated  at  120,000  infantry  and  20,000 
cavalry.  There  is  no  armed  navy.  The  internal  history  of  Japan 
is  little  known ;  and  it  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  proposed  naval  ex 
pedition  will  be  the  means  of  procuring  information,  which  will  re 
sult  in  the  publication  of  an  extended  history  of  the  country. 


THE    EMPIRE    OF   JAPAN. 


[From  the  National  Intelligencer.] 


MESSRS.  GALES  &  SEATON, — As  anything  which  relates  to 
Japan  at  the  present  time  may  be  interesting,  I  send  you  the  fol 
lowing  concise  sketch  of  that  kingdom  : — It  is  called  by  the  natives 
Niphon,  and  was  founded  about  six  hundred  and  sixty-five  years 
before  Christ,  by  Simmu.  From  him  to  Sinzakin  there  appears  to 
have  been  sixty-one  emperors.  After  this  period,  in  the  year  1142, 
a  change  took  place.  From  this  time  a  double  chronology  com 
mences,  including  the  reigns  of  the  Dearios  and  Cubos.  The 
Dearios  were  military  officers,  and  at  one  period  completely  usurped 
the  power  of  the  emperors  ;  but  a  general,  by  the  name  of  Jeretimo, 
being  crowned,  succeeded  in  depriving  the  Dearios  of  all  military 
power.  At  the  present  time  the  kingdom  of  Japan  is  governed  by 
an  emperor  with  full  military  powers,  a  Deario  with  full  civil 
powers,  and  a  Cubo,  or  prime  minister,  who  has  authority  over  cer 
tain  cities,  their  parliament,  &c. 

The  kingdom  of  Japan  consists  of  three  large  and  thirty  or 
forty  smaller  islands,  situated  off  the  coast  of  China.  The  largest 
of  these  islands  is  Niphon,  the  next  Jesso.  On  the  Island  of 
Bungo,  south-west  of  Tonsa,  is  the  city  of  Nangaschi,  and  near  that 
city  is  the  little  artificial  island  of  Disna,  on  which  a  Dutch  factory 
is  built. 

Jeddo,  or  Yeddo,  the  capital  of  the  whole  empire,  is  situated  in 
the  midst  of  a  fine  plain,  in  the  province  of  Musace.  It  is  built  in 
the  form  of  a  crescent,  and  intersected  in  almost  every  street  by 
canals,  their  banks  being  planted  with  rows  of  beautiful  trees. 
The  city  is  not  surrounded,  as  most  Eastern  cities  are,  by  a  wall, 
but  has  a  strong  castle  to  defend  it.  The  river  Tongag  waters  it, 
and  supplies  the  castle-ditch,  and,  being  divided  into  five  streams, 
has  a  bridge  over  each.  The  public  buildings  are  on  a  magnificent 
scale.  The  imperial  palace  is  formed  by  three  cinctures,  or  circular 
piles  of  buildings,  and  inclosing  many  streets,  courts,  apartments, 
pavilions,  guard-houses,  gates,  drawbridges,  gardens,  canals,  &c. 


168  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

In  it  reside  the  emperor  and  his  family,  the  royal  domestics,  tribu 
tary  princes  and  their  retinues,  the  ministers  of  state,  many  other 
officers  of  government,  and  a  strong  garrison.  The  walls  of  this 
magnificent  palace  are  built  of  free-stone,  without  cement,  and  the 
stones  prodigiously  large.  The  whole  pile  was  orginally  covered 
with  gilt  tiles,  which  gave  it  a  very  grand  and  beautiful  appearance. 
Many  of  the  stately  apartments  are  formed  and  altered  at  pleasure, 
by  movable  screens.  The  principal  apartments  are  the  Hall  of 
Attendance,  the  Council  Chamber,  Hall  of  a  Thousand  Mats,  &c. 
The  city  is  under  the  rule  of  two  governors,  who  rule  a  year  each. 

The  next  largest  city  is  Meaco.  It  is  also  a  royal  city,  and  is 
situated  on  a  lake  near  the  middle  of  the  Island  of  Niphon,  and 
surrounded  by  mountains,  which  give  a  remarkable  and  delightful 
prospect  to  the  whole  ;  the  circumjacent  country  between  the  city 
and  the  mountains  is  covered  with  temples,  sepulchres,  &c,,  and  is 
embellished  with  a  variety  of  orchards,  groves,  cascades,  and  purling 
streams.  Three  considerable  rivers  water  this  fertile  plain,  and 
unite  their  streams  in  the  centre  of  the  city,  where  a  magnificent 
stone-bridge  facilitates  the  communication  between  the  different 
parts  of  the  city.  A  strong  castle  defends  the  town  ;  it  is  six  hun 
dred  yards  in  length,  has  a  tower  in  the  centre,  and  is  surrounded 
by  two  ditches,  the  one  dry,  the  other  full  of  water.  This  splendid 
city  is  twenty  miles  long,  and  nine  wide,  within  the  suburbs,  which 
are  as  well  populated  as  the  city.  The  number  of  the  inhabitants 
of  the  city  proper  is  supposed  to  be  529,000.  The  universities, 
colleges,  temples,  &c.,  are  almost  incredible  in  number  and  mag 
nificence.  It  contains  twelve  capital  or  principal  streets,  in  the 
centre  of  which  are  the  royal  palaces,  superbly  built  of  marble,  and 
adorned  with  gardens,  orchards,  pavilions,  terraces,  groves,  &c. 

The  next  principal  town  is  Ozeaco.  It  is  deemed  the  chief  sea 
port,  is  very  populous,  and  has  an  army  of  80,000  men,  always 
ready,  at  the  disposal  and  command  of  the  emperor.  It  is  near 
fifteen  miles  in  circumference. 

The  city  of  Nangascke  is  the  Japanese  naval  depot ;  but  as  they 
have  not  yet  found  any  use  for  a  navy,  their  vessels  are  only  in  the 
rough  material,  and  stored  away  for  emergencies.  The  kokansa 
or  prison  is  here.  The  name  means,  in  the  Japanese,  hell ;  it  has 
one  hundred  dungeons  and  cages.  The  history  of  these  few  cities 
gives  a  fair  outline  of  their  whole  empire.  Their  private  dwellings 
are  small  but  neat,  and  ornamented  with  small  gardens ;  in  this 
they  excel,  as  they  are  the  very  best  of  horticulturists.  A  few  feet 
of  ground  are  turned  to  the  best  advantage,  as  the  Japanese  un- 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  169 

derstand  perfectly  the  art  of  dwarfing  plants,  trees,  fruits,  and 
flowers.  They  use  neither  tables,  bedsteads,  nor  chairs  ;  but  sit, 
eat,  and  sleep,  like  most  eastern  nations,  on  mats. 

Almost  the  first  accomplishment  learned  by  tfcem  is  the  art  and 
grace  of  suicide  ;  the  child  in  the  nursery  stabs  itself  with  its  fin 
ger  or  stick,  and  falls  back  in  imitative  death ;  the  lover  cuts  out 
his  intestines  before  his  obdurate  mistress,  and  the  latter  pours  out 
her  heart's  blood  in  the  face  of  her  faithless  lover ;  the  criminal 
executes  himself;  and,  in  fact,  the  whole  nation,  from  early  youth, 
revels  in  the  luxury  of  suicide. 

Their  trade  is  at  present  under  great  restrictions,  as  they  only 
trade  with  the  Chinese  and  Dutch.  The  latter  have  always  fos 
tered,  cherished  and  increased  the  prejudices  of  the  Japanese 
against  all  other  nations,  particularly  the  French,  English,  and 
Portuguese. 

The  mechanics  and  manufacturers  in  Japan  excel  in  their 
different  branches,  and  are  even  far  superior  to  the  Chinese.  Their 
silks  and  cottons  are  excellent,  and  their  Japan  ware  and  porcelain 
unequaled.  Their  exports  are  raw  and  manufactured  silks,  iron, 
steel,  artificial  metals,  furs,  teas,  finer  than  the  Chinese,  Japan 
ware,  gold,  silver,  copper,  gums,  medicinal  herbs,  roots,  diamonds, 
pearls,  coral,  shells,  ambegris,  &c.  Whatever  goods  the  Japanese 
want,  they  pay  for  in  gold  and  silver. 

The  Japanese  worship  the  principal  two  gods,  Xaca  and  Amida. 
At  Meaco  there  is  a  stately  temple,  built  to  one  of  these  gods  ;  it 
is  of  free-stone,  as  large  as  St.  Paul's,  with  an  arched  roof,  sup 
ported  by  heavy  pillars,  in  which  stands  an  idol  of  copper,  which 
reaches  as  high  as  the  roof;  and,  according  to  a  description  given 
by  Sir  Thomas  Herbert,  his  chair  is  seventy  feet  high  and  eighty 
feet  long  ;  the  head  is  big  enough  to  hold  fifteen  men,  and  the 
thumb  forty  inches  in  circumference.  There  is  another  statue 
called  after  the  god  Dabio,  made  of  copper,  twenty-two  feet  high, 
in  a  sitting  posture.  This  shows  that  the  Japanese  understand 
the  art  of  working  in  bronze,  and  they  are  far  ahead  of  Christian 
nations  in  this  particular.  They  allow  polygamy,  and  they  often 
strangle  their  female  children,  but  never  the  males.  The  nobility 
extract  the  two  front  teeth,  and  supply  them  with  two  of  gold. 

The  principal  rivers  are  the  Ujingava  and  Askagava — the  former 
so  rapid  and  wide  that  a  bridge  cannot  be  built  over  it ;  the  latter 
remarkable  for  its  depth  and  perpetual  fluctuations.  The  chief 
lake,  called  Citz,  is  100  miles  long  and  21  wide.  A  large  valley 
exists  in  the  interior,  filled  with  carbonic  gas,  and  called  the  Valley 


170  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

of  the  Upas.  It  is  covered  with  the  skeletons  of  numerous  wild 
and  tame  beasts  and  birds.  The  emperor,  it  is  said,  often  sent 
criminals  to  the  valley  to  bring  away  a  precious  gem  of  inestimable 
value  ;  and  the  bones  of  men  also  whiten  its  deadly  sides. 

Acidulated  lakes  and  thermal  springs  are  common  throughout 
several  of  the  islands. 

Their  great  source  of  opulence  are  their  mines  of  gold  and  silver, 
but  they  have  no  antimony,  calamine,  sal  ammoniac,  borax,  or 
cinnebar,  (quicksilver).  These  articles  are  in  demand,  and  bring 
a  high  price.  Birds  and  every  kind  of  duck  and  poultry  are 
plenty  ;  camphor-trees  are  abundant,  and  the  cedars  are  the  finest 
in  the  world.  Few  countries  open  so  fair  a  field  as  the  islands  of 
Japan  for  botanical  and  geological  research. 

It  is  not  necessary  here  to  enter  into  a  detailed  statistical  ac 
count  of  the  commerce  of  Japan.  A  direct  trade  to  that  empire 
would  increase  the  commerce  of  this  country  about  $200,000,000 
annually,  if  not  more. 

It  has  always  been  in  contemplation  with  this  country  to  make 
an  effort  to  open  a  direct  trade  with  Japan.  Commodore  Porter, 
as  far  back  as  1815,  addressed  a  letter  to  Mr.  Monroe  on  the  sub 
ject.  It  was  intended  to  fit  out  a  frigate  and  two  sloops-of-war, 
and  place  them  under  his  command,  but  subsequent  events  pre 
vented  the  consummation  of  this  design,  but  it  has  been  revived 
from  time  to  time  without  being  carried  out.  But  a  few  years  ago 
the  undersigned  drew  the  attention  of  the  Hon.  John  Y.  Mason  to 
the  subject  by  the  recommendation  of  a  steam  line  to  China,  with 
a  view  of  incidental  commercial  intercourse,  and  finally  direct  trade 
with  Japan.  It  would  require  but  small  efforts  to  accomplish  com 
mercial  intercourse  with  so  shrewd  a  people  as  the  Japanese,  who 
are  alive  to  commercial  feelings.  A  steam  line  direct  from  New 
York  to  the  Isthmus  being  already  in  existence,  it  is  an  easy  matter 
to  continue  it  to  the  Gallipagoes,  which  islands  abound  in  coal ; 
thence  to  the  Marquesas,  and  on  to  Shanghai  or  Jeddo. 

W.  D.  PORTER. 


THE     JAPANESE     EXPEDITION 


[From  the  Correspondent  of  the  New  York  Herald.] 


THE     INSTRUCTIONS     TO      THE     COMMODORE. 

WASHINGTON,  April  20,  1852. 

The  President  recently  transmitted  to  the  Senate  a  communica 
tion  containing  official  documents  relative  to  the  Empire  of  Japan, 
under  a  resolution  of  the  4th  of  March.  These  documents  consist 
of  extracts  from  the  instructions  given  by  the  State  Department 
to  various  individuals,  since  1832,  together  with  a  communication 
from  James  Grlynn  to  the  President,  with  reference  to  his  transac 
tions  in  the  Preble,  copy  of  an  extract  from  the  New- York  Herald, 
of  the  3d  January,  1851,  &c.,  &c.,  together  with  instructions 
given  to  Commodore  Aulick,  and  a  letter  from  the  President  to  the 
Emperor  of  Japan,  dated  10th  May,  1851.  The  letter  of  the 
President  has  already  been  published.  The  highly-important  let 
ter  of  instructions  to  Commodore  Aulick  has  not,  however,  been 
yet  given,  and  will  be  found  below.  It  displays  the  object  of  the 
visit  to  Japan,  so  far  as  the  President  has  given  instructions  to 
the  East  India  squadron,  and  is,  in  reality,  the  gist  of  the  whole 
affair : — 

DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE,  Washington,  10th  June,  1851. 
COMMODORE  JOHN  H.  AULICK  : 

SIR, — The  moment  is  near  when  the  last  link  in  the  chain  of 
oceanic  steam  navigation  is  to  be  formed.  From  China  and  the 
East  Indies,  to  Egypt,  thence  through  the  Mediterranean  and  the 
Atlantic  Ocean,  to  England,  thence  again  to  our  happy  shores,  and 
other  parts  of  this  great  continent ;  from  our  own  ports  to  the 
southernmost  part  of  the  Isthmus,  that  connects  the  two  western 
continents,  and  from  its  Pacific  coast,  north  and  southwards,  as  far 
as  civilization  has  spread,  the  steamers  of  other  nations,  and  of  our 


172  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

own,  carry  intelligence,  the  wealth  of  the  world,  and  thousands  of 
travelers. 

It  is  the  President's  opinion  that  steps  should  be  taken  at  once 
to  enable  our  enterprising  merchants  to  supply  the  last  link  in  that 
great  chain,  which  unites  all  nations  of  the  world,  by  the  early  es 
tablishment  of  a  line  of  steamers  from  California  to  China.  In 
order  to  facilitate  this  enterprise,  it  is  desirable  that  we  should  ob 
tain  from  the  Emperor  of  Japan  permission  to  purchase  from  his 
subjects  the  necessary  supplies  of  coal,  which  our  steamers,  in  their 
outward  and  inward  voyages  may  require.  The  well-known  jealousy 
with  which  the  Japanese  Empire  has,  for  the  last  two  centuries, 
rejected  all  overtures  from  other  nations  to  open  its  ports  to  their 
vessels,  embarrasses  all  new  attempts  to  change  the  exclusive  policy 
of  that  country. 

The  interests  of  commerce,  and  even  those  of  humanity,  demand, 
however,  that  we  should  make  another  appeal  to  the  sovereign  of 
that  country,  in  asking  him  to  sell  to  our  steamers — not  the  manu 
factures  of  his  artisans,  or  the  results  of  the  toil  of  his  husband- 
men — kut  a  gift  of  Providence,  deposited  by  the  Creator  of  all 
things,  in  the  depths  of  the  Japanese  Islands,  for  the  benefit  of  the 
human  family. 

By  the  President's  direction,  I  now  transmit  to  you  a  letter  to 
the  Emperor  of  Japan,  (with  an  open  copy),  which  you  are  to 
carry  to  Jeddo,  his  capital,  in  your  flag-ship,  accompanied  by  as 
many  of  the  vessels  of  the  squadron  under  your  command,  as  may 
conveniently  be  employed  in  this  service.  A  Chinese  translation 
of  this  letter  will  be  furnished  to  you  by  the  United  States  Lega 
tion  at  Canton,  and  sent  to  your  anchorage  at  Hong  Kong  or 
Macao. 

At  one  of  the  latter  places  you  will  probably  meet  with  a  national 
vessel,  detached  by  the  Commodore  of  the  squadron  in  the  Pacific, 
(as  you  will  perceive  by  the  inclosed  copy  of  a  correspondence  be 
tween  this  and  the  Navy  Department),  to  carry  to  you  a  number 
of  ship-wrecked  Japanese  mariners,  who  were,  some  time  ago, 
picked  up  at  sea  by  the  bark  Auckland.  These  men  you  will  take 
with  you  to  Jeddo,  and  deliver  them  over  to  the  officers  of  the 
Emperor,  giving  them  through  your  interpreter,  the  assurance  that 
the  American  government  will  never  fail  to  treat  with  kindness  any 
of  the  natives  of  Japan,  whom  misfortune  may  bring  to  our  shores ; 
and  that  it  expects  similar  treatment  of  such  of  its  own  citizens 
who  may  be  driven  on  the  coasts  of  Japan. 

The  letter  of  the  President  to  the  Emperor  of  Japan,  you  will 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  173 

deliver  to  such  of  his  high  officers  as  he  may  appoint  for  the  pur 
pose  of  receiving  it.  To  them  you  will  explain  the  main  object  of 
your  visit. 

Mineral  coal  is  so  abundant  in  Japan  that  the  government  of 
that  country  can  have  no  reasonable  objection  to  supplying  our 
steamers,  at  fair  prices,  with  that  great  necessary  of  commerce. 
One  of  the  eastern  ports  of  Niphon  would  be  the  most  desirable 
place  for  this  purpose.*  Should,  however,  the  government  of  Japan 
persist  in  following  out  its  system  of  exclusiveness,  you  might,  per 
haps,  induce  them  to  consent  to  the  transportation  of  the  coal  by 
their  own  vessels,  to  a  neighboring  island,  easy  of  access,  where 
the  steamers  could  supply  their  wants,  avoiding  thus  the  necessity 
of  an  intercourse  with  any  large  number  of  the  people  of  the 
country. 

It  is  considered  important  that  you  should  avail  yourself  of  every 
occasion  to  impress  on  those  Japanese  officers  with  whom  you  will 
be  brought  in  contact,  that  the  government  of  the  United  States 
does  not  possess  any  power  over  the  religion  of  its  own  citizens, 
and  that  there  is,  therefore,  no  cause  to  apprehend  that  it  will  in 
terfere  with  the  religion  of  other  countries. 

The  President,  although  fully  aware  of  the  great  reluctance 
hitherto  shown  by  the  Japanese  government  to  enter  into  treaty 
stipulations  with  any  foreign  nation— a  feeling  which  it  is  sincerely 
wished  that  you  may  be  able  to  overcome — has  thought  it  proper, 
in  anticipation  of  this  latter  favorable  contingency,  to  invest  you 
with  full  power  to  negotiate  and  sign  a  treaty  of  amity  and  com 
merce  between  the  United  States  and  the  Empire  of  Japan. 

I  transmit,  herewith,  the  act  of  the  President,  clothing  you  with 
that  power  ;  as  also  copies  of  the  treaty  between  the  United  States 
and  China,  with  Siam  and  the  Muscat,  which  may  to  a  certain  ex 
tent  be  of  use  to  you  as  precedents.  It  is  important  that  you 
should  secure  to  our  vessels  the  right  to  enter  one  or  more  of  the 
ports  of  Japan,  and  there  to  dispose  of  their  cargoes  either  by  sale 
or  by  barter,  without  being  subjected  to  extravagant  port  charges  ; 
and  even  more  important  is  it  that  the  government  of  Japan  should 
bind  itself  to  protect  American  sailors  and  property  which  may  be 
on  their  shores.  The  second  article  of  our  treaty  with  Muscat, 
and  the  fifth  article  of  the  treaty  with  Siam,  embrace  these 
objects. 

Every  treaty  has  to  be  subjected  to  the  Senate,  for  ratification, 
as  you  are  aware.  In  consideration  of  the  great  distance  between 
the  two  countries,  and  unforeseen  difficulties,  it  would  be  prudent, 


174  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

should  you  succeed  in   effecting  the   object  proposed,  to  fix  the 
period  for  the  exchange  of  the  ratifications  at  three  years. 
I  am.  Sir,  respectfully,  your  obedient  servant, 

DANIEL  WEBSTER. 

The  accompanying  note  from  the  Minister  of  the  Netherlands 
here,  will  also  be  found  interesting  : — 


TRANSLATION. 


NOTE  VERBALE. — It  is  a  matter  of  public  notoriety  that  foreign 
vessels  are  excluded  from  Japan,  by  the  government  of  that  em 
pire.  It  was,  nevertheless,  determined  in  1842,  that,  if  such  ves 
sels  should  be  cast  upon  the  shores  of  Japan  by  storms,  or  come 
there  in  want  of  provisions  with  a  view  of  asking  for  such  commo 
dities,  water,  or  wood  for  fuel,  those  articles  should  be  granted  to 
them  on  request. 

For  fear,  however,  lest  this  determination,  prompted  as  it  has 
been  by  feelings  of  humanity,  should  give  rise  to  any  false  inter 
pretation,  the  government  of  Japan  has  solicited  that  of  the 
Netherlands  to  inform  the  other  powers  that  the  above-mentioned 
resolution  does  not  infringe  upon,  or  otherwise  imply  any  modifica 
tion  whatever  of  the  system  of  separation  and  exclusion,  which  was 
adopted  more  than  two  centuries  ago,  by  the  Japanese  govern 
ment,  and  since  the  establishment  of  which,  the  prohibition  against 
allowing  any  foreign  vessel  to  explore  the  Japanese  coasts,  has 
been  constantly  in  force. 

^The  Dutch  government  has  made  no  difficulty  of  complying  with 
this  request,  especially  as  the  government  of  Japan  has  no  other 
means  of  making  a  communication  of  this  nature  ;  and  in  pursu 
ance  of  instructions  from  the  cabinet  of  the  Hague,  the  Legation 
of  the  Netherlands  has  the  honor  to  communicate  the  above-men 
tioned  facts  to  the  Hon.  Secretary  of  State  of  the  United  States, 
for  the  information  of  his  government. 

April  30,  1851. 


175 


THE   JAPANESE   EXPEDTION. 


[From  Gleason's  Pictorial,  May  15.] 

The  object  of  the  Japan  Expedition  is  already  pretty  well  un 
derstood  by  the  public,  its  main  features  being  to  establish  between 
this  country  and  Japan  a  sort  of  commercial  treaty  for  the  benefit 
of  both  nations  in  the  matter  of  maritime  trade,  and  also  to  impress 
that  strange  and  peculiar  people  with  a  degree  of  respect  for  our 
people  and  laws.  These  objects  gained,  such  an  expedition,  how 
ever  costly,  would  richly  repay  our  government  for  the  outlay  ;  and 
our  merchantmen  and  whalers,  sometimes  driven  by  storms  and 
stress  of  weather  upon  these  now  inhospitable  shores,  would  be  ren 
dered  safe,  as  it  regards  life  and  property. 

The  following  is  the  list  of  the  squadron  : — Steamer  Mississippi, 
flag-ship,  Capt.  McCluney,  having  on  board  Com.  Perry,  com 
mander  of  the  fleet — steam-frigate  Susquehannah,  Capt.  Buchanan 
— steamer  Princeton,  Commander  Sydney  Smith  Lee — sloop-of- 
war  St.  Mary's,  Commander  Geo.  A.  McGruder — sloop-of-war 
Plymouth,  Commander  John  Kelly — sloop-of-war  Saratoga,  Com 
mander  Wm.  L.  Walker — brig-of-war  Perry,  Lieut.  Fairfax — 
store-ship  Supply,  Lieut.  Arthur  St.  Clair.  The  Susquehannah, 
Plymouth  and  Saratoga  are  aleady  afloat  on  the  Pacific  Ocean, 
waiting  the  arrival  of  the  rest  of  the  squadron.  The  St.  Mary's 
is  now  on  her  way  to  Japan,  having  on  board  the  Japanese  sailors, 
and  on  reaching  Japan,  will  await  the  arrival  of  the  fleet.  It  is 
proposed  that  the  remainder  of  the  squadron  get  under  weigh 
during  the  present  month.  The  object  of  the  expedition,  as 
officially  announced,  is  to  effect  a  landing  at  Jeddo,  the  capital,  at 
all  hazards,  and  also  to  make  explorations  on  shore,  and  leave  no 
efforts  untried  to  open  commercial  intercourse  with  that  long-sealed 
people — the  fleet  to  be  absent  about  eighteen  months. 

Ineffectual  attempts  have  been  made  by  the  Portuguese,  the 
Russians,  the  French,  the  English,  and  the  Americans,  to  open 
trade  with  Japan,  but  never  with  success  ;  and  so  far  do  they  carry 
the  matter  of  exclusion,  that  the  vessels  of  foreign  nations  are  not 
even  allowed  to  anchor  in  the  Japanese  ports. 

The  Empire  of  Japan  is  said  to  include  3850  islands,  (including 
uninhabitable  rocks),  which  embrace  a  territory  of  122,720  square 
miles,  and  the  population  is  estimated  at  thirty  millions. 


176 


THE    JAPANESE    EXPEDITION, 

IN  A   EUROPEAN   POINT  OF  VIEW. 


[Translated  from  La  Patric,  of  Paris,  April  1.] 


The  expedition  directed  by  the  United  States  against  the 
Japanese  empire  is  not  one  of  those  enterprises  which  can  excite 
the  distrust  or  the  jealousy  of  civilized  nations.  They  must,  on 
the  contrary,  make  vows  in  order  that  the  expedition  realizes  all 
the  hopes  which  it  gives  to  the  other  side  of  the  Atlantic.  In 
England,  the  most  influential  organs  of  the  press  have  applauded  that 
great  idea ;  and  in  that  we  can  say  they  have  answered  the  sentiments 
of  all  the  learned  men  of  the  United  States.  It  cannot  be  other 
wise  in  France.  All  those  who  attach  any  value  to  the  extension 
of  relations  among  the  different  people  of  the  earth,  as  means  of 
increasing  the  general  well-being,  will  follow  with  the  liveliest  in 
terest,  and  will  give  all  their  sympathies  to  those  bold  navigators 
who  are  going  to  try  to  open  a  new  and  vast  field  to  the  spirit  of 
enterprise,  not  only  for  the  American  people,  but  for  all  the  nations 
of  the  universe. 

It  is  known,  indeed,  that  the  entry  of  Japan  is  closed  in  an  ab 
solute  manner  to  the  foreigners  of  all  nations.  It  is  thus  a  will  of 
the  jealous  and  suspicious  policy  of  the  government  of  that  country, 
as  a  faithful  imitator  of  the  traditions  followed  in  the  empire  of 
China.  For  several  centuries  this  interdiction  against  foreigners 
has  subsisted,  and  is  maintained  with  the  most  extreme  rigor. 
Sometimes  the  zeal  of  Catholic  missionaries  has  baffled  the  vigilance 
of  the  Japanese  authorities  ;  but  they  have  been  nearly  all  sacri 
ficed,  and  the  exertions  of  these  dauntless  apostles  of  civilization 
could  not  break  or  raise  the  barriers  established  by  a  policy  which 
originated  in  the  most  barbarous  religious  fanaticism. 

A  single  people  of  Europe — the  Dutch — have  been  admitted  to 
traffic  with  the  Japanese,  and  this  trade  was  but  for  the  entry  of 
two  vessels  every  year  in  the  port  of  Nangasaki.  The  value  of 
both  cargoes  was  about  $300,000.  They  consisted  of  sugars,  tin, 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  177 

cotton  thread,  black  pepper,  cloves,  lead,  firwood,  cloths,  wools, 
camblets,  and  a  quantity  of  other  articles  of  less  importance.  In 
return,  these  vessels  took  cargoes  of  brass  and  camphor.  It  is 
known  on  what  shameful  conditions  the  Dutch  merchants  had  the 
power  to  obtain  this  exclusive  privilege.  They  could  not  put  their 
foot  on  the  Japanese  soil  without  denying  their  religion,  by  tramp 
ling  over  the  image  of  the  cross.  Now,  that  obligation  is  no  more 
observed,  either  because  the  Dutch  have  refused  to  submit  any 
longer  to  it,  or  that  the  Japanese  government  has  considered  is  as 
useless. 

The  exclusive  policy  of  Japan  was  not  only  directed  against  the 
Western  people,  but  the  Eastern  people,  (with  the  exception  of 
the  Chinese,)  were  equally  put  under  the  ban  of  the  empire.  The 
Chinese  junks  are  admitted  in  the  port  of  Nangasaki. 

We  have  already  remarked,  in  announcing  the  departure  of  the 
American  expedition,  the  importance  of  its  results  to  the  commerce 
of  the  world.  One  may  judge  of  its  importance,  when  he  thinks 
that  the  Japanese  Archipelago  has  a  population  estimated  by  the 
most  moderate  of  travelers  to  be  30,000,000  of  inhabitants  (some 
say  45,000,000),  that  that  country  is  rich  in  products  of  every 
kind,  which  constitute  vast  means  of  exchange  in  the  commerce  of 
nations. 

What  England  did  in  China,  twelve  years  ago,  the  United  States 
are  going  to  attempt  in  Japan.  Now-a-days — thanks  to  the  suc 
cess  of  the  expedition  of  Admiral  Cochrane — the  principal  ports 
of  China  are  opened  to  the  vessels  of  all  nations  of  the  world  ;  and 
whatever  were  the  motives  of  the  English  policy,  in  that  case,  we 
cannot  do  less  than  applaud,  in  the  name  of  the  interests  of  com 
merce  and  civilization,  the  advantages  that  she  has  obtained  for 
them,  and  which  have  been  enjoyed  ever  since. 

We  have  stated  the  forces  which  will  compose  the  American 
expedition.  The  United  States  journals  do  not  appear  to  have  the 
least  doubt  of  its  success.  That  is  also  the  opinion  of  the  English 
newspapers.  "  Indeed,"  says  the  London  Times,  "  although  the 
Japanese  are  a  more  warlike  race  than  the  Chinese  race,  they 
could  not  do  anything  against  the  cannons  of  the  three  frigates. 
And  again,  the  shores  are  well  known  to  the  American  whalers, 
and  also  the  Strait  of  Sangara,  which  separates  Niphon  from  Teso, 
the  two  principal  islands  of  the  Japanese  empire.'7 

It  is  possible  that  Commodore  Perry  may  encounter,  in  the 
execution  of  the  enterprise  confided  to  him,  unforeseen  obstacles; 
but  they  cannot  stop  a  great  nation  like  America.  The  immense 


178  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

resources  which  she  has  at  her  disposal  will  permit  her  to  happily 
end,  sooner  or  later,  an  expedition,  the  success  of  which  interests 
her  commerce  to  so  high  a  degree. 

It  is  asserted  that,  fearing  the  dangers  which  threaten  it,  the 
Japanese  government  has  asked  the  aid  of  the  Lower  Countries,  in 
order  to  obtain  their  mediation  with  the  United  States.  We 
strongly  doubt  whether  or  not  the  Lower  Countries  wish  to  take 
charge  of  such  negotiations.  To  accept  it,  they  would  act  against 
their  own  interest,  for  the  Dutch  commerce  can  but  profit  by  the 
removal  of  the  interdiction  which  falls  upon  the  flags  of  other 
nations  in  the  Japanese  ports. 

We  repeat  it,  the  civilized  nations  can  only  see  with  pleasure 
the  success  of  an  enterprise,  in  the  issue  of  which  they  have  a  direct, 
incontestable  advantage ;  and  France,  in  herself,  must  desire  its 
success,  and  prepare  herself  to  take  a  part  in  its  immense  results. 


THE  "  STRIPES  AND  STARS"  IN  THE  EAST. 

[From  the  Dublin  Nation,  April  3.] 

An  expedition  of  singular  interest  has  by  this  time  sailed  from 
the  American  shores,  bound  for  the  seas  of  Japan.  The  objects 
with  which  it  is  undertaken  are  to  open  to  the  intercourse  of  the 
world  the  immense  sea-board  of  that  mighty  empire,  to  terminate 
the  rigid  exclusion  which  dooms  to  destruction  the  vessel  of  any 
nation  which  may  seek  the  protection  of  its  harbors  from  the  perils 
of  the  deep,  and  to  demand  the  release  of  numerous  Europeans 
and  Americans,  captured  by  the  jealous  and  cruel  natives,  and  ex 
hibited  in  iron  cages  in  various  parts  of  the  Japanese  territory.  A 
policy  similar  to  that  which  so  long  closed  to  other  nations  the  seas 
and  cities  of  China,  and  which  isolated  that  people  from  the  uni 
versal  world,  has  co-existed,  with  but  little  relaxation,  in  Japan. 
Spreading  over  an  area  of  more  than  1 00,000  square  miles,  having 
a  population  of  at  least  30,000,000,  rich  in  many  agricultural  and 
mineral  productions,  and  possessing  considerable  manufacturing 
skill,  it  is  a  sealed  kingdom  to  all  nations  but  the  Dutch  and  the 
Chinese,  who  enjoy  a  limited  exchange  of  commodities  with  one  or 
two  of  its  cities.  Its  revenue  amounts  to  forty  millions  sterling. 
Its  people  are  spirited,  and  trained  to  a  rude  military  discipline. 
The  whole  coast  is  a  continued  chain  of  fortifications,  and  custom 
and  law  shut  it  up  in  cold  and  mysterious  separation  from  external 
intercourse.  We  also  know  it  is  governed  by  an  Emperor,  who 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  179 

commands  an  immense  standing  army,  and  that  its  capital  city  is 
Jeddo.  But  further,  our  knowledge  has  not  penetrated. 

America  has  undertaken  to  break,  if  possible,  this  immemorable 
isolation  ;  and  not  without  a  just  plea.  The  interests  of  her  whale 
trade,  which  is  daily  growing  into  an  enormous  branch  of  enter 
prise,  require  that  her  fleets  should  have  free  access  to  and  secure 
shelter  along  that  immense  line  of  sea-board  which  lies  opposite  her 
Pacific  coast.  And  she  has  determined  that  the  harbors  of  the  Ja 
panese  territory  shall  not  continue  to  be  more  destructive  to  her 
commerce  and  her  crews,  than  the  storms  which  drive  her  ships 
from  the  open  sea  to  the  dangers  of  more  barbarous  shores. 

Three  war-steamers,  a  frigate,  a  sloop  of  war,  and  a  storeship, 
under  the  command  of  the  first  naval  officer  in  the  United  States 
service — Com.  Perry — have  started  on  the  expedition,  commis 
sioned  to  seek  an  amicable  arrangement,  the  release  of  the  tortured 
captives,  the  freedom  of  the  seas  and  harbors  to  the  whole  world, 
and  to  propose  the  establishment  of  commercial  relations  between 
the  United  States  and  Japan.  The  proposal  for  a  commercial  re 
lation  is  left  to  the  free  choice  of  the  country  and  government ; 
but  the  other  propositions  are  to  be  rigorously  enforced  by  the 
whole  strength  of  the  squadron,  if  force  be  necessary.  The  Ame 
rican  press  claims  for  this  project  the  sympathy  of  Europe  ;  and 
certainly,  as  far  as  some  of  the  objects  of  the  expedition  go,  they 
should  have  the  approbation  of  all  men,  for  it  is  intolerable  that 
the  lives  of  innumerable  mariners  are  sacrificed  because  the  laws  of 
Japan  interdict  its  coast  to  the  fleets  of  the  world,  and  that  its 
batteries  are  opened  to  murder  those  who  land  upon  its  shores,  not 
from  choice,  but  from  the  vicissitudes  of  a  career  which  should  ex 
cite  commisseration,  and  command  help,  above  all  human  occupa 
tions.  But  we  confess  we  are  not  learned  enough  in  the  abstraction 
called  the  u  laws  of  nations,"  to  admit  that  it  is  competent  on  any 
one  country  absolutely  to  impose  relationship  and  intercourse  upon 
another  against  its  will,  and  in  contravention  of  its  peculiar  consti 
tution.  The  interests  of  civilization  and  of  religion  are  the  ready 
and  habitual  pleas  with  which  the  advocates  of  such  "  propagations'' 
silence  all  objectors.  But  if  cruelties,  similar  to  those  which  dis 
grace  the  British  name  in  India,  are  the  only  benefits  to  be  derived 
by  civilization,  and  if  apocryphal  conversions,  similar  to  those 
achieved  for  the  Gospel  in  Southern  Africa,  be  the  only  "  vine 
yards"  to  be  gained  for  religion,  we  doubt  the  morality  and  value 
of  such  bloody  and  unholy  conquests. 

Let  America  vindicate  and  defend  the  inviolability  of  her  sea- 


180  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

toen,  and  exact  protection  of  those  adventurers  of  all  the  earth 
who  live  upon  the  wide  and  perilous  waters ;  but  let  her  statesmen 
1'emember,  as  a  warning,  the  infamy  which  the  atrocious  opium  war 
with  China  brought  upon  England,  and  let  her  government  shrink 
from  forcing  upon  a  strange,  independent,  and  weaker  people,  an 
intercourse  which  they  do  not  desire,  and  which  may  be  the  fatal 
parent  of  their  subjugation  and  destruction.  She,  the  pioneer  of 
the  world's  progress,  the  sentinel  of  human  liberty,  should  not 
push  her  legitimate  demands  beyond  the  exact  limits  of  righteous 
ness — she  should  not  permit  a  necessary  enterprise  to  degenerate 
into  a  gigantic  piracy.  Let  her  remonstrate  and  arbitrate  ;  but 
let  not  her  unstained  banner  wave  above  a  conquered  nationality. 


THE  AMERICAN  EXPEDITION  TO  JAPAN. 

[From  the  London  Examiner,  April  17.] 

The  great  Atlantic  Republic  is  about  to  come  into  collision  with 
the  Empire  of  Japan,  and  is  sending  an  expedition  to  claim  redress 
for  flagrant  violations  of  the  law  of  nations,  as  well  as  with  the 
hope  to  effect  ultimately  the  grand  object  of  obliging  the  Japanese 
to  renew  that  intercourse  with  the  rest  of  mankind  on  which  they 
have  virtually  laid  an  embargo  for  two  centuries.  By  the  laws  of 
Japan,  no  native  of  the  country  can  quit  it,  nor  foreigner  enter  it, 
under  pain  of  death,  or  at  best  of  perpetual  imprisonment.  This 
law  was  enacted  in  consequence  of  the  intrigues  of  the  Portuguese 
and  Spanish  priesthood,  who,  according  to  the  view  taken  by  the 
Japanese  of  their  conduct,  were,  under  the  mask  of  religious  con 
version,  sapping  the  foundations  of  government.  Before  the 
edicts  of  seclusion  and  isolation  took  effect,  the  Japanese,  as  do 
now  the  Chinese,  had  carried  on  trade  with  the  Islands  of  the  In 
dian  Archipelago  ;  and  even  as  far  west  as  Malacca  and  Bantam 
their  merchants  were  found  in  the  beginning  of  the  sixteenth  cen 
tury,  by  the  Portuguese,  on  their  first  arrival  in  those  seas,  and 
were  there  distinguished  above  all  other  Asiatic  traders  for  their 
integrity.  Even  as  late  as  the  commencement  of  the  subsequent 
century,  we  find  them  employed,  as  what  we  should  now  call  Se 
poys,  by  the  European  insular  governments,  being  chosen  as  such 
from  among  many  nations,  for  superior  courage  and  fidelity. 

The  law  of  exclusion  has  continued  to  be  carried  into  effect  by 
the  Japanese  government  to  the  length  of  inhumanity ;  and,  in- 


JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE.  181 

deed,  to  be  effectual  at  all,  it  could  hardly  be  otherwise.  Foreign 
ships  in  distress,  approaching  the  shores  of  Japan,  instead  of  being 
assisted,  are  repelled  by  force  and  insult ;  shipwrecked  mariners 
are  imprisoned,  exhibited  in  cages,  or  put  to  death ;  and  cargoes 
are  confiscated.  There  certainly  can,  in  this  case,  be  no  question 
of  a  palpable  violation  of  the  law  of  nature  and  nations  ;  for,  in 
dependent  of  the  crimes  perpetrated,  and  which  amount  to  a  vir 
tual  piracy,  the  Japanese  have  no  more  right  to  preclude  access  to 
their  coasts  than  to  bar  a  similar  extent  of  the  ocean— both  being 
equally  the  common  inheritance  of  mankind.  The  subjects  of  the 
American  Republic  have  of  late  been  the  chief  victims  of  this 
barbarous  and  intolerable  law  ;  the  fishing  grounds  of  their  whalers 
being  close  to  the  Japan  Islands,  which  afford,  naturally,  their 
most  convenient  ports  of  refuge,  and  several  hundreds  of  them 
passing  yearly  through  the  strait  which  divides  the  great  Island  of 
Niepon  from  the  more  northern  large  one  of  Jesso. 

The  Americans,  now  planted  on  the  shores  of  the  Pacific,  send 
a  force  to  demand  reparation  for  injuries  done  to  themselves  by 
such  flagrant  violation  of  the  laws  of  nature  and  society — to  com 
pel  the  Japanese  to  renew  their  intercourse  with  the  rest  of  man 
kind,  and  to  forbear  from  the  practice  of  a  ferocious  mhospitality. 
For  the  common  good  of  the  world,  and  for  the  sake  of  civilization 
and  justice,  we  wish  them  every  success,  although  we  have  our  own 
doubts  whether  the  means  they  propose  to  apply  be  adequate  to 
the  end  they  contemplate  to  attain. 

Let  us  see.  The  area  of  the  Japanese  empire  is  said  to  be 
266,000  square  miles,  which  makes  it  larger  than  France  and 
England  put  together.  The  population  is  reckoned  by  the  Ameri 
can  writers,  and  probably  without  undue  exaggeration,  at  thirty 
millions ;  less  civilized,  no  doubt,  than  the  Chinese,  but  a  good 
deal  more  hardy  and  warlike.  Japan  does  not  contain,  as  China 
does,  great  navigable  rivers,  by  which  an  invader  can  penetrate  into 
the  interior ;  nor  does  one  part  of  the  Japanese  empire  depend 
for  food  on  another,  as  the  northern  provinces  of  China  do  on  those 
of  the  southern ;  so  that  the  Japanese  cannot  be  starved  by  an  in 
vader  into  a  capitulation,  as  we  starved  the  Chinese,  by  carrying 
our  operations  to  the  head  of  the  great  artery  that  feeds  the 
Chinese  capital.  Japan,  moreover,  does  not  contain,  like  China, 
two  distinct  races  of  unamalgamated  men — conquerors  and  con 
quered — the  last  ready  to  rise  in  revolt  against  the  first,  and  far 
outnumbering  them.  The  Japanese  who  rule  and  are  ruled,  are, 
on  the  contrary,  one  and  the  same  people. 


182  JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE. 

The  Japanese  are  assailable  alone  by  their  coasts,  and  that  only 
where  a  great  town  is  so  near  the  shore  as  to  be  open  to  the 
broadsides  of  the  American  squadron.  The  redress-squadron  is  to 
consist  of  three  powerful  steam-frigates,  one  sailing-frigate,  one 
corvette,  and  a  store-ship.  Including  sailors  and  marines,  we 
fancy  the  whole  force  cannot  well  exceed  2000  men ;  and  we 
cannot  agree  with  an  American  journalist  in  thinking,  that  such  a 
force  will  be  sufficient  to  coerce  a  vain,  ignorant,  semi-barbarous, 
and  sanguinary  nation  of  thirty  millions  of  people,  into  the  sur 
render  of  an  organic  law  of  200  years'  standing.  The  only  chance 
of  success,  as  it  appears  to  us,  is  likely  to  be  found  in  a  bombard 
ment  of  Jeddo,  the  capital  of  the  Secular  Emperor,  which  lies  at 
the  head  of  a  deep  and  accessible  bay  on  the  eastern  side  of  the 
great  island.  We  notice  that  light  field-pieces  are  spoken  of  in 
the  American  newspapers  ;  but  such  an  incumbrance,  which  implies 
landing,  ought  not  to  be  thought  of.  The  Americans  must  not 
quit  their  wooden  walls.  Within  these  they  are  powerful  and  un 
conquerable  ;  but,  landing,  they  could  not  penetrate  five  miles  into 
the  interior  without  inevitable  perdition.  In  our  own  contest  with 
China,  a  simpleton  in  authority  proposed  to  march,  with  our  whole 
disposable  force,  from  the  river  Peiho  on  Pekin,  a  march  of  120 
miles,  with  a  view  of  catching  the  Emperor.  Fortunately,  the 
rash  project  was  not  carried  out,  for  if  it  had  been,  we  should 
certainly  have  caught  a  Tartar,  but  not  the  one  we  went  in 
search  of. 


JAPAN    AND    THE    JAPANESE.  183 

[From  the  New  York  Herald,  May  21,  1852.] 

THE  DUTCH  FRIGATE— THE  PRINCE  OF  ORANGE. 

HER    VISITERS NEWS    FOR    THE    JAPANESE    EXPEDITION,  ETC. 

This  noble  frigate  has  become  a  regular  lion,  and  draws  large 
concourses  of  ladies  and  gentlemen,  who  are  delighted  with  the 
courteous  and  attentive  reception  extended  to  them  by  her  gallant 
captain  and  officers.  Yesterday,  their  leading  theme  was  the 
beauty  and  classical  symmetry  of  the  New  York  ladies,  and  their 
amiable  temper  in  diving  into  all  the  recesses  of  their  fine  ship. 
For  the  first  time,  we  had  the  pleasure  of  an  interview  with  Cap 
tain  D.  Byl  de  Yroe,  who  is  a  perfect  beau  ideal  of  all  that  should 
constitute  a  naval  officer,  and  a  gentleman.  "  Every  man,"  said 
the  gallant  captain  to  us,  "  is  welcome  to  come  into  my  cabin,  no 
matter  who  he  is — provided  he  be  an  honest  man."  That  expres 
sion  may  be  taken  as  an  exponent  of  his  character,  and  fully  tallied 
with  his  noble  and  generous  mien.  We  found  him  entertaining  a 
party  of  ladies  with  amusing  anecdotes  and  conversation,  and  giving 
suitable  advice,  for  the  proper  inspection  of  his  frigate.  He  is 
middle-aged,  tall,  stout,  and  seaman-like,  and  we  hear  through  re 
liable  sources,  that  he  has  seen  considerable  service.  The  lieuten 
ants  are  officers  of  great  experience,  having  been  engaged  in  active 
service  ;  in  fact,  she  is  a  perfect  specimen  of  the  Dutch  navy,  and 
well  does  she  honor  it.  Among  her  midshipmen,  will  be  perceived 
two  young  gentlemen  who  are  barons  of  Holland ;  but,  unlike  the 
corrupt,  aristocratic  and  unfair  system,  adopted  in  the  British 
navy,  they  enjoy  no  privilege  beyond  their  brother  officers  of  the 
same  rank,  and  are  promoted  according  to  their  gallantry  and  ser 
vice. 

Among  the  topics  of  our  conversation  which  occasionally  turned 
up,  was  the  political  institutions  of  our  republic,  its  lightness  of 
taxation,  the  absolute  freedom  of  the  press,  and  our  equality,  and 
the  similarity  of  the  free  institutions  and  spirit  of  Holland,  to  our 
own,  of  which  they  are  justly  proud.  The  freedom  of  the  press  of 
Holland,  regarding  the  expression  of  opinion,  is  about  equal  to  our 
own,  though  each  paper  is  subject  to  a  stamp  duty.  The  gallant 
officers  are  pretty  well  up  in  the  politics  of  our  country  ;  and, 
speaking  of  the  proposed  Japan  Expedition,  one  of  them,  who  is 
well  acquainted  with  Japan  and  its  coast,  and  the  military  force 
of  that  empire,  and  the  extent  of  its  fortifications,  was  inclined  to 


184  JAPAN  AND  THE  JAPANESE. 

think  that  the  force  of  Commodore  Perry  would  be  found  insuffi 
cient  to  accomplish  a  warlike  negotiation,  and  as  to  a  peaceable 
one,  the  gallant  officer  assured  us  that  the  Emperor  of  Japan 
would  not  even  hear  of  opening  his  ports  to  us.  The  two  ships 
which  the  Dutch  are  allowed  to  send  to  Nangasaki  in  the  Japanese 
empire,  were  always  strictly  guarded  ;  and  upon  any  of  the  officers 
or  men  going  ashore,  they  were  surrounded  by  a  guard  of  a  thou 
sand  men.  We  hear  nothing  of  any  inclination  on  the  part  of  the 
Dutch  government  to  interfere  with  our  operations  ;  but  we  under 
stand  the  Japanese  are  fully  competent  to  defend  themselves,  and 
are  making  preparations  to  give  us  a  warm  reception.  So  look 
out,  Commodore  Perry. 


[From  Zadkiel's  Almanac,  Lond.,  1852— p.  39.] 

A  total  Eclipse  of  the  Sun,  visible  chiefly  in  the  eastern  and 
northern  parts  of  Asia.  The  Eclipse  will  be  central  at  noon,  in 
long.  127°  18'  E.,  lat.  37°  28  N.,  which  falls  in  the  centre  of 
Corea,  and  it  will  be  seen  so  from  the  borders  of  Siberia,  in  long. 
92°  E.  lat.  59°  N.,  down  through  Tartary  to  the  Yellow  Sea,  and 
the  Isles  of  Japan.  The  greatest  Eclipse  at  3h.  24m.,  A.  M., 
Dec.  llth,  Greenwich  time.  It  occurs  in  the  20th  deg.  I.  It 
will  produce  great  mortality  among  camels  and  horses  in  the  East, 
also  much  fighting  and  warlike  doings,  and  I  judge  that  it  will  carry 
war  into  the  peaceful  vales  of  Japan,  for  there,  too,  do  the  men 
of  the  West  follow  the  track  of  gain,  "  seeking  the  bubble-reputa 
tion,  even  in  the  cannon's  mouth." 


From  the   Sunday  Jltlas,  June  20M,  1852 — S.  8.  Southivorth,  Editor. 

THE  THERAPEUTIST. 

There  is  something  wonderful  in  the  fact  that  all  the  ideas  and  opinions'of 
celebrated  writers,  both  ancient  and  modern,  prove  it  is  no  new  theory  of 
speculative  fallacy,  but  the  comprehended  wisdom  of  all  scientific  research 
and  physiological  knowledge,  from  the  earliest  period  of  time,  that  the  brain 
is  not  only  the  source  of  reason  and  thought,  but  the  grand  magazine  or  de 
pot  of  all  physical  vitality,  the  source  of  health,  strength  and  vigorous  longe 
vity,  and  that  all  diseases  are  dependent  upon  its  condition.  See  Dr.  Parr's 
Medical  Dictionary,  2  vol.  4to.  London  edition  : 

"  If  we  examine  the  functions  of  the  nervous  system,  we  shall  find  life  and 
health  depend  upon  the  regular  disposition  of  the  nervous  power.  The 
whole  nervous  influence  is  regulated  in  the  state  of  the  brain,  and  if  that  ar 
rangement  can  be  altered  by  any  violent  stimulant,  or  sedative  impression, 
the  rest  must  suffer  or  experience  a  similar  change,  and  when  we  contem 
plate  the  various  phenomena  which  diseases  of  the  nervous  system  present, 
we  are  inclined  to  adopt  this  opinion.  The  nerves  are  the  sources  of  the  gal 
vanic  fluid,  and  that  these  and  the  nervous  fluids  are  the  same  ;  and  if  the 
excess  of  electricity  disappears  we  must  look  for  some  reservoir  in  which  it 
is  collected,  some  storehouse  from  which  it  may  be  issued,  and  this  from 
the  facts  before,  appears  to  be  the  brain.  The  cells  of  the  lungs  are  really 
galvanic  organs,  through  which  the  electricity  is  discharged  into  the  lungs, 
where  the  fluids  loaded  with  carbon,  increase  its  activity — giving  a  stimulus 
to  the  heart." — p.  487,  vol.  1. 

Dr.  Bringham,  the  intelligent  and  deep-thinking  writer  upon  the  Brain 
and  Nerves,  says,  "  It  is  gratifying  to  perceive  that  the  formation  of  the  brain 
and  nerves  are  now  attracting  the  attention  of  medical  inquirers.  Many  of  the 
most  industrious  and  distinguishedmembers  of  the  medical  profession  are  pros 
ecuting  their  research  with  great  earnestness,  respecting  the  structure,  growth 
and  diseased  appearance  of  the  brain  and  nerves,  with  a  view  of  ascer 
taining  their  functions  and  remedying  their  diseases.  We  may  therefore  rea 
sonably  expect  within  a  short  period,  valuable  additions  to  our  knowledge 
of  the  nervous  system." 

In  fact  every  writer  from  Paraselsus  to  Mesmer  and  Dr.  Newman,  have 
favored  this  hypothesis,  and  every  action  of  life  proves  it.  Look  at  thousands 
of  anecdotes  of  taking  diseases  from  imagination,  the  fluids  of  the  brain  ari 
sing  and  engendering  while  it  is  under  the  apprehension  of  diseases,  carries 
it  through  the  system  and  deposits  it.  The  immediate  effect  of  the  brain 
voluntarily  acting  upon  all  the  functions  of  the  body  can  be  demonstrated  in 
thousands  of  ways.  What  reason  is  there  that  any  sudden  knowledge  of 
loss  should  destroy  the  appetite,  but  that  the  fluids  of  the  brain  are  carried 
electrically  to  the  nerves  of  digestion  1  Why  should  fear  make  the  legs 
tremble  1  And  this  is  as  positive  as  that  food  nourishes,  as  many  proofs  can 
be  adduced  to  show.  Now,  the  question  is,  how  is  that  fluid  to  be  excited  to 
healthy  action,  soi  as  to  transmit  a  fluid  of  sufficient  strength  to  annul  those 
foully  impregnated  with  disease  and  inactivity  1  We  answer,  by  magnetism, 
internal-electro  magnetism,  which  has  such  wonderfully  exciting  power  upon 
the  brain  that  it  may  almost  be  said  to  make  it  boil,  and  in  that  boiling  the 
steam  is  so  thrown  off,  that  no  matter  how  diseased  the  surface  may  be,  or 
how  deeply  impregnated,  keep  on  boiling,  and  all  the  diseased  emanations 
must  at  last  be  exhausted,  and  the  healthy  fluids  from  the  body  of  the  brain 
be  extracted.  This,  we  say,  can  be  produced,  not  only  best — but  only,  by 
Dr.  Watts'  Nervous  antidote,  it  being  the  only  remedy  yet  discovered  capa 
ble  of  producing  that  effect. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
This  book  is  DIJE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


OCT  22  1947 


'Van'SSKWy 

- 


29Jul'57Blx 
REC'D  LD 

JWl  22  tt&/ 


LD  21-100m-12,'46(A2012sl6)4120 


.OLD 

dAY  1 7  '65  -2  PM 


REC'D  LD 

OCTH'64-4f>M 


' 


'6673  Rc 


REC'D  LD    itB&CK,     fSis'77 


29034 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 
or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made 
4  days  prior  to  due  date 


DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

AU6281004 


DD20   15M  4-02 


THE    INVESTIGATOR. 


PKYMTKl)  TO  A  FREE. 

OPEN  AM)  CANDID    DIS'TSSKJN,  THOROUGH 

EXAMINATION    AND    IMPOSITION    OP   THE   FACTS  AND 

FALLACIES  UK  ALL  MODERN  SCIENTIFIC  DISCOVERIES,  DEVELOPMENTS. 

AND  THEORIES—- WITH  WHATEVER    ELSE    CONCEDING-   THE   PRO- 

GRESS  AND  HAPPINESS  OF  MAN— ^HEREIN  li/*  TRUTHS 

SHALL  B!"  FEARLESSLY  ADMITTED  AND'4LL 

ERRORS  EXPOSED. 


Tin;  INVESTIGATOR  will  be  mailed  to  subscribers  at  50  cents  per  annum, 
in  advance.     Post  office  stamps  can  be  remitted  for  trie  copy.     By  clubbing 
^  for  three  copies,  they  will  be  sent  for  $1,00.     All  communfiwions  must  be 
post  paid,  or  they  will  not  be  received,  and  directed  to  the  Editor  of  tfie  In 
vestigator. 


NOTICE  TO  ADVERTISERS.— -The  Editors  being  pledged  to  the  exposure  of 
falsehood,  no  advertisements  will  be  taken  that  will  not  bear  the  strictest 
investigation,  therefore  the  public  may  rely  upon  the  few  that  will  be  insert 
ed,  for  vesauty.  Fifty  cents  a  square,  of  eight  lines,  enclosed  and  directed 
to  ihe  Editor  ol  the  Investigator,  at  J.  I").  TOKKKV'S  ]2  Spruce  street,  Ne\v- 
York.  • 


